XXXX                                  __|__|__<LF>          GGGGGGGGG      __|__|__<LF>          G                          |    |<LF>          G<LF>          G         GGGG    <LF>          G               G<LF>           GGGGGGGGG
XXXX                               __|__|__<LF>         FFFFFFFFF       __|__|__  <LF>         F                         |    |<LF>         FFFFFF<LF>         F<LF>         F<LF>     
XXXX                               __|__|__<LF>        DDDDDD           __|__|__  <LF>        D            D           |    |<LF>        D              D   <LF>        D                D<LF>        D               D<LF>        D             D<LF>        DDDDDD
XXXX                           __|__|__<LF>                    A     __|__|__<LF>                  A   A     |     |<LF>                A       A<LF>              AAAAAAA     <LF>            A               A<LF>           A                  A
XXXX                         _|__|_<LF>      CCCCCCC     _|__|_<LF>      C                   |    |<LF>      C<LF>      C<LF>      CCCCCCC
XXXX        This piece of code sets up a blue event that is triggered when the touch        sensor is touched and released. The Monitor Event icon begins monitoring        for such an event to occur. A sound will be played over and over again until        the touch sensor is pushed in and released.. This will force the program        out of the jump sequence and make it land where the Event Landing is located.  
XXXX       DDDDDD<LF>       D             D<LF>       D               D<LF>       D                D<LF>       D               D<LF>       D              D<LF>       DDDDDD
XXXX  Hints: This command sets up an event to occur when the touch sensor is pressed        and released. The default waits for a touch sensor pressed connected to        port one. This command must appear before the Begin Monitoring command in        your program. You can string in a yellow, blue, red, or generic modifier        to have several events. You can also string in an event source, source of        information, such as sensor values of ports 1, 2, &amp; 3, container values,        or mail values.   
XXXX  Measurement Type
XXXX  Set the container to a random value.<LF>The default is to set the Red Container to a random <LF>number between 0 and 8.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier that corresponds to the <LF>container you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Max random number: String in a number to be the <LF>maximum random number to set the container to.
XXXX  This VI calculates the position of the rotation center of the needle and the bow covered by the extremity of the needle. This VI has first to be used in a calibration phase.<LF>This Vi is working with vu-meters equipped with a dark needle an a clear background or with a clear needle on a dark background.<LF><LF>Description :<LF><LF>Inputs :<LF><LF>-  Image is the reference of the image to be treated.<LF>-  ROI Descriptor is the descriptor of the area of interest drawn by the user and corresponding to 2 lines corresponding to the initial position of the needle and the full scale position of the needle (the origin of each line must be the extremity of the needle). It is compatible with the type ROI Descriptor of IMAQ Vision for G. It can be returned by the VI Cvi WindGetRoi.<LF>-  error in is LabVIEW cluster error.<LF><LF>Outputs :<LF><LF>-  Center is a cluster containing the coordinates of the rotation center of the needle.<LF>-  Circle Points is an array of clusters containing the coordinates of the points of the bow curved by the extremity of the needle.<LF>-  error out is LabVIEW cluster error.
XXXX  This VI is used to calibrate the meter or gauge using three points on the meter: (i) the base of the needle, (ii) the tip of the needle at its initial point and (iii) the tip of the needle at its full scale position.It calculates the position of the points of the arc covered by the tip of the needle.<LF>This Vi is working with vu-meters equipped with a dark needle on a light background or with a light needle on a dark background.<LF><LF>- 	Image is the reference of the image containing the meter.<LF><LF>- 	Needle Base is a cluster containing the coordinates of the base of the needle.<LF><LF>- 	Initial Point is a point cluster containing the coordinates of the tip of the needle in its initial position.<LF><LF>- 	Range Point is a point cluster containing the coordinates of the tip of the needle in full scale position.<LF><LF>- 	error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>- 	Center out is a point cluster containing the coordinates of the rotation center of the needle.<LF><LF>- 	Circle Points is an array of point clusters containing the coordinates of the points of the bow curved by the extremity of the needle.<LF><LF>- 	error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXX (all FALSE: do not change)
XXXX Angle (deg) 
XXXX Coordinate Angle (rad) 
XXXX End (dB is << or = )
XXXX Position 
XXXX TaskFlags (0-1)
XXXX Tells whether the event is in the low, normal or high state depending on the set thresholds. The eventstate may also be undefined or calibrating.<LF>0 == Low<LF>1 == Normal<LF>2 == High<LF>3 == Undefined<LF>4 == Start calibrating<LF>5 == Calibrating in process
XXXX error 
XXXX then<LF>Off (Float)<LF>Off (Brake)<LF>On<LF>Forward<LF>Flip<LF>Backward<LF>to <LF> - slope: %d<LF>No such command
XXXX""Ask RCX""
XXXX% Tolerance
XXXX(0: do not change)
XXXX(1st line)
XXXX(2nd line)
XXXX(32 bits flat pointer)
XXXX([[sgl]]) scaled data: a two-dimensional array that contains scaled analog input data if output units requests scaled data.  The first dimension is scans, the second dimension is channels.
XXXX(if needed ex: /home/m/p/mportsmo/)
XXXX- Column<LF>- Row
XXXX- Nand<CR>- And
XXXX- Nor<CR>- Or
XXXX- Row<LF>- Column
XXXX- Set<LF>- Get
XXXX- T: Show<LF>- F: Hide
XXXX- True<LF>- False
XXXX- Xnor<CR>- Xor
XXXX- Yes<CR>- No
XXXX- Yes<LF>- No
XXXX- high pass (T)<LF>- low pass (F)
XXXX-Set<LF>-Get
XXXX-Yes<LF>-No
XXXX1 Blink detected (a blink time can be set up)
XXXX1 bit
XXXX1,2, or 3
XXXX1/16ths
XXXX1/16ths of a Rotation
XXXX10 ms Timer (0-3)
XXXX10 ms timers (0,1,2)
XXXX10-Oct-96
XXXX12 bits (unsigned)
XXXX16 bit data
XXXX16 bits
XXXX16 bits (RGB chunky)
XXXX16 bits (signed)
XXXX16 bits (unsigned)
XXXX1D Color value array
XXXX1D U32 array
XXXX1st Diagonal
XXXX2 Blinks detected
XXXX2 bits
XXXX24 bits (RGB chunky)
XXXX24 bits (RGB planar)
XXXX24-Bit Color Table
XXXX2D Color value array
XXXX2D U32 array
XXXX2nd Derivatives
XXXX2nd Diagonal
XXXX32 Bits ?
XXXX32 bits (RGB chunky)
XXXX32 bits (float)
XXXX32 bits (signed)
XXXX32 bits (unsigned)
XXXX3D Options:<LF>Complex source image:<LF> 0: real plane<LF> 1: imaginary plane<LF> 2: magnitude plane<LF> 3: phase plane
XXXX3D options
XXXX3rd Party Sensor
XXXX3rd Party Sensor 2
XXXX4 bits
XXXX48 bits (Complex 2x24 int)
XXXX64 bits (Complex 2x32 float)
XXXX8 bits
XXXX<<B>>buffer size<</B>> is the size of the internal buffer that LabVIEW uses to transfer data from a device.
XXXX<<B>>elements<</B>> is an array of elements that are in the queue. If <<B>>return elements<</B>> is FALSE, this array is empty. 
XXXX<<B>>left channel <</B>>controls the volume for the left channel.
XXXX<<B>>queue element<</B>> contains the element removed from the queue. 
XXXX<LF>                                                          SPINNER<LF><LF>Purpose:<LF>Design and test a scientific instrument that is able to measure the rotations of something spinning.  We will then be able to use this instrument to measure the rotations of things such as a pinwheel, waterwheel, or hamster wheel.<LF><LF>Hypothesis:<LF>We think that the best way to make something to measure rotations is with a light sensor.  We will make something that spins, called the spinner, that has a light side and a dark side.<LF><LF>Procedure:<LF>Construction -<LF>We used a piece of a notebook cover, white-out, and a black marker to make a paper wheel for our spinner.  We then put an axle through the center of the spinner and secured it on with bushings.  Lastly, we mounted a light sensor in front of the paper wheel and the spinner was complete. <LF>Testing -<LF>We tested the spinner by measuring the speed of the motor, which is supposed to be 350 revolutions per minute.  We also compared the rotations measured by the spinner to the LEGO angle sensor.<LF><LF>Results:<LF>Our spinner works very well.  We will be able to use it in the next experiment.<LF><LF>
XXXX<LF>                                                      DOORWAY<LF><LF>Purpose:<LF>The goal of this project is to count the number of people passing through the doorway.  <LF><LF>Hypothesis:<LF>We think that by mounting a light sensor near the doorway, we will be able to tell how many people walked through the door:<LF><LF>Procedure:<LF>We taped the light sensor to the doorway and connected it to a long wire which went to the RCX.  We wrote a program to collect light sensor data and then looked at the changes in light.<LF><LF>Results:<LF>We were able to see if someone passed in front of the light sensor.  Our experiment is unable to tell if someone was coming into the room or leaving the room.<LF><LF>Conclusions:<LF>Our experiment was very successful.  We were able to count the number of people coming in and out of the room.  Next we want to make an experiment that will be able to tell if someone is leaving or entering the room.  We are not sure how to do that yet.  We also want to make the RCX beep and turn on the lights when someone enters.
XXXX<LF>                                              REACTION TIME<LF><LF>Purpose:<LF>The goal of this project it to measure how fast a person can hit a touch sensor after a light comes on. <LF><LF>Hypothesis:<LF>Our group thinks that our reaction times will be around one second.<LF><LF>Procedure:<LF>Someone holds the touch sensor in one hand and watches the lamp (or motor).  <LF>When the lamp comes on, the person has to press the touch sensor as quick as they can.<LF><LF>Results:<LF>Typical speeds are in the tenths of seconds.  The average reaction time was 0.5 seconds for 10 tries.  Next we will try comparing who in our group has the quickest reaction time.  Since the RCX only samples the sensors every 0.03 seconds at the fastest, we think that our numbers could be off by at least +/- 0.03 seconds.<LF><LF>Conclusions:<LF>The reacion times that we measured were much quicker than we thought!  We should also test reaction times of people that are being distracted too.  We think that the reaction time will increase if you are distracted.<LF>
XXXX<LF>                                    OVERNIGHT MEASUREMENTS<LF><LF>Purpose:<LF>Take measurements of the light sensor and temperature sensor overnight and compare their values.<LF><LF>Hypothesis:<LF>The light sensor will see darker and the temperature will get lower overnight.<LF><LF>Procedure:<LF>We wrote a program to take light and temperature measurements every minute starting at 11:00 pm on the night of 6/24/99. <LF><LF>Results:<LF>From the data, one can see that the sun rises early in the summer and that although the day will be a warm one, the nights are still cool.<LF><LF>Conclusions:<LF>Our experiement was able to accurately measure the light and temperature overnight.  Next we will try and compare different measurements from different nights and see if there is a difference.
XXXX<LF>                    A<LF>                  A   A<LF>                A       A<LF>              AAAAAAA     <LF>            A               A<LF>           A                  A
XXXX<LF>          GGGGGGGGG<LF>          G<LF>          G<LF>          G         GGGG    <LF>          G               G<LF>           GGGGGGGGG
XXXX<LF>         BBBB<LF>         B       B<LF>         B       B<LF>         BBBBB<LF>         B         B<LF>         B          B<LF>         BBBBBB
XXXX<LF>         FFFFFFFFF      <LF>         F                       <LF>         FFFFFF<LF>         F<LF>         F<LF>     
XXXX<LF>       EEEEEEEE<LF>       E<LF>       EEEEE<LF>       E<LF>       EEEEEEEE
XXXX<LF>      CCCCCCC<LF>      C<LF>      C<LF>      C<LF>      CCCCCCC
XXXX<LF>----------------------------------------------------------------------------------<LF>ROBOLABtm Software  Version 2.5<LF>----------------------------------------------------------------------------------<LF>ROBOLABtm the LEGO DACTA icon oriented programming software<LF>used to program the LEGO RCX microcomputer!<LF><LF>Produced and distributed by LEGO DACTA A/S<LF>     DK-7190<LF>     Billund, Denmark<LF><LF>Developed at TUFTS University<LF>     College of Engineering<LF>     Medford, MA USA<LF><LF>Powered by LabVIEW<LF>     National Instruments Corp.<LF>     Austin, TX USA<LF><LF>Graphics designed by Interactive Factory<LF>     Boston, MA<LF><LF>Copyright 2001 The LEGO Group, TUFTS University and<LF>National Instruments Corporation.<LF>All rights reserved.<LF>-------------------------------------------------------------------------------<LF>Developed by Chris Rogers, Merredith Portsmore, Martha Cyr, Scott McNamara, Barbara Bratzel, Ben Erwin and John Osborne, Tufts University, Massachusetts, USA<LF>-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
XXXX<LF>The value of the clock in the RCX (what you see on the display) in minutes since 00:00.
XXXX<LF>Variation"><LF>				
XXXX<LF>language string"><LF>		
XXXX>> Changerate
XXXXA 1-byte data value in 'data'.
XXXXA 1-dimensional array of 1-byte data that LabVIEW draws as a pixmap in the picture.  The array is made up of a concatenation of rows of data.  Within each row, data is packed into the array of bytes.  Thus if 'bit depth' is 1, each byte represents 8 pixel values, if 'bit depth' is 4, each byte represents 2 pixel values, and if 'bit depth' is 8, each byte represents 1 pixel value.<LF>Each row should be padded to a multiple of two bytes long.
XXXXA Controls
XXXXA cluster containing the specific font characteristics for the text to draw.  This specification is ignored unless the 'desired font' control is set to 'User-specified Font'.
XXXXA cluster containing the upper-left and lower-right coordinates that describe a rectangle bounding the data. The data will be conformed to the width of this rectangle and clipped to the height of this rectangle. All coordinates are absolute.
XXXXA number between 1 and 20 to represent the number of the Jumping and Landing pair of commands.
XXXXA picture of the page you have chosen.
XXXXA secret!
XXXXA#
XXXXA,B, and/or C
XXXXA,B, or C
XXXXA/D Converter Settings
XXXXA/D Settings
XXXXABS Container
XXXXAI Data
XXXXAI Data (1D)
XXXXAI Data (2D)
XXXXAI External Clock
XXXXAI Parameters
XXXXAI Trig/Clock
XXXXAI Trigger
XXXXAI channel<FONT predef=APPFONT>
XXXXAI channels<FONT predef=APPFONT>
XXXXAI scan rate<FONT predef=APPFONT>
XXXXAI scan rate<FONT predef=APPFONT> (10 scans/sec)
XXXXAIPD
XXXXAND Container
XXXXAND the container by a Boolean.  <LF>The default is to AND the Red Container value by 1.<LF><LF>Note: Numbers are rounded down to the nearest integer.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier that corresponds to the <LF>container you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Number to AND:  String a number to which the container will be <LF>ANDed.
XXXXAND the container by a Boolean.  <LF>The default is to AND the Red Container value by 1.<LF><LF>Note: Numbers are rounded down to the nearest integer.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier that corresponds to the container you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Number to AND:  String a number to which the container will be <LF>ANDed.
XXXXAO External Clock
XXXXAO Parameters
XXXXAO Trig/Clock
XXXXAO Trigger
XXXXAO channel<FONT predef=APPFONT>
XXXXAO channels
XXXXAO channels<FONT predef=APPFONT>
XXXXAO scan rate/ch<FONT predef=APPFONT>
XXXXAO scan rate<FONT predef=APPFONT>
XXXXAO scan rate<FONT predef=APPFONT> (10 scans/sec)
XXXXAREA
XXXXASCII Character
XXXXAUTODETECT
XXXXAbort Download
XXXXAbort Loading
XXXXAbort Waiting
XXXXAborted
XXXXAborted?
XXXXAbout
XXXXAbout LabVIEW...
XXXXAbout ROBOLAB
XXXXAcceleration Sensor Container
XXXXAccelerometer (g) LogIT
XXXXAccelerometer (m/s/s) LogIT
XXXXAccelerometer Sensor Fork
XXXXAccess Control Landing
XXXXAction
XXXXActivate a motor or a lamp on Port A.
XXXXActivate a motor or a lamp on Port B.
XXXXActivate a motor or a lamp on Port C.
XXXXActivate event
XXXXActual Current Task #
XXXXAdagio
XXXXAdapter 1
XXXXAdapter 2
XXXXAdd
XXXXAdd Rest
XXXXAdd Theme
XXXXAdd a number to the container.<LF>The default is to add 1 to the Red Container.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier that corresponds to the <LF>container you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Number to add:  String a number to add to the<LF>container.
XXXXAdd a number to the container.<LF>The default is to add 1 to the Red Container.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier that corresponds to the container you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Number to add:  String a number to add to the container.
XXXXAdd to Container
XXXXAdditional Data Sets
XXXXAdditional Duration
XXXXAdditional Events
XXXXAdditional Octaves
XXXXAdditional Ports
XXXXAdds or inserts an image on the browser. The image is resampled to fit the size of the thumbnail size. The resampling value applied to the image is the same on both axes in order to maintain the image aspect.<LF><LF>The thumbnail will be added at the last position or at the first vacant position depending on the selected mode. If all positions are occupied, an additionnal line of thumbnail images will be added to the browser.<LF><LF>- Image Browser In is the RGB image used by the browser.<LF> 	<LF>- Image to Add  is the image to add or insert in the browser. This image can be of 8,16, float, or RGB type.<LF><LF>- Insertion Mode  is the mode used for inserting the thumbnail. Two modes are available : <LF>1. first vacant position <LF>2. last position.<LF> 	<LF>- Color Palette  is the palette used to show an 8 bit image. If this control is not set, a gray level palette is used.<LF><LF>- error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>- Image Browser Out is the resulting browser image<LF> 	<LF>- Index Out is the index of the position where the image is placed on the browser.<LF><LF>- Matrix Indexes Out is the (column,line) position of the added thumbnail <LF><LF>- Pixel Position Out  Pixel Coordinates (X, Y top-left, X, Y right-bottom) defining the area where the image is inserted.<LF> 	<LF>- error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXAdds or inserts an image on the browser. The image is resampled to fit the size of the thumbnail size. The resampling value applied to the image is the same on both axes in order to maintain the image aspect.<LF><LF>The thumbnail will be added at the last position or at the first vacant position depending on the selected mode. If all positions are occupied, an additionnal line of thumbnail images will be added to the browser.<LF><LF>- Image Browser In is the RGB image used by the browser.<LF><LF>- Image to Add  is the image to add or insert in the browser. This image can be of 8,16, float, or RGB type.<LF><LF>- Insertion Mode  is the mode used for inserting the thumbnail. Two modes are available : <LF>1. first vacant position <LF>2. last position.<LF><LF>- Color Palette  is the palette used to show an 8 bit image. If this control is not set, a gray level palette is used.<LF><LF>- error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>- Image Browser Out is the resulting browser image<LF> 	<LF>- Index Out is the index of the position where the image is placed on the browser.<LF><LF>- Matrix Indexes Out is the (column,line) position of the added thumbnail <LF><LF>- Pixel Position Out  Pixel Coordinates (X, Y top-left, X, Y right-bottom) defining the area where the image is inserted.<LF><LF>- error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF>
XXXXAdds or inserts an image on the browser. The image is resampled to fit the size of the thumbnail size. The resampling value applied to the image is the same on both axes in order to maintain the image aspect.<LF><LF>The thumbnail will be added at the last position or at the first vacant position depending on the selected mode. If all positions are occupied, an additionnal line of thumbnail images will be added to the browser.<LF><LF>- Image Browser In is the RGB image used by the browser.<LF><LF>- Image to Add  is the image to add or insert in the browser. This image can be of 8,16, float, or RGB type.<LF><LF>- Insertion Mode  is the mode used for inserting the thumbnail. Two modes are available : <LF>1. first vacant position <LF>2. last position.<LF><LF>- Color Palette  is the palette used to show an 8 bit image. If this control is not set, a gray level palette is used.<LF><LF>- error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>- Image Browser Out is the resulting browser image<LF><LF>- Index Out is the index of the position where the image is placed on the browser.<LF><LF>- Matrix Indexes Out is the (column,line) position of the added thumbnail.<LF> <LF>- Pixel Position Out  Pixel Coordinates (X, Y top-left, X, Y right-bottom) defining the area where the image is inserted.<LF><LF>- error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXAdds two images or an image and a constant.<LF>    	    <LF>Constant is the value added to the input Image Src A for image-constant operations. The constant is rounded down in cases in which the image is encoded as an integer. The default is 0.<LF><LF>Image Src A is the reference to the source (input) image A.<LF><LF>Image Dst is the reference to the destination image.<LF><LF>Image Src B is the reference to the source (input) image B.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Dst Out is the reference to the destination (output) image which receives the processing results of the VI. If the Image Dst is connected, then Image Dst Out is the same as Image Dst. Otherwise, Image Dst Out refers to the image referenced by Image Src A.<LF>	<LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>An operation between an image and a constant occurs when the input Image Src B is not connected.
XXXXAdds two images where the first is a complex image, or adds a complex image and a complex constant.<LF>  <LF>Constant is the complex constant added to the input Image Src A for image-constant operations. The default is 0.<LF>	<LF>Image Src A is the handle of the first source image and must be a complex image.<LF>	<LF>Image Dst is the handle of the complex image that contains the resulting FFT image. This input can accept only a complex image.<LF>	<LF>Image Src B is the handle of the second source image. This input can accept an 8-bit, 16-bit, 32-bit floating-point, or complex image. If the image is not a complex image, then the imaginary part of the Image Dst is equal to Image Src A.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Dst Out is the reference to the destination (output) image which receives the processing results of the VI. If the Image Dst is connected, then Image Dst Out is the same as Image Dst. Otherwise, Image Dst Out refers to the image referenced by Image Src A.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>An operation between an image and a constant occurs when the input Image Src B is not connected. The two possibilities are distinguished in the following equations.<LF><LF>Dst(x, y) = SrcA(x, y) + SrcB(x, y), or<LF>Dst(x, y) = SrcA(x, y) + Constant.
XXXXAdmin
XXXXAdmin button
XXXXAdministrator
XXXXAlarms
XXXXAlignment
XXXXAll Bins
XXXXAll Data Sets
XXXXAll Images? (No)
XXXXAllegro
XXXXAlpha
XXXXAmount Filled
XXXXAmplitude
XXXXAmplitudes
XXXXAmusement Park
XXXXAn RGB color value in 'Color Table'.
XXXXAn array of RGB colors to which the array of data maps.  If no color table is specified, the LabVIEW color table is used.
XXXXAn error-management facility for IMAQ Vision that can be programmed to perform specific actions in case of an error.<LF>The previous error code also can be read.<LF><LF>Error Processing: is a number representing the type of error processing you need to use. This value is only used when the Boolean Set Error Condition is set to TRUE. The following values are possible:<LF><LF>  0	Dialog	Displays a Stop/Continue dialog box, to determine<LF>    whether to stop or continue when an error occurs. Dialog is the      <LF>    default value.<LF>   1	Stop	Stops in case of error.<LF>   2	Ignore	Ignores all errors and does not display an error message.<LF>     Set Error Condition rereads the last occurring error (FALSE) or   <LF>     programs a procedure when an error occurs (TRUE). The     <LF>     default value is FALSE.<LF><LF>	Last Error Code: contains the last occurring error code if the Boolean Set Error Condition is set to FALSE. This error code is only accessible once and is reset automatically after reading. <LF><LF>	Last Error Message: contains the message associated with the last error code if the Boolean Set Error Condition is set to FALSE. As in Last Error Code, this error message is accessible only once and is reset automatically after reading<LF><LF>Note:	Error codes returned from the VIs in IMAQ Vision are not accessible directly. If an error occurs, depending on the error condition chosen (Dialog, Stop, or Ignore), a programmed action is taken. The reading of the last occurring error then is reset.
XXXXAnalog  LogIT
XXXXAnalyze Area
XXXXAnalyze Page
XXXXAnd
XXXXAnd/Nand (And)
XXXXAndante
XXXXAngle
XXXXAngle (deg)
XXXXAngle (degrees)
XXXXAngle (rad)
XXXXAngle Container
XXXXAngles (deg)
XXXXAngles (rad)
XXXXApplies a lookup table (LUT) to each color plane.<LF><LF>Color Mode defines the image color format to use for the operation. The default is 0, which specifies RGB.<LF><LF>0	(Default) RGB<LF>1	HSL<LF>2	HSV<LF>Image Src (RGB) must be an RGB-chunky image.<LF><LF>Image Dst (RGB) is the reference to the destination image. If connected, it must be an RGB-chunky image..<LF><LF>Red (or Hue) Lookup Table is the LUT applied to the first color plane (depending on the Color Mode). This array can contain a maximum of 256 elements. The array is filled automatically when less than 256 elements are specified. This procedure does not change pixel values that are not explicitly specified from the values of the LUT given by the user on input. By default this array is empty and no replacement occurs on this plane. <LF><LF>Green (or Sat) Lookup Table is the LUT applied to the second color plane (depending on the Color Mode). This array can contain a maximum of 256 elements. The array is filled automatically when less than 256 elements are specified. This procedure does not change pixel values that are not explicitly specified from the values of the LUT given by the user on input. By default this array is empty and no replacement occurs on this plane. <LF><LF>Blue (or Light or Val) Lookup Table is the LUT applied to the third color plane (depending on the Color Mode). This array can contain a maximum of 256 elements. The array is filled automatically when less than 256 elements are specified. This procedure does not change pixel values that are not explicitly specified from the values of the LUT given by the user on input. By default this array is empty and no replacement occurs on this plane. <LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Dst Out (RGB) is the reference to the output RGB image that is obtained by applying the color LUT to the source image.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXApplies a multi-threshold to an image. <LF>    	  <LF>Threshold Data is an array of clusters specifying the mode and threshold range. This operation is analogous to the process in IMAQ Threshold. Each cluster is composed of the following elements:<LF><LF> Lower value is the lowest pixel value used during a threshold. The  <LF> default is 128.<LF>	Upper value (default 255) is the highest pixel value used during a  <LF> threshold. The default is 128.<LF>	<LF>  All pixels not contained between the two values Lower value and  <LF>  Upper value are set to 0. All values found between this range are  <LF>  replaced by the value entered in Replace Value, if Keep/<LF>  ReplaceValue (Replace) is set to TRUE.<LF><LF>Image Src is the reference to the source (input) image.<LF><LF>Image Dst is the reference to the destination image. If it is connected, it must be the same type as the Image Src.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Dst Out is the reference to the destination (output) image which receives the processing results of the VI. If the Image Dst is connected, then Image Dst Out is the same as Image Dst. Otherwise, Image Dst Out refers to the image referenced by Image Src.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>The threshold operations are performed in the order that the data is received from Threshold Data. A pixel can be taken into account only once, even if the pixel is included in the threshold range of two different thresholds by Threshold Data.<LF><LF>For example, a VI contains two clusters on input:<LF><LF>Cluster 1	Lower value =  80, Upper value = 150, Keep/Replace Value = TRUE, Replace Value = 255.<LF>Cluster 2	Lower value = 120, Upper value = 200, Keep/Replace Value = FALSE.<LF>This example shows two threshold ranges with an overlap between 120 and 150. Therefore, the pixels between 120 and 150 are treated only by the first threshold. The following results occur after execution of this VI:<LF><LF>·	Pixel values between 0 and 79 are replaced by 0<LF><LF>·	Pixel values between 80 and 150 are replaced by 255<LF><LF>·	Pixel values between 151 and 200 keep their original values<LF><LF>·	Pixel values greater than 200 are set to 0
XXXXApplies a threshold to an image.<LF>    	    <LF>Keep/Replace Value (Replace) determines whether the pixels existing in the range between Lower value and Upper value are to be replaced by another value. The default TRUE replaces these pixel values and the status FALSE keeps the original values. <LF><LF>Image Src is the reference to the source (input) image.<LF><LF>Image Dst is the reference to the destination image. If it is connected, it must be the same type as the Image Src.<LF><LF>Range is a cluster specifying the threshold range. It is composed of the following elements:<LF><LF> Lower value is the lowest pixel value used during a threshold. The  <LF> default is 128.<LF> <LF>	Upper value is the highest pixel value used during a threshold. The  <LF> default is 255.<LF><LF>All pixels not contained between the two values Lower value and Upper value are set to 0. All values found between this range are replaced by the value entered in Replace Value, if Keep/ReplaceValue (Replace) is set to TRUE.<LF><LF>Replace Value is the value used to replace pixels between the Lower value and Upper value. This operation requires that Keep/Replace Value (Replace) be set to TRUE. <LF><LF>Note:	You should use a binary palette when you plan to visualize an image to which a threshold has been applied in Replace mode. However, which palette to use for visualization depends on the value of Replace Value. For example, the visualization of a threshold image could be performed with a gray palette. However, in this case it is advised that you use a replacement value of 255 (white) to see the threshold image better.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Dst Out is the reference to the destination (output) image which receives the processing results of the VI. If the Image Dst is connected, then Image Dst Out is the same as Image Dst. Otherwise, Image Dst Out refers to the image referenced by Image Src.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXApplies a threshold to the three planes of an RGB-chunky image and places the result into an 8-bit image. A test is performed with each range (Red (or Hue) Range, Green (or Sat) Range, and Blue (or Light or Val) Range), to determine whether the corresponding pixel from the Image Src is set to the value specified in Replace Value. If a pixel from the Image Src does not have corresponding pixel values specified in all three ranges, then the corresponding pixel in Image Dst Out is set to 0. <LF><LF>Note:	By default the pixels in the Image Dst Out take the new value specified by ReplaceValue as all three ranges are set for 0 to 255. Therefore you easily can apply a threshold to one of the three ranges without having to set the values of the other two ranges. <LF><LF>Replace Value specifies the value applied to the destination image when the corresponding pixel from the Image Src is found in all three ranges. The default is 1.<LF><LF>Color Mode defines the image color format to use for the operation. The default is 0, which specifies RGB.<LF><LF>0	(Default) RGB<LF>1	HSL<LF>2	HSV<LF>Image Src (RGB) is the reference to the image to threshold. It must be an RGB-chunky image.<LF><LF>Image Dst must be connected and must be an 8-bit image.<LF><LF>Red (or Hue) Range is a cluster used to determine the thresholding range for the red or hue plane (depending on the Color Mode). Any pixel values not included in this range are reset to zero in the destination image. The pixel values included in this range are altered depending on the status of the Replace input. By default, all pixel values are included (0, 255).<LF><LF>Lower Value is the minimal pixel value in the red or hue plane that is used for the threshold. The default is 0.<LF><LF>Upper Value is the maximal pixel value in the red or hue plane that is used for the threshold. The default is 255.<LF><LF>Green (or Sat) Range is a cluster used to determine the thresholding range for the green or saturation plane (depending on the Color Mode). Any pixel values not included in this range are reset to zero in the destination image. The pixel values included in this range are altered depending on the status of the Replace input. By default, all pixel values are included (0, 255). Green (or Sat) Range has the same elements as found in Red (or Hue) Range.<LF><LF>Blue (or Light or Val) Range is a cluster used to determine the thresholding range for the blue, lightness, or value plane (depending on the Color Mode). Any pixel values not included in this range are reset to zero in the destination image. The pixel values included in this range are altered depending on the status of the Replace input. By default, all pixel values are included (0, 255). Blue (or Light or Val) Range has the same elements as found in Red (or Hue) Range.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Dst Out is the reference to the destination (output) image which receives the processing results of the VI. Image Dst Out is the same as Image Dst.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXApplies an automatic binary threshold to an image that initially possesses 256 gray levels in two classes. Performs a statistical calculation to determine the optimal threshold.<LF>  <LF>Image is the reference to the source (input) image.<LF><LF>Method is the threshold method used. The following values are valid:<LF><LF>  0	clustering<LF>  1	entropy<LF>  2	metric<LF>  3	moments<LF>  4	inter-class variance<LF>Note:	See the Thresholding section of Chapter 7, Morphology Analysis, in the IMAQ Vision for G Reference Manual for more information about these methods.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Threshold Value outputs the threshold value. This value can be directly connected to Lower value from IMAQ Threshold, provided that 255 is connected to Upper value.<LF><LF>Lookup Table outputs a lookup table containing 256 elements encoded in 0 and 1. If the threshold value is 160 then the values between 0 and 159 become zero and the values between 160 and 255 become 1. This array can be used directly by IMAQ UserLookup. <LF><LF>Threshold Data outputs an array containing two clusters compatible with IMAQ MultiThreshold. The elements in this array define a set of intervals equivalent to the LUT outputted by Lookup Table.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>The VI outputs the threshold data in three forms:<LF><LF>·	The threshold data directly (Threshold Value)<LF><LF>·	An LUT directly usable by IMAQ UserLookup<LF><LF>·	An array directly usable by IMAQ MultiThreshold (Threshold Data)
XXXXApplies an automatic multi-threshold by using a variant of the classification by clustering method. Starting from a random sort, the gray scale values are determined. This technique is rapid.<LF>  <LF>Image is the reference to the source (input) image.<LF><LF>Number of Classes is the number of desired phases. This algorithm uses a clustering method and can use any value between 2 and 256. The default is 2.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Lookup Table is an array containing the values of the 256 transformed elements encoded between 0 and the (n – 1), where n is the Number of Classes. This array can be connected directly to IMAQ UserLookup. <LF><LF>Threshold Data outputs an array containing the Number of Classes compatible with IMAQ MultiThreshold. The results range from 0 to (n - 1), where n is the Number of Classes.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>This method is based on a reiterated measurement of an histogram. After finding the best result (a very rapid process), the histogram is segmented into n groups. These groups are based on the fact that each point in a group is closer to the barycenter of its own group than the other group. The VI outputs the threshold data in two forms:<LF><LF>·	A LUT directly usable by IMAQ UserLookup<LF><LF>·	An array directly usable by IMAQ MultiThreshold (Threshold Data)
XXXXArc Points
XXXXAre you sure that you want<LF>to delete the theme:  
XXXXAre you sure you want to delete this theme?
XXXXArea
XXXXArea (calibrated)
XXXXArea (pixels)
XXXXArea (pixels^2)
XXXXArea Under Curve
XXXXAreas
XXXXArray Size
XXXXArray of digits
XXXXArticulation
XXXXAsk Before Starting?
XXXXAspect Ratio
XXXXAssociates an ROI with an image window.<LF><LF>Window Number (0...15) is a number from 0 to 15 that specifies the image window. The default value is 0. <LF><LF>ROI Descriptor is the descriptor that defines the region of interest that is associated with an image window. <LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXAttenuates the frequencies of a complex image.<LF>  <LF>Low pass/High pass (Low pass) determines which frequencies are attenuated. Choose low pass (F) to attenuate the high frequencies or high pass (T) to attenuate the low frequencies. The default is FALSE, which specifies low pass.<LF>	<LF>Image Src is the image reference source. <LF>	<LF>Image Dst is the reference of the image destination.<LF>	<LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Dst Out is the reference to the destination (output) image which receives the processing results of the VI. If the Image Dst is connected, then Image Dst Out is the same as Image Dst. Otherwise, Image Dst Out refers to the image referenced by Image Src.<LF>	<LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXAuto
XXXXAuto Threshold Binary
XXXXAuto Threshold Greyscale
XXXXAuto-Median
XXXXAuto?
XXXXAverage Data Set
XXXXAverage Lines
XXXXAverage Reaction Time
XXXXAxis Labels
XXXXB Controls
XXXXBTN
XXXXBack
XXXXBackground Color
XXXXBackground Image
XXXXBackground color
XXXXBar pattern
XXXXBarometeric Sensor Container
XXXXBarometeric Sensor Fork
XXXXBarometric LogIT
XXXXBars
XXXXBase Reference
XXXXBasic Reports
XXXXBasic Reports Out
XXXXBattery (0)
XXXXBattery Level (0)
XXXXBattery Power (V)
XXXXBattery Value
XXXXBattery value
XXXXBeats/min
XXXXBegin
XXXXBegin Control Lab Interface
XXXXBegin Direct Mode
XXXXBegin Internet Direct Mode
XXXXBegin LASM
XXXXBegin LASM File
XXXXBegin RCX
XXXXBegin Scout
XXXXBegin Scout Direct Mode
XXXXBegin an Inventor program and shows the <LF>LASM interface.<LF><LF>This is required as the first command in<LF>every Inventor program.<LF>
XXXXBegin an Inventor program and shows the LASM interface.<LF><LF>This is required as the first command in every Inventor program.
XXXXBegin an Inventor program for the 2nd <LF>Control Lab Interface (CLI).<LF><LF>This is required as the first command in<LF>every Inventor program.  <LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  Wire a number for the port on your <LF>computer to which the CLI is connected   <LF>(Com1 = 0,  Com2 = 1).The default port<LF>is the one you selected in ""Select COM Port"".
XXXXBegin an Inventor program for the Control Lab Interface (CLI).<LF><LF>This is required as the first command in every Inventor program.  <LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  Wire a number for the port on your computer to which the CLI is connected   <LF>(Com1 = 0,  Com2 = 1).The default port is the one you selected in ""Select COM Port"".
XXXXBegin an Inventor program for the RCX.<LF><LF>This is required as the first command in every Inventor program for the RCX.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  Wire a number for the port on your computer to which RCX is connected.    <LF>(Com1 = 0,  Com2 = 1).The default port is the one you selected in ""Select COM Port"".<LF><LF>LASM View: This allows you to look at the LASM code before it is passed to the brick.
XXXXBegin an Inventor program for the RCX.<LF><LF>This is required as the first command in<LF>every Inventor program for the RCX.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  Wire a number for the port on your <LF>computer to which the RCX is connected    <LF>(Com1 = 0,  Com2 = 1).The default port<LF>is the one you selected in ""Select COM Port"".<LF><LF>LASM View: This allows you to look at the LASM<LF>code before it is passed to the brick.  <LF>The default is to pass it dirctly to the RCX.<LF>
XXXXBegin an Inventor program for the Scout.<LF><LF>This is required as the first command in every Inventor program for the Scout.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  Wire a number for the port on your computer to which the Scout is connected (Com1 = 0,  Com2 = 1).The default port is the one you selected in ""Select COM Port"".<LF><LF>LASM View: This allows you to look at the LASM code before it is passed to the brick.  The default is to pass it directly to the Scout.
XXXXBegin an Inventor program for the Scout.<LF><LF>This is required as the first command in<LF>every Inventor program for the Scout.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  Wire a number for the port on your <LF>computer to which the Scout is connected    <LF>(Com1 = 0,  Com2 = 1).The default port<LF>is the one you selected in ""Select COM Port""<LF><LF>LASM View: This allows you to look at the LASM<LF>code before it is passed to the brick.  The <LF>default is to pass it directly to the Scout.
XXXXBegin an Inventor program to be download over the internet.<LF><LF>This is required as the first command in every Internet Inventor program.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Remote Site IP Number:  String in the IP number or name of the compter that you are trying to access.  You must type the name or number first and then wire  the icon in.<LF><LF>Typing a * will use the host computer and leaving it blank uses the IP addres in the default.prf.
XXXXBegin an Inventor program to downloaded<LF>over the internet.<LF><LF>This is required as the first command in<LF>every Internet Inventor program.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Remote site IP number:  String in the IP number or name of the computer that you are trying to access.  You must type the name or number first and then wire the icon in.  <LF><LF>Typing a * will use the host computer and leaving it blank uses the IP address in the default.prf<LF><LF>
XXXXBegin an Inventor program.<LF><LF>This is required as the first command in every Inventor program.
XXXXBegin an Inventor program.<LF><LF>This is required as the first command in<LF>every Inventor program.<LF>
XXXXBegin of Subroutine
XXXXBegin of a direct Internet mode program.<LF><LF>String a command in after this one to run the following commands immediately in direct mode (no download) over the internet.  Make sure the RCX is near the IR Transmitter on the remote computer to communicate directly with it.  Further, the remote computer must be running the program ROBOLAB Internet Server in your Projects menu.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Remote site IP number:  String in the IP number or name of the computer that you are trying to access.  You must type the name or number first and then wire the icon in.
XXXXBegin of a direct Internet mode program.<LF><LF>String a command in after this one to run the following commands immediately in direct mode (no download) over the internet.  You will need to make sure the RCX is near the IR Transmitter on the remote computer to communicate directly with it.  Further, the remote computer must be running the program ROBOLAB Internet Server in your Projects menu.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF>  <LF>Remote site IP number:  String in the IP number or name of the computer that you are trying to access.  You must type the name or number first and then wire the icon in.
XXXXBig Endian (Motorola)
XXXXBin
XXXXBin 1
XXXXBin 2
XXXXBin 3
XXXXBin In
XXXXBin Modifier<LF><LF>String this to a bin command to select <LF>All Bins.
XXXXBin Modifier<LF><LF>String this to a bin command to select All Bins.
XXXXBin Modifier<LF><LF>String this to a bin command to select the <LF>Blue Bin.
XXXXBin Modifier<LF><LF>String this to a bin command to select the <LF>Brown Bin.
XXXXBin Modifier<LF><LF>String this to a bin command to select the <LF>Green Bin.
XXXXBin Modifier<LF><LF>String this to a bin command to select the <LF>Lavender Bin.
XXXXBin Modifier<LF><LF>String this to a bin command to select the <LF>Light Blue Bin.
XXXXBin Modifier<LF><LF>String this to a bin command to select the <LF>Olive Bin.
XXXXBin Modifier<LF><LF>String this to a bin command to select the <LF>Orange Bin.
XXXXBin Modifier<LF><LF>String this to a bin command to select the <LF>Purple Bin.
XXXXBin Modifier<LF><LF>String this to a bin command to select the <LF>Red Bin.
XXXXBin Modifier<LF><LF>String this to a bin command to select the <LF>Yellow Bin.
XXXXBin Modifier<LF><LF>String this to a bin command to select the Blue Bin.
XXXXBin Modifier<LF><LF>String this to a bin command to select the Brown Bin.
XXXXBin Modifier<LF><LF>String this to a bin command to select the Green Bin.
XXXXBin Modifier<LF><LF>String this to a bin command to select the Lavender Bin.
XXXXBin Modifier<LF><LF>String this to a bin command to select the Light Blue Bin.
XXXXBin Modifier<LF><LF>String this to a bin command to select the Olive Bin.
XXXXBin Modifier<LF><LF>String this to a bin command to select the Orange Bin.
XXXXBin Modifier<LF><LF>String this to a bin command to select the Purple Bin.
XXXXBin Modifier<LF><LF>String this to a bin command to select the Red Bin.
XXXXBin Modifier<LF><LF>String this to a bin command to select the Yellow Bin.
XXXXBin Plots
XXXXBinary
XXXXBinary_Morph
XXXXBins
XXXXBlack
XXXXBlack Jump
XXXXBlack Land
XXXXBlack on White
XXXXBlackIsZero
XXXXBlob Count
XXXXBlob Math
XXXXBlob Parameter
XXXXBlobCount
XXXXBlobs
XXXXBlue
XXXXBlue (or Light or Val) Histogram Graph
XXXXBlue (or Light or Val) Histogram Report
XXXXBlue (or Light or Val) Lookup Table
XXXXBlue (or Light or Val) Plane
XXXXBlue (or Light or Val) Plane out
XXXXBlue (or Light or Val) Range
XXXXBlue (or Light or Val) value
XXXXBlue Bin
XXXXBlue Container
XXXXBlue Data Set
XXXXBlue Event
XXXXBlue Jump
XXXXBlue Land
XXXXBlue Scroll
XXXXBlue Timer
XXXXBlue scroll
XXXXBlue value
XXXXBold?
XXXXBoolean
XXXXBorder Size
XXXXBottom
XXXXBrightSteps (1-32767)
XXXXBrightTH (1-1020)
XXXXBring To Front? (N)
XXXXBrown Bin
XXXXBrowse
XXXXBrowse for Project
XXXXBrowse...
XXXXBrowser Info
XXXXBrowser Size
XXXXBrush Parameters in
XXXXBrush Parameters out
XXXXBrush Window
XXXXBrush active out
XXXXBrush active? (False)
XXXXBrush element size<FONT predef=APPFONT> in
XXXXBrush element size<FONT predef=APPFONT> out
XXXXBrush shape in
XXXXBrush shape out
XXXXBtns
XXXXBuilding
XXXXBuilds a reference for any arbitrary coordinate system with respect to the image plane. The reference of the coordinate system is specified as the position of the origin of the coordinate system and the orientation of its X axis with respect to that of the image plane.<LF><LF>Coordinate Reference is an array of point clusters that define the coordinate system. If two points are specified, these points are assumed to lie along the X axis of the coordinate system and the first point is used as the origin of the coordinate axis. If three points are specified, then the first two points are assumed to be along the X axis and the third point is assumed to be on the Y axis of the coordinate system.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF>	<LF>Coordinate Origin is a point cluster that specifies the location of the origin of the coordinate system within an image plane.<LF>	<LF>Coordinate Angle (rad) is the angle in radians formed by the X axis of the coordinate system and the image plane.<LF><LF>Coordinate Angle (deg) is the angle in degrees formed by the X axis of the coordinate system and the image plane.<LF>	<LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXBuilds a single ROI descriptor from an array ROIs descriptors.<LF><LF>- 	ROI Descriptors is an array of ROIs descriptors. Each element of this array is compatible with the type ROI Descriptor of IMAQä Vision for G which is returned by the VI IMAQ WindGetRoi.<LF><LF>- 	error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>- 	ROI Descriptor out is a ROI descriptor that contains all the contours in the array of ROIs.<LF><LF>- 	error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXBy subtracting the measurements from the number 41, the places where the light sensor measurements were darker now show up as spikes on the graph.  These are the times when someone was going in or coming out of the room.<LF><LF>
XXXXByte Order
XXXXBytes count
XXXXC Controls
XXXXC#
XXXXCLI
XXXXCODE A
XXXXCODE B
XXXXCODE C
XXXXCOM 1
XXXXCOM 2
XXXXCOM 3
XXXXCOM 4
XXXXCOM Port
XXXXCalculates a convex envelope for particles that are labeled in an image. You need to execute IMAQ Label prior to this VI in order to label the objects in the image.<LF>  	  <LF>Image Src is the reference to the source (input) image.<LF>	<LF>Image Dst is the reference to the destination image. If it is connected, it must be the same type as the Image Src.<LF>	<LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Dst Out is the reference to the destination (output) image which receives the processing results of the VI. If the Image Dst is connected, then Image Dst Out is the same as Image Dst. Otherwise, Image Dst Out refers to the image referenced by Image Src.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXCalculates slope of line(s) and displays the corresponding value <LF>on the graph.
XXXXCalculates slope of line(s) and displays the corresponding value on the graph.
XXXXCalculates standard deviation of a Data Set and <LF>displays corresponding values on the graph.
XXXXCalculates the area of interest of each digit from a rectangular area of interest around the whole indicator. This Vi has first to be used in a calibration phase. In order to find the area of each digit, all the segments of the indicator have to be lighted.<LF>This Vi is working with LCD indicators and with electroluminescent indicators, a parameter specifies the type of the indicator.<LF>It is fairly insensitive to light drift. It returns the area of interest containing the global rectangle for each digit. Its type is ROI Descriptor, standard of IMAQä Vision for G.<LF><LF>- 	Image is the reference of the image containing the seven segment display.<LF><LF>- 	ROI Descriptor in is the descriptor of the area of interest drawn by the user that corresponds to the global rectangle of the indicator. It is compatible with the type ROI Descriptor of IMAQä Vision for G. It can be returned by the VI IMAQ WindGetRoi.<LF><LF>- 	Threshold (default=8) is used to determine if a segment is on or off. This value is compared to the standard deviation of the line profiles. This value may be increased when using images with high contrast or lowered in case of poor contrast images.<LF><LF>- 	LCD / LED (LCD) (default FALSE) is a Boolean used to choose the indicator type. FALSE corresponds to LCD indicators and  TRUE to electroluminescent indicators.<LF><LF>- 	error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>- 	ROI Descriptor out contains the global rectangles of each digit.<LF><LF>- 	error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXCalculates the area under the curves and displays<LF>corresponding values on graph.
XXXXCalculates the coefficients of all detected particles. This VI returns an array of coefficients whose measurements are based on the results sent from IMAQ ComplexParticle.<LF>  <LF>Image is the same input source image that is used to measure the particle coefficients by IMAQ ComplexParticle.<LF>	<LF>Complex Reports is the output array of measurements from IMAQ ComplexParticle. The description of the measurements stored in each element of this array is described in IMAQ ComplexParticle. <LF>	<LF>Complex Report is an extraction of the output array of measurements from IMAQ ComplexParticle. The description of the measurements stored in each element of this array is described in IMAQ ComplexParticle. This input is used only in a case in which Complex Reports is not connected, thereby specifying that the measurements are to be made on a single particle. <LF><LF>Parameters is an array specifying a descriptor list of the coefficients that the user wants to calculate. The user can calculate one or more coefficients for one or more particles. The descriptor list is described in the table for the Parameter control.<LF>	<LF>Parameter is an array specifying a descriptor list of the coefficients that the user wants to calculate. The user can calculate one or more coefficients for one or more particles. This input is used only in a situation in which the input Parameters is not connected. The descriptor list is described in the table below.<LF><LF>   0	Area (pixels)	surface area of particle in pixels<LF>    1	Area (calibrated)	surface area of particle in user units<LF>    2	Number of holes	number of holes<LF>    3	Hole's Area	surface area of the holes in user units<LF>    4	Total Area	total surface area (holes and particles) in user units<LF>    5	Scanned Area	surface area of the entire image in user units<LF>    6	Ratio: Area/Scanned Area %	percentage of the surface area <LF>       of a particle in relation to the Scanned Area<LF>     7	Ratio: Area/Total Area %	percentage of a particle's surface <LF>        area in relation to the Total Area<LF>     8	Center of mass (X)	X coordinate of the center of gravity<LF>     9	Center of mass (Y)	Y coordinate of the center of gravity<LF>     10 	Left column (X)	left X coordinate of bounding rectangle <LF>     11	Upper row (Y)	top Y coordinate of bounding rectangle <LF>     12	Right column (X)	right hand X coordinate of bounding <LF>          rectangle <LF>     13	Lower row (Y)	bottom Y coordinate of bounding rectangle <LF>     14	Width 	width of bounding rectangle in user units<LF>     15	Height 	height of bounding rectangle in user units<LF>     16	Longest segment length	length of longest horizontal line <LF>         segment<LF>    17	Longest segment left column (X)	left-most X coordinate of <LF>         longest horizontal line segment<LF>   18	Longest segment row (Y)	Y coordinate of longest horizontal <LF>         line segment<LF>    19	Perimeter	length of outer contour of particle in user units<LF>    20	Hole's Perimeter	perimeter of all holes in user units<LF>    21	SumX	sum of the X-axis for each pixel of the particle<LF>    22	SumY	sum of the Y-axis for each pixel of the particle<LF>    23	SumXX	sum of the X-axis squared, for each pixel of the <LF>         particle<LF>    24	SumYY	sum of the Y-axis squared, for each pixel of the <LF>         particle<LF>    25	SumXY	sum of the X-axis and Y-axis for each pixel of the <LF>        particle<LF>    26	Corrected projection X	projection corrected in x<LF>    27	Corrected projection Y	projection corrected in y<LF>    28	Moment of inertia Ixx	inertia matrix coefficient in xx<LF>    29	Moment of inertia Iyy	inertia matrix coefficient in yy<LF>    30	Moment of inertia Ixy	inertia matrix coefficient in xy <LF>    31	Mean chord X	mean length of horizontal segments<LF>    32	Mean chord Y	mean length of vertical segments<LF>    33	Max intercept	length of longest segment <LF>    34	Mean intercept perpendicular 	mean length of the chords in <LF>        an object perpendicular to its max intercept<LF>     35	Particle orientation	direction of the longest segment <LF>     36	Equivalent ellipse minor axis	total length of the axis of the <LF>        ellipse having the same area as the particle and a major axis <LF>        equal to half the max intercept.<LF>     37	Ellipse major axis	total length of major axis having the same <LF>          area and perimeter as the particle in user units <LF>    38	Ellipse minor axis	total length of minor axis having the same <LF>        area and perimeter as the particle in user units<LF>    39	Ratio of equivalent ellipse axis	fraction of major axis to minor <LF>         axis<LF>    40	Rectangle big side	length of the large side of a rectangle   <LF>         having the same area and perimeter as the particle in user   <LF>         units<LF>     41	Rectangle small side	length of the small side of a rectangle <LF>         having the same area and perimeter as the particle in user <LF>         units<LF>     42	Ratio of equivalent rectangle sides	ratio of rectangle big side <LF>         to rectangle small side<LF>    43	Elongation factor	max intercept / mean perpendicular <LF>         intercept<LF>    44	Compactness factor	particle area (breadth × width)<LF>    45	Heywood circularity factor	particle perimeter / perimeter of <LF>         circle having same area as particle<LF>   46	Type Factor	a complex factor relating the surface area to the <LF>         moment of inertia <LF>    47	Hydraulic Radius	particle area / particle perimeter <LF>    48	Waddel disk diameter	diameter of the disk having the same <LF>         area as the particle in user units<LF>    49	Diagonal	diagonal of an equivalent rectangle in user units<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Coefficients (2D) is a 2D array containing the specified measurements. This array is used only when the user has specified multiple coefficients (measurements) for each particle. The data is stored by particle followed by the coefficients.<LF>	<LF>Coefficients (1D) is a 1D array containing the specified measurements. This array is used only when the user has specified either multiple coefficients (measurements) for a single particle or a single coefficient for multiple particles. <LF><LF>Coefficient is the measurement specified for a single particle. <LF>	<LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>The output from this VI can be in one of three forms: Coefficients (2D), Coefficients (1D), or Coefficient. The final type of output is dependent on the connected inputs, as shown in the following table.<LF><LF>Possible Inputs	Resulting Type of Output<LF>Complex Reports and Parameters  	Coefficients (2D)<LF>Complex Reports and Parameter    	Coefficients (1D)<LF>Complex Report and Parameters    	Coefficients (1D)<LF>Complex Report and Parameter	      Coefficient
XXXXCalculates the histogram from an image. This VI returns a data type (cluster) compatible with a LabVIEW or BridgeVIEW graph.<LF>    	<LF>Image is the input source image used for calculating the histogram. <LF>	<LF>Image Mask is an 8-bit image specifying the region in the image to use for calculating a histogram. Only pixels in the original image that correspond to the equivalent pixel in the mask are used for calculating the histogram (provided that the value in the mask is not 0). A histogram on the complete image occurs if the Image Mask is not connected. <LF>	<LF>Number of Classes specifies the number of classes used to classify the pixels. The number of obtained classes differs from the specified amount in a case in which the minimum and maximum boundaries are overshot in the Interval Range. You are advised to specify an even number of classes (for example, 2, 4, or 8) for 8-bit or 16-bit images. The default value is 256, which is designed for 8-bit images. This value gives a uniform class distribution or one class for each pixel in a 8-bit image.<LF><LF>Interval Range is a cluster specifying the minimum and maximum boundaries for the histogram calculation. Only pixels having a value that falls in this range are taken into account by the histogram calculation. This cluster is composed of the following elements. <LF><LF>Minimum is the minimum interval value. The default value of (0, 0) insures that the real minimum value is determined by the source image, as described in the following table:<LF><LF>Image Type	           Minimum Value Used<LF>  8 bit                                 (0, 0)<LF>  16 bit                      Minimum pixel value found in the image<LF>  32 bit                      Minimum pixel value found in the image<LF><LF>Maximum is the maximum interval value. The default value of (0, 0) insures that the real maximum value is determined by the source image, as shown in the following table:<LF><LF>Image Type	              Maximum Value Used<LF>   8 bit                                 255<LF>  16 bit                       Maximum pixel value found in the image<LF>  Float                        Maximum pixel value found in the image<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF>	<LF>Histogram Graph is a cluster that returns the histogram values. This cluster contains the following elements:<LF><LF>Starting Value returns the smallest pixel value from the first class calculated in the histogram. It can be equal to the Minimal value from the Interval Range or the smallest value found for the image type connected. <LF>	<LF>Incremental Value returns the incrementing value that specifies how much to add to Starting Value in calculating the median value of each class from the histogram. The median value xn from the nth class is: xn = Starting Value + n × Incremental Value.<LF><LF>Histogram returns the histogram values in an array. The elements found in this array are the number of pixels per class. The n class contains all pixel values belonging to the interval [(Starting Value + (n - 1) × Interval Width), (Starting Value + n × (Interval Width - 1))].<LF><LF>Mean Value returns the mean value of the pixels used in calculating the histogram. <LF>	<LF>Standard Deviation returns the standard deviation from the histogram. The higher this value, the better the distribution of the values in the histogram and the image. <LF>	<LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXCalculates the histogram of an image.<LF>    	<LF>Image is the input source image used for calculating the histogram. <LF>	<LF>Image Mask is an 8-bit image specifying the region in the image to use for calculating a histogram. Only pixels in the original image that correspond to the equivalent pixel in the mask are used for calculating the histogram (provided that the value in the mask is not 0). A histogram on the complete image occurs if the Image Mask is not connected. <LF>	<LF>Number of Classes specifies the number of classes used to classify the pixels. The number of obtained classes differs from the specified amount in a case in which the minimum and maximum boundaries are overshot in the Interval Range. It is advised to specify an even number of classes (for example, 2, 4, or 8) for 8-bit or 16-bit images. The default value is 256, which is designed for 8-bit images. This value gives a uniform class distribution or one class for each pixel in a 8-bit image.<LF><LF>Interval Range is a cluster specifying the minimum and maximum boundaries for the histogram calculation. Only pixels having a value that falls in this range are taken into account by the histogram calculation. This cluster is composed of the following elements:<LF><LF>Minimum is the minimum interval value. The default value of (0, 0) insures that the real minimum value is determined by the source image, as described in the following table:<LF><LF>Image Type	        Minimum Value Used<LF> 8 bit                            (0, 0)<LF> 16 bit                 Minimum pixel value found in the image<LF> Float                  Minimum pixel value found in the image<LF><LF>Maximum is the maximum interval value. The default value of (0, 0) insures that the real maximum value is determined by the source image, as shown in the following table:<LF><LF>Image Type                     	Maximum Value Used<LF>  8 bit                                          255<LF>  16 bit                           Maximum pixel value found in the image<LF>  Float                            Maximum pixel value found in the image<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Histogram Report is a cluster that returns the histogram values. <LF>This cluster contains the following elements:<LF><LF>  Histogram returns the histogram values in an array. The elements   <LF>  found in this array are the number of pixels per class. The nth   <LF>  class contains all pixel values belonging to the interval [(Starting  <LF>  Value + (n - 1) × Interval Width), (Starting Value + n × (Interval <LF>  Width - 1))].<LF>	<LF>  Minimal Value returns the smallest pixel value used in calculating   <LF>  the histogram. <LF>	<LF>  Maximal Value returns the largest pixel value used in calculating <LF>  the histogram. <LF><LF>  Starting Value returns the smallest pixel value from the first class   <LF>  calculated in the histogram. It can be equal to the Minimal value <LF>  from the Interval Range or the smallest value found for the image   <LF>  type connected. <LF>	<LF>   Interval Width returns the length of each class. <LF>	<LF>   Mean Value returns the mean value of the pixels used in <LF>   calculating the histogram. <LF>	<LF>    Standard Deviation returns the standard deviation from the <LF>    histogram A higher value corresponds to a better the distribution<LF>    of the values in the histogram and the image. <LF><LF>    Area (pixels) returns the number of pixels used in the histogram   <LF>    calculation. This is influenced by the values specified in Interval <LF>    Range and the contents of Image Mask.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXCalculates the histograms extracted from the three planes of an image. This VI can function in one of three modes corresponding to the three color models (RGB, HSL, or HSV). IMAQ ColorHistograph, a variant of the IMAQ ColorHistogram VI, has the advantage that its output data is directly compatible with a LabVIEW or BridgeVIEW graph.<LF><LF>Color Mode defines the image color format to use for the operation. The default is 0, which specifies RGB.<LF><LF>0	(Default) RGB<LF>1	HSL<LF>2	HSV<LF>Image Src (RGB) is the input source image used for calculating the histogram. It must be an RGB-chunky image.<LF><LF>Image Mask, if connected, must be an 8-bit image.<LF><LF>Number of Classes specifies the number of classes used to classify the pixels. The default is 256.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Red (or Hue) Histogram Report is a cluster that returns the detailed results from a histogram calculated on a red or hue plane (depending on the Color Mode). This cluster is the same as the cluster used by IMAQ Histogram. It contains the following elements.<LF><LF>Histogram returns the histogram values in an array. The elements found in this array are the number of pixels per class. The nth class contains all pixel values belonging to the interval <LF>[Starting Value + (n - 1) × Interval Width, Starting Value + n × Interval Width - 1].<LF><LF>Minimal Value returns the smallest pixel value used in calculating the histogram. <LF><LF>Maximal Value returns the largest pixel value used in calculating the histogram. <LF><LF>Starting Value is always equal to 0 here. It returns the smallest pixel value from the first class calculated in the histogram. It can be equal to the Minimal value from the Interval Range or the smallest value found for the image type connected. <LF><LF>Interval Width returns the length of each class.<LF><LF>Mean Value returns the mean value of the pixels used in calculating the histogram. <LF><LF>Standard Deviation returns the standard deviation from the histogram. A higher value corresponds to a better the distribution of the values in the histogram and the image. <LF>	Area (pixels) returns the number of pixels used in the histogram calculation. This is influenced by the contents of Image Mask.<LF><LF>Green (or Sat) Histogram Report is a cluster that returns the detailed results from a histogram calculated on the green or saturation plane (depending on the Color Mode). It has the same elements as found in Red (or Hue) Histogram Report.<LF><LF>Blue (or Light or Val) Histogram Report is a cluster that returns the detailed results from a histogram calculated on the blue, lightness, or value planes (depending on the Color Mode<LF>). It has the same elements as found in Red (or Hue) Histogram Report.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>
XXXXCalculates the histograms extracted from the three planes of an image. This VI can function in one of three modes corresponding to the three color models (RGB, HSL, or HSV). The output from this VI is directly compatible with a LabVIEW or BridgeVIEW graph.<LF><LF>Color Mode defines the image color format to use for the operation. The default is 0, which specifies RGB.<LF><LF>0	(Default) RGB<LF>1	HSL<LF>2	HSV<LF>Image Src (RGB) is the RGB-chunky input source image used for calculating the histogram.<LF><LF>Image Mask, if connected, must be an 8-bit image.<LF><LF>Number of Classes specifies the number of classes used to class the pixels. The default is 256.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Red (or Hue) Histogram Graph is a cluster that returns the detailed results from a histogram calculated on a red or hue plane (depending on the Color Mode). This cluster is the same as the cluster used by IMAQ Histograph. It contains the following elements.<LF><LF>Starting Value is always equal to 0 here. This parameter is returned in the type Histogram Report, as in the VI IMAQ Histograph.<LF><LF>Incremental Value returns the incrementing value that specifies how much to add to Starting Value in calculating the median value of each class from the histogram. The median value xn from the nth class is xn = Starting Value + n × Incremental Value.<LF><LF>Histogram returns the histogram values in an array. The elements found in this array are the number of pixels per class. the nth class contains all pixel values belonging to the interval <LF>[Starting Value + (n – 1) × Interval Width, Starting Value + n × Interval Width – 1].<LF><LF>Green (or Sat) Histogram Graph is a cluster that returns the detailed results from a histogram calculated on the green or saturation plane (depending on the Color Mode). It has the same elements as found in Red (or Hue) Histogram Graph.<LF><LF>Blue (or Light or Val) Histogram Graph is a cluster that returns the detailed results from a histogram calculated on the blue, lightness, or value planes (depending on the Color Mode<LF>). It has the same elements as found in Red (or Hue) Histogram Graph.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXCalculates the inter-pixel variation between the pixel being processed and those pixels surrounding it. If the pixel being processed has a variation greater than a specified percentage, it is set to the average pixel value as calculated from the neighboring pixels.<LF>   	    <LF>Size & Tolerance is a cluster that specifies the following variables:<LF><LF> X Size is the size of the horizontal matrix axis. The default is 3.<LF><LF> Y Size is the size of the vertical matrix axis. The default is 3.<LF>	% Tolerance is the maximum variation authorized. The default is  <LF> 40%.<LF><LF>Image Src is the image reference source.<LF><LF>Image Mask is an 8-bit image that specifies the region in the image to modify. Only pixels in the original image that correspond to the equivalent pixel in the mask are replaced by the values in the lookup table (provided that the value in the mask is not 0). All pixels not corresponding to this criteria keep their original value. The complete image is modified if Image Mask is not connected. <LF><LF>Image Dst is the reference to the destination image. If it is connected, it must be the same type as the Image Src.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Dst Out is the reference to the destination (output) image which receives the processing results of the VI. If the Image Dst is connected, then Image Dst Out is the same as Image Dst. Otherwise, Image Dst Out refers to the image referenced by Image Src.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Note:	See the Nonlinear Filters section of Chapter 5, Spatial Filtering, in the IMAQ Vision for G Reference Manual for more information about the lowpass filter.<LF><LF>Any image connected to the input Image Dst must be the same image type connected to Image Src. The image type connected to the input Image Mask must be an 8-bit image.<LF>The connected source image must have been created with a border capable of supporting the size of the convolution matrix. A 3 × 3 matrix must have a minimum border of 1, a 5 × 5 matrix must have a minimum border of 2, and so forth. The border size of the destination image is not important.
XXXXCalculates the mean value of a Data Set and <LF>displays a line at the corresponding value on the graph.
XXXXCalculates the profile of a line of pixels. This VI returns a data type (cluster) compatible with a LabVIEW or BridgeVIEW graph. The relevant pixel information is taken from the specified vector (line).<LF>    	<LF>Image is the input source image used for calculating the line profile. <LF>	<LF>Line Coordinates is an array specifying the pixel coordinates that form the end points of the line. <LF><LF>Note:	A line with the coordinates [0, 0, 0, 255] is formed from 256 pixels. Any pixels designated by the Line Coordinates found outside the actual image are set to 0 in Line Graph.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF>	<LF>Line Graph is a cluster that contains the line profile with an X origin at 0 and an increment of 1. The cluster contains the following elements:<LF><LF> x0 always returns 0. <LF>	dx always returns 1.<LF>	<LF>Pixel Line returns the line profile calculated in an array in which elements represent the pixel values belonging to the specified vector. <LF><LF>Line Information is a cluster containing relevant information about the pixels found in the specified vector. This cluster contains the following elements:<LF>  <LF>  Min returns the smallest pixel value found in the line profile. <LF> 	Max returns the largest pixel value found in the line profile. <LF>	 Mean returns the mean value of the pixels found in the line profile. <LF> 	Var returns the standard deviation from the line profile. <LF> 	Count found in the line profile.<LF><LF>Global Rectangle is a cluster that contains the coordinates of a bounding rectangle for the ROI in the image. This cluster includes the following parameters:<LF><LF>   	x1Left indicates the x coordinate of the top-left corner of the <LF>    rectangle.<LF>   	y1Top indicates the y coordinate of the top-left corner of the <LF>    rectangle.<LF>	  x2Right indicates the x coordinate of the bottom-right corner of    <LF>   the rectangle.<LF>  	y2Bottom indicates the y coordinate of the bottom-right corner of <LF>   the rectangle.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXCalculates the profile of the pixels along the boundary of an ROI descriptor. This VI returns a data type (cluster) that is compatible with a LabVIEW or BridgeVIEW graph. This VI also returns other information such as pixel statistics and the true coordinates of the ROI boundary.<LF>    	  <LF>Image is the input source image used for calculating the ROI profile. <LF>	<LF>ROI Descriptor is the descriptor that defines the region of interest.<LF>	<LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF>	<LF>ROI Graph is a cluster that contains the ROI profile with an X origin at 0 and an increment of 1. The cluster contains the following elements.<LF><LF>   x0 always returns 0. <LF>  	dx always returns 1.<LF>	<LF>Pixels Line returns the ROI profile calculated in an array in which elements represent the pixel values belonging to the specified vector.<LF><LF>Pixel Coordinates is an array consisting of the spatial coordinates of each pixel along the ROI boundary.<LF>	<LF>ROI Pixel Statistics is a cluster containing relevant information about the pixels found along the ROI boundary. This cluster contains the following elements.<LF><LF>  Min returns the smallest pixel value found in the ROI profile. <LF>	 Max returns the largest pixel value found in the ROI profile. <LF>	 Mean returns the mean value of the pixels found in the ROI <LF>  profile. <LF> 	Var returns the standard deviation from the ROI profile. <LF>	 Count returns the count of pixels found in the ROI profile.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF>	<LF>Global Rectangle is a cluster that contains the coordinates of a bounding rectangle for the ROI in the image. This cluster includes the following parameters.<LF><LF> 	 x1Left indicates the x coordinate of the top-left corner of the <LF>   rectangle.<LF>  	y1Top indicates the y coordinate of the top-left corner of the <LF>   rectangle.<LF>	  x2Right indicates the x coordinate of the bottom-right corner of <LF>   the rectangle.<LF>	  y2Bottom indicates the y coordinate of the bottom-right corner of <LF>   the rectangle.
XXXXCalculating
XXXXCalculating Plot.  Please wait....
XXXXCalibration
XXXXCaliper Parameters
XXXXCaliper Report
XXXXCamera 1 Enabled?
XXXXCamera 2 Enabled?
XXXXCamera 3 Enabled?
XXXXCamera Equal Fork
XXXXCamera Port
XXXXCamera Sensor 1
XXXXCamera Sensor 2
XXXXCamera Sensor 3
XXXXCamera Sensor Container
XXXXCamera Sensor Fork
XXXXCancel
XXXXCancel this operation and go back to Pilot.
XXXXCancel?
XXXXCanceled?
XXXXCaps Lock
XXXXCelsius
XXXXCelsius Equal Fork
XXXXCelsius Fork
XXXXCenter
XXXXCenter Point
XXXXCenter out
XXXXCenterLight (1-1020)
XXXXCentral
XXXXCentroid
XXXXChange Inventor Level
XXXXChange Motor Speed
XXXXChange Program On RCX
XXXXChange View On RCX
XXXXChange between the greater than or less than sign used for comparisons.
XXXXChange the direction of the motor, forward of backwards.
XXXXChange the direction of the motor, forward or backward.
XXXXChange the direction of the motor, forward or backwards.
XXXXChange the motor speed on specified ports.<LF>The default is to turn change the motor speed on all ports to power level 5.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Ports:  Choose which motors to change motor speed on by stringing together any combination of output port modifiers A, B and C.<LF><LF>Power Level:  String a single modifier to choose the power level for the motors.
XXXXChange the motor speed on specified ports.<LF>The default is to turn change the motor speed on all<LF>ports to power level 5.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Ports:  Choose which motors to change motor speed on <LF>by stringing together any combination of output port <LF>modifiers A, B and C.<LF><LF>Power Level:  String a single modifier to choose the <LF>power level for the motors.
XXXXChange which program will be run on the RCX and run it.<LF><LF>Wire in a constant from 1 to 5.  The default is selecting program 3.<LF>
XXXXChange which sensor or motor is being viewed on the RCX.  The modifier chooses which view you want.  Modifiers can be Containers or constants.<LF><LF>The default is to set the view to sensor port 1.<LF><LF>0 ... the clock<LF>1 ... Sensor port 1<LF>2 ... Sensor port 2<LF>3 ... Sensor port 3<LF>4 ... Output port A<LF>5 ... Output port B<LF>6 ... Output port C
XXXXChanges a line of pixels from a color image. This VI receives an array of unsigned 32-bit integer controls. An array of clusters coding the color three values (R, G, B), (H, S, L), or (H, S, V) can be converted into an array of pixels (unsigned 32-bit integer controls) using the VI IMAQ IntegerToColorValue.<LF><LF>Line Coordinates is an array specifying the two endpoints of the line to modify. Any pixels designated by the Line Coordinates found outside the actual image are not replaced.<LF><LF>Image must be an RGB-chunky image.<LF><LF>Pixels Line(U32) contains the pixel values as a 1D array of unsigned 32-bit integer controls.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Out is the reference to the destination (output) image.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXChanges the intensity values in a line of pixels from an image. <LF>    	<LF>Note:	Each Pixels Line input is specific for a particular type of data.<LF><LF>Line Coordinates are the coordinates of the line to change. These coordinates are in the form of an array specifying the endpoints of the line. Any pixels designated by the Line Coordinates found outside the actual image are not replaced.<LF><LF>Image is the reference to the source (input) image.<LF><LF>Pixels Line (U8) is an array containing the coordinates of the pixel line to be drawn. This input must be used if the image connected is an 8-bit image. The drawing is made between the endpoints of the line and contains the values supplied from Pixels Line. <LF><LF>Pixels Line (I16) is an array of 16-bit integers. This input must be used if the image connected is a 16-bit image.<LF><LF>Pixels Line (Float) is an array of floating-point values. This input must be used if the image connected is a 32-bit floating-point image.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Out is the reference to the destination (output) image.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXChanges the intensity values in either a row or a column of pixels in an image. <LF>    	<LF>Note:	Each Pixels input is specific for a particular type of data.<LF><LF>Row / Column uses the row Number by default (the default is FALSE). When the TRUE value is connected, the column Number is used. <LF>	<LF>Number is the row or column number to be replaced in the image. <LF>	<LF>Image is the reference to the source (input) image.<LF><LF>Pixels (U8) is an array specifying the coordinates of the pixel row or column to be drawn. This input must be used if the image connected is an 8-bit image. The drawing is made between the endpoints of the line and contains the values supplied from Pixels.<LF><LF>Pixels (I16) is an array of 16-bit integers specifying the coordinates of the pixel row or column to be drawn. This input must be used if the image connected is a 16-bit image. The drawing is made between the endpoints of the line and contains the values supplied from Pixels.<LF><LF>Pixels (Float) is an array of floating-point values specifying the coordinates of the pixel row or column to be drawn. This input must be used if the image connected is a 32-bit floating-point image. The drawing is made between the endpoints of the line and contains the values supplied from Pixels.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Out is the reference to the destination (output) image.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXChanges the pixel value for a color image. This VI receives the pixel value as an unsigned 32-bit integer control. The values (R, G, B), (H, S, L), or (H, S, V) can be converted into an unsigned 32-bit integer control using the VI IMAQ ColorValueToInteger.<LF><LF>Image must be an RGB-chunky image.<LF><LF>X Coordinate is the horizontal position of the pixel. <LF><LF>Y Coordinate is the vertical position of the pixel.<LF><LF>Pixel Value contains the pixel value as an unsigned 32-bit integer control.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Out is the reference to the destination (output) image.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXChanges the pixel value in an image. <LF><LF>Image is the reference to the source (input) image.<LF><LF>X Coordinate is the horizontal coordinate of the pixel to modify.<LF><LF>	Y Coordinate is the vertical coordinate of the pixel to modify.<LF><LF>Pixel Value contains the replacement pixel value. <LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Out is the reference to the destination (output) image.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXChannel
XXXXCharacter
XXXXCheck - Is there?
XXXXCheck Value
XXXXCheck character (False)
XXXXCheck the battery level of the RCX.<LF>Outputs a value (V)  between 0 and 9.
XXXXCheck the battery level of the RCX<LF>Outputs a value (V)  between 0 and 9.
XXXXCheck to see if the RCX is in front of tower.<LF>Outputs true if RCX is in view and false if it is not.
XXXXChoose a Bin for your computed data (only visible data is placed in the bin).
XXXXChoose a Bin or a number.
XXXXChoose a Bin.
XXXXChoose a Bin.<LF><LF>In the View Area, the view all bins (1..10), including Compute data.
XXXXChoose a Container
XXXXChoose a page of your Project to be displayed below.
XXXXChoose a path depending on whether the <LF>sound level is greater-than or less-than a specified <LF>value. <LF><LF>If the sound level is greater than the specified <LF>value, the program will follow the top string.<LF>If the sound level is less than or equal to the specified <LF>number, the program will follow the bottom string.<LF>The default is to compare the value of the sound level to <LF>60 dB.<LF><LF>Note: All forks will need a 'Merge' later in the string.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to (dB):  String in the number to compare with the <LF>value of the sound level sensor.
XXXXChoose a path depending on whether the Clock value is <LF>greater-than or less-than a specified number.<LF>If the Clock value is greater than the specified number, <LF>the program will follow the top string.<LF>If the Clock value is less than or equal to the specified <LF>number, the program will follow the bottom string.<LF>The default is to compare the value of the Clock to 1 min.<LF><LF>Note: All forks will need a 'Merge' later in the string<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Compare to (min):  String in the number to compare with the Clock.
XXXXChoose a path depending on whether the Clock value is equal to or not equal to a specified number.<LF>If the Clock value is equal to the specified number, the program will follow the top string.<LF>If the Clock value is not equal to the specified number, the program will follow the bottom string.<LF>The default is to compare the value of the Clock to 1 min.<LF><LF>Note: All forks will need a 'Merge' later in the string<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Compare to (min):  String in the number to compare with the Clock.
XXXXChoose a path depending on whether the Clock value is equal to or not equal to a specified number.If the Clock value is equal to the specified number, the program will follow the top string.If the Clock value is not equal to the specified number, the program will follow the bottom string.The default is to compare the value of the Clock to 1 min.<LF><LF>Note: All forks will need a 'Merge' later in the string<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Compare to (min):  String in the number to compare with the Clock.
XXXXChoose a path depending on whether the Clock value is greater-than or less-than a specified number.<LF>If the Clock value is greater than the specified number, the program will follow the top string.<LF>If the Clock value is less than or equal to the specified number, the program will follow the bottom string.<LF>The default is to compare the value of the Clock to 1 min.<LF><LF>Note: All forks will need a 'Merge' later in the string<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Compare to (min):  String in the number to compare with the Clock.
XXXXChoose a path depending on whether the Timer is equal to or not equal to a specified number.   If the Timer is equal to the specified number the program will follow the top string.  If the Timer is not equal to the specified number the program will follow the bottom string.  The default is to compare the value of the Red Timer to 5 seconds.<LF><LF>Note: All forks need a 'Merge' later in the string.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in a number (in tenths of seconds) to compare with the Timer.<LF><LF>Timer:  String in a Timer modifier corresponding to the Timer you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.
XXXXChoose a path depending on whether the Timer is equal to or not equal to a specified number. <LF>If the Timer is equal to the specified number the program will follow the top string.<LF>If the Timer is not equal to the specified number the program will follow the bottom string.<LF>The default is to compare the value of the Red Timer to 5 seconds.<LF><LF>Note: All forks need a 'Merge' later in the string.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in a number (in tenths of seconds) to compare with the Timer.<LF><LF>Timer:  String in a Timer modifier corresponding to the Timer you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.
XXXXChoose a path depending on whether the Timer is greater-than or <LF>less-than a specified number. <LF>If the Timer is greater-than the specified number the program will <LF>follow the top string.<LF>If the Timer is less-than or equal to the specified number the <LF>program will follow the bottom string.<LF>The default is to compare the value of the Red Timer to 5 seconds.<LF><LF>Note: All forks need a 'Merge' later in the string.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in a number (in tenths of seconds) to <LF>compare with the Timer.<LF><LF>Timer:  String in a Timer modifier corresponding to the Timer you<LF>want to use: red, yellow, or blue.
XXXXChoose a path depending on whether the Timer is greater-than or less-than a specified number. <LF>If the Timer is greater-than the specified number the program will follow the top string.<LF>If the Timer is less-than or equal to the specified number the program will follow the bottom string.<LF>The default is to compare the value of the Red Timer to 5 seconds.<LF><LF>Note: All forks need a 'Merge' later in the string.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in a number (in tenths of seconds) to compare with the Timer.<LF><LF>Timer:  String in a Timer modifier corresponding to the Timer you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.
XXXXChoose a path depending on whether the container value is <LF>greater-than or less-than a specified number.<LF>If the container value is greater than the specified number, <LF>the program will follow the top string.<LF>If the container value is less than or equal to the specified <LF>number, the program will follow the bottom string.<LF>The default is to compare the value of the Red Container to 1.<LF><LF>Note: All forks will need a 'Merge' later in the string<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Choose a container:  String in the container modifier that <LF>corresponds to the container you want to use.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the container.
XXXXChoose a path depending on whether the container value is equal to or not equal to a specified number.<LF>If the container value is equal to the specified number, the program will follow the top string.<LF>If the container value is not equal to the specified number, the program will follow the bottom string.<LF>The default is to compare the value of the Red Container to 1.<LF><LF>Note: All forks will need a 'Merge' later in the string<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Choose a container:  String in the container modifier that corresponds to the container you want to use.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the container.
XXXXChoose a path depending on whether the container value is greater-than or less-than a specified number.<LF>If the container value is greater than the specified number, the program will follow the top string.<LF>If the container value is less than or equal to the specified number, the program will follow the bottom string.<LF>The default is to compare the value of the Red Container to 1.<LF><LF>Note: All forks will need a 'Merge' later in the string<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Choose a container:  String in the container modifier that corresponds to the container you want to use.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the container.
XXXXChoose a path depending on whether the number of clicks of the Touch Sensor is equal to or not equal to a specified number.<LF><LF>If the number of clicks is equal to the specified number, the program will follow the top string.  <LF>If the number of clicks is not equal to the specified number, the program will follow the bottom string.<LF><LF>The default is to compare the number of clicks of the Touch Sensor on Port 1 to the number 10.<LF><LF>Note: All forks will need a 'Merge' later in the string.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the number of clicks of the touch sensor.
XXXXChoose a path depending on whether the number of clicks of the Touch Sensor is greater than or less than a specified number.<LF><LF>If the number of clicks is greater than the specified number, the program will follow the top string.  <LF>If the number of clicks is less than or equal to the specified number, the program will follow the bottom string.<LF><LF>The default is to compare the number of clicks of the <LF>Touch Sensor on Port 1 to the number 10.<LF><LF>Note: All forks will need a 'Merge' later in the string.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that<LF>corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the <LF>number of clicks of the touch sensor.
XXXXChoose a path depending on whether the number of clicks of the Touch Sensor is greater than or less than a specified number.<LF><LF>If the number of clicks is greater than the specified number, the program will follow the top string.  <LF>If the number of clicks is less than or equal to the specified number, the program will follow the bottom string.<LF><LF>The default is to compare the number of clicks of the Touch Sensor on Port 1 to the number 10.<LF><LF>Note: All forks will need a 'Merge' later in the string.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the number of clicks of the touch sensor.
XXXXChoose a path depending on whether the number of points in a Data Set is equal to or not equal to a specified number. <LF>If the number of points is equal to the specified number the program will <LF>follow the top string.<LF>If the number of points is not equal to the specified number the <LF>program will follow the bottom string.<LF>The default is to compare the number of points in the Red Data Set to 5 points.<LF><LF>Note: All forks need a 'Merge' later in the string.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Data Set: String  the data set modifier that corresponds to the data set you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Compare to (Number of Points):  String in a number to compare to the number of points. 
XXXXChoose a path depending on whether the number of points in a Data Set is equal to or not equal to a specified number. <LF>If the number of points is equal to the specified number the program will follow the top string.<LF>If the number of points is not equal to the specified number the <LF>program will follow the bottom string.<LF>The default is to compare the number of points in the Red Data Set to 5 points.<LF><LF>Note: All forks need a 'Merge' later in the string.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Data Set: String  the data set modifier that corresponds to the data set you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Compare to (Number of Points):  String in a number to compare to the number of points. <LF>
XXXXChoose a path depending on whether the number of points in a Data Set is greater-than or <LF>less-than a specified number. <LF>If the number of points is greater-than the specified number the program will <LF>follow the top string.<LF>If the number of points is less-than or equal to the specified number the <LF>program will follow the bottom string.<LF>The default is to compare the number of points in the Red Data Set to 5 points.<LF><LF>Note: All forks need a 'Merge' later in the string.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Data Set: String  the data set modifier that corresponds to the data set you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Compare to (Number of Points):  String in a number to compare to the number of points. 
XXXXChoose a path depending on whether the number of points in a Data Set is greater-than or less-than a specified number. <LF>If the number of points is greater-than the specified number the program will follow the top string.<LF>If the number of points is less-than or equal to the specified number the program will follow the bottom string.<LF>The default is to compare the number of points in the Red Data Set to 5 points.<LF><LF>Note: All forks need a 'Merge' later in the string.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Data Set: String the data set modifier that corresponds to the data set you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Compare to (Number of Points):  String in a number to compare to the number of points. <LF><LF>
XXXXChoose a path depending on whether the number of touches and releases of the Touch Sensor is equal to or not equal to a specified number.<LF><LF>If the number of clicks is equal to the specified number, the program will follow the top string.  <LF>If the number of clicks is not equal to the specified number, the program will follow the bottom string.<LF><LF>The default is to compare the number of clicks of the Touch Sensor on Port 1 to the number 10.<LF><LF>Note: All forks will need a 'Merge' later in the string.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the number of clicks of the touch sensor.
XXXXChoose a path depending on whether the number of touches and releases of the Touch Sensor is greater than or less than a specified number.<LF><LF>If the number of clicks is greater than the specified number, the program will follow the top string.  <LF>If the number of clicks is less than or equal to the specified number, the program will follow the bottom string.<LF><LF>The default is to compare the number of clicks of the To<LF>uch Sensor on Port 1 to the number 10.<LF><LF>Note: All forks will need a 'Merge' later in the string.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that<LF>corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the <LF>number of clicks of the touch sensor.
XXXXChoose a path depending on whether the number of touches and releases of the Touch Sensor is greater than or less than a specified number.<LF><LF>If the number of clicks is greater than the specified number, the program will follow the top string.  <LF>If the number of clicks is less than or equal to the specified number, the program will follow the bottom string.<LF><LF>The default is to compare the number of clicks of the Touch Sensor on Port 1 to the number 10.<LF><LF>Note: All forks will need a 'Merge' later in the string.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the number of clicks of the touch sensor.
XXXXChoose a path depending on whether the sound level is greater-than or less-than a specified value. <LF><LF>If the sound level is greater than the specified value, the program will follow the top string.<LF>If the sound level is less than or equal to the specified value, the program will follow the bottom string.<LF>The default is to compare the value of the sound level to <LF>60 dB.<LF><LF>Note: All forks will need a 'Merge' later in the string.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to (dB):  String in the number to compare with the <LF>value of the sound level sensor.
XXXXChoose a path depending on whether the value of mail <LF>in the mailbox is greater-than or less-than a <LF>specified number.<LF>If the mail is greater than the specified number, the<LF> program will follow the top string.<LF>If the mail is less than or equal to the specified <LF>number, the program will follow the bottom string.<LF>The default is to compare the mail value to 1.  <LF><LF>Note:  You will need an 'Empty mailbox' command <LF>somewhere in the string before this fork.<LF><LF>Note: If you have emptied the mailbox earlier and <LF>have not received any mail from another RCX, the <LF>mailbox will read Zero.  <LF><LF>Note: All forks will need a 'Merge' later in the <LF>string.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with <LF>the mail value.
XXXXChoose a path depending on whether the value of mail in the mailbox is equal to or not equal to a specified number.  If the mail is equal to the specified number, the program will follow the top string.  If the mail is not equal to the specified number, the program will follow the bottom string.The default is to compare the mail value to 1.  <LF><LF>Note:  You will need an 'Empty mailbox' command somewhere in the string before this fork.<LF><LF>Note: If you have emptied the mailbox earlier and have not received any mail from another RCX, the mailbox will read Zero.  <LF><LF>Note: All forks will need a 'Merge' later in the string.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the mail value.
XXXXChoose a path depending on whether the value of mail in the mailbox is equal to or not equal to a specified number.<LF>If the mail is equal to the specified number, the program will follow the top string.<LF>If the mail is not equal to the specified number, the program will follow the bottom string.<LF>The default is to compare the mail value to 1.  <LF><LF>Note:  You will need an 'Empty mailbox' command somewhere in the string before this fork.<LF><LF>Note: If you have emptied the mailbox earlier and have not received any mail from another RCX, the mailbox will read Zero.  <LF><LF>Note: All forks will need a 'Merge' later in the string.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the mail value.
XXXXChoose a path depending on whether the value of mail in the mailbox is greater-than or less-than a specified number.<LF>If the mail is greater than the specified number, the program will follow the top string.<LF>If the mail is less than or equal to the specified number, the program will follow the bottom string.<LF>The default is to compare the mail value to 1.  <LF><LF>Note:  You will need an 'Empty mailbox' command somewhere in the string before this fork.<LF><LF>Note: If you have emptied the mailbox earlier and have not received any mail from another RCX, the mailbox will read Zero.  <LF><LF>Note: All forks will need a 'Merge' later in the string.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the mail value.
XXXXChoose a path depending on whether the value of the  Light Sensor is equal to or not equal to a specified  number.  If the light sensor is equal to the specified  number, the program will follow the top string. If the light sensor is not equal to the specified  number, the program will follow the bottom string.<LF><LF>The default is to compare the value of the Light Sensor to  55.<LF><LF>Note: The Light Sensor reads a value between 1  (dark) and 100 (bright).<LF>Note: All forks will need a 'Merge' later in the string.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that  corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the  value of the light sensor.
XXXXChoose a path depending on whether the value of the <LF>Light Sensor is equal to or not equal to a specified <LF>number. <LF>If the light sensor is equal to the specified <LF>number, the program will follow the top string.<LF>If the light sensor is not equal to the specified <LF>number, the program will follow the bottom string.<LF>The default is to compare the value of the Light Sensor to <LF>55.<LF><LF>Note: The Light Sensor reads a value between 1 <LF>(dark) and 100 (bright).<LF>Note: All forks will need a 'Merge' later in the string.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the <LF>value of the light sensor.
XXXXChoose a path depending on whether the value of the <LF>Light Sensor is greater-than or less-than a specified <LF>number. <LF>If the light sensor is greater than the specified <LF>number, the program will follow the top string.<LF>If the light sensor is less than or equal to the specified <LF>number, the program will follow the bottom string.<LF>The default is to compare the value of the Light Sensor to <LF>55.<LF><LF>Note: The Light Sensor reads a value between 1 <LF>(dark) and 100 (bright).<LF>Note: All forks will need a 'Merge' later in the string.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the <LF>value of the light sensor.
XXXXChoose a path depending on whether the value of the <LF>Temperature Sensor is greater-than or less-than a <LF>specified number.  <LF>If the temperature is greater than the specified <LF>number, the program will follow the top string.<LF>If the temperature is less than or equal to the specified <LF>number, the program will follow the bottom string.<LF>The default is to compare the value of the <LF>Temperature Sensor to 30 Celsius.<LF><LF>Note: All forks will need a 'Merge' later in the string.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that<LF> corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the <LF>temperature sensor. If the value of a container is used here, the number must be 10 times the desired threshold temperature (401 for 40.1 degrees). 
XXXXChoose a path depending on whether the value of the <LF>Temperature Sensor is greater-than or less-than a <LF>specified number.  <LF>If the temperature is greater than the specified <LF>number, the program will follow the top string.<LF>If the temperature is less than or equal to the specified <LF>number, the program will follow the bottom string.<LF>The default is to compare the value of the <LF>Temperature Sensor to 80 Fahrenheit.<LF><LF>Note: All forks will need a 'Merge' later in the string.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that<LF> corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the <LF>temperature sensor. If the value of a container is used here, the number must be 10 times the desired threshold temperature (401 for 40.1 degrees). 
XXXXChoose a path depending on whether the value of the <LF>Voltage Sensor is greater-than or less-than a specified <LF>number. <LF><LF>If the voltage is greater than the specified <LF>value, the program will follow the top string.<LF>If the voltage is less than or equal to the <LF>specified  value, the program will follow the bottom string.<LF>The default is to compare the value of the sensor to <LF>2V.<LF><LF>Note: All forks will need a 'Merge' later in the string.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to (V):  String in the number to compare with the <LF>value of the sensor adapter.
XXXXChoose a path depending on whether the value of the <LF>humidity sensor is greater-than or less-than a specified <LF>value. <LF>If the relative humidity is greater than the specified <LF>percentage, the program will follow the top string.<LF>If the sensor adapter  is less than or equal to the specified <LF>humidity, the program will follow the bottom string.<LF>The default is to compare the value of the humidity sensor to <LF>50%.<LF><LF>Note: All forks will need a 'Merge' later in the string.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to (%RH):  String in the number to compare with the <LF>value of the humidity sensor.
XXXXChoose a path depending on whether the value of the <LF>pH is greater-than or less-than a specified  number. <LF><LF>If the pH is greater than the specified  value, the program <LF>will follow the top string.<LF>If the pH  is less than or equal to the specified  value, the <LF>program will follow the bottom string.<LF><LF>The default is to compare the value of the pH to 7.<LF><LF>Note: All forks will need a 'Merge' later in the string.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to (pH):  String in the number to compare with the <LF>value of the pH sensor.
XXXXChoose a path depending on whether the value of the <LF>position sensor is greater-than or less-than a specified <LF>value. <LF>If the position is greater than the specified <LF>percentage, the program will follow the top string.<LF>If the sensor adapter is less than or equal to the specified <LF>position, the program will follow the bottom string.<LF>The default is to compare the value of the position sensor to <LF>180 degrees.<LF><LF>Note: All forks will need a 'Merge' later in the string.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to (degrees):  String in the number to compare with the <LF>value of the position sensor.
XXXXChoose a path depending on whether the value of the <LF>pressure sensor is greater-than or less-than a specified <LF>value. <LF><LF>If the pressure is greater than the specified <LF>value, the program will follow the top string.<LF>If the pressure is less than or equal to the specified <LF>number, the program will follow the bottom string.<LF>The default is to compare the value of the pressure sensor to <LF>100 kPa.<LF><LF>Note: All forks will need a 'Merge' later in the string.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to (kPa):  String in the number to compare with the <LF>value of the sensor adapter.
XXXXChoose a path depending on whether the value of the <LF>sensor adapter  is greater-than or less-than a specified <LF>number. <LF><LF>If the sensor adapter lux is greater than the specified <LF>value, the program will follow the top string.<LF>If the sensor adapter lux is less than or equal to the <LF>specified  value, the program will follow the bottom string.<LF>The default is to compare the value of the sensor adapter to <LF>10000 lux.<LF><LF>Note: All forks will need a 'Merge' later in the string.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to (Lux):  String in the number to compare with the <LF>value of the sensor adapter.
XXXXChoose a path depending on whether the value of the <LF>sensor adapter  is greater-than or less-than a specified <LF>number. <LF><LF>If the sensor adapter pressure is greater than the specified <LF>value, the program will follow the top string.<LF>If the sensor adapter pressure is less than or equal to the <LF>specified  value, the program will follow the bottom string.<LF>The default is to compare the value of the sensor adapter to <LF>1000 hPa.<LF><LF>Note: All forks will need a 'Merge' later in the string.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to (hPa):  String in the number to compare with the <LF>value of the sensor adapter.
XXXXChoose a path depending on whether the value of the <LF>sensor adapter  is greater-than or less-than a specified <LF>number. <LF><LF>If the sensor adapter voltage is greater than the specified <LF>value, the program will follow the top string.<LF>If the sensor adapter voltage is less than or equal to the <LF>specified  value, the program will follow the bottom string.<LF>The default is to compare the value of the sensor adapter to <LF>25 m/s/s.<LF><LF>Note: All forks will need a 'Merge' later in the string.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to (m/s/s):  String in the number to compare with the <LF>value of the sensor adapter.
XXXXChoose a path depending on whether the value of the <LF>sensor adapter  is greater-than or less-than a specified <LF>number. <LF><LF>If the sensor adapter voltage is greater than the specified <LF>value, the program will follow the top string.<LF>If the sensor adapter voltage is less than or equal to the <LF>specified  value, the program will follow the bottom string.<LF>The default is to compare the value of the sensor adapter to <LF>2V.<LF><LF>Note: All forks will need a 'Merge' later in the string.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to (V):  String in the number to compare with the <LF>value of the sensor adapter.
XXXXChoose a path depending on whether the value of the <LF>sensor adapter  is greater-than or less-than a specified <LF>number. <LF><LF>If the sensor adapter voltage is greater than the specified <LF>value, the program will follow the top string.<LF>If the sensor adapter voltage is less than or equal to the <LF>specified  value, the program will follow the bottom string.<LF>The default is to compare the value of the sensor adapter to <LF>625 mV.<LF><LF>Note: All forks will need a 'Merge' later in the string.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to (mV):  String in the number to compare with the <LF>value of the sensor adapter.
XXXXChoose a path depending on whether the value of the <LF>temperature sensor is greater-than or less-than a specified <LF>value. <LF><LF>If the temperature is greater than the specified <LF>value (in degrees Celsius), the program will follow the top<LF>string.<LF>If the sensor adapter is less than or equal to the specified <LF>value, the program will follow the bottom string.<LF>The default is to compare the value of the temperature sensor<LF>to 30 degrees C.<LF><LF>Note: All forks will need a 'Merge' later in the string.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to (Celsius):  String in the number to compare with the <LF>value of the temperature sensor.
XXXXChoose a path depending on whether the value of the Angle <LF>Sensor is greater-than or less-than a specified number.<LF>If the value of the Angle Sensor is greater than the <LF>specified number, the program will follow the top string.<LF>If the value of the Angle Sensor is less than or equal to the <LF>specified number, the program will follow the bottom string.<LF>The default is to compare the value of the Angle Sensor to 16<LF>(one rotation).<LF><LF>Note: All forks will need a 'Merge' later in the string.<LF><LF>Note: To properly use this command you will need a Zero <LF>Angle Sensor in the string somewhere before this fork.  <LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to <LF>where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the <LF>Angle Sensor value in sixteenths of a rotation.<LF><LF>
XXXXChoose a path depending on whether the value of the Angle Sensor is equal to or not equal to a specified number.<LF>If the value of the Angle Sensor is equal to the specified number, the program will follow the top string.<LF>If the value of the Angle Sensor is not equal to the specified number, the program will follow the bottom string.<LF>The default is to compare the value of the Angle Sensor to 16 (one rotation).<LF><LF>Note: All forks will need a 'Merge' later in the string.<LF><LF>Note: To properly use this command you will need a Zero Angle Sensor in the string somewhere before this fork.  <LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the Angle Sensor value in sixteenths of a rotation.<LF><LF>
XXXXChoose a path depending on whether the value of the Angle Sensor is equal to or not equal to a specified number.If the value of the Angle Sensor is equal to the specified number, the program will follow the top string.<LF>If the value of the Angle Sensor is not equal to the specified number, the program will follow the bottom string.The default is to compare the value of the Angle Sensor to 16 (one rotation).<LF><LF>Note: All forks will need a 'Merge' later in the string.<LF><LF>Note: To properly use this command you will need a Zero Angle Sensor in the string somewhere before this fork.  <LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the Angle Sensor value in sixteenths of a rotation.<LF><LF><LF>
XXXXChoose a path depending on whether the value of the Angle Sensor is greater-than or less-than a specified number.<LF>If the value of the Angle Sensor is greater than the specified number, the program will follow the top string.<LF>If the value of the Angle Sensor is less than or equal to the specified number, the program will follow the bottom string.<LF>The default is to compare the value of the Angle Sensor to 16 (one rotation).<LF><LF>Note: All forks will need a 'Merge' later in the string.<LF><LF>Note: To properly use this command you will need a Zero Angle Sensor in the string somewhere before this fork.  <LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the Angle Sensor value in sixteenths of a rotation.<LF><LF>
XXXXChoose a path depending on whether the value of the Camera Sensor is equal to or not equal to a specified number.  <LF>If the Camera Sensor is equal to the specified number, the program will follow the top string.<LF>If the Camera sensor is not equal to the specified number, the program will follow the bottom string.<LF>The default is to compare the value of the red container.<LF><LF>Note: All forks will need a 'Merge' later in the string.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier.<LF><LF>Compare to:  Compare to the camera sensor value.
XXXXChoose a path depending on whether the value of the Camera Sensor is equal to or not equal to a specified number.  If the defined sensor is equal to the specified number, the program will follow the top string.If the defined sensor is not equal to the specified number, the program will follow the bottom string.The default is to compare the value of the defined sensor to the red container.<LF><LF>Note: All forks will need a 'Merge' later in the string.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Container:  String in a container modifier.<LF><LF>Compare to:  Compare to the camera sensor value.<LF>
XXXXChoose a path depending on whether the value of the Camera Sensor is greater-than or less-than a specified number.   If the camera sensor is greater than the specified number, the program will follow the top string.  If the camera sensor is less than or equal to the specified number, the program will follow the bottom string.<LF>The default is to compare the value of the Camera Sensor to 55.<LF><LF>Note: The Camera Sensor reads a value defined in the vision center.<LF>Note: All forks will need a 'Merge' later in the string.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier that corresponds to where the camera sensor used.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the value of the camera sensor.
XXXXChoose a path depending on whether the value of the Light Sensor is greater-than or less-than a specified number. <LF>If the light sensor is greater than the specified number, the program will follow the top string.<LF>If the light sensor is less than or equal to the specified number, the program will follow the bottom string.<LF>The default is to compare the value of the Light Sensor to 55.<LF><LF>Note: The Light Sensor reads a value between 1 (dark) and 100 (bright).<LF>Note: All forks will need a 'Merge' later in the string.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the value of the light sensor.
XXXXChoose a path depending on whether the value of the Temperature Sensor is equal to or not equal to a specified number.  <LF>If the temperature is equal to the specified number, the program will follow the top string.<LF>If the light sensor is not equal to the specified number, the program will follow the bottom string.<LF>The default is to compare the value of the Temperature Sensor to 80 Fahrenheit.<LF><LF>Note: All forks will need a 'Merge' later in the string.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the temperature sensor.
XXXXChoose a path depending on whether the value of the Temperature Sensor is equal to or not equal to a specified number.  <LF>If the temperature is equal to the specified number, the program will follow the top string.<LF>If the temperature is not equal to the specified number, the program will follow the bottom string.<LF>The default is to compare the value of the Temperature Sensor to 30 Celsius.<LF><LF>Note: All forks will need a 'Merge' later in the string.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the temperature sensor.
XXXXChoose a path depending on whether the value of the Temperature Sensor is equal to or not equal to a specified number.  If the temperature is equal to the specified number, the program will follow the top string.<LF>If the temperature is not equal to the specified number, the program will follow the bottom string.<LF>The default is to compare the value of the Temperature Sensor to 30 Celsius.<LF><LF>Note: All forks will need a 'Merge' later in the string.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF>
XXXXChoose a path depending on whether the value of the Temperature Sensor is equal to or not equal to a specified number.  If the temperature is equal to the specified number, the program will follow the top string.If the light sensor is not equal to the specified number, the program will follow the bottom string.<LF>The default is to compare the value of the Temperature Sensor to 80 Fahrenheit.<LF><LF>Note: All forks will need a 'Merge' later in the string.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the temperature sensor.
XXXXChoose a path depending on whether the value of the Temperature Sensor is greater-than or less-than a specified number.  <LF>If the temperature is greater than the specified number, the program will follow the top string.<LF>If the light sensor is less than or equal to the specified number, the program will follow the bottom string.<LF>The default is to compare the value of the Temperature Sensor to 80 Fahrenheit.<LF><LF>Note: All forks will need a 'Merge' later in the string.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the temperature sensor. If the value of a container is used here, the number must be 10 times the desired threshold temperature (401 for 40.1 degrees).
XXXXChoose a path depending on whether the value of the Temperature Sensor is greater-than or less-than a specified number.  <LF>If the temperature is greater than the specified number, the program will follow the top string.<LF>If the temperature is less than or equal to the specified number, the program will follow the bottom string.<LF>The default is to compare the value of the Temperature Sensor to 30 Celsius.<LF><LF>Note: All forks will need a 'Merge' later in the string.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the temperature sensor. If the value of a container is used here, the number must be 10 times the desired threshold temperature (401 for 40.1 degrees).
XXXXChoose a path depending on whether the value of the Voltage Sensor is greater-than or less-than a specified number. <LF><LF>If the voltage is greater than the specified value, the program will follow the top string.<LF>If the voltage is less than or equal to the specified  value, the program will follow the bottom string. The default is to compare the value of the sensor to 2V.<LF><LF>Note: All forks will need a 'Merge' later in the string.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to (V):  String in the number to compare with the value of the sensor adapter.
XXXXChoose a path depending on whether the value of the humidity sensor is greater-than or less-than a specified value. <LF>If the relative humidity is greater than the specified percentage, the program will follow the top string.<LF>If the sensor adapter  is less than or equal to the specified humidity, the program will follow the bottom string.<LF>The default is to compare the value of the humidity sensor to 50%.<LF><LF>Note: All forks will need a 'Merge' later in the string.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to (%RH):  String in the number to compare with the value of the humidity sensor.
XXXXChoose a path depending on whether the value of the pH is greater-than or less-than a specified  number. <LF><LF>If the pH is greater than the specified value, the program will follow the top string.<LF>If the pH  is less than or equal to the specified  value, the program will follow the bottom string.<LF><LF>The default is to compare the value of the pH to 7.<LF><LF>Note: All forks will need a 'Merge' later in the string.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to (pH):  String in the number to compare with the value of the pH sensor.
XXXXChoose a path depending on whether the value of the position sensor is greater-than or less-than a specified value. <LF>If the position is greater than the specified percentage, the program will follow the top string.<LF>If the sensor adapter  is less than or equal to the specified position, the program will follow the bottom string.<LF>The default is to compare the value of the position sensor to 180 degrees.<LF><LF>Note: All forks will need a 'Merge' later in the string.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to (degrees):  String in the number to compare with the value of the position sensor.
XXXXChoose a path depending on whether the value of the pressure sensor is greater-than or less-than a specified value. <LF><LF>If the pressure is greater than the specified value, the program will follow the top string.<LF>If the pressure is less than or equal to the specified number, the program will follow the bottom string.<LF>The default is to compare the value of the pressure sensor to 100 kPa.<LF><LF>Note: All forks will need a 'Merge' later in the string.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to (kPa):  String in the number to compare with the value of the sensor adapter.
XXXXChoose a path depending on whether the value of the sensor adapter is greater-than or less-than a specified number. <LF><LF>If the sensor adapter voltage is greater than the specified value, the program will follow the top string.<LF>If the sensor adapter voltage is less than or equal to the <LF>specified  value, the program will follow the bottom string.<LF>The default is to compare the value of the sensor adapter to <LF>2V.<LF><LF>Note: All forks will need a 'Merge' later in the string.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to (V):  String in the number to compare with the value of the sensor adapter.
XXXXChoose a path depending on whether the value of the temperature sensor is greater-than or less-than a specified value. <LF><LF>If the temperature is greater than the specified value (in degrees Celsius), the program will follow the top string.<LF>If the sensor adapter  is less than or equal to the specified value, the program will follow the bottom string.<LF>The default is to compare the value of the temperature sensor to 30 degrees C.<LF><LF>Note: All forks will need a 'Merge' later in the string.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to (Celsius):  String in the number to compare with the value of the temperature sensor.
XXXXChoose a statistic (Min, Max, Mean, Standard Deviation) - the result is the number below
XXXXChoose between editing Programmer Vaults or Investigator Themes.
XXXXChoose between your RCX and one over the network.
XXXXChoose the Bin for the X-axis.
XXXXChoose the Bin for the Y-axis.
XXXXChoose the bin color, plot style, and statistic that you want to see.
XXXXChoose the number of plots you wish to print.
XXXXChoose the operation you want to perform on your bin.
XXXXChoose the statistic or mathematical operation you want to perform on your bin.  The function will be applied to each data set in the bin.
XXXXChoose to wait for a specific amount of time or for a random amount of time.
XXXXChoose two Bins to be plotted against each other.
XXXXChoose two different Bins and their plot style to be displayed in the graph below.
XXXXChoose what port the sensor is connected to.
XXXXChoose which port the sensor is connected to.
XXXXChoose which value you want to read from the RCX, a Container, Timer, Sensor, the Clock, or the Mail.<LF><LF>
XXXXCircle Points
XXXXCircles Data
XXXXCities and Transportation
XXXXClassical
XXXXClear All Events
XXXXClear Data Buffer
XXXXClear Data Log Memory
XXXXClear Sound Buffer
XXXXClear all of the memory allocated for data logging and free that memory up for bigger programs.
XXXXClears data logging buffer.  This frees up the space for longer programs.
XXXXClick
XXXXClick Counter (0-15)
XXXXClick Equal Fork
XXXXClick Fork
XXXXClick event
XXXXClick here for instructions on how to view the RCX set-up movie.
XXXXClick here to accept changes and exit this window.
XXXXClick here to add a new page to this section.
XXXXClick here to add a new theme after typing its name in the field above.
XXXXClick here to automatically go to this web site through your default web browser.
XXXXClick here to automatically go to this website through your default web browser.
XXXXClick here to begin an Invent and Investigate Project.
XXXXClick here to calculate a sensor value and send it to the blue container in the RCX (assuming that the RCX is in view and that vision center is talking to it).
XXXXClick here to calculate a sensor value and send it to the red container in the RCX (assuming that the RCX is in view and that vision center is talking to it).
XXXXClick here to calculate a sensor value and send it to the yellow container in the RCX (assuming that the RCX is in view and that vision center is talking to it).
XXXXClick here to cancel changes and exit this window.
XXXXClick here to cancel the operation.
XXXXClick here to cancel this command.
XXXXClick here to cancel this operation.
XXXXClick here to cancel.
XXXXClick here to change between the greater than or less than sign used for comparisons.
XXXXClick here to change the RCX IR Power Setting.<LF><LF>High sets the power for long distance communication.<LF><LF>Low sets the power for short distance communication. (This helps save batteries!)
XXXXClick here to change the path to the where you will save your programs or projects.
XXXXClick here to change the power setting for output A.
XXXXClick here to change the power setting for output C.
XXXXClick here to change the power setting of Output A.
XXXXClick here to change the power setting of Output A.  Use the sensor on Port 1 to control Output A by selecting the Port 1 indicator.
XXXXClick here to change the power setting of Output C.
XXXXClick here to change the power setting of output A.
XXXXClick here to change the power setting of output B.
XXXXClick here to change the power setting of output C.
XXXXClick here to change the sensor that is being data logged on Port 1.
XXXXClick here to change the sensor that is being data logged on Port 3.
XXXXClick here to choose an operation to transform the picture.
XXXXClick here to choose the computer COM port to which the IR transmitter cable is connected.
XXXXClick here to choose the length of time for the outputs to be on or choose to wait for the touch sensor or light sensor.
XXXXClick here to choose the length of time to wait.
XXXXClick here to choose what to wait for.  <LF>The program can wait for:<LF>     -a number of points to be collected<LF>      -an amount of time<LF>      -the touch sensor is pushed or released, <LF>     -light sensor to detect a darker or brighter value<LF>     -temperature, rotation or other adapter sensor to be greater or less than a certain value<LF>
XXXXClick here to choose what to wait for.  <LF>The program can wait for:<LF>     -a number of points to be collected<LF>     -a certain amount of time<LF>     -the touch sensor to be pushed or released<LF>     -the light sensor to detect a darker or brighter value<LF>     -the temperature, rotation or other adapter sensor to be greater or less than a certain value<LF>
XXXXClick here to choose what to wait for.  The program can wait for an amount of time, or  until the touch sensor is pushed or until the touch sensor is released.
XXXXClick here to choose what to wait for.  The program can wait for an amount of time, until the touch sensor is pushed or released or for a light sensor to read a darker or brighter value.
XXXXClick here to choose whether or not you want the sensor(s) to be collecting data during this step. 
XXXXClick here to choose which output to turn on.<LF><LF>You can turn on a motor in the forward or reverse direction or you can turn on a lamp.
XXXXClick here to choose which output to turn on.<LF><LF>You can turn on a motor in the forward or reverse direction or you can turn on a lamp.  If the stop sign is selected, the output will turn off.
XXXXClick here to close the display.  This shortens the amount of time needed to take a data point and allows programs to run faster.
XXXXClick here to create a name for your Bin.
XXXXClick here to create a new Invent and Investigate Project.
XXXXClick here to create this theme.
XXXXClick here to define a sensor for the camera to use.
XXXXClick here to delete this step.
XXXXClick here to delete this theme.
XXXXClick here to download and run this program on the RCX in direct mode.  The RCX must remain in front of the IR tower during direct mode.   You must sample slower than 1 sec per point to use this feature.
XXXXClick here to download and run this program on the RCX in direct mode.  The RCX must remain in front of the IR tower during direct mode.  You must sample slower than 1 sec per point to use this feature.
XXXXClick here to download the firmware into the RCX.
XXXXClick here to download this program into the RCX.
XXXXClick here to download this program to the RCX.
XXXXClick here to download this song to the RCX.
XXXXClick here to enable or disable autothresholding.  Autothresholding can help in situations where ambiant light is constantly changing.
XXXXClick here to end all server connections and close the window.
XXXXClick here to enter Programmer.
XXXXClick here to expand the template to the full screen size.
XXXXClick here to expand the templates to the full screen size.
XXXXClick here to finish selecting an ROI
XXXXClick here to go back to ROBOLAB.
XXXXClick here to go back to the introductory screen.
XXXXClick here to go back to the previous screen
XXXXClick here to go to the Administrator Settings.
XXXXClick here to go to the Compute Area<LF><LF>· Used to adjust the data with arithmetic functions, for calibration or<LF> scientific understanding.<LF>· Has five levels of computation available, from: simple statistics to <LF>taking derivatives and integrals. <LF>
XXXXClick here to go to the Journal Area.<LF><LF>· Used to document your project.<LF>· Used to import images to support your project.<LF>· Useful for: <LF>    problem statement, <LF>    hypothesis, <LF>    predictions (text and images), <LF>    images of any experimental set-up, including digital photographs, <LF>    discussion of results,<LF>    and conclusions.<LF>
XXXXClick here to go to the Program Area.<LF><LF>· Used to write the programs for the RCX.<LF>· Has five levels of data logging programming.<LF>· Used for downloading the programs to the RCX.<LF>
XXXXClick here to go to the RCX settings.
XXXXClick here to go to the ROBOLAB settings.
XXXXClick here to go to the Upload Area.<LF><LF>· 'Upload' means to transfer the data from the RCX to the computer.<LF>· Every set of uploaded data is stored individually within the upload area, one set of data per page.<LF>
XXXXClick here to go to the View and Compare Area.<LF><LF>· Used to View at all of the data that has been gathered.<LF>· Used to Compare data of different types.<LF>· Used to Measure statistics about the data such as maximum and minimum<LF><LF>
XXXXClick here to highlight a song to be played during your program.
XXXXClick here to insert a step after the current step.
XXXXClick here to load a Pilot 3 program.
XXXXClick here to load a Pilot 4 program.
XXXXClick here to open a file.
XXXXClick here to open a song.  Once a song is opened, it's title will be displayed here.
XXXXClick here to open an Inventor program window.
XXXXClick here to open an Inventor programming window for data analysis.
XXXXClick here to open and close the help window.
XXXXClick here to open the Music Component of the Media Bar.
XXXXClick here to open the Piano Player
XXXXClick here to open the control panel of your camera.
XXXXClick here to open the music section of the Media Bar.
XXXXClick here to open the vision section of the Media Bar.
XXXXClick here to pause the video screen.
XXXXClick here to play the selected song on the computer.
XXXXClick here to print selected pages.
XXXXClick here to print this screen.
XXXXClick here to publish your project as a presentation, web page, or print out. 
XXXXClick here to quit ROBOLAB.
XXXXClick here to remove the selected page.
XXXXClick here to return to the Program Area.
XXXXClick here to return to the introduction menu.
XXXXClick here to return to the introductory screen.
XXXXClick here to return to the investigator project.
XXXXClick here to return to the main menu.
XXXXClick here to save the video image as a file.
XXXXClick here to save this image and exit.
XXXXClick here to save this program listing as a text file.
XXXXClick here to save this program.
XXXXClick here to save this sensor and exit.
XXXXClick here to save this song and exit.
XXXXClick here to save your PILOT file in a different location other than in one of the Themes.  This is useful for advanced users who want to save their file ona  floppy disk or on the desktop, etc.
XXXXClick here to select a Compute Template<LF><LF>Level 1 - Arithmemtic Operations<LF>Level 2 - Bin 1 vs. Bin 2<LF>Level 3 - Advanced Operations (integrals, derivatives, best fit lines)<LF>Level 4 - Inventor-style Computing<LF>Level 5 - Full RCX Programming<LF><LF>
XXXXClick here to select a Compute Template<LF><LF>Level 1 - Arithmemtic Operations<LF>Level 2 - Bin 1 vs. Bin 2<LF>Level 3 - Advanced operations (integrals, derivatives, best fit lines)<LF>Level 4 - Inventor-style Computing<LF>Level 5 - Full RCX Programming<LF><LF>
XXXXClick here to select a Compute Template<LF><LF>Level 1 - Arithmetic Operations<LF>Level 2 - Bin 1 vs. Bin 2<LF>Level 3 - Advanced Operations (integrals, derivatives, best fit lines)<LF>Level 4 - Inventor-style Computing<LF>Level 5 - Full RCX Programming<LF><LF>
XXXXClick here to select a Journal Template.<LF><LF>Describe Page - Import an image of a page of your Project and label it<LF>Describe Project - Describe your Project in words<LF>Import JPEG - Import an image file and label it to help explain your Project
XXXXClick here to select a Journal Template<LF><LF>Describe and Draw - allows writing and illustrating<LF>Draw - allows only illustrating<LF>Describe - allows only writing
XXXXClick here to select a Programming Template<LF><LF>Level 1 - One Sensor<LF>Level 2 - Two Sensors and Motors<LF>Level 3 - Two Sensors with 3 Steps<LF>Level 4 - Inventor Level Programming<LF>Level 5 - Full RCX Programming <LF><LF>
XXXXClick here to select a constant to apply to the image.
XXXXClick here to select a folder where Invent and Investigate Projects reside.
XXXXClick here to select an Upload Template<LF>
XXXXClick here to select different folders of music or the ""No Song"" Option.
XXXXClick here to select the Non Lego Sensor you are using.  Your sensor will only appear of you have loaded the setup from the disk or downloaded it from the web
XXXXClick here to select the Sensor you are using with the Sensor Adapter.  
XXXXClick here to select the arithmetic operation you wish to use.
XXXXClick here to select the final operation.  This will reduce the processed image (defined below) into a single number.  Vision Center will then send that number to the RCX container.
XXXXClick here to select the level you have chosen.
XXXXClick here to select the new communications port.
XXXXClick here to select the time between captured data points.  <LF><LF>The options include preset times (1 sec, 1 min, 1 hr), any time in seconds, or the touch sensor.  If the touch sensor is selected, data will be captured each time the touch sensor is pushed in.  The touch sensor must be on input port 2 to be used as the trigger for data capturing.
XXXXClick here to select the time between captured data points.  <LF><LF>The options include preset times (1 sec, 1 min, and 1 hr), any time in seconds, or the touch sensor.  If the touch sensor is selected, data will be captured each time the touch sensor is pushed in.  The touch sensor must be on input port 2 to be used as the trigger for data capturing.
XXXXClick here to select the type of binary morphology to be applied.  For counting particles, auto-median works the best in most cases.
XXXXClick here to select the type of blob calculation.  This can change the blob count by changing which blobs are filtered.  This also affects your choice in Sensor Operation.  For instance, if you have not enabled blobs, then the sensor operation ""Maximum"" will return the maximum intensity of the image.  If you have selected Blob Area, then ""Maximum"" will give you the maximum blob area instead.
XXXXClick here to select what input port the touch sensor is on.
XXXXClick here to select what is to be arithmatically applied to the image.  Toggle between a number, new image that you can snap from the camera, or an image from a file.  
XXXXClick here to select which camera to use.
XXXXClick here to send the recorded song to a new file.  (If there is no song recorded the scroll will be erased)
XXXXClick here to send the recorded song to the blue scroll.  (If there is no song recorded the scroll will be erased)
XXXXClick here to send the recorded song to the red scroll.  (If there is no song recorded the scroll will be erased)
XXXXClick here to send the recorded song to the yellow scroll.  (If there is no song recorded the scroll will be erased)
XXXXClick here to set the amount of time the RCX will sit idle before turning off.  The range is from 0 to 255 minutes.  A time of 0 means the RCX will never turn off.
XXXXClick here to show or hide the administrator button on the introductory screen.  To show the button again, hit the function key F5 in the main ROBOLAB screen.
XXXXClick here to show the details and credits of ROBOLAB.
XXXXClick here to snap an image from your USB camera.
XXXXClick here to start a remote RCX (hitting the green RUN button)
XXXXClick here to start a slide presentation of selected pages from your Project.
XXXXClick here to switch between continuous play and single play.
XXXXClick here to test communication with the RCX.  The RCX will beep if communication was successful.
XXXXClick here to test the communication or to change which hardware you are using. (RCX, Scout, or Control Lab Interface).
XXXXClick here to toggle between No Connection with the RCX, Slow Connection, or Fast Connection.  If you are in Slow Connection mode, then your RCX can request Vision Center to save the current image to the Pictures folder in the Vision folder (in My Data). A red light appears on the Vision Center panel when it receives the ""Snap"" command from the RCX.
XXXXClick here to toggle between having a program run once or having a program run continuously.
XXXXClick here to toggle between having the program execute once or having the program run continuously.
XXXXClick here to toggle between masking the area inside or outside of the selected area.
XXXXClick here to try the operation again.
XXXXClick here to turn your Project into a set of web pages.
XXXXClick here to type in the number to compare to the value of the sensor.
XXXXClick here to upload data from the RCX.
XXXXClick here to view the Administrator Menus.
XXXXClick here to view the next page in this Presentation.
XXXXClick here to view the next step in this program.
XXXXClick here to view the previous page in the Presentation.
XXXXClick here to view the previous step in this program.
XXXXClick in this space to type infomation about your JPEG image.
XXXXClick in this space to type infomation about your project.
XXXXClick in this space to type the name of your page.  This title will appear in the navigator. 
XXXXClick in this space to type the name of your page.  This title will appear on the navigator. 
XXXXClick on a Pilot Theme to select which programs will appear in the Program window.
XXXXClick on a page title to switch to that page.  Double clicking on a page allows you to mark that page as the top page of your project.  This means that next time you open the project, it will be the first one to be shown.
XXXXClick on an Inventor Theme to select which programs will appear in the Program window.
XXXXClick on the desired Inventor Level
XXXXClicking here will allow you once more to see what the camera is seeing.
XXXXClicking on this button transposes your song down one semitone.
XXXXClicking on this button transposes your song up one semitone.
XXXXClicking on this list allows you to choose between editing Programmer and Investigator vaults.
XXXXClicks
XXXXClicks Container
XXXXClicks Counter
XXXXClicks Threshold
XXXXClipboard has an image?
XXXXClock Container
XXXXClock Equal Fork
XXXXClock Value
XXXXClock fork
XXXXClose
XXXXClose &W
XXXXClose All Windows? (N)
XXXXClose Camera
XXXXClose Display
XXXXClose Mic
XXXXClose error code
XXXXClose event
XXXXCloses a user window. This VI functions in the same way as IMAQ WindClose, which is used for closing image windows.<LF><LF>Window Number (17...22) is a number from 17 to 22 that specifies the user window. The default value is 17.<LF><LF>Close All Windows? (N) specifies if all the image windows are to be closed. The default value FALSE (No) closes only the specified window. Setting this value to TRUE closes all windows simultaneously.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXCloses the WindTools window. This VI functions in the same way as IMAQ WindClose, which is used for closing image windows. Note that this function also destroys the space reserved in memory for the WindTools window. <LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXCluster
XXXXCmd
XXXXCodabar Character set
XXXXCode
XXXXCoefficient
XXXXCoefficients
XXXXCoefficients (1D)
XXXXCoefficients (2D)
XXXXCol
XXXXCol of Max
XXXXCol of Min
XXXXColor
XXXXColor (red)
XXXXColor LUT
XXXXColor Mode
XXXXColor Palette
XXXXColor Pixel Value
XXXXColor Replace Value
XXXXColor Value
XXXXColor of ROI (white)
XXXXColor sensor ID
XXXXColor titles
XXXXColors (Red)
XXXXColumn
XXXXColumns
XXXXCom port
XXXXCombine
XXXXCombine Bins
XXXXCombine the X and Y values into a plot.  If a plot is wired to <LF>Data Set in, the new plot is appended to the old.
XXXXCombine the X and Y values into a plot.  If a plot is wired to Data Set in, the new plot is appended to the old.
XXXXCombines two plots together.
XXXXCommand listing
XXXXCommands
XXXXCommunication Error
XXXXCompare
XXXXCompare Sensors
XXXXCompare Tools
XXXXCompare to
XXXXCompare to (#)
XXXXCompare to (%)
XXXXCompare to (%RH)
XXXXCompare to (Celsius)
XXXXCompare to (Fahrenheit)
XXXXCompare to (Lux)
XXXXCompare to (Number of Points)
XXXXCompare to (V)
XXXXCompare to (Volts)
XXXXCompare to (dB)
XXXXCompare to (degrees)
XXXXCompare to (hPa)
XXXXCompare to (kPa)
XXXXCompare to (lux)
XXXXCompare to (m/s/s)
XXXXCompare to (mV)
XXXXCompare to (min)
XXXXCompare to (pH)
XXXXCompare to (tenths of seconds)
XXXXComparison
XXXXComparison Value
XXXXComplex Pixel Value
XXXXComplex Report
XXXXComplex Reports
XXXXComplex Reports Out
XXXXComplexBlob
XXXXCompute
XXXXCompute 1
XXXXCompute 2
XXXXCompute 3
XXXXCompute Area
XXXXCompute Data
XXXXCompute Tools
XXXXCompute Tools 1
XXXXCompute Tools 2
XXXXCompute Tools 3
XXXXCompute Tools 4
XXXXCompute Tools 5
XXXXComputer Error
XXXXComputes a ratio between two images. Each pixel in input Image Src A is multiplied by the integer value specified in the input Constant before being divided by the equivalent pixel found in input Image Src B. If the background is lighter than the image, this function can be used to correct the background. In a background correction image, Image Src A is the acquired image, and Image Src B is the light background. <LF>    	  <LF>Constant. Each pixel in Image Src A is multiplied by the Constant value prior to being divided by the equivalent pixel in Image Src B. The default is 255, which corresponds to the maximum value for a pixel encoded in an 8-bit image.<LF><LF>Image Src A is the reference to the source (input) image A.<LF><LF>Image Dst is the reference to the destination image. If it is connected, it must be the same type as Image Src A.<LF><LF>Image Src B is the reference to the source (input) image B.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Dst Out is the reference to the destination (output) image which receives the processing results of the VI. If the Image Dst is connected, then Image Dst Out is the same as Image Dst. Otherwise, Image Dst Out refers to the image referenced by Image Src A.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Dst(x, y) = (SrcA(x, y) × Constant) ÷ SrcB(x, y)<LF><LF>All input images must be of the same image type. <LF><LF>Division by 0 is not allowed. If this value is found in Image Src B, the equivalent pixel value from Image Src A is directly applied to Image Dst. If one of the two source images is empty, the result is a copy of the other.<LF>
XXXXComputes the FFT of an image.<LF>    	    <LF>Image Src is the handle of the source image. The image must have a resolution of 2n × 2m.<LF>	<LF>Image Dst is the handle of the complex image that contains the resulting FFT image. This input can accept only a complex image (2 × 32-bit floating point), which is an image created with IMAQ Create using type 3. The complex image is resized to the Image Src.<LF>	<LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Dst Out is the reference to the destination (output) image which receives the processing results of the VI. If the Image Dst is connected, then Image Dst Out is the same as Image Dst. Otherwise, Image Dst Out refers to the image referenced by Image Src.<LF>	<LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Note:	The FFT that is calculated is not normalized; you can use IMAQ ComplexDivide to normalize the complex image.<LF><LF>The FFT is a complex image in which high frequencies are grouped at the center, while low frequencies are located at the edges.
XXXXComputes the angles formed by sets of four points in an image or between sets of two points and a common vertex.<LF>  <LF>Use Vertex (No) specifies whether a vertex point is used while computing the angle.<LF>	<LF>Points is an array of point clusters. If the vertex point is not used, then four points at a time are considered while computing the angle, as shown in the illustration the left. If Use Vertex is TRUE, then the angle made by two consecutive points in the array and the vertex is computed.<LF><LF>Vertex specifies the vertex point to use if the Use Vertex option is TRUE.<LF>	<LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF>	<LF>Angles (deg) is an array containing the computed angles in degrees.<LF>	<LF>Angles (rad) is an array containing the computed angles in radians.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXComputes the average pixel intensity (mean line profile) on whole or part of the image.<LF>    	<LF>Image Src is the reference to the source (input) image.<LF>	<LF>Optional Rectangle defines an array (four elements) containing the coordinates (Left / Top / Right / Bottom) of the region to extract. The operation is applied to the entire image if the input is empty or not connected.<LF>	<LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>X Axis Averages is the linear average along each column in the image.<LF>	<LF>Y Axis Averages is the linear average along each row in the image.<LF>	<LF>X+Y Axis Averages is the linear average along each diagonal running from bottom-left to top-right.<LF>	<LF>X-Y Axis Averages is the linear average along each diagonal running from top-left to bottom-right.<LF>	<LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXComputes the center of the circle described by three points or more located on its circumference. It returns also the diameter of the circle in pixels, the area of the disk and its perimeter.<LF><LF>- 	Radial Points is an array of Point Coordinates clusters. This array must contain three Points Coordinates clusters (or more) corresponding to three points (or more) on the circumference of the circle.<LF>	Three points on the circumference of the circle determine a unique center. When more than three points are provided, the function computes the barycenter of the set of centers (each center given by a group of three points).<LF><LF>- 	error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>- 	Center is the coordinates of the center of the circle.<LF><LF>- 	Diameter (pixels) is the diameter of the circle.<LF><LF>- 	Area (pixels^2) is the area of the disk in square pixels.<LF><LF>- 	Perimeter (pixels) is the perimeter of the circle in pixels.<LF><LF>- 	error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXComputes the conjugate of a complex image. This VI converts the complex pixel data z = a + ib of an FFT image into z' = a - ib.<LF>  <LF>Image Src is the handle of the source image for the image that is used to measure the conjugate. This input can accept only a complex image. <LF>	<LF>Image Dst is the handle of the complex image that contains the resulting FFT image. This input can accept only a complex image.<LF>	<LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Dst Out is the reference to the destination (output) image which receives the processing results of the VI. If the Image Dst is connected, then Image Dst Out is the same as Image Dst. Otherwise, Image Dst Out refers to the image referenced by Image Src.<LF>	<LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXComputes the distance in pixels between consecutive pairs of points.<LF>  <LF>Points is an array of point-coordinate clusters. <LF>	<LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF>	<LF>Distances is an array containing the computed distances. Distance i is computed between points i and i + 1.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXComputes the energy center of the image.<LF>    	  <LF>Image is the reference to the image whose centroid has to be calculated.<LF>	<LF>Image Mask is an 8-bit image specifying the region in the image to use for calculating a centroid. Only pixels in the original image that correspond to the equivalent pixel in the mask are used for calculating the centroid (provided that the value in the mask is not 0). A centroid on the complete image occurs if the Image Mask is not connected.<LF>	<LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Centroid is a cluster containing the X and Y coordinates of the centroid of the image.<LF>	<LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXComputes the inverse FFT of a complex image (2 × 32-bit floating point).<LF>    <LF>Image Src is the handle of the source image. This input can accept only a complex image. The image must have a resolution of 2n × 2m.<LF>	<LF>Image Dst is the handle of the 8-bit, 16-bit, or 32-bit floating-point image that contains the resulting spatial image.<LF>	<LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Dst Out is the reference to the destination (output) image which receives the processing results of the VI. If the Image Dst is connected, then Image Dst Out is the same as Image Dst. Otherwise, Image Dst Out refers to the image referenced by Image Src.<LF>	<LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Note:	This VI uses a buffer equal to the size of the complex image. An 8-bit image with a resolution of 256 × 256 pixels uses 64 KB of memory. The FFT associated with this image requires eight times the memory, or 64 × 8 = 512KB. The calculation of the inverse FFT also requires a temporary buffer of 512 KB. Therefore, the total memory necessary for this operation is 1080 KB.
XXXXComputes the normalized cross correlation between the source image and the template image.<LF>    <LF>Optional Rectangle defines an array (four elements) containing the coordinates (Left / Top / Right / Bottom) of the region in the source image that is used for the correlation process. Correlation is applied to the entire image if the input is empty or not connected.<LF><LF>Image Src is a reference to the source image. The normalized cross correlation is performed between this image and the template image. This image must be an 8-bit image.<LF><LF>Image Template is a reference to a template image. This image must be an 8-bit image. For the correlation, the center of the template image is used as the origin.<LF><LF>Image Dst is the reference to the destination image. If it is connected, it must be the same type as the Image Src.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Dst Out is an 8-bit image that contains the cross-correlation values normalized to lie in the range [0, 255]. A value of 255 indicates a very high correlation and a value of 0 indicates no correlation.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Note:	Correlation is a time-intensive operation. You can reduce the time required to perform a correlation by keeping the template size small and reducing the search area in the source image by using the optional rectangle.
XXXXConcatenated String
XXXXConfigures the appearance and availability of the region tools found in the WindTools palette. By default, with no input connections, a palette is displayed containing all nine region tools. The WindTools palette is a floating palette. It is always visible.<LF><LF>Show Coordinates? (T) specifies if the active pixel coordinates are shown. Coordinates are shown (TRUE) by default. <LF><LF>Note:	Unlike an image window, the WindTools window is not visible unless activated by calling IMAQ WindToolsShow.<LF><LF>The user must have LabVIEW version 3.1 (or higher) to access the pixel-coordinate and parameter information.<LF><LF>Tools specifies which icons are displayed in the WindTools window. There are seven regions tools available: <LF><LF>Number	Icon	Tool Name	Function<LF>0	NA	No Selection	NA<LF>1		Point	Select a pixel in the image.<LF>2		Line	Draw a line in the image.<LF>3		Rectangle	Draw a rectangle (or square) in the image.<LF>4		Oval	Draw an oval (or circle) in the image.<LF>5		Polygon	Draw a polygon in the image.<LF>6		Free	Draw a freehand region in the image.<LF>7	NA	Unused 1	NA<LF>8		Zoom	Zoom-in or zoom-out in an image.<LF>9	NA	Unused 2	NA<LF>10		Broken Line	Draw a broken line in the image.<LF>11		Freehand Line	Draw a free hand line in the image.<LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Icons per line (4) determines the number of icons per line. The subsequent lines are set as a function of the number of remaining available icons. <LF><LF>Note:	The WindTools palette automatically displays cursor information if the input Icons per Line is set to 3 (or higher) for the Macintosh version and 4 (or higher) for the Windows version.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXConfigures the appearance of a thumbnail that is selected on the browser. A selected image will be framed using the Focus Color.<LF><LF>- Image Browser In is the RGB image used by the browser.<LF><LF>- Focus Color  is the color used to draw the frame around a selected thumbnail image.<LF><LF>- error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this Vi executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>- Image Browser Out is the resulting browser image<LF><LF>- error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF>
XXXXConfigures the browser. This VI sets all the required parameters that determine the aspect and the thumbnail organization on the browser.<LF><LF>A browser is created and configured using the IMAQ Browser Setup. These two steps, creation and configuration, are mandatory because all the functions of this library act on browsers and not on standard images.<LF><LF>-	Image In  is the RGB image used by the browser. This image forms  the base of the the browser. All thumbnails that are placed in the browser are actually pasted on to this image.<LF><LF>-	Browser Info is the cluster configuring the initial aspect of the browser. The parameters are :<LF>   - Browser Size (X,Y)  is the browser screen size.<LF>   - Images per Line is the number of thumbnail images per line on the browser.<LF>   - Background Color is the color filling the background of the browser.<LF>   - Frame Size  is the width of the frame that contains each thumbnail.<LF>   - Frame Style  see below.<LF><LF>  The available frame styles are ( for a width of 5 pixels) :<LF>	Raised	 	Hidden	 <LF>	Bevelled	 	Step	 <LF>	Outline	 	Raised Outline	 <LF><LF><LF>-	Image Ratio is the width on height ratio of the thumbnail images of the browser. This value is 3/2 for PAL images and 4/3 for NTSC images.<LF><LF>- error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>- Image Browser Out  is the configured browser image.<LF><LF>- Images per Line is the number of thumbnail images per line on the browser.<LF><LF>- Images per Column is the number of thumbnail images per column on the browser.<LF><LF>- error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXConfigures the look and attributes of an image window<LF><LF>Window Number (0...22) selects the window to configure. The default is 0.<LF><LF>Window can grow? (Yes) enables or disables the user resize window box. Default is TRUE, which indicates user-resizable windows.<LF><LF>Window can close? (Yes) shows or does not show the close box of the window. The default is TRUE, which shows the close box.<LF><LF>Window has title bar? (Yes) shows or does not show the title bar. The default is TRUE, which shows the title bar.<LF><LF>Window is floating? (No) produces either a normal or a floating window. The default is FALSE, which produces a floating window.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXConfigures the shape of a brush used in ROI tracing in conjunction with freehand tools. A brush is a mask that indicates the neighborhood of pixels that are colored when painting. Normally you use a brush in which the only pixel involved in drawing is the one under the cursor. However, with this VI you can define any shape.<LF><LF>Note:	Do not use this VI in zoom mode.<LF><LF>Color LUT is an array of clusters with the following fields: Pixvalue, R, G, and B. This array of clusters changes the value of a pixel in the image, making a multicolored brush possible. The new pixel value is given by Pixvalue. On the display window, the appearance of this pixel changes to the color specified by R, G, and B.<LF><LF>This array of clusters has 256 entries. Each entry defines the following fields.<LF><LF>Pixvalue. This field indicates the new pixel value. Pixels affected include those in the last image connected to the window specified by the parameter Brush Window. When touched by the brush, each pixel that has a value equal to the array entry is changed. For example, if entry 7 of the Color LUT array parameter specifies a Pixvalue of 127, every pixel with a value of 7 that the brush touches is changed to 127.<LF><LF>R, G, and B. These three parameters specify the color on the display window of the pixels that have a value equal to Pixvalue. For example, if entry 7 of the Color LUT array parameter specifies (R = 255, G = 0, B = 0), every pixel with value 7 that the brush touches is painted red.<LF><LF>Get/Set? (Set) specifies that input parameters are set when the value is TRUE (Set). If the value is FALSE (Get), input parameters are ignored. Output parameters are always effective.<LF><LF>Brush shape in. This Boolean 2D array specifies the shape of the brush. TRUE values (in conjunction with brush width) define the pixels that are affected in your drawing. If your shape is described in a 3 × 3 grid, use a pen size of 3 for viewing a complete portion of the shape. If all values are FALSE, the brush shape is not changed.<LF><LF>Brush element size in specifies parameters that define the dimension of the brush element.<LF><LF>Brush Parameters in is a cluster consisting of the following parameters:<LF><LF>Brush Window is the number of the window in which the brush is active.<LF><LF>Density is a parameter with a value between 1 and 100 that defines the probability (D/100) that a pixel will be written. Use this parameter to generate spray effects.<LF><LF>Left 1 pix? (No) is a Boolean that specifies whether a separation pixel is used between brush elements.<LF><LF>Synchronous. If this parameter is TRUE, the drawing of the brush is denied until the previous ROI is recovered using IMAQ WindGetROI. Use this parameter to synchronize brush drawing with ROI recovering.<LF><LF>Brush active? (False) activates or deactivates the special brush feature.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Brush shape out indicates the current shape of the brush.<LF><LF>Brush element size out indicates the X and Y dimensions of the brush.<LF><LF>Brush Parameters out indicates the current settings of the brush parameters Brush Window, Density, Left 1 pix? (No), and Synchronous.<LF><LF>Brush active out indicates whether the brush is active.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXConnection Speed
XXXXConnectivity
XXXXConnectivity 4/8 (8)
XXXXConstant
XXXXConstant (-32768-32767)
XXXXConstructs a convolution matrix by converting a string. This string can represent either integers or floating-point values. <LF>  <LF>Kernel String is a string listing the coefficients forming the matrix.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Kernel is the resulting matrix converted from the input string. This output can be connected directly to the input Kernel in IMAQ Convolute. <LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>The column separator can be either a comma, a semi-colon, or a blank space. The line separator is a hard return. For example, the string 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 produces a 3 × 3 matrix with all coefficients set to 1.
XXXXContainer
XXXXContainer #
XXXXContainer Equal Fork
XXXXContainer Modifier<LF><LF>String this to a container command to select <LF>the Blue Container.
XXXXContainer Modifier<LF><LF>String this to a container command to select <LF>the Yellow Container.
XXXXContainer Modifier<LF><LF>String this to a container command to select the <LF>Red Container.
XXXXContainer Modifier<LF><LF>String this to a container command to select the Blue Container.
XXXXContainer Modifier<LF><LF>String this to a container command to select the Red Container.
XXXXContainer Modifier<LF><LF>String this to a container command to select the Yellow Container.
XXXXContainer Threshold
XXXXContainer Value
XXXXContainer fork
XXXXContainer's Container
XXXXContainer's Container Modifier<LF><LF>String this to a container command to select a <LF>generic container.  You can string in a number <LF>anywhere from 0 to 20 to select any of the 21 <LF>available conatainer variables.<LF><LF>0 corresponds to the Red Container<LF>1 corresponds to the Yellow Container<LF>2 corresponds to the Blue Container<LF>3 to 20 correspond to generic user defined <LF>container variables.
XXXXContains the Formula string for the Formula Container.   Precedence is given for multiplication and division only.  The formula can contain:<LF>+...addition<LF>-...subtraction<LF>*...multiplication<LF>/...division<LF>&...bitwise and<LF>|...bitwise or<LF><LF> and<LF><LF>c...container [0-20]  (e.g. c0 is the red container)<LF>m...mail value<LF>r...random number with max value [1-32767]  (e.g. r5 is a # from 1 to 5)<LF>s...sensor value [1-3]  (e.g. s1 is sensor 1)<LF>t...timer [1..3]   (e.g. t1 is the red timer)<LF>w...clock value<LF><LF>For example:  s1/10 + 3*m would be one tenth of the value of sensor 1 plus three times the mail value.  Remember that all math is carried out on integers so it is an integer divide.<LF>
XXXXContents and Index &?
XXXXContinue
XXXXContours
XXXXContrast
XXXXControl a motor or lamp connected to Port A.
XXXXControl a motor or lamp connected to Port B.
XXXXControl a motor or lamp connected to Port C.
XXXXControl btns
XXXXControl buttons
XXXXControls
XXXXControls global sound settings (allows a 'mute' functionality)<LF>and selects which scheme is currently used for system sounds.<LF><LF>Legal range for 'sound_enable':       0 (disregard 'sound_onoff' and select <LF>                                                       'soundset_number' for the system <LF>                                                        sounds),  <LF>                                                      1 (disregard 'soundset_number' and <LF>                                                         use 'sound_onoff' to globally control<LF>                                                         all sounds).<LF><LF>Legal range for 'sound_onoff':         0 (mute all sounds) and <LF>                                                      1 (allow sounds to pass through).<LF><LF>Legal range for 'soundset_number': 0 (NoSoundset), 1 (Basic), 2 (Bug),<LF>                                                      3 (Alarm), 4 (Random), 5 (Science).
XXXXControls global sound settings (allows a 'mute' functionality)<LF>and selects which scheme is currently used for system sounds.<LF><LF>Legal range for 'sound_enable':       0 (disregard 'sound_onoff' and select <LF>                                                       'soundset_number' for the system <LF>                                                        sounds),  <LF>                                                      1 (disregard 'soundset_number' and <LF>                                                         use 'sound_onoff' to globally control<LF>                                                         all sounds).<LF><LF>Legal range for 'sound_onoff':         0 (mute all sounds) and <LF>                                                      1 (allow sounds to pass through).<LF><LF>Legal range for 'soundset_number': 0 (NoSoundset), 1 (Basic), 2 (Bug),<LF>                                                      3 (Alarm), 4 (Random), 5 (Science).<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Sound_enable:  String in a modifier.<LF>Sound_onoff:  String in a modifier.<LF>Soundset_number:  String in a modifier.
XXXXConvert to array
XXXXConvert to image
XXXXConvert to picture
XXXXConvert to picture - autoscale
XXXXConverts a 16-bit image to an 8-bit image. The VI executes this conversion by shifting the 16-bit pixel values right by the specified number (from 1 to 8) of shift operations and then truncating to get an 8-bit value.<LF><LF>Shift Value specifies the number of right shifts (between 1 and 8) by which each pixel value in the input image is shifted.<LF><LF>Image Src is the reference to the 16-bit image.<LF><LF>Image Dst is the reference to the 8-bit output image.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Dst Out is the reference to the destination (output) image which receives the processing results of the VI. If the Image Dst is connected, then Image Dst Out is the same as Image Dst. Otherwise, Image Dst Out refers to the image referenced by Image Src.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXConverts an HSL or HSV color value into an RGB color value.<LF><LF>Color Mode defines the image color format conversion to perform. The default is 0, which specifies no change.<LF><LF>0	RGB	(Default) no change<LF>1	HSL	Convert from HSL<LF>2	HSV	Convert from HSV<LF>Red (or Hue) value is the input value for the first color plane (depending on the Color Mode chosen). <LF><LF>Green (or Sat) value is the input value for the second color plane (depending on the Color Mode chosen). <LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Blue (or Light or Val) value is the input value for the third color plane (depending on the Color Mode chosen). <LF><LF>Red value is the output red value. <LF><LF>Green value is the output green value. <LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Blue value is the output blue value. 
XXXXConverts an RGB color value into another format (HSL or HSV).<LF><LF>Color Mode defines the image color format conversion to perform. The default is 0, which specifies no change.<LF><LF>0	RGB	(Default) no change<LF>1	HSL	Convert to HSL<LF>2	HSV	Convert to HSV<LF>Red value is the input red value. <LF><LF>Green value is the input green value. <LF><LF>Blue value is the input blue value. <LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Red (or Hue) value is the output value for the first color plane (depending on the Color Mode chosen). <LF><LF>Green (or Sat) value is the output value for the second color plane (depending on the Color Mode chosen). <LF><LF>Blue (or Light or Val) value is the output value for the third color plane (depending on the Color Mode chosen). <LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXConverts an image by using a lookup table which is encoded in floating-point values. <LF><LF>    <LF>Lookup Table is an array consisting of 256 elements maximum if Image Src has an 8-bit or a maximum of 65536 elements if the Image Src has a 16-bit image. This array is filled with values equal to the index if it has less elements than the amount demanded by the image type in Image Src. The lookup table can be used to calculate a polynomial giving a relation between a gray-level value and an user value. VIs capable of analyzing floating-point type images can be used to directly quantify an image, or regions from an image, in user values after converting the image into a floating-point type images.<LF><LF>Image Src is the image to be converted. It must be an 8-bit or 16-bit image.<LF><LF>Image Dst is the image that receives the conversion. The image type for Image Dst can take the following values:<LF><LF>·	16-bit if Image Src has an 8-bit image<LF><LF>·	32-bit floating point if Image Src has an 8-bit or 16-bit image <LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Dst Out is the reference to the destination (output) image which receives the processing results of the VI. If the Image Dst is connected, then Image Dst Out is the same as Image Dst. Otherwise, Image Dst Out refers to the image referenced by Image Src.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXConverts clusters composed of three colors in mode (R, G, B), (H, S, L), or (H, S, V) into colors encoded in the form of an unsigned 32-bit integer control. The elements of these clusters can contain single values, 1D arrays, 2D arrays, or a combination of the above.<LF><LF>Color Mode defines the image color format to use for the output. The default is 0, which specifies that the input and output values are the same.<LF><LF>0	RGB	(Default) no change<LF>1	HSL	Convert to HSL<LF>2	HSV	Convert to HSV<LF>Color Value is a cluster containing a color in (R, G, B), (H, S, L), or (H, S, V) (depending on the Color Mode).<LF><LF>Red (Hue) Value is the first color plane value (depending on the Color Mode).<LF><LF>Green (Sat) Value is the second color plane value (depending on the Color Mode).<LF><LF>Blue (Light,Val) Value is the third color plane value (depending on the Color Mode).<LF><LF>1D Color value array is a 1D array of clusters containing the color values. The values are in (R, G, B), (H, S, L), or (H, S, V) depending on the status of the set Color Mode. These clusters are the same type as Color Value.<LF><LF>2D Color value array is a 2D array of clusters containing the color values. The values are in (R, G, B), (H, S, L), or (H, S, V) depending on the status of the set Color Mode. These clusters are the same type as Color Value.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>U32 value receives the color value resulting from the input Color Value and it is encoded as an unsigned 32-bit integer control.<LF><LF>1D U32 array receives the color value resulting from the input 1D Color Value Array and it is encoded as a 1D array of unsigned 32-bit integer controls.<LF><LF>2D U32 array receives the color value resulting from the input 2D Color Value Array and it is encoded as a 2D array of unsigned 32-bit integer controls.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXConverts colors in the form of an unsigned 32-bit integer control into a cluster composed of the three colors in mode (R, G, B), (H, S, L), or (H, S, V). These colors can be entered as a single value, a 1D array, a 2D array, or a combination of the above.<LF><LF>Color Mode defines the image color format to use for the output. The default is 0, which specifies that the input and output values are the same.<LF><LF>0	RGB	(Default) no change<LF>1	HSL	Convert to HSL<LF>2	HSV	Convert to HSV<LF>U32 value a color value encoded as an unsigned 32-bit integer control.<LF><LF>1D U32 array a set of color values encoded as a 1D array of unsigned 32-bit integer controls.<LF><LF>2D U32 array a set of color values encoded as a 2D array of unsigned 32-bit integer controls.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Color Value is a cluster containing the color value resulting from the input U32 Value. This cluster can contain the values (R, G, B), (H, S, L), or (H, S, V), depending on the status of the set Color Mode. The cluster is composed of the following elements.<LF><LF>Red (or Hue) Value is the first color plane value (depending on the Color Mode).<LF><LF>Green (or Sat) Value is the second color plane value (depending on the Color Mode).<LF><LF>Blue (or Light or Val) Value is the third color plane value (depending on the Color Mode).<LF><LF>1D Color value array is a 1D array containing the color value resulting from the input 1D U32 Array. This array can contain the values (R, G, B), (H, S, L), or (H, S, V), depending on the status of the set Color Mode. <LF><LF>2D Color value array is a 2D array containing the color value resulting from the input 2D U32 Array. This array can contain the values (R, G, B), (H, S, L), or (H, S, V), depending on the status of the set Color Mode. <LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXConverts the current image type of an image to the image type specified by Image Type. <LF>        	<LF>Image is both the image to be converted (input) and the image that receives the conversion (output). With this VI, only the image type of the image changes. The conversion rules are the same as described in IMAQ Convert.<LF><LF>Image Type determines into what image type the input Image is converted. The following values are valid:<LF><LF>  0		8 bits per pixel (unsigned, standard monochrome)<LF>  1		16 bits per pixel (signed)<LF>  2		32 bits (floating point) per pixel<LF>  3	unused	<LF>  4		32 bits per pixel (RGB chunky, standard color)<LF>  5	unused	<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Out is the reference to the input image with the new image type.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>The conversion rules are the same as the rules for IMAQ Convert.
XXXXConverts the image type specified by Image Src into the image type specified by Image Dst.<LF>        	<LF>Image Src is the reference to the source (input) image.<LF><LF>Image Dst is the reference to the destination image.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Dst Out is the reference to the destination (output) image which receives the processing results of the VI. If the Image Dst is connected, then Image Dst Out is the same as Image Dst. Otherwise, Image Dst Out refers to the image referenced by Image Src.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>The conversion rules are performed as a function of the image type specified by Image Src and Image Dst. The image type encoded by Image Dst defines the how the conversion is performed. The conversion rules are described in the following table.<LF><LF>   	Pixel values are recopied (0 to 255).<LF>   	Pixel values are copied into each of the three color planes    (red, green, and blue).<LF>  	Pixel values less than 0 are set to 0. <LF>   Pixel values between 0 and 255 are recopied.<LF>   Pixel values greater than 255 are set to 255.<LF>  	Pixel values are recopied (–32768 to 32767).<LF>  	Pixel values are copied into each of the three color planes (red,    <LF>  green, and blue) with the same conversion rule as 16-bit to 8-bit.<LF>  Pixel values less than 0 are set to 0.<LF>  Pixel values between 0 and 255 are recopied. <LF>  Pixel values greater than 255 are forced to 255.<LF>	 Pixel values less than –32768 are set to –32768.<LF>  Pixel values between –32768 and 32767 are recopied.<LF>  Pixel values greater than 32767 are set to 32767.<LF>     	Same conversion rule as 16-bit to RGB.
XXXXConverts the pixel values of an image by replacing them with values from a defined lookup table. This VI modifies the dynamic range of either part of an image or the complete image, depending on the type of curve chosen. <LF>    	  <LF>Note:	This VI is fundamental for many image processing procedures. You can use this VI with 8-bit and 16-bit images to create your own lookup table. You can then apply your new curve with the VI IMAQ UserLookup.<LF><LF>Range is a cluster containing the minimum and maximum values for the range to modify. The dynamic range of the entire image is modified if this cluster is not connected (or the defaults 0 and 0 are used as input). The dynamic range of the destination image is dependent on the type of input image. The dynamic range for an 8-bit image is between 0 and 255. The dynamic range for 16-bit and 32-bit floating-point images is the smallest and largest pixel value contained in the original image prior to processing. The default is (0, 0). <LF><LF>Note:	The dynamic range for 16-bit and 32-bit floating-point images is not modified. Only the distribution of the values is changed. <LF><LF>The following elements are specified in the Range cluster.<LF><LF> Minimum is the smallest value used for processing. After     <LF> processing, all pixel values that are less than or equal to the  <LF> Minimum (in the original image) are set to 0 for an 8-bit image. In  <LF> 16-bit and 32-bit floating-point images, these pixel values are set to  <LF> the smallest pixel value found in the original image.<LF>	<LF> Maximum is the largest value used for processing. After  <LF> processing, all pixel values that are greater than or equal to the <LF> Maximum (in the original image) are set to 255 for an 8-bit image. In   <LF> 16-bit and 32-bit floating-point images, these pixel values are set to <LF> the largest pixel value found in the original image.<LF><LF>X Value is a value used only for the operators Power X and Power 1/X.<LF><LF>Image Src is the reference to the source (input) image.<LF><LF>Image Mask is an 8-bit image that specifies the region in the image to modify. Only pixels in the original image that correspond to the equivalent pixel in the mask are replaced by the values in the lookup table (provided that the value in the mask is not 0). All pixels not corresponding to this criteria keep their original value. The complete image is modified if Image Mask is not connected. <LF><LF>Image Dst is the reference to the destination image. If it is connected, it must be the same type as the Image Src.<LF><LF>Operator specifies the remapping procedure used. The horizontal axis represents the pixel values before processing (between<LF><LF>Minimum and Maximum) and the vertical axis represents the pixel values (between Dynamic Minimum and Dynamic Maximum) after processing. The default is 0, which specifies linear remapping.<LF><LF>   0	Linear 	Linear remapping.<LF>   1	Log	A logarithmic remapping operation that gives extended   <LF>     contrast for small pixel values and less contrast for large pixel    <LF>     values.<LF>   2	Exp	An exponential remapping operation that gives extended <LF>      contrast for large pixel values and less contrast for small pixel    <LF>     values.<LF>   3	Square	Similar to Exponential but with a more gradual effect.<LF>   4	Square Root 	Similar to Logarithmic but with a more gradual <LF>     effect. <LF>   5	Power X 	Gives variable effects depending on the value of X.   <LF>     The default value of X is 1.5.<LF>  6	Power 1/X 	Gives variable effects depending on the value of X.      <LF>     The default value of X is 1.5.<LF><LF>Note:	For an 8-bit image, the minimum is always 0 and the maximum is always 255. For 32-bit floating-point images, the minimum and maximum are the endpoint values found in the image prior to processing. <LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Dst Out is the reference to the destination (output) image which receives the processing results of the VI. If the Image Dst is connected, then Image Dst Out is the same as Image Dst. Otherwise, Image Dst Out refers to the image referenced by Image Src.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXCoordinate  Origin
XXXXCoordinate Angle (deg)
XXXXCoordinate Points
XXXXCoordinate Reference
XXXXCoordinate of the current pixel on the X-axis.
XXXXCoordinate of the current pixel on the Y-axis.
XXXXCoordinates
XXXXCoordinates (screen)
XXXXCoordinates out of space?
XXXXCopies a C character string to a G programming language string. In LabVIEW 4.0 and BridgeVIEW 1.0, the Call Library function does not directly support entry points returning a character pointer (char*). This VI allows the use of a char* pointer to get the associated string.<LF><LF>char* is the C character string pointer. The end of the character string is marked with a 0 (\00) value. The following table gives the pointer type for different platforms.<LF><LF>Platform	Pointer Type<LF>   IMAQ Vision for LabVIEW 4 for Windows 3.1	16-bit FAR<LF>   Other platforms	32-bit flat (universal type)<LF>The copied string size is limited to 65536 bytes.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF>	<LF>G programming language string is a G programming language string containing all characters before \00 (end of string mark in C).<LF>	error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXCopies a memory zone in a G programming language string. In LabVIEW 4.0 and BridgeVIEW 1.0, the Call Library function does not directly manipulate a C structure; this VI provides this function.<LF><LF>void* is the pointer on the memory zone to be copied. The following table gives the pointer type for different platforms.<LF><LF>Platform	Pointer Type<LF>    IMAQ Vision for LabVIEW 4 for Windows 3.1	16-bit FAR<LF>    Other platforms	32-bit flat (universal type)<LF>The size of the memory zone is not limited.<LF><LF>Bytes count is the number of bytes to be copied in the G programming language string.<LF>	<LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF>	<LF>Data string is the G programming language string containing the bytes of the specified memory zone.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXCopies a small image into part of another larger image. This VI is useful for making thumbnail sketches from multiple miniature images. <LF>      	<LF>Offset Left/Top is an array specifying the Image Dst pixel coordinates that receive the image copied from Image Src.<LF><LF>Image Src is the reference to the source (input) image.<LF><LF>Image Dst is the reference to the destination image. If it is connected, it must be the same type as the Image Src.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Dst Out is the reference to the destination (output) image which receives the processing results of the VI. If the Image Dst is connected, the Image Dst Out is the same as Image Dst. Otherwise, Image Dst Out refers to the image referenced by Image Src.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXCopies the clipboard data into an image.<LF>  	<LF>Image is the reference to the source (input) image.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Out contains a copy of the clipboard if the clipboard is an image. <LF>	<LF>Color Palette is the color palette that is stored in the clipboard. A gray ramp is returned if no color palette is found in the clipboard.<LF><LF>Clipboard has an image? returns a TRUE value if the clipboard contains an image.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXCopies the image to the clipboard.<LF>  	<LF>Image is the reference to the source (input) image.<LF><LF>Color Palette can be affected to an 8-bit image. It can be directly taken from the output of IMAQ GetPalette or the user can specify their own. It is formed from an array of clusters composed of 256 elements for each of the three color planes. A specific color is the result of affecting a value between 0 and 255 for each of the three color planes (red, green, and blue). If the three planes have the identical value, then a gray level is obtained. (0 specifies black and 255 specifies white). By default the palette is a gray-scale ramp. <LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXCopies the specifications and pixels of one image into another image of the same type. This function is used for keeping an original copy of an image (for example, before processing an image).<LF>        	<LF>Image Src is the reference to the source (input) image.<LF><LF>Image Dst is the reference to the destination image. If it is connected, it must be the same type as the Image Src.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Dst Out is the reference to the destination (output) image which receives the processing results of the VI. If the Image Dst is connected, the Image Dst Out is the same as Image Dst. Otherwise, Image Dst Out refers to the image referenced by Image Src.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Note :	The images to be copied must be the same type. The full definition of the source image as well as the pixel data are copied to the destination image. The border size of the destination image also is modified be equal to that of the source image.
XXXXCopyright 1997 by Tufts University
XXXXCopyright 1998 Tufts University
XXXXCopyright 1998 by Tufts University
XXXXCore Area
XXXXCorrelation
XXXXCorrelations
XXXXCount
XXXXCounter (0,1,2)
XXXXCounter 0 on limit
XXXXCounter 1 on limit
XXXXCover
XXXXCreate IMAQ
XXXXCreate Subroutine
XXXXCreate Theme
XXXXCreate a Program for taking data with the RCX.
XXXXCreate a new Theme:<FONT color=FFFF00> 
XXXXCreate a new subroutine with this command. <LF>Run the subroutine elsewhere in the program with the Run Subroutine command.  The subroutine will not run at this point in the program.<LF><LF>The main program follows the top string.<LF>The subroutine consists of the bottom string.<LF>The default subroutine is subroutine 0.<LF><LF>Note: Each subroutine that splits off will need its own separate End command (Red Traffic Light).<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Subroutine Number: String in a number to define your subroutine.  You can have up to 8 different subroutines.<LF>
XXXXCreates a color image from a 2D array. This VI receives the values as a 2D array of unsigned 32-bit integer controls. A 2D array of clusters coding the three color values as either (R, G, B), (H, S, L), or (H, S, V) can be converted into a 2D array of pixels (unsigned 32-bit integer controls) using the VI IMAQ ColorValueToInteger.<LF><LF>Image must be an RGB-chunky image.<LF><LF>Image Pixels contains the pixel values as a 2D array of unsigned 32-bit integer controls.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Out is the reference to the destination (output) image.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXCreates a complex image, starting from a complex 2D array ([CSG]).<LF>  <LF>Image is the reference to the complex image to be created.<LF>	<LF>Image Pixels (Complex) is the complex 2D array (Line, Column) containing all the pixel values that form the image. The first index corresponds to the vertical axis and the second to the horizontal index. The final size of the image is equal to the size of the array. The image passed in the input Image is forced to the same size as the complex 2D array encoded by Input Pixels.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF>	<LF>Image Out is the reference to the destination (output) image.<LF>	<LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXCreates an image from a 2D array. <LF>    	<LF>Note:	For this VI, you have a choice of inputs, depending on how the data is encoded (see the following descriptions). <LF><LF>Image is the reference to the source (input) image.<LF><LF>Image Pixels (U8) is a 2D array  (Line, Column) containing all the pixel values that form the image. The first index corresponds to the vertical axis and the second to the horizontal index. The final  size of the image is  equal to the size of the array. The image passed in the input image is forced to the same size as the array encoded by <LF>Input Pixels. This input should only be used to create an 8-bit image.<LF><LF>Image Pixels (I16) is a 2D array of 16-bit integers. This input must be used if the image connected is a 16-bit image. This input should only be used to create a 16-bit signed image.<LF><LF>Image Pixels (Float) is a 2D array of floating-point values. This input must be used if the image connected is a 32-bit floating-point image. This input only should be used to create single plane images that are not encoded as 8-bit, 16-bit signed, or complex.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Out is the reference to the destination (output) image.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>See the additional VIs in the Complex VIs section for performing array-to-image transformations with complex images.
XXXXCreates an image mask by extracting a region surrounding a reference pixel, called the origin, and using a tolerance (+ or –) of intensity variations based on this reference pixel. Using this origin, the VI searches for its neighbors with an intensity equal to, or falling within the tolerance value, of the point of reference. The resulting image is binary. The image passed as input for Image Dst must be an 8-bit image. If the same image is entered for Image Src and <LF>Image Dst then both must be 8-bit images.<LF>    	<LF>Connectivity 4/8 (8) determines the type of connectivity to be used by the algorithm creating the mask. The default is 8.<LF>	<LF>Fill Value is the value that is used for the lit pixels in the destination image. The default is 1.<LF><LF>Image Src is the image reference source. It must be an 8-bit or RGB image.<LF><LF>Image Dst is the reference of the image destination. It must be and <LF>8-bit image.<LF><LF>Hot spot (x,y) is an array counting the (x, y) coordinates of the origin pixel chosen from the image source. <LF><LF>Tolerance is the maximum authorized deviation from the origin. All pixels satisfying the tolerance criteria (origin pixel – tolerance / origin pixel + tolerance) and connectivity criteria, as specified in Connectivity 4/8 (8), are lit and all other pixels are turned off. The default is 20.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Dst Out is the reference to the destination (output) image which receives the processing results of the VI. If the Image Dst is connected, the Image Dst Out is the same as Image Dst. Otherwise, Image Dst Out refers to the image referenced by Image Src.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXCreates an image.<LF><LF>Border Size: determines the width in pixels of the border created around an image. These pixels are used only for specific VIs. You should create a border at the beginning of your application if an image is to be processed later using functions that require a border (for example, labeling and morphology). The default value, 0, creates no border. To optimize transfer time, especially for real-time acquisition, use a border that is an even number of pixels wide. <LF><LF>Image Name: is a name that is associated with the created image. Each image created must have a unique name.<LF><LF>	Image Type: specifies the image type. This input can accept the following values:<LF><LF>  0		8 bits per pixel (unsigned, standard monochrome)<LF>  1		16 bits per pixel (signed)<LF>  2		32 bits (floating point) per pixel<LF>  3		2 × 32 bits (floating point) per pixel (native format after an FFT)<LF>  4		32 bits per pixel (RGB chunky, standard color)<LF><LF>error in (no error): is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>	New Image: is the Image structure that is supplied as input to all subsequent (downstream) functions used by IMAQ Vision. Multiple images can be created in a LabVIEW or BridgeVIEW application. Activating the IMAQ ImageStatus VI shows you all created images and the space they occupy in memory during the execution of your application. <LF><LF>error out: is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXCtrl
XXXXCurrect Source
XXXXCurrent
XXXXCurrent LogIT
XXXXCurrent Note
XXXXCurrent Page
XXXXCurrent Path
XXXXCurrent Template
XXXXCurrent Theme
XXXXCurrent page
XXXXCursor 0
XXXXCursor 1
XXXXCursor 2
XXXXCurve Fit
XXXXCurve fit order
XXXXCurves fit to Data Sets
XXXXCutoff Acceleration (m/s/s)
XXXXCutoff Accelertation (m/s/s)
XXXXCutoff Angle (degrees)
XXXXCutoff Brightness (%)
XXXXCutoff Clicks
XXXXCutoff Humidity (%RH)
XXXXCutoff Lux (Lux)
XXXXCutoff Position (degrees)
XXXXCutoff Pressure (hPa)
XXXXCutoff Pressure (kPa)
XXXXCutoff Rotation (sixteenths)
XXXXCutoff Sound Level (dB)
XXXXCutoff Temperature (C)
XXXXCutoff Temperature (F)
XXXXCutoff Voltage (V)
XXXXCutoff Voltage (mV)
XXXXCutoff pH
XXXXCutoff value
XXXXD#
XXXXDCP Humidity
XXXXDCP Light
XXXXDCP SPL
XXXXDCP Temperature
XXXXDEL
XXXXDIsplay
XXXXDOWNLOAD FIRMWARE
XXXXDamping
XXXXDark
XXXXDash
XXXXDashDot
XXXXDashDotDot
XXXXData
XXXXData Array
XXXXData Logging Interval
XXXXData Points Equal Fork
XXXXData Points Fork
XXXXData Rate
XXXXData Set
XXXXData Set  Number
XXXXData Set 1
XXXXData Set 2
XXXXData Set In
XXXXData Set Modifier<LF><LF>String this to a Log command to select the <LF>Blue Data Set.
XXXXData Set Modifier<LF><LF>String this to a Log command to select the <LF>Red Data Set.
XXXXData Set Modifier<LF><LF>String this to a Log command to select the <LF>Yellow Data Set.
XXXXData Set Modifier<LF><LF>String this to a Log command to select the Blue Data Set.
XXXXData Set Modifier<LF><LF>String this to a Log command to select the Red Data Set.
XXXXData Set Modifier<LF><LF>String this to a Log command to select the Yellow Data Set.
XXXXData Set Value
XXXXData Set values between cutoffs
XXXXData Sets
XXXXData Sets Compared
XXXXData Sets Extracted
XXXXData Sets In
XXXXData Sets Out
XXXXData string
XXXXDataPrint
XXXXDatabase
XXXXDate Modified
XXXXDebug Mode
XXXXDecimal point
XXXXDedicated to Oma, Dan, and Anne - CBR, MDP and JPO
XXXXDef Sensor
XXXXDefault Path
XXXXDefaults
XXXXDefine Event
XXXXDefine Sensor
XXXXDefine how many seconds you want to wait (resolution is 10 msec).
XXXXDefine sensor
XXXXDefines a pen with user specified features. The user pen affects each region tracked with the freehand tools. No other ROI selection tools work with user pen.<LF><LF>Paint mode indicates the mode of painting in zoom mode. Paint mode has three possible values: don't change, Paint, or Frame.<LF><LF>Note:	This mode is useful only in positive zoom mode greater than 3: in this mode the ROI is tracked using pen size 1 and ignoring the pen width value.<LF><LF>Pen transfer mode describes the mode in which the foreground and the background of the pen affect the image. Pen transfer mode has four possible values:<LF><LF>don't change	(Default)<LF>srcCopy	Overwrites the background and foreground with specified colors.<LF>srcOr	Overwrites only the foreground.<LF>srxXor	Inverts the pixels below the foreground pixels. The new value equals 255 minus the old value; this operation occurs for each plane of an RGB image.<LF>srcBic	Forces the background color on foreground pixels.<LF>Pen style specifies the pen style. Pen style has six possible values: Don't change (default), Solid, Dash, Dot, DashDot, and DashDotDot.<LF><LF>Foreground Color specifies the color of the foreground pixels. Use a LabVIEW or BridgeVIEW color box for color specification.<LF><LF>Background Color specifies the color of the background pixels. Use a LabVIEW or BridgeVIEW color box for color specification.<LF><LF>Pen pattern (8x8). This Boolean 2D array describes the pattern associated with the user pen. TRUE value is associated to foreground, while FALSE is associated to background. The pattern is always an 8 × 8 matrix. The default is FALSE, which specifies that the current pattern is not changed.<LF><LF>User pen active? (no) enables the pen when set to TRUE. The default value is FALSE, which specifies the use of the standard pen.<LF><LF>Pen width specifies the pen width. The default value is 0, which specifies no change.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Note:	In zoom mode greater than 3, the values of Paint mode and Pen style are ignored.
XXXXDefines the position of an image mask in relation to the origin of the coordinate system (0, 0). <LF>  <LF>Image is the reference to the source (input) image.<LF><LF>X Offset specifies the horizontal offset of the image mask.<LF><LF>Y Offset specifies the vertical offset of the image mask.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Out is the reference to the destination (output) image.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXDefines the sensor and the type of data acquired by the sensor connected to Port 1.
XXXXDefines the sensor and the type of data acquired by the sensor connected to Port 2.
XXXXDefines the sensor and the type of data acquired by the sensor connected to Port 3.
XXXXDefines the settings for Enter (low, normal, and high) events<LF><LF>If an event doesn't use a specification than it is ignored (example: Enter Low Event only uses the lower threshold so all others are ignored).<LF><LF><LF>Modifiers<LF><LF>Hysteresis: A non-zero hysteresis means that the trigger value for increasing sensor values is different from the trigger value if the sensor value is decreasing.<LF><LF>Upper Threshold: String in the value to be used for upper threshold<LF>(Enter Normal and Enter High Events)<LF> <LF>Lower Threshold: String in the value to be used for lower threshold<LF>(Enter Normal and Enter Low Events)<LF><LF>Event: String in the event you are defining settings for:  red, yellow, blue<LF><LF>Duration: The minimum time event must happen to count as an event (time in seconds).<LF><LF><LF><LF><LF><LF><LF><LF><LF><LF><LF><LF><LF>
XXXXDefines the settings for Enter (low, normal, and high)<LF>events<LF><LF>If an event doesn't use a specification than it is ignored<LF>(example: Enter Low Event only uses the lower threshold<LF>so all others are ignored).<LF><LF><LF>Modifiers<LF><LF>Hysteresis: A non-zero hysteresis means that the trigger value for<LF>increasing sensor values is different from the trigger value if thesensor value is decreasing.<LF><LF>Upper Threshold: String in the value to be used for upper threshold(Enter Normal and Enter High Events)<LF> <LF>Lower Threshold: String in the value to be used for lower threshold<LF>(Enter Normal and Enter Low Events)<LF><LF>Event: String in the event you are defining settings for:  red, yellow, blue<LF><LF>Duration: The minimum time event must happen to count as an event (time in seconds).<LF><LF><LF><LF><LF><LF><LF><LF><LF><LF><LF><LF><LF><LF><LF><LF><LF>
XXXXDefines the total duration of the note
XXXXDefines the type of sensor used.
XXXXDelete
XXXXDelete Page
XXXXDelete Subroutine
XXXXDelete Task(s)
XXXXDelete Theme
XXXXDelete all Tasks
XXXXDelete any Subroutine that has been created.<LF><LF>The default subroutine is to delete subroutine 0.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Subroutine Number: String in a number (0-7) to pick which subroutine to delete.<LF>
XXXXDeletes all tasks in current program level.
XXXXDeletes one or all tasks in a program.<LF><LF>The default is to delete all tasks in a program.<LF><LF>Note: Separate tasks are generated by multi-tasking forks or by adding data logging to a program. <LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Task Number: String in the number of the task you wish to delete.  
XXXXDensity
XXXXDepending on the value of <<B>>Connectivity<</B>>, this VI can be used to fill holes and smooth right angles along the edges of particles.
XXXXDepending on the value of <<B>>Connectivity<</B>>, this VI can be used to remove single pixels isolated in the background and right angles along the edges of particles.
XXXXDepending on the value of Connectivity, this <LF>VI can be used to fill holes and smooth right angles <LF>along the edges of particles.
XXXXDepending on the value of Connectivity, this <LF>VI can be used to remove single pixels isolated in the <LF>background and right angles along the edges of <LF>particles.
XXXXDescribe
XXXXDescribe Page
XXXXDescribe Project
XXXXDescription
XXXXDescription 1
XXXXDestroys an image and the frees of the space it occupied in memory. <LF><LF>Image: is the name of the image to be destroyed.<LF><LF>	All Images ? (No): determines whether the user wants to destroy a single image or all previously created images. Giving a TRUE value on input destroys all images previously created. The default is FALSE. This function must be used at the end of an application to free the memory occupied by the images.<LF><LF>	error in (no error): is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>error out: is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Note:	When a LabVIEW or BridgeVIEW application is aborted the image space remains occupied. 
XXXXDetects and measures particles. This VI returns a set of measurements made from particles in a binary image. <LF>  <LF>Image is the input source image used for calculating the matrices. The image must be binary. A particle is considered to consist of pixels that do not contain a null (0) value. The source image must have been created with a border size of at least 2. <LF>	<LF>Connectivity 4/8 (8) specifies the type of connectivity used by the algorithm for particle detection. The connectivity mode directly determines whether an adjacent pixel belongs to the same particle or a different particle. The default is 8. The following values are possible.<LF><LF>  TRUE	Connectivity 8	(Default) Particle detection is performed in    <LF>  connectivity mode 8.<LF>  FALSE	Connectivity 4	Particle detection is performed in   <LF>  connectivity mode 4.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF>	<LF>Complex Reports is an array that returns a set of measurements from the detected particles. This cluster contains the following elements:<LF><LF>  Area (pixels) indicates the surface area of a particle in number of <LF>  pixels. <LF>	<LF>   Area (calibrated) indicates the surface area of a particle in   <LF>   user-defined units. <LF><LF>  	Perimeter is the perimeter size in user units. <LF>	<LF>  Number of Holes is the number of holes in the particle. <LF><LF>  	Hole's Area (pixels) is the total surface area of all the holes in a   <LF>  particle (in pixels). <LF><LF>	  Hole's Perimeter is the total perimeter size calculated from all the <LF>   holes in a particle (in user units).<LF><LF>  Global Rectangle is a cluster that contains the coordinates of a  <LF>  bounding rectangle for the ROI in the image. This cluster includes <LF>  the following parameters:<LF><LF>       x1Left indicates the x coordinate of the top-left corner of the <LF>      rectangle.<LF>	<LF>       y1Top indicates the y coordinate of the top-left corner of the <LF>       rectangle.<LF><LF>      	x2Right indicates the x coordinate of the bottom-right corner of <LF>       the rectangle.<LF>        <LF>       	y2Bottom indicates the y coordinate of the bottom-right corner <LF>        of the rectangle.<LF><LF>  Sum x is the sum of the X-axis for each pixel of the particle. <LF>	<LF> Sum y is the sum of the Y-axis for each pixel of the particle. <LF><LF>	 Sum xx is the sum of the X-axis squared for each pixel of the   <LF>  particle.<LF><LF> 	Sum yy is the sum of the Y-axis squared for each pixel of the<LF>   particle.<LF><LF>  	Sum xy is the sum of the X-axis and Y-axis for each pixel of the <LF>   particle.<LF>	<LF>  Longest Segment Length is the longest segment length of the <LF>   particle.<LF><LF>    Longest Segment Coordinates are the coordinates of the left <LF>    most pixel in the Longest Segment Length of the particle. The <LF>    topmost segment coordinates are used in a case in which more <LF>    than one   <LF> <LF>   Longest Segment Length exist. This cluster contains the following   <LF>   parameters:<LF><LF>           x is the x-axis (coordinate) of the pixel the furthest left in the <LF>            Longest Segment Length in the particle.<LF><LF>            	y is the y-axis (coordinate) of the pixel the furthest left in the <LF>             Longest Segment Length in the particle.<LF><LF>     Projection x is half the sum of the horizontal segments in a    <LF>     particle that do not overlap another adjacent horizontal   <LF>     segment. <LF><LF>     	Projection y is half the sum of the vertical segments in a particle <LF>      that do not overlap another adjacent vertical segment.<LF><LF>Number of Particles returns the number of detected particles. <LF>	<LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXDetects and measures particles. This VI returns the area and position of particles in a binary image. <LF>  <LF>Image is the input source image used for calculating the matrices. The image must be binary. A particle is considered to consist of pixels that do not contain a null (0) value. The source image must have been created with a border size of at least 2.<LF>	<LF>Connectivity 4/8 (8) specifies the type of connectivity used by the algorithm for particle detection. The connectivity mode directly determines whether an adjacent pixel belongs to the same particle or a different particle. The default is 8. The following values are possible:<LF><LF>  TRUE	Connectivity 8	(Default) Particle detection is performed in <LF>  connectivity mode 8.<LF>  <LF>  FALSE	Connectivity 4	Particle detection is performed in   <LF>  connectivity mode 4.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF>	<LF>Basic Reports is an array that returns a set of measurements from the detected particles. This cluster contains the following elements:<LF><LF>Area (pixels) indicates the surface area of a particle in number of pixels. <LF>	<LF>Area (calibrated) indicates the surface area of a particle in user-defined units. <LF>	<LF>Global Rectangle is a cluster that contains the coordinates of a bounding rectangle for the ROI in the image. This cluster includes the following parameters:<LF><LF>   	x1Left indicates the x coordinate of the top-left corner of the   <LF>    rectangle.<LF>	   y1Top indicates the y coordinate of the top-left corner of the  <LF>    rectangle.<LF>	  x2Right indicates the x coordinate of the bottom-right corner of   <LF>   the rectangle.<LF>	  y2Bottom indicates the y coordinate of the bottom-right corner of   <LF>   the rectangle.<LF><LF>Number of Particles returns the number of pixels detected in a particle.<LF>	<LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXDetects the rotational shift between two images. This process is generally applied between a Reference Image (with the inspected part at a known orientation) and another image, corresponding to the unknown position of the part. The process extract the pixel values around a circular region of the Reference Image. These values are compared to the same region on the Image 2. The algorithm looks for the rotational shift between those two samples. In order to speed up the process, the requested precision of the result can be adjusted. <LF><LF>- 	Reference Image is the reference of the image to be processed. This image represents the inspected part in a known position.<LF><LF>- 	Image 2 is the reference of the image to be processed. This image represents the inspected part in the searched position.<LF><LF>-  Reference Center are the Point Coordinates of the center of a circular region on the reference image. The pixel values of this region on the reference images are used to detect the rotation angle between the two images.<LF><LF>- 	Image 2 Center are the Point Coordinates of the center of a circular region in Image 2. The pixel values of this region in image 2 are used to detect the rotation angle between the two images.<LF><LF>- 	Radius of the circular region in the image. The pixel values of this region on the two images are used to detect the rotation angle between the two images.<LF><LF>- 	Precision (Default = 5) is the sampling period (in degrees) of the pixel values of the circular region. The aim of this control is to speed up the process. A precision better than 5 degrees is not often needed to position the regions of inspection of a part.<LF><LF>- 	error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF>	<LF><LF>- 	Angle (rad) returns the angle (in radian) corresponding to the shift giving the best match between the two samples.<LF><LF>- 	Angle (deg) returns the angle (in degrees) corresponding to the shift giving the best match between the two samples.<LF><LF>- 	error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXDetermines the maximum value in a Data Set and <LF>displays a line at the corresponding value on the graph.
XXXXDetermines the minimum value in a Data Set and <LF>displays a line at corresponding value on the graph.
XXXXDevice
XXXXDiagonal
XXXXDiagram
XXXXDialog box
XXXXDiameter (pixels)
XXXXDifferentiate
XXXXDifferentiated Data Sets
XXXXDilation
XXXXDirect
XXXXDirect Commands
XXXXDirect Mode
XXXXDirection
XXXXDirection (NW)
XXXXDisplay
XXXXDisplays an image in an image window. The image window appears automatically when the VI is executed. Note that by default the image window does not have scroll bars. Scroll bars can be added by using the IMAQ WindSizeVI.<LF>        	<LF>Window Number (0...15) specifies the image window in which the image is displayed. As many as 16 windows can be displayed simultaneously. Each window is specified with an indicator ranging from 0 to 15. Only the specified image window is affected, and all other image windows remain the same. The default value is 0. <LF><LF>Image specifies the image reference for the displayed image. <LF><LF>Note:	16-bit and floating-point images can be displayed by using an 8-bit image buffer (Tmp). This 8-bit image buffer, used only to display the image, is calculated as a function of the dynamic range from the image source. The minimum value (min) and the maximum value (max) are calculated automatically. Then the following formula is applied to each pixel:<LF><LF>Tmp(x, y) = (Src(x – y)–Min) × 255/(Max – Min).<LF><LF>Title is an image window name. If a string is attached to this input then the image window automatically takes that name. The default name for the image window is Image #<<Window Number>>.<LF>	<LF>Color Palette is used to apply a color palette to an image window. Color Palette is an array of clusters constructed by the user or supplied by IMAQ GetPalette. This palette is composed of 256 elements for each of the three color planes. A specific color is the result of applying a value between 0 and 255 for each of the three color planes (red, green, and blue). If the three planes have the identical value, then a gray level is obtained. (0 specifies black and 255 specifies white).<LF><LF>Note: A color palette is not used for a true color image (RGB).<LF><LF>You should use a screen capable of displaying thousands (15/16-bit) or 16 million colors (24-bit). Currently, LabVIEW and BridgeVIEW do not display a full palette of 256 colors (or gray scales) unless your monitor has a display capability of 16 million colors. A true color image does not use a display palette and therefore displays in true color if your monitor is in a 24-bit display mode.<LF><LF>(Macintosh only) You can change the palette tolerance in a Macintosh or Power Macintosh. You can display a full palette of 256 colors (or gray scales) even with an 8-bit display mode. In this case it is necessary to pass by the IMAQ PaletteTolerance VI and change from Tolerant mode to Exact mode.<LF><LF>Resize to Image Size? (Y) specifies whether the user wants to resize the image window automatically to fit the image size. The default is set to TRUE (Yes), in which case the user does not have to know the size of a source image prior to displaying it. <LF><LF>Note:	You must use the IMAQ WindSize function to place scroll bars in an image window.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF>	<LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXDisplays an image using an isometric view. Each pixel from the image source is represented as a column of pixels in the 3D view. The pixel value corresponds to the altitude.<LF>  	<LF>3D Options is a cluster containing the elements alpha, beta, border, background, and plane.<LF><LF>alpha defines the angle between the horizontal and the base line (see figure). The value can be between 0° and 45°. The default value is 30°.<LF>	<LF>beta defines the angle between, the horizontal and the second baseline. The value can be between 0° and 45°. The default value is 30°.<LF>	<LF>border defines the border size in the 3D view. The default value is 20.<LF>	<LF>background defines the background color for the 3D view. The default is 85.<LF><LF>plane specifies the view to display if the image is complex. There are four possible planes that can be visualized from a complex image. For complex images, the default is the magnitude.<LF><LF>  0	real<LF>  1	imaginary<LF>  2	(Default) magnitude<LF>  3	phase<LF><LF>Direction (NW) defines the viewing orientation shown for the 3D view. Four viewing angles are possible. The default is North-West.<LF><LF>  0	(Default) North-West<LF>  1	South-West<LF>  2	South-East<LF>  3	North-East<LF><LF>Image Src is the reference to the source (input) image.<LF>	<LF>Image Dst must be an 8-bit image.<LF>	<LF>Size reduction is a factor applied to the source image to calculate the final dimensions of the 3D view image. This factor is a divisor that is applied to the source image when determining the final height and width of the 3D view image. A factor of 1 uses all of the pixels of the source image when determining the 3D view image. A factor of 2 uses every other line and every other column of the pixels of the source image to determine the 3D view image. The default is 2.<LF><LF>Maximum height defines the maximum height of a pixel from the image source that is drawn in 3D. This value is mapped from a maximum of 255 (from the source image) in relation to the baseline in the 3D view. A value of 255, therefore, gives a one-to-one correspondence between the intensity value in the source image and the display in 3D view. The default value of 64 results in a reduction of 4-fold between the original intensity value of the pixel in the source image and the final displayed 3D image.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF>	<LF>Image Dst Out is the reference to the destination (output) image which receives the processing results of the VI. If the Image Dst is connected, then Image Dst Out is the same as Image Dst. Otherwise, Image Dst Out refers to the image referenced by Image Src.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXDisplays the value the sensor reads.
XXXXDisplays the value the sensor reads. 
XXXXDisplays uploaded data as a table.
XXXXDispose IMAQ
XXXXDistance  
XXXXDistances
XXXXDivide
XXXXDivide Container
XXXXDivide the container by a number.  <LF>The default is to divide the Red Container value by 2.<LF><LF>Note: Numbers are rounded down to the nearest integer.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier that corresponds to the <LF>container you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Number to divide:  String a number to which the container will be <LF>divided.
XXXXDivide the container by a number. (This is an integer divide)<LF>The default is to divide the Red Container value by 2.<LF><LF>Note:  Numbers are rounded down to the nearest integer.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier that corresponds to the container you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Number to divide:  String a number to which the container will be divided.
XXXXDivider
XXXXDivider (kernel sum)
XXXXDivides one image by another or an image by a constant.<LF>    	  <LF>Constant. The input Image Src A is divided by the Constant value for image-constant operations. The default is 1.<LF><LF>Image Src A is the reference to the source (input) image A.<LF><LF>Image Dst is the reference to the destination image.<LF><LF>Image Src B is the reference to the source (input) image B.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Dst Out is the reference to the destination (output) image which receives the processing results of the VI. If the Image Dst is connected, then Image Dst Out is the same as Image Dst. Otherwise, Image Dst Out refers to the image referenced by Image Src A.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXDivides one image by another where the first is a complex image, or divides a complex image by a complex constant. <LF>  <LF>Constant. The input Image Src A is divided by this complex constant for image-constant operations. The default is 0.<LF><LF>Note:	Division by 0 is not allowed. If the constant is 0, it automatically is replaced by 1. If one of the two source images is empty, the result is a copy of the other.<LF><LF>Image Src A is the handle of the first source image and must be a complex image.<LF>	<LF>Image Dst is the handle of the complex image that contains the resulting FFT image. This input can accept only a complex image.<LF>	<LF>Image Src B s the handle of the second source image. This input can accept an 8-bit, 16-bit, 32-bit floating-point, or complex image.<LF>	<LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Dst Out is the reference to the destination (output) image which receives the processing results of the VI. If the Image Dst is connected, then Image Dst Out is the same as Image Dst. Otherwise, Image Dst Out refers to the image referenced by Image Src A.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>An operation between an image and a constant occurs when the input Image Src B is not connected. The two possibilities are distinguished in the following equations. <LF><LF>Dst(x, y) = SrcA(x, y) ¸ SrcB(x, y), or<LF>Dst(x, y) = SrcA(x, y) ¸ Constant.
XXXXDo you want to save changes to your project?
XXXXDon't Read Raw File 
XXXXDon't Save
XXXXDon't Use TIFF Options
XXXXDone
XXXXDone/Running
XXXXDone?
XXXXDot
XXXXDouble Click here to open an Invent and Investigate Project.
XXXXDouble click
XXXXDouble click on a page name to select or deselect it.  Deselected pages will not be published.  <LF><LF>To change the order of the pages click on the page name.  While holding the mouse button down drag the page to the desired location.
XXXXDouble-Click on a Pilot Level to open a default PILOT program.<LF><LF>Click on Pilot Vault to view all Pilot 3 and Pilot 4 programs in the Program window for a particular theme.<LF><LF>Single-Click on Pilot 3 or Pilot 4 to view the themes in the Themes window that correspond to that Pilot Level.
XXXXDouble-Click on an Inventor Level to program the RCX with that Inventor Level.<LF><LF>Click on Inventor Vault to view all Inventor programs in the Program window for a particular theme.<LF><LF>Single-Click on an Inventor Level to view the programs in the Program window that correspond to that Inventor Level and Theme.
XXXXDouble-Click on the name of a program to launch that program with Inventor.<LF><LF>To delete a program, highlight it and hit the F10 key.
XXXXDouble-Click on the name of a program to launch that program with Pilot.<LF><LF>To delete a program, highlight it and hit the F10 key.
XXXXDown 2
XXXXDown an Octave
XXXXDownload Firmware
XXXXDownload Remote Program
XXXXDownload s sequence of commands as a program to remote RCX(S)<LF><LF>Commands located between this command and  Start Direct RCX Communication will be downloaded to the remote RCX(s) as a program.
XXXXDownload s sequence of commands as a<LF> program to remote RCX(S)<LF><LF>Commands located between this command and <LF>Start Direct RCX Communication will be downloaded<LF>to the remote RCX(s) as a program.<LF>
XXXXDownloads
XXXXDraw
XXXXDraw Flattened Pixmap
XXXXDraw Mode
XXXXDraw event
XXXXDraws geometric objects in an image.<LF>    	<LF>Draw Mode defines how to draw the object and has the following choices: <LF><LF>   0	Frame	(Default) Specifies the use of Pixel Color in tracing the   <LF>     contour.<LF>   1	Paint	Specifies the use of Pixel Color in tracing the contour and <LF>     the interior of the shape.<LF>   2	Invert Frame	Specifies the use of the inverse of the pixel values        <LF>     when drawing the contour.<LF>  3	Invert Paint	Specifies the use of the inverse of the pixel values      <LF>     when drawing the contour and the interior of the shape.<LF><LF>Pixel Color is the pixel value used for tracing the design. This value is not used when in the mode Invert Frame or Invert Paint. The default is 0.<LF><LF>Image Src is the reference to the source (input) image.<LF><LF>Image Dst is the reference to the destination image. If it is connected, it must be the same type as the Image Src.<LF><LF>Coordinates is an array of four elements. A line is specified by the two points forming it. Rectangles and ovals are specified by their bounding rectangle, possessing the format (Left / Top / Right / Bottom). In these cases, the tracing of a rectangle or oval stops at the column (Right - 1) and at the row (Bottom - 1). The values by default are (0, 0, SizeX, SizeY) where (SizeX, SizeY) is the resolution of the image. The default is used if the input is 0 or is not connected. <LF><LF>Shape to draw is the form to draw. The following shapes are available: <LF><LF>   0	Line	(Default) Defined by the two points specified in the array <LF>     Coordinates.<LF>   1	Rectangle	Defined by the bounding rectangle specified in the <LF>     array Coordinates.<LF>  2	Oval	Defined by the bounding rectangle specified in the array    <LF>     Coordinates.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Dst Out is the reference to the destination (output) image which receives the processing results of the VI. If the Image Dst is connected, the Image Dst Out is the same as Image Dst. Otherwise, Image Dst Out refers to the image referenced by Image Src.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXDraws the contours of a ROI descriptor in a LabVIEW picture.<LF>Note: This function needs the Picture Control toolkit in order to be executable.<LF><LF>-  	Picture in is the picture to which you want to add the contours of the ROI descriptor. It defaults to an empty picture if you do not wire it.<LF><LF>- 	ROI Descriptor in is the ROI Descriptor of IMAQä Vision for G.<LF><LF>- 	Point Symbol is an optional control. This 2D array of boolean represents the shape used to symbolize a point ROI. The default value is a cross of size 7 x 7 pixels.<LF><LF>- 	Color (red) is an array of  numerical values coding the color of each contour of the ROI descriptor. If you want the contours to be drawn in the same color, enter only one color element. By default, the first color element is set to red color so that all the contours will be drawn in red.<LF><LF>- 	error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>- 	New Picture is the returned LabVIEW picture.<LF><LF>- 	error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXDuplicate
XXXXDuration
XXXXDuration 
XXXXDuration (-32768 -  32767)
XXXXDuration (0-15)
XXXXDuration (sec)
XXXXDuration Value
XXXXDwnld
XXXXERROR
XXXXEdge Coordinates
XXXXEdge Information
XXXXEdge Parameters
XXXXEdge1 Contrast
XXXXEdge1 Position
XXXXEdge2 Contrast
XXXXEdge2 Position
XXXXEdges Coordinates
XXXXEdit Blue
XXXXEdit Red
XXXXEdit Yellow
XXXXEighth note
XXXXEliminates or keeps particles resistant to a specified number of 3 × 3 erosions. The particles that are kept are exactly the same as those found in the original source image. The source image must be an 8-bit binary image. This function requires the creation of a temporary memory space that is twice the size of the source image. <LF>  <LF>Connectivity 4/ 8 (8) specifies how the algorithm determines whether an adjacent pixel is the same or different particle. The default is 8.<LF><LF>Square/Hexa (Square) specifies whether the pixel frame is treated as square or hexagonal during the transformation. The default is square.<LF><LF>Image Src is the reference to the source (input) image.<LF><LF>Image Dst is the reference to the destination image. If it is connected, it must be the same type as the Image Src.<LF><LF>Number of Erosion specifies the number of 3 × 3 erosions to apply to the image. The default is 2.<LF><LF>Low Pass/High Pass (Low) specifies whether the objects resistant to n erosions are discarded or kept (default).<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Dst Out is the reference to the destination (output) image which receives the processing results of the VI. If the Image Dst is connected, then Image Dst Out is the same as Image Dst. Otherwise, Image Dst Out refers to the image referenced by Image Src.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXEliminates particles that touch the border of an image. The source image must be an 8-bit binary. This operation requires the creation of a temporary memory space that is equal to the size of the source image.<LF>  <LF>Connectivity 4/ 8 (8) specifies how the algorithm determines whether an adjacent pixel is the same or different particle. The default is 8.<LF><LF>Image Src is the reference to the source (input) image.<LF><LF>Image Dst is the reference to the destination image. If it is connected, it must be the same type as the Image Src.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Dst Out is the reference to the destination (output) image which receives the processing results of the VI. If the Image Dst is connected, then Image Dst Out is the same as Image Dst. Otherwise, Image Dst Out refers to the image referenced by Image Src.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXEmpty
XXXXEmpty Container
XXXXEmpty Mailbox
XXXXEmpty the mailbox and wait until mail received from another RCX is equal to a given number.<LF>The default is to wait for any non-zero number to be received.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Wait until mail equals:  String in a number <LF>to wait for.
XXXXEmpty the mailbox and wait until mail received from another RCX is equal to a given number.<LF>The default is to wait for any non-zero number to be received.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Wait until mail equals:  String in a number to wait for.
XXXXEnabled?
XXXXEncodes a pixel value of a particle as a function of the location of that pixel in relation to the distance to the border of the particle. The source image must have been created with a border size of at least 1 and must be an 8-bit binary image. This function requires the creation of a temporary memory space that is twice the size of the source image.<LF>  <LF>Square/Hexa (Square) specifies whether the pixel frame is treated as square or hexagonal during the transformation. The default is square.<LF><LF>Image Src is the reference to the source (input) image.<LF><LF>Image Dst is the reference to the destination image. If it is connected, it must be the same type as the Image Src.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Dst Out is the reference to the destination (output) image which receives the processing results of the VI. If the Image Dst is connected, then Image Dst Out is the same as Image Dst. Otherwise, Image Dst Out refers to the image referenced by Image Src.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXEnd
XXXXEnd (# of Rotations is << or = )
XXXXEnd (# of Rotations is =)
XXXXEnd (# of Rotations is >>)
XXXXEnd (# of Rotations is not = )
XXXXEnd (# touch and releases are =)
XXXXEnd (# touch and releases are not =)
XXXXEnd (% Relative Humidity is << or = )
XXXXEnd (% Relative Humidity is >> )
XXXXEnd (Clicks is << or =)
XXXXEnd (Clicks is >>)
XXXXEnd (Clock is << or = )
XXXXEnd (Clock is =)
XXXXEnd (Clock is >>)
XXXXEnd (Clock is not = )
XXXXEnd (Container is << or = )
XXXXEnd (Container is =)
XXXXEnd (Container is =) 
XXXXEnd (Container is >>)
XXXXEnd (Container is not = )
XXXXEnd (Count is << or =)
XXXXEnd (Count is >>)
XXXXEnd (FALSE)
XXXXEnd (Light is << or = )
XXXXEnd (Light is = )
XXXXEnd (Light is >>)
XXXXEnd (Light is not = )
XXXXEnd (Lux is << or = )
XXXXEnd (Lux is >> )
XXXXEnd (Mail is << or = )
XXXXEnd (Mail is =)
XXXXEnd (Mail is >>)
XXXXEnd (Mail is not =)
XXXXEnd (Number of Clicks is =)
XXXXEnd (Number of Clicks is not =)
XXXXEnd (Number of Points is = )
XXXXEnd (Number of Points is not = ) 
XXXXEnd (Points is << or = ) 
XXXXEnd (Points is >> )
XXXXEnd (Pressure is << or = )
XXXXEnd (Pressure is >> )
XXXXEnd (TRUE)
XXXXEnd (Temp << or =)
XXXXEnd (Temp >>)
XXXXEnd (Temp is = )
XXXXEnd (Temp is =)
XXXXEnd (Temp is not = )
XXXXEnd (Temp is not =)
XXXXEnd (Temperature (Celsius) is >> )
XXXXEnd (Temperature (Celsius)is << or = )
XXXXEnd (Value of Timer is << or = ) 
XXXXEnd (Value of Timer is = )
XXXXEnd (Value of Timer is >> )
XXXXEnd (Value of Timer is not = )
XXXXEnd (Volts is << or = )
XXXXEnd (Volts is >> )
XXXXEnd (container is not =)
XXXXEnd (dB is >> )
XXXXEnd (degrees are << or = )
XXXXEnd (degrees are >> )
XXXXEnd (hPa is << or = )
XXXXEnd (hPa is >> )
XXXXEnd (m/s/s is << or = )
XXXXEnd (m/s/s is >> )
XXXXEnd (mV is << or = )
XXXXEnd (mV is >> )
XXXXEnd (pH is << or = )
XXXXEnd (pH is >> )
XXXXEnd (pushed in)
XXXXEnd (released)
XXXXEnd 1
XXXXEnd 2
XXXXEnd Direct Mode
XXXXEnd Direct RCX Communcation
XXXXEnd Internet Direct Mode
XXXXEnd Task or Sub
XXXXEnd an Inventor program being downloaded over the internet.<LF><LF>This is required as the last command in every Internet Inventor program and will send the program to an RCX that is on a remote computer.<LF><LF>If the program has multiple tasks, you will need the End command at the end of each task.   Make sure the RCX is near the IR Transmitter on the remote computer to communicate directly with it.  Further, the remote computer must be running the program ROBOLAB Internet Server in your Projects menu.<LF><LF>
XXXXEnd an Inventor program.<LF><LF>This is required as the last command in every <LF>Inventor program.<LF><LF>If the program has multiple tasks, you will need <LF>the End command at the end of each task.
XXXXEnd an Inventor program.<LF><LF>This is required as the last command in every Inventor program and will send the program to an RCX that is on a remote computer.<LF><LF>If the program has multiple tasks, you will need the End command at the end of each task.  Make sure the RCX is near the IR Transmitter on the remote computer to communicate directly with it.  Further, the remote computer must be running the program ROBOLAB Internet Server in your Projects menu.
XXXXEnd an Inventor program.<LF><LF>This is required as the last command in every Inventor program.<LF><LF>If the program has multiple tasks, you will need the End command at the end of each task.
XXXXEnd of Loop
XXXXEnd of a direct Internet mode program.<LF><LF>This completes the Internet direct mode calls. It must be on the end of every direct Internet mode string.
XXXXEnds direct communication sequence with remote RCX(s)<LF><LF>Commands between this icon and the Start Remote RCX Communication will be sent to the RCX as direct commands.
XXXXEnter IP number of remote site.
XXXXEnter a name for your PILOT program:
XXXXEnter a name for your saved Pilot program.
XXXXEnter a number to use in the mathematical operation on your Bin.
XXXXEnter high
XXXXEnter low
XXXXEnter normal
XXXXEnter the IP address of the remote destination (leave blank if local machine)
XXXXEnter the name of the theme you want to create.
XXXXEnters looping forever playing a sequence of beeps at a rate proportional<LF>to the light level.<LF>In the loop (kLightOffset-LightValue) will be added to the integrator<LF>followed by a 10ms Wait. <LF>If the integrator exceeds lvIntgLimit a tone of kGeigerL2F *<LF> (kToneOffset - LightValue) Hz is played for 10ms and the integrator is reset.<LF><LF>The local variable IntgLimit and LocalVar4-8 are preserved by the sub.<LF><LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>IntgLimit:  String a single modifier.
XXXXEnters looping forever playing a sequence of<LF>beeps at a rate proportional to the light level.<LF>In the loop (kLightOffset-LightValue) will be<LF>added to the integrator followed by a 10ms Wait.<LF>If the integrator exceeds lvIntgLimit a tone of<LF>kGeigerL2F * (kToneOffset - LightValue) Hz is<LF>played for 10ms and the integrator is reset.<LF><LF>The local variable IntgLimit and LocalVar4-8 <LF>are preserved by the sub.
XXXXEqual to? or Random time?
XXXXEqualizes a color image. This VI equalizes either the lightness plane (default) or all three planes (red, green, and blue).<LF><LF>Light / R,G,B (Light) specifies whether the operation is performed on the lightness plane or on all three planes (red, green, blue). An equalization on the lightness plane conserves the hue and saturation from the color image. An equalization of the three planes (red, green, blue), gives a stronger contrast but changes the hue and saturation of the color image. The default is FALSE.<LF><LF>Image Src (RGB) is the reference to the source image. It must be an RGB-chunky image.<LF><LF>Image Dst (RGB) is the reference to the destination image. If connected, it must be an RGB-chunky image.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Dst Out (RGB) is the reference to the output RGB image that is obtained after equalization of the source image.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXEquation String
XXXXEquations
XXXXErases the active region of interest associated with an image window. <LF><LF>Window Number (0…15) is a number from 0 to 15 that specifies the image window. The default value is 0. <LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Note:	You can erase an ROI in an image window by pressing <<Backspace>> when the current image window is active.
XXXXErosion
XXXXError
XXXXError Code
XXXXError Descriptions
XXXXError IO
XXXXError IO 2
XXXXError Processing
XXXXError code
XXXXError codes will be displayed in this box.  Refer to the images above to find out what is wrong with your hardware setup.
XXXXError?
XXXXErrors
XXXXEvent
XXXXEvent #
XXXXEvent Fork
XXXXEvent Landing
XXXXEvent Modifier<LF><LF>String this to an Event Definition or Monitor command to select the <LF>Blue Event.
XXXXEvent Modifier<LF><LF>String this to an Event Definition or Monitor command to select the <LF>Generic Event.
XXXXEvent Modifier<LF><LF>String this to an Event Definition or Monitor command to select the <LF>Red Event.
XXXXEvent Modifier<LF><LF>String this to an Event Definition or Monitor command to select the <LF>Yellow Event.
XXXXEvent Modifier<LF><LF>String this to an Event Definition or Monitor command to select the Blue Event.
XXXXEvent Modifier<LF><LF>String this to an Event Definition or Monitor to select the Red Timer.
XXXXEvent Register Container
XXXXEvent Source
XXXXEvent State (0-15)
XXXXEvent State Container
XXXXEvent Type
XXXXEvent Value
XXXXEvents
XXXXEvents list (User Event Only)
XXXXEvents list (all)
XXXXExamine
XXXXExamples
XXXXExamples...
XXXXExamples<LF>My Projects
XXXXExecutes modulo division (remainder) of one image by another or an image by a constant.<LF>    	  <LF>Constant. The input Image Src A is divided by the Constant value for image-constant operations. The default is 1.<LF>	<LF>Image Src A is the reference to the source (input) image A.<LF>	<LF>Image Dst is the reference to the destination image. If it is connected, it must be the same type as Image Src A.<LF>	<LF>Image Src B is the reference to the source (input) image B.<LF>	<LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Dst Out is the reference to the destination (output) image which receives the processing results of the VI. If the Image Dst is connected, then Image Dst Out is the same as Image Dst. Otherwise, Image Dst Out refers to the image referenced by Image Src A.<LF>	<LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>An operation between an image and a constant occurs when the input Image Src B is not connected. The two possibilities are distinguished in the following equations:<LF><LF>Dst(x, y) = SrcA(x, y) % SrcB(x, y), or<LF>Dst(x, y) = SrcA(x, y) % Constant.<LF><LF>If the Image Src A is a 32-bit floating-point image then the following operation is performed:<LF><LF>Dst(x, y) = SrcA(x, y) – SrcB(x, y) × E(SrcA(x, y) ÷ SrcB(x, y) ), or<LF>Dst(x, y) = SrcA(x, y) – Constant × E(SrcA(x, y) ÷ Constant),<LF>where E(x) is the integer part of x.
XXXXExists?
XXXXExit &Q
XXXXExit direct mode display.
XXXXExiting...
XXXXExpand
XXXXExpand the graph to the size of the screen.
XXXXExpands (duplicates) an image or part of an image with adjustment of the horizontal and vertical resolution. <LF>     	<LF>Optional Rectangle defines an array (four elements) containing the coordinates (Left / Top / Right / Bottom) of the region to expand. The operation is applied to the entire image if the input is empty or not connected. <LF><LF>Image Src is the reference to the source (input) image.<LF><LF>Image Dst is the reference to the destination image. If it is connected, it must be the same type as the Image Src.<LF><LF>X Duplication Step specifies the number of pixel duplications per column. The column is recopied if the default value (1) is used. <LF><LF>Y Duplication Step specifies the number of pixel duplications per line. The row is recopied if the default value (1) is used. <LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Dst Out is the reference to the destination (output) image which receives the processing results of the VI. If the Image Dst is connected, the Image Dst Out is the same as Image Dst. Otherwise, Image Dst Out refers to the image referenced by Image Src.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>For example, if a 256 × 256 image is connected and the X Duplication Step and Y Duplication Step are both equal to 2, then the resulting image has a resolution of 512 × 512. Each pixel in the original image now is represented by four pixels in new image (2 × 2). <LF><LF>The input images must be the same image type.<LF>
XXXXExplain Error...
XXXXExport...
XXXXExported VI list
XXXXExternal Clock
XXXXExternal edges only (T)
XXXXExternal_Edge
XXXXExtract
XXXXExtract Plane
XXXXExtracted Data Set
XXXXExtracts (copies) the pixels from an image, or part of an image, into a 2D array encoded in 8 bits, 16 bits, or floating point, which is determined by the type of input image. Various processing can be applied to this array. These arrays can be programmed either from LabVIEW or BridgeVIEW, or from standard programming languages (such as C) via a Code Interface Node. <LF><LF>Image is the reference to the source (input) image.<LF><LF>Optional Rectangle defines an array (four elements) containing  the coordinates (Left / Top / Right / Bottom) of the region to extract. The operation is applied to the entire image if the input is empty or not connected. <LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Pixels (U8) returns the extracted pixel values into a 2D array (line, column). This output is only used for an 8-bit image.<LF>	Image Pixels (I16) returns the extracted pixel values into a 2D array (line, column). This output is only used for a 16-bit image.<LF><LF>Image Pixels (SGL) returns the extracted pixel values into a 2D array (line, column). This output is only used for a 32-bit floating-point image.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXExtracts (reduces) an image or part of an image with adjustment of the horizontal and vertical resolution. <LF>      	<LF>Optional Rectangle defines an array (four elements) containing the coordinates (Left / Top / Right / Bottom) of the region to extract. The operation is applied to the entire image if the input is empty or not connected. <LF><LF>Image Src is the reference to the source (input) image.<LF><LF>	Image Dst is the reference to the destination image. If it is connected, it must be the same type as the Image Src.<LF><LF>	X Step Size is the vertical sampling step, which defines the columns to be extracted (the horizontal reduction ratio). For example, with an X Step Size equal to 3, one out of every three columns is extracted from the Image Src into the Image Dst. Each column is extracted if the default value (1) is used. <LF><LF>Y Step Size is the horizontal sampling step, which defines the lines to be extracted (the vertical reduction ratio). Each row is extracted if the default value (1) is used. <LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Dst Out is the reference to the destination (output) image which receives the processing results of the VI. If the Image Dst is connected, the Image Dst Out is the same as Image Dst. Otherwise, Image Dst Out refers to the image referenced by Image Src.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>For example, if a 512 × 512 image is connected and the X Step Size and Y Step Size are both equal to 2, then the resulting image has a resolution of 256 × 256. The resulting image contains the lines from the Image Src 0, 2, 4, …, 510 and the columns 0, 2, 4, …, 510 from the Image Src.<LF><LF>The input images must be the same image type.<LF>
XXXXExtracts a line of pixels from a color image. This VI returns an array of unsigned 32-bit integer indicators. This array can be converted into an array of clusters coding the three color values as either (R, G, B), (H, S, L), or (H, S, V) using the VI IMAQ IntegerToColorValue.<LF><LF>Image must be an RGB-chunky image.<LF><LF>Line Coordinates is an array specifying the two endpoints of the line to extract. <LF><LF>Note:	A line designated by the coordinates [0, 0, 0, 255] consists of 256 pixels. The output Pixels Line contains the values specified by this line. Any pixel values outside the image automatically is set to 0 in Pixels Line.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Pixels Line(U32) returns the pixel values as a 1D array of unsigned 32-bit integer indicators.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXExtracts a range of pixels values, either a row or column, from an image.<LF>    	<LF>Image is the reference to the source (input) image.<LF><LF>Number is the row or column number to be extracted. <LF><LF>Row / Column uses the row Number by default (the default is FALSE). When the TRUE value is connected, the column Number is used. <LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Pixels (U8) returns the intensity values for the specified row or column of pixels. This output is only used for an 8-bit image.<LF><LF>Pixels (I16) returns the intensity values for the specified row or column of pixels. This output is only used for a 16-bit image.<LF><LF>Pixels (SGL) returns the intensity values for the specified row or column of pixels. This output is only used for a 32-bit floating-point image.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXExtracts odd and even fields from an interlaced image or builds an image using two field images.<LF>        	<LF>Interlace/Separate (Interlace). The default is the interlace mode, which specifies that an interlaced image is built using two field images (Image even and Image odd).In the separate mode, the odd and even fields from an interlaced image (Image frame) are extracted. <LF>	<LF>Image frame is the reference to the image in which odd and even fields have to be extracted.<LF>	<LF>Image even is the reference to the image that forms the even lines of the interlaced image.<LF><LF>Image odd is the reference to the image that forms the odd lines of the interlaced image.<LF>	<LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF>	<LF>Image frame Out contains the interlaced image.<LF>	<LF>Image even Out contains the even lines of the input image.<LF><LF>Image odd Out contains the odd lines of the input image.<LF>	<LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Note:	When two fields are interlaced, the first line in the resulting frame comes from the even field and the second comes from the odd field.
XXXXExtracts the contours (detects edges) in gray-level values. Any image connected to the input Image Dst must be the same image type connected to Image Src. The image type connected to the input Image Mask must be an 8-bit image. The connected source image must have been created with a border capable of supporting the size of the processing matrix. For example, a 3 × 3 matrix has a minimum border size of 1. The border size of the destination image is not important.<LF><LF>Threshold Value is the minimum pixel value to appear in the resulting image. It is rare to use a value greater than 0 for this type of processing because the results from this processing are usually very dark and are not very dynamic. The default is 0.<LF><LF>Image Src is the image reference source.<LF><LF>Image Mask is an 8-bit image that specifies the region in the image to modify. Only pixels in the original image that correspond to the equivalent pixel in the mask are replaced by the values in the lookup table (provided that the value in the mask is not 0). All pixels not corresponding to this criteria keep their original value. The complete image is modified if Image Mask is not connected. <LF><LF>Image Dst is the reference to the destination image. If it is connected, it must be the same type as the Image Src.<LF><LF>Method specifies the type of edge-detection filter to use. The following table lists some of the available filters.<LF><LF>  0 (default)	Differentiation	processing with a 2 × 2 matrix<LF>  1	Gradient	processing with a 2 × 2 matrix<LF>  2	Prewitt 	processing with a 3 × 3 matrix<LF>  3	Roberts	processing with a 2 × 2 matrix<LF>  4	Sigma 	processing with a 3 × 3 matrix<LF>  5	Sobel	processing with a 3 × 3 matrix<LF>Note:	See the Nonlinear Filters section of Chapter 5, Spatial Filtering, in the IMAQ Vision for G Reference Manual for more information about these filters.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Dst Out is the reference to the destination (output) image which receives the processing results of the VI. If the Image Dst is connected, then Image Dst Out is the same as Image Dst. Otherwise, Image Dst Out refers to the image referenced by Image Src.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXExtracts the intensity values of a line of pixels. <LF>    	<LF>Image is the reference to the source (input) image.<LF>	<LF>Line Coordinates are the coordinates of the line to extract. These coordinates are in the form of an array specifying the endpoints of the line. Note that a line with the coordinates (0, 0, 0, 255) is formed from 256 pixels. The output Pixels Line is an array containing the intensity values of the pixels in the selected line. Any pixels designated by the Line Coordinates found outside the actual image are set to zero in Pixels Line.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Pixels Line (U8) returns the intensity values for the specified line of pixels. This output is only used for an 8-bit image.<LF><LF>Pixels Line (I16) returns the intensity values for the specified line of pixels. This output is only used for a 16-bit image.<LF><LF>Pixels Line (SGL) returns the intensity values for the specified line of pixels. This output is only used for a 32-bit floating-point image.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXExtracts the pixels from a color image, or from part of a color image, into a 2D array. This VI returns the values as a 2D array of unsigned 32-bit integer indicators. This 2D array can be converted into a 2D array of clusters coding the three color values as either (R, G, B), (H, S, L), or (H, S, V) using the VI IMAQ IntegerToColorValue.<LF><LF>Image must be an RGB-chunky image.<LF><LF>Optional Rectangle designates a rectangular region (Left / Top / Right / Bottom) within an image in which the pixels are to be changed. . If this array is empty the entire image is changed.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Pixels (U32) returns the pixel values as a 2D array of unsigned 32-bit integer indicators.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXExtracts the pixels from a complex image (2 × 32-bit floating point) into a 2D complex array ([CSG]).<LF>  <LF>Image is the reference to the complex image.<LF>	<LF>Optional Rectangle specifies a rectangular region of the complex image to be extracted. The operation is applied to the entire image if the input is empty or not connected.<LF>	<LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Pixels (Complex) is a 2D array (Line, Column) containing all the pixel values that comprise the image. The first index corresponds to the vertical axis and the second to the horizontal index. The final size of the array is equal to the size of the image or to the size of the optional rectangle.<LF>	<LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXExtracts the pixels from an 8-bit, 16-bit, or 32-bit floating-point image into the real part or imaginary part of a complex image (2 × 32-bit floating point). <LF>    	  <LF>Plane specifies which component of the complex image is replaced. The following values are valid:<LF><LF>    0	  (Default) Real<LF>    1  	Imaginary<LF> <LF>Image Src must be an 8-bit, 16-bit, or 32-bit floating-point image.<LF> <LF>Image Dst must be a complex image.<LF>	<LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF>	<LF>Image Dst Out is the reference to the destination (output) image which receives the processing results of the VI. If the Image Dst is connected, then Image Dst Out is the same as Image Dst. Otherwise, Image Dst Out refers to the image referenced by Image Src.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXExtracts the pixels from the real part, imaginary part, magnitude, or phase from a complex image (2 × 32-bit floating point) into an 8-bit, 16-bit, or 32-bit floating-point image.<LF><LF>Plane indicates which component of the complex image is extracted. The following values are valid:<LF><LF>   0	(Default) Real<LF>   1	Imaginary<LF>   2	Magnitude<LF>   3	Phase<LF><LF>Image Src must be a complex image.<LF>	<LF>Image Dst must be an 8-bit, 16-bit, or 32-bit floating-point image.<LF>	<LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF>	<LF>Image Dst Out is the reference to the destination (output) image which receives the processing results of the VI. It is the same as Image Dst.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXExtracts the pixels from the real part, imaginary part, magnitude, or phase from a complex image into a floating-point 2D array.<LF><LF>Plane indicates which component of the complex image is extracted into an array. The following values are valid:<LF><LF>   0	(Default) Real<LF>   1	Imaginary<LF>   2	Magnitude<LF>   3	Phase<LF><LF>Image is the reference to the input complex image.<LF><LF>Optional Rectangle specifies a rectangular region of the complex image to be extracted. The operation is applied to the entire image if the input is empty or not connected.<LF>	<LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Pixels (float) is a 2D floating-point array (Line, Column) containing all the pixel values that comprise the image. The first index corresponds to the vertical axis and the second to the horizontal index. The final size of the array is equal to the size of the image or to the size of the optional rectangle.<LF>	<LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXExtracts the three planes (RGB, HSV, or HSL) from an image.<LF><LF>Color Mode defines the image color format to use for the operation. The default is 0, which specifies RGB.<LF><LF>0	(Default) RGB<LF>1	HSL<LF>2	HSV<LF>Image Src (RGB) is the reference to an image that has its three planes extracted: RGB, HSV or HSL. It must be an RGB-chunky image.<LF><LF>Red (or Hue) Plane is the reference to the destination image. It contains the first color plane. This plane can be either the red plane (Color Mode 0) or the hue plane (Color Mode 1 or 2). It must be an 8-bit image. The color plane is not extracted if the input is not connected.<LF><LF>Green (or Sat) Plane is the reference to the destination image. It contains the second color plane. This plane can be either the green plane (Color Mode 0) or the saturation plane (Color Mode 1 or 2). It must be an 8-bit image. The color plane is not extracted if the input is not connected.<LF><LF>Blue (or Light or Val) Plane is the reference to the destination image. It contains the third color plane. This plane can be either the blue plane (Color Mode 0), the lightness plane (Color Mode 1), or the value plane (Color Mode 2). It must be an 8-bit image. The input must be connected for the color plane to be extracted.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Red (or Hue) Plane out is the reference to the image containing the red (or hue) plane of the source (input) image.<LF><LF>Green (or Sat) Plane out is the reference to the image containing the green (or saturation) plane of the source (input) image.<LF><LF>Blue (or Light or Val) Plane out is the reference to the image containing the blue (or lightness or value) plane of the source (input) image.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>
XXXXF#
XXXXFALSE
XXXXFF
XXXXFFT
XXXXFIll Value
XXXXFahrenheit
XXXXFahrenheit Equal Fork
XXXXFahrenheit Fork
XXXXFalse
XXXXFile
XXXXFile Data Type
XXXXFile Options
XXXXFile Path
XXXXFile Type
XXXXFile name
XXXXFiles
XXXXFill Container
XXXXFill Mailbox
XXXXFill Remote Container
XXXXFill Value
XXXXFilling Value (255)
XXXXFills an image and its border with a specified value.<LF>        	<LF>Complex Pixel Value specifies the value used for filling a complex image.<LF><LF>Image is the reference to the source (input) image.<LF><LF>Image Mask is an 8-bit image that specifies the region in the image to modify. Only pixels in the original image that correspond to the equivalent pixel in the mask are replaced by the values in the lookup table (provided that the value in the mask is not 0). All pixels not corresponding to this criteria keep their original value. The complete image is modified if Image Mask is not connected.<LF><LF>Pixel Value (U8, I16, Float) specifies the value with which the image is to be filled. This value is used for 8-bit, 16-bit and 32-bit floating-point images.<LF><LF>Color Pixel Value specifies the value used for filling a color image.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Out contains the image that has been filled with the specified pixel value.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXFills the border of an image.<LF>        	<LF>Image in is the reference to the image that has to be modified.<LF>	<LF>Function indicates the method used to fill the border of the image. <LF>This parameter has three possible values:<LF><LF>  0	Border Mirror	Repeats the pixel values of the image near the <LF>     border into the border by symmetry.<LF>  1	Border Copy	Sets the value of the border pixels to the value of <LF>    the image pixel near the border.<LF>  2	Border Clear	Sets all border pixels to 0.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF>	<LF>Image Out is the reference to the destination (output) image.<LF>	<LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXFills the holes found in a particle. The holes are filled with a pixel value of 1. The source image must be an 8-bit binary image. This operation requires the creation of a temporary memory space that is equal to the size of the source image.<LF>  <LF>Connectivity 4/ 8 (8) specifies how the algorithm determines whether an adjacent pixel is the same or different particle. The default is 8.<LF><LF>Image Src is the reference to the source (input) image.<LF><LF>Image Dst is the reference to the destination image. If it is connected, it must be the same type as the Image Src.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Dst Out is the reference to the destination (output) image which receives the processing results of the VI. If the Image Dst is connected, then Image Dst Out is the same as Image Dst. Otherwise, Image Dst Out refers to the image referenced by Image Src.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXFilter
XXXXFilter width
XXXXFilters an image using a linear filter. The calculations are performed either with integers or floating points, depending on the image type and the contents of the kernel.<LF>    	    <LF>Divider (kernel sum) is a normalization factor that can be applied to the sum of the obtained products. Under normal conditions the divider should not be connected. If connected (and not equal to 0), the elements internal to the matrix are summed and then divided by this normalization factor.<LF><LF>Image Src is the image reference source. It must be and 8-bit or RGB image.<LF><LF>Image Mask is an 8-bit image that specifies the region in the image to modify. Only pixels in the original image that correspond to the equivalent pixel in the mask are replaced by the values in the lookup table (provided that the value in the mask is not 0). All pixels not corresponding to this criteria keep their original value. The complete image is modified if Image Mask is not connected. <LF><LF>Image Dst is the reference to the destination image. If it is connected, it must be the same type as the Image Src.<LF><LF>Kernel is a 2D array that contains the convolution matrix to be applied to the image. The size of the convolution is fixed by the size of this array. The array can be generated by using standard G programming techniques or the VIs IMAQ GetKernel or IMAQ BuildKernel. If the dimensions (XY) produced by this array are not greater than 3, the filter is considered null and the output image is identical to the input image.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Dst Out is the reference to the destination (output) image which receives the processing results of the VI. If the Image Dst is connected, then Image Dst Out is the same as Image Dst. Otherwise, Image Dst Out refers to the image referenced by Image Src.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Any image connected to the input Image Dst must be the same image type connected to Image Src. The image type connected to the input Image Mask must be an 8-bit image.<LF>The connected source image must have been created with a border capable of supporting the size of the convolution matrix. A 3 × 3 matrix must have a minimum border of 1, a 5 × 5 matrix must have a minimum border of 2, and so forth. The border size of the destination image is not important.<LF><LF>A convolution matrix must have odd-sized dimensions so that it contains a central pixel. The function does not take into account the odd boundary, furthest out on the matrix, if one of the Kernel dimensions is even. For example, if the input Kernel is 6 × 4 (X = 6 and Y = 4), the actual convolution is 5 × 3. Both the sixth line and the fourth are ignored. Remember, the second dimension in a G array is the vertical direction (Y).<LF>Calculations made with an 8-bit or 16-bit Image Src input are made in integer mode provided that the kernel contains only integers. Calculations made with a 32-bit floating-point Image Src input are made in floating-point mode. Note that the processing speed is correlated with the size of the kernel. A 3 × 3 convolution processes nine pixels while a 5 × 5 convolution processes 25 pixels.
XXXXFinal data
XXXXFinds edge pairs along a specified path in the image. This VI performs an edge extraction similar to IMAQ Edge Tool then finds edge pairs based on specified criteria such as the distance between the leading and trailing edges, edge contrasts, and so forth.<LF>    	  <LF>Edge Parameters is a cluster defining the characteristics of the filter used to detect edges. This cluster consists of the following parameters.<LF><LF>   contrast specifies the threshold for the contrast of the edge. Only   <LF>   edges with a contrast greater than this value are used in the  <LF>   detection process. Contrast is defined as the difference between <LF>   the average pixel intensity before the edge and the average pixel <LF>   intensity after the edge. <LF><LF>	filter width specifies the number of pixels that are averaged to find   <LF>  the contrast at either side of the edge.<LF><LF>	 Steepness specifies the slope of the edge. This value represents   <LF>  the number of pixels that correspond to the transition area of the   <LF>  edge.<LF><LF>Image is the input source image. 8-bit, 16-bit, and floating-point images are supported.<LF>	<LF>Pixel Coordinates is an array consisting of the spatial coordinates of pixels in the image.<LF>	<LF>SubPixel Information is a cluster containing the following parameters for subpixel analysis.<LF><LF>   Interpolation Type specifies the method used to perform the <LF>   interpolation. Two values are possible.<LF><LF>   1	Quadratic<LF>   2	Cubic Spline<LF>  <LF>  SubPixel Accuracy specifies the number of samples that are    <LF>  obtained from a pixel. A subpixel accuracy of one fourth specifies    <LF>  that each pixel is split into four subpixels.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF>	<LF>Caliper Parameters specifies the following parameters for finding edge pairs.<LF><LF>  Polarity specifies the polarity of the leading and trailing edge in the   <LF>   search process.<LF><LF>  0	None	Polarity of the edges is ignored.<LF> 1	Dark-Light	The leading edge has a dark-to-light polarity while the <LF>   trailing edge has a light-to-dark polarity.<LF>  2	Light-Dark	The leading edge has a light-to-dark polarity while <LF>  the  trailing edge has a dark-to-light polarity.<LF>  3	Dark-Dark	The leading edge has a dark-to-light polarity while <LF>   the  trailing edge has a dark-to-light polarity.<LF>  4	Light-Dark	The leading edge has a light-to-dark polarity while   <LF>   the trailing edge has a light-to-dark polarity.<LF><LF>    Separation specifies the desired separation between the edge <LF>    pairs. Edge pairs with separation greater or less than this value <LF>    within some tolerance are ignored. If this parameter is set to 0, all <LF>   edge pairs are found.<LF>	  Separation Deviation specifies a tolerance value for the <LF>   separation between the edges. This value influences the score of <LF>   the detected edge pairs.<LF><LF>Caliper Report is an array of clusters that contain the following information about the detected edge pairs.<LF><LF>  Separation is the computed distance in pixels between the edges <LF>  in the edge pair.<LF>  	Edge1 Position is the location of the leading edge.<LF>  	Edge1 Contrast is the contrast of the leading edge.<LF>  	Edge2 Position is the location of the trailing edge.<LF>  	Edge2 Contrast is the contrast of the trailing edge.<LF>  	Score is unused.<LF><LF>Edge Coordinates is an array of point clusters consisting of the spatial coordinates of the detected edges.<LF>	<LF>Number of Edge Pairs returns the number of detected edge pairs.<LF>	<LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXFinds edges along a path defined in the image. Edges are determined based on their contrast, width, and steepness.<LF>    	  <LF>Edge Parameters is a cluster defining the characteristics of the filter used to detect the edges. This cluster consists of the following parameters.<LF><LF>    Contrast specifies the threshold for the contrast of the edge. Only <LF>    edges with a contrast greater than this value are used in the<LF>   detection process. Contrast is defined as the difference between <LF>    the average pixel intensity before the edge and the average pixel <LF>    intensity after the edge. <LF>	<LF>   Filter width specifies the number of pixels that are averaged to <LF>   find the contrast at either side of the edge.<LF><LF> 	 Steepness specifies the slope of the edge. This value represents   <LF>   the number of pixels that correspond to the transition area of the   <LF>   edge.<LF><LF>Image is the input source image. 8-bit, 16-bit, and floating-point images are supported.<LF>	<LF>Pixel Coordinates is an array consisting of the spatial coordinates of pixels in the image. <LF>	<LF>SubPixel Information is a cluster containing the following parameters for subpixel analysis.<LF><LF>  Interpolation Type specifies the method used to perform the       <LF>  interpolation. Two values are possible.<LF><LF>    1	Quadratic<LF>    2	Cubic Spline<LF><LF>  SubPixel Accuracy specifies the number of samples that are   <LF>  obtained from a pixel. A subpixel accuracy of one fourth specifies <LF>  that each pixel is split into four subpixels.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF>	<LF>Edge Report is a cluster containing the following information.<LF> <LF>Number of Edges returns the number of edges found.<LF><LF>Edge Information is an array that contains the following information about each detected edge.<LF><LF>   Position indicates the position of the edge from the first point in   <LF>   the Pixel Coordinates array.<LF>	<LF>   Contrast specifies the intensity contrast at the edge.<LF>	<LF>  Polarity indicates the polarity of the edge.<LF>    0	Rising edge (going from dark to light)<LF>    1	Falling edge (going from light to dark)<LF>  <LF>   Score is unused.<LF><LF>Edge Coordinates is an array of point clusters consisting of the spatial coordinates of the detected edges.<LF>	<LF>Number of Edges specifies the number of edges found.<LF>	<LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXFinds objects in an image whose shape matches the shape of the object specified by a template. The matching process is invariant to rotation and can be set to be invariant to the scale of the objects. This VI requires that the objects have been separated from the background (the input image is binary). This VI labels the image to give each object in the image a unique ID before performing the match operation.<LF>  <LF>Scale Invariance (Yes) specifies whether to use size or scale invariance when matching objects in the source image to the template object.<LF>	<LF>Tolerance indicates the percentage difference allowable between the template shape and similar shapes in the image.<LF>	<LF>Image Src is an 8-bit binary image that contains objects of different shapes. <LF>	<LF>Image Template is an 8-bit binary image that contains the object to match. <LF><LF>Image Dst is a reference to an 8 bit binary image that will contain the objects from the Image Src that match the object in the Image Template. <LF>	<LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Connectivity 4/8 (8) specifies how the algorithm determines whether an adjacent pixel is the same or different particle. The default is 8.<LF><LF>Image Dst Out contains the objects that match the template object.<LF>	<LF>Number of  Matches	specifies the number of objects in the source image that match the template object within the specified tolerance.<LF>	<LF>Shape Report is an array of clusters in which each cluster contains the following information on the matched objects:<LF><LF>  Global Rectangle contains the bounding rectangle of the object.<LF>	<LF>    Centroid is a point-coordinate cluster containing the location of   <LF>    the centroid of the object.<LF><LF>	   Object Size is the size in pixels of the object.<LF><LF>   	Score (between 1 and 1000) specifies how similar the object in <LF>    the image is to the template. A score of 1000 implies a perfect <LF>    match.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXFinds the direction of lowest or highest light intensity.<LF><LF>The local variable Time and LocalVar6-8 are preserved by the sub.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Movement Type:  Choose between Seek Dark (=0) or Seek Light (=1) by stringing a single modifier.<LF><LF>Time:  String a single modifier.
XXXXFinds the direction of lowest or highest<LF>light intensity.<LF><LF>The local variable Time and LocalVar6-8 <LF>are preserved by the sub.
XXXXFinds the direction with a light level lower than the local variable BrightTH.  Samples the local variable BrightSteps times.<LF><LF>The local variable BrightTH and LocalVar5-8 are preserved by the sub.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>BrightTH:  String a single modifier.<LF><LF>BrightSteps:  String a single modifier.
XXXXFinds the direction with a light level lower<LF>than the local variable BrightTH.  Samples<LF>the local variable BrightSteps times.<LF><LF>The local variable BrightTH and LocalVar5-8 <LF>are preserved by the sub.
XXXXFinds the location, amplitude, and second derivative of peaks or valleys in a dataset. The dataset can be passed to the VI as a single array or as consecutive blocks of data. <LF><LF>The VI is based on an algorithm that fits a quadratic polynomial to sequential groups of data points. The number of data points used in the fit is specified by the width control. <LF><LF>For each peak/valley, the quadratic fit is tested against the threshold level: peaks with heights lower than the threshold or valleys with troughs higher than the threshold are ignored. Peaks/valleys are detected only after about width/2 data points have been processed beyond the peak/valley location. This delay has implications only for realtime processing.<LF>
XXXXFirmWare
XXXXFirmware
XXXXFirmware Version (0)
XXXXFirmware description.
XXXXFirmware type
XXXXFirmware version
XXXXFirst flag character
XXXXFirst flag character encodation
XXXXFit Curve
XXXXFit Data
XXXXFit Exponential
XXXXFit Line
XXXXFit Lines
XXXXFit Ln
XXXXFit Spline
XXXXFlip Direction
XXXXFlip the directions of the motors.<LF>The default is to flip the direction of all motors.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Ports:  String the modifiers for the ports whose <LF>direction you want to change.
XXXXFlip the directions of the motors.<LF>The default is to flip the direction of all motors.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Ports:  String the modifiers for the ports whose direction you want to change.
XXXXFlip?
XXXXFloat
XXXXFloat Outputs
XXXXFloat the motors and lamps.  If you use the Stop command, <LF>the motors will brake and stop quickly.  This command will <LF>just stop powering the outputs (i.e. they will gradually stop).<LF>The default is to Float all motors and lamps.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Ports:  String in which ports to float.
XXXXFloat the motors and lamps.  If you use the Stop command, the motors will brake and stop quickly.  This command will just stop powering the outputs (i.e. they will gradually stop).  The default is to Float all motors and lamps.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Ports:  String in which ports to float.
XXXXFocus Color
XXXXFolder
XXXXFolder Name
XXXXFont Name:
XXXXFont, Size & Style
XXXXForce an Event
XXXXForces the firmware to behave as if the events, whose bits are set in the calculated 16 bit value, had actually happened. <LF><LF>Modifiers:  String in the value of the event you want to force: red, yellow, blue.  It corresponds to a 16 bit number.  The bit corresponds to an event number.<LF><LF>1 (2^0) corresponds to event 0<LF>2 (2^1) corresponds to event 1<LF>3 (2^0+2^1) correponds to events 0 and 1<LF>
XXXXForces the firmware to behave as if the events, whose bits are set in the calculated 16 bit value, had actually happened. <LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Event: String in the value of the event which you want to force:  red, yellow, blue.  It corresponds to a 16 bit number.  The bit corresponds to an event number.<LF><LF>1 (2^0) corresponds to event 0<LF>2 (2^1) corresponds to event 1<LF>3 (2^0+2^1) corresponds to events 0 and 1<LF><LF>
XXXXForeground Image
XXXXForeground color
XXXXFork Merge
XXXXFormat of the sound configuration.
XXXXFormula Container
XXXXForward
XXXXFrame
XXXXFrame Size
XXXXFrame Style
XXXXFree
XXXXFree Sampling
XXXXFree Sampling with Time Stamp
XXXXFreeLine
XXXXFreeze
XXXXFrequency
XXXXFrequency (Hz)
XXXXFrequency Analysis
XXXXFrom this window you can compute statistics and other mathematical functions on your bin.
XXXXFrom this window you can upload data from the RCX, choose a Bin color and name, choose a plot style, and adjust the graph.
XXXXFrontmost Window?
XXXXFullCorrelate
XXXXFunction
XXXXFunction 2
XXXXFunction Code
XXXXG programming<LF>language string
XXXXG#
XXXXGS
XXXXGenerate Color Table
XXXXGeneric
XXXXGeneric Container
XXXXGeneric Container Modifier<LF><LF>String this to a container command to select a <LF>generic container.  You can string in a number <LF>anywhere from 0 to 20 to select any of the 21 <LF>available container variables.<LF><LF>0 corresponds to the Red Container<LF>1 corresponds to the Yellow Container<LF>2 corresponds to the Blue Container<LF>3 to 20 correspond to generic user defined <LF>container variables.
XXXXGeneric Container Modifier<LF><LF>String this to a container command to select a generic container.  You can string in a number anywhere from 0 to 20 to select any of the 21 available conatainer variables.<LF><LF>0 corresponds to the Red Container<LF>1 corresponds to the Yellow Container<LF>2 corresponds to the Blue Container<LF>3 to 20 correspond to generic user defined container variables.
XXXXGeneric Container Modifier<LF><LF>String this to a container command to select a generic container.  You can string in a number anywhere from 0 to 20 to select any of the 21 available container variables.<LF><LF>0 corresponds to the Red Container<LF>1 corresponds to the Yellow Container<LF>2 corresponds to the Blue Container<LF>3 to 20 correspond to generic user defined container variables.
XXXXGeneric Event
XXXXGeneric Sensor Container
XXXXGeneric Sensor Fork
XXXXGet Image Subset
XXXXGet Pixel Value
XXXXGet/Set (Set)
XXXXGet/Set ? (Set)
XXXXGet/Set Status? (Set)
XXXXGets or sets the status of images on the browser. The possible status values are : selected or not selected. Selected images are framed using the color Focus Color (see Cvi Browser Focus Setup).<LF><LF>-	Image Browser In is the RGB image used by the browser.<LF><LF>-	State In  image status value.<LF><LF>- Selection Mode  Two modes are available : Multiple selection or single selection.<LF><LF>- Get/Set  is the Vi action<LF><LF>- Index  is the position of the image to select.<LF><LF>- Matrix Indexes is the (column,line) position of the selected thumbnail.<LF><LF>- Pixel Position  is the pixel coordinates of the area where the thumbnail is selected.<LF><LF>- error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>- Image Browser Out is the resulting browser image<LF> 	<LF>- State Out  is the image status.<LF><LF>- Index Out is the index of the position of the selected image.<LF><LF>- Matrix Indexes Out is the (column,line) position of the selected thumbnail.<LF> <LF>- Pixel Position Out  Pixel Coordinates (X, Y top-left, X, Y right-bottom) defining the area where the image is selected.<LF><LF>- error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF>
XXXXGets the immediate state of motors A and B.<LF>Status A is returned in LocalVar1, Status B <LF>is returned in LocalVar 2.<LF><LF>Status:  0: Off, 1: Fwd, 2: Rwd.<LF><LF>LocalVar3-8 are preserved by the sub.
XXXXGets the immediate state of motors A and B.<LF>Status A is returned in LocalVar1, Status B is returned in LocalVar 2.<LF><LF>Status:  0: Off, 1: Fwd, 2: Rwd.<LF><LF>LocalVar3-8 are preserved by the sub.
XXXXGives information regarding the size (resolution) of the image. <LF><LF>        	<LF>Image is the reference to the image whose size has to be determined.<LF><LF>	error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>	X Resolution gives the number of pixels per line.<LF><LF>	Y Resolution gives the number of pixels per column.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXGlobal Motor Register (0,1,2)
XXXXGlobal Motor Status (0-2)
XXXXGlobal Rectangle
XXXXGlobal Rectangle
XXXXGlobal Report
XXXXGrab
XXXXGrab Blue
XXXXGrab Green
XXXXGrab Grey
XXXXGrab RGB
XXXXGrab Red
XXXXGrab Sound
XXXXGrab Sound Continuously
XXXXGraph
XXXXGraph Type
XXXXGraphic
XXXXGreater or Less Than
XXXXGreen
XXXXGreen (or Sat) Histogram Graph
XXXXGreen (or Sat) Histogram Report
XXXXGreen (or Sat) Lookup Table
XXXXGreen (or Sat) Plane
XXXXGreen (or Sat) Plane out
XXXXGreen (or Sat) Range
XXXXGreen (or Sat) value
XXXXGreen Bin
XXXXGreen Jump
XXXXGreen Land
XXXXGreen value
XXXXGrey Bkgrnd
XXXXGreyscale
XXXXGrid Size
XXXXGrow
XXXXHIDE ADMINISTRATOR BUTTON
XXXXHIGH
XXXXHPercent (1-100)
XXXXHT
XXXXHTML FILE NAMES
XXXXHTML PATHS
XXXXHalf note
XXXXHardware
XXXXHas Scrollbars?
XXXXHave the program choose between one of two paths <LF>depending on the state of the event.<LF>If the event happened, the program will  follow the top string.<LF>If the did not happen, the program will follow the bottom string.<LF>The default is the red event.<LF><LF>Note: All forks will need a 'Merge' later in the string.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the event modifier that <LF>corresponds to where the sensor is connected.
XXXXHave the program choose between one of two paths <LF>depending on the state of the touch sensor.<LF>If the touch sensor is pushed in, the program will <LF>follow the bottom string.<LF>If the touch sensor is released, the program will <LF>follow the top string.<LF>The default is on Port 1.<LF><LF>Note: All forks will need a 'Merge' later in the string.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where the sensor is connected.
XXXXHave the program choose between one of two paths <LF>randomly<LF><LF>Note: All forks will need a 'Merge' later in the string.<LF><LF><LF>
XXXXHave the program choose between one of two paths depending on the state of the event.<LF>If the event happened, the program will follow the top string.<LF>If the did not happen, the program will follow the bottom string.<LF>The default is the red event.<LF><LF>Note: All forks will need a 'Merge' later in the string.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the event modifier that <LF>corresponds to where the sensor is connected.
XXXXHave the program choose between one of two paths depending on the state of the touch sensor.<LF>If the touch sensor is pushed in, the program will follow the bottom string.<LF>If the touch sensor is released, the program will follow the top string.<LF>The default is on Port 1.<LF><LF>Note: All forks will need a 'Merge' later in the string.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where the sensor is connected.
XXXXHave the program choose between one of two paths randomly.<LF><LF>Note: All forks will need a 'Merge' later in the string.<LF><LF><LF>
XXXXHeader
XXXXHeight
XXXXHelp
XXXXHelp Files *
XXXXHelp for This VI
XXXXHere is a picture of the light sensor taped to the side of the door where it was taking measurements.
XXXXHere is a picture of the spinner that we made using a light sensor and a paper wheel.
XXXXHere one can see that the higher temperatures occured when the sun was down and the lower temperatures were at sunrise.  This is because the air was still cooling off from a previously hot day.
XXXXHere one can see that we had a mean reaction time of 0.5 sec.
XXXXHi Power?
XXXXHi/Low
XXXXHide/Show (Show)
XXXXHigh
XXXXHistogram
XXXXHistogram 2
XXXXHistogram Graph
XXXXHistogram Report
XXXXHistograph
XXXXHistory
XXXXHit #
XXXXHit this button to cancel the printing operation.
XXXXHit this button when all is done.
XXXXHits
XXXXHole's Area (pixels)
XXXXHole's Perimeter
XXXXHorizontal
XXXXHost type
XXXXHot spot (x,y)
XXXXHours
XXXXHumiPro LogIT
XXXXHumidity Container (HumiPro LogIT)
XXXXHumidity Sensor Fork (HumiPro LogIT)
XXXXHysteresis
XXXXHysteresis (0-15)
XXXXHysteresis Value
XXXXIInitializes the Touch Sensor to take data and configures data logging settings.<LF><LF>The default is the Touch Sensor is set up on Port 1 and data is captured in the Red Data Set.<LF><LF>Note: This command must appear before any data logging of the sensor can begin.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port Value: String in the port that the touch sensor is connected to.<LF><LF>Data Set: String the data set modifier that corresponds to the data set you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Total Buffer Size: String in the maximum number of points in buffer.<LF>This number ranges from 0-2000 and is dependent on the amount of memory used by the program.
XXXXIMAQ  WindUserSetup
XXXXIMAQ 3DView 
XXXXIMAQ Add
XXXXIMAQ AddPictToWindow
XXXXIMAQ And
XXXXIMAQ ArrayToColorImage
XXXXIMAQ ArrayToComplexImage
XXXXIMAQ ArrayToImage
XXXXIMAQ AutoBThreshold
XXXXIMAQ AutoMThreshold 
XXXXIMAQ BasicParticle 
XXXXIMAQ BinaryMorphology 
XXXXIMAQ Browser Focus
XXXXIMAQ Browser Focus Setup 
XXXXIMAQ Browser Insert
XXXXIMAQ Browser Replace
XXXXIMAQ Browser Setup
XXXXIMAQ BuildKernel
XXXXIMAQ Caliper Tool
XXXXIMAQ Cast
XXXXIMAQ Centroid 
XXXXIMAQ CharPtrToString
XXXXIMAQ ChooseMeasurements 
XXXXIMAQ Circles
XXXXIMAQ ClipboardToImage
XXXXIMAQ ColorEqualize
XXXXIMAQ ColorHistogram
XXXXIMAQ ColorHistograph
XXXXIMAQ ColorImageToArray 
XXXXIMAQ ColorThreshold
XXXXIMAQ ColorToRGB
XXXXIMAQ ColorUserLookup
XXXXIMAQ ColorValueToInteger
XXXXIMAQ Compare
XXXXIMAQ ComplexAdd
XXXXIMAQ ComplexAttenuate
XXXXIMAQ ComplexConjugate
XXXXIMAQ ComplexDivide
XXXXIMAQ ComplexFlipFrequency
XXXXIMAQ ComplexImageToArray 
XXXXIMAQ ComplexMeasure 
XXXXIMAQ ComplexMultiply
XXXXIMAQ ComplexParticle 
XXXXIMAQ ComplexPlaneToArray 
XXXXIMAQ ComplexPlaneToImage
XXXXIMAQ ComplexSubtract
XXXXIMAQ ComplexTruncate
XXXXIMAQ ConvertByLookup
XXXXIMAQ Convex
XXXXIMAQ Convolute 
XXXXIMAQ Coordinate Reference
XXXXIMAQ Copy
XXXXIMAQ Correlate  
XXXXIMAQ Create
XXXXIMAQ Danielsson 
XXXXIMAQ Dispose
XXXXIMAQ Distance 
XXXXIMAQ Divide
XXXXIMAQ Draw
XXXXIMAQ DrawText
XXXXIMAQ Edge Tool
XXXXIMAQ EdgeDetection 
XXXXIMAQ Equalize
XXXXIMAQ Error V 4.1
XXXXIMAQ Expand 
XXXXIMAQ Extract 
XXXXIMAQ ExtractColorPlanes
XXXXIMAQ FFT 
XXXXIMAQ FillHole 
XXXXIMAQ Fillimage 
XXXXIMAQ Get Angles
XXXXIMAQ Get Circle
XXXXIMAQ Get LCD ROI
XXXXIMAQ Get LCD ROI 1
XXXXIMAQ Get Meter
XXXXIMAQ Get Meter 2
XXXXIMAQ GetCalibration
XXXXIMAQ GetColorPixelLine
XXXXIMAQ GetColorPixelValue 
XXXXIMAQ GetFileInfo
XXXXIMAQ GetHostType
XXXXIMAQ GetImageInfo
XXXXIMAQ GetImagePixelPtr
XXXXIMAQ GetImageSize 
XXXXIMAQ GetKernel
XXXXIMAQ GetLastKey
XXXXIMAQ GetOffset
XXXXIMAQ GetPalette
XXXXIMAQ GetPixelLine
XXXXIMAQ GetPixelValue 
XXXXIMAQ GetRowCol
XXXXIMAQ GetScreenSize
XXXXIMAQ GrayMorphology 
XXXXIMAQ Group ROIs
XXXXIMAQ Histogram 
XXXXIMAQ Histograph 
XXXXIMAQ ImageBorderOperation
XXXXIMAQ ImageBorderSize
XXXXIMAQ ImageToArray 
XXXXIMAQ ImageToClipboard
XXXXIMAQ ImageToComplexPlane
XXXXIMAQ ImageToImage
XXXXIMAQ IntegerToColorValue
XXXXIMAQ Interlace
XXXXIMAQ Interpolate 1D
XXXXIMAQ InverseFFT 
XXXXIMAQ Label
XXXXIMAQ Line Gauge Tool
XXXXIMAQ LineProfile
XXXXIMAQ LinearAverages
XXXXIMAQ LogDiff
XXXXIMAQ LowPass 
XXXXIMAQ MagicWand 
XXXXIMAQ Mask
XXXXIMAQ MaskToROI
XXXXIMAQ MathLookup
XXXXIMAQ MemPeek
XXXXIMAQ Modulo
XXXXIMAQ MulDiv
XXXXIMAQ MultiThreshold
XXXXIMAQ Multiply
XXXXIMAQ NthOrder 
XXXXIMAQ Or
XXXXIMAQ Peak/Valley Detector
XXXXIMAQ PointDistances
XXXXIMAQ Quantify 
XXXXIMAQ RGBToColor
XXXXIMAQ ROI to Picture
XXXXIMAQ ROIProfile
XXXXIMAQ ROIToMask
XXXXIMAQ Read Cod128
XXXXIMAQ Read Cod25
XXXXIMAQ Read Cod39
XXXXIMAQ Read Cod93
XXXXIMAQ Read Codabar
XXXXIMAQ Read EAN13
XXXXIMAQ Read EAN8
XXXXIMAQ Read LCD
XXXXIMAQ Read LCD 1
XXXXIMAQ Read MSI
XXXXIMAQ Read Meter
XXXXIMAQ Read Single Digit
XXXXIMAQ Read Single Digit 1
XXXXIMAQ Read UPC A
XXXXIMAQ ReadFile
XXXXIMAQ RejectBorder 
XXXXIMAQ RemoveParticle 
XXXXIMAQ ReplaceColorPlane
XXXXIMAQ Resample 
XXXXIMAQ Rotate
XXXXIMAQ Rotation Detect
XXXXIMAQ Segmentation 
XXXXIMAQ Separation
XXXXIMAQ SetCalibration
XXXXIMAQ SetColorPixelLine
XXXXIMAQ SetColorPixelValue 
XXXXIMAQ SetImageSize 
XXXXIMAQ SetOffset
XXXXIMAQ SetPixelLine
XXXXIMAQ SetPixelValue 
XXXXIMAQ SetRowCol
XXXXIMAQ SetUserPen
XXXXIMAQ SetupBrush
XXXXIMAQ Shape Match Tool
XXXXIMAQ Shift
XXXXIMAQ Shift16To8
XXXXIMAQ Simple Edge
XXXXIMAQ Simple Edge<LF><LF>This function looks for step edges along an array of Pixel Coordinates. According to the Process chosen, the VI returns the first, the first and the last or all the edges found. <LF>The Threshold Parameters are the critera used to determine whether a change in the pixel values is considered as an edge or not. For the Simple Edge VI, the main criterion is a threshold level on the pixel values. This threshold value can be either relative or absolute. Relative threshold level is specified as a percentage of the pixel range found in the pixel path. Absolute value is directly based on the pixel values. The location of the edges can be computed with sub-pixel accuracy.<LF><LF>- 	Image Src is the reference of the image to be processed.<LF><LF>- 	Pixel Coordinates is an array containing the coordinates of the pixels to be inspected. The pixels coordinates may be returned from a ROI descriptor by the VI IMAQ ROIProfile.<LF><LF>- 	Process determines the type of search. The VI can return: the first edge,  the first and the last edge, or all edges found along the ROI path.<LF><LF>-  Threshold Parameters is a cluster containing the criterion used to determine whether a change in pixel values is considered as an edge or not. This cluster contains the following data:<LF><LF>- 	Level Type  (default Absolute value) is an enumerated type control determining if the Threshold Level is expressed in absolute or relative values. <LF><LF>- 	Threshold Level can be either absolute or relative. Absolute threshold is based on the pixel values. Relative threshold is expressed as a percentage of the pixel range found in the ROI.<LF><LF>- 	Hysteresis can be either absolute or relative. It determines a range of pixel values (or a range of percentage) after an edge detection where there is no detection. This feature enables a correct detection in noisy images.<LF><LF>- 	Sub-pixel Accuracy (default: False) determines the accuracy requested for the location of the edge coordinates. Setting this control to False enables a very quick edge detection. A sub-pixel localization of the edges is obtained when this control is True. The sub-pixel result is computed using a local quadratic interpolation.  <LF><LF>- 	error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>- 	Edges Coordinates returns the detected edges coordinates. If the Sub-pixel Accuracy control is set to True, the result is given with sub-pixel accuracy.<LF><LF>- 	Nb Detected Edges returns the number of edges found.<LF><LF>- 	error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXIMAQ Skeleton
XXXXIMAQ Status
XXXXIMAQ Substract
XXXXIMAQ Symmetry
XXXXIMAQ Threshold
XXXXIMAQ Transform ROI
XXXXIMAQ Ungroup ROIs
XXXXIMAQ UserLookup
XXXXIMAQ WindDraw
XXXXIMAQ WindDrawRect
XXXXIMAQ WindEraseROI
XXXXIMAQ WindGetMouse
XXXXIMAQ WindGetROI
XXXXIMAQ WindGrid
XXXXIMAQ WindLastEvent
XXXXIMAQ WindMove
XXXXIMAQ WindROIColor
XXXXIMAQ WindSetROI
XXXXIMAQ WindSetup
XXXXIMAQ WindShow
XXXXIMAQ WindSize
XXXXIMAQ WindToolsClose
XXXXIMAQ WindToolsMove
XXXXIMAQ WindToolsSelect
XXXXIMAQ WindToolsSetup
XXXXIMAQ WindToolsShow
XXXXIMAQ WindUserEvent
XXXXIMAQ WindUserMove
XXXXIMAQ WindUserShow
XXXXIMAQ WindUserStatus
XXXXIMAQ WindXYZoom
XXXXIMAQ WindZoom
XXXXIMAQ WriteFile
XXXXIMAQ Xor
XXXXIMAQTransform ROI
XXXXIP Address
XXXXIR Transmitter Error
XXXXIcons per Line (4)
XXXXIdle
XXXXIf Bit 15 in the local variable TaskFlags is set <LF>Access Control is set up.<LF>It will do the Zig Zag motion with the local variable<LF>Time between the steps.<LF><LF>Local Variable Duration<LF>   >>0   ZigZag Duration times (loop)<LF>   <<0   Duration is treated as an event list and the<LF>          ZigZag is performed until the event happenes<LF>   =0   ZigZags forever<LF>Duration, Time and LocalVar 5-8 are preserved by<LF>the sub.
XXXXIf Bit 15 in the local variable TaskFlags is set <LF>Access Control is set up.<LF>Sets up motor control: Motor A Fwd, Motor B Fwd.<LF>After motor control is set up, the duration of the Sub<LF>is determined:<LF>Local variable Duration<LF>   >>0   A Wait of Duration*10ms is performed<LF>   <<0   Duration is treated as an event list and a <LF>          WaitUntilEvent is performed<LF>   =0   Enters Looping forever<LF>Duration and LocalVar 3-8 are preserved by the sub.
XXXXIf Bit 15 in the local variable TaskFlags is set <LF>Access Control is set up.<LF>Sets up motor control: Motor A Fwd, Motor B Fwd.<LF>After motor control is set up, the duration of the Sub<LF>is determined:<LF>Local variable Duration<LF>   >>0   A Wait of Duration*10ms is performed<LF>   <<0   Duration is treated as an event list and a <LF>          WaitUntilEvent is performed<LF>   =0   Enters Looping forever<LF>Duration and LocalVar 3-8 are preserved by the sub.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Duration:  Choose the duration of the Sub by stringing a single modifier.<LF><LF>TaskFlag:  String a single modifier.<LF>
XXXXIf Bit 15 in the local variable TaskFlags is set <LF>Access Control is set up.<LF>Sets up motor control: Motor A Fwd, Motor B Off.<LF>After motor control is set up, the duration of the Sub<LF>is determined:<LF>Local variable Duration<LF>   >>0   A Wait of Duration*10ms is performed<LF>   <<0   Duration is treated as an event list and a <LF>          WaitUntilEvent is performed<LF>   =0   Enters Looping forever<LF>Duration and LocalVar 3-8 are preserved by the sub.
XXXXIf Bit 15 in the local variable TaskFlags is set <LF>Access Control is set up.<LF>Sets up motor control: Motor A Fwd, Motor B Off.<LF>After motor control is set up, the duration of the Sub<LF>is determined:<LF>Local variable Duration<LF>   >>0   A Wait of Duration*10ms is performed<LF>   <<0   Duration is treated as an event list and a <LF>          WaitUntilEvent is performed<LF>   =0   Enters Looping forever<LF>Duration and LocalVar 3-8 are preserved by the sub.<LF><LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Duration:  Choose the duration of the Sub by stringing a single modifier.<LF><LF>TaskFlag:  String a single modifier.<LF>
XXXXIf Bit 15 in the local variable TaskFlags is set <LF>Access Control is set up.<LF>Sets up motor control: Motor A Fwd, Motor B Rwd.<LF>After motor control is set up, the duration of the Sub<LF>is determined:<LF>Local variable Duration<LF>   >>0   A Wait of Duration*10ms is performed<LF>   <<0   Duration is treated as an event list and a <LF>          WaitUntilEvent is performed<LF>   =0   Enters Looping forever<LF>Duration and LocalVar 3-8 are preserved by the sub.
XXXXIf Bit 15 in the local variable TaskFlags is set <LF>Access Control is set up.<LF>Sets up motor control: Motor A Fwd, Motor B Rwd.<LF>After motor control is set up, the duration of the Sub<LF>is determined:<LF>Local variable Duration<LF>   >>0   A Wait of Duration*10ms is performed<LF>   <<0   Duration is treated as an event list and a <LF>          WaitUntilEvent is performed<LF>   =0   Enters Looping forever<LF>Duration and LocalVar 3-8 are preserved by the sub.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Duration:  Choose the duration of the Sub by stringing a single modifier.<LF><LF>TaskFlag:  String a single modifier.<LF>
XXXXIf Bit 15 in the local variable TaskFlags is set <LF>Access Control is set up.<LF>Sets up motor control: Motor A Off, Motor B Fwd.<LF>After motor control is set up, the duration of the Sub<LF>is determined:<LF>Local variable Duration<LF>   >>0   A Wait of Duration*10ms is performed<LF>   <<0   Duration is treated as an event list and a <LF>          WaitUntilEvent is performed<LF>   =0   Enters Looping forever<LF>Duration and LocalVar 3-8 are preserved by the sub.
XXXXIf Bit 15 in the local variable TaskFlags is set <LF>Access Control is set up.<LF>Sets up motor control: Motor A Off, Motor B Fwd.<LF>After motor control is set up, the duration of the Sub<LF>is determined:<LF>Local variable Duration<LF>   >>0   A Wait of Duration*10ms is performed<LF>   <<0   Duration is treated as an event list and a <LF>          WaitUntilEvent is performed<LF>   =0   Enters Looping forever<LF>Duration and LocalVar 3-8 are preserved by the sub.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Duration:  Choose the duration of the Sub by stringing a single modifier.<LF><LF>TaskFlag:  String a single modifier.<LF>
XXXXIf Bit 15 in the local variable TaskFlags is set <LF>Access Control is set up.<LF>Sets up motor control: Motor A Off, Motor B Rwd.<LF>After motor control is set up, the duration of the Sub<LF>is determined:<LF>Local variable Duration<LF>   >>0   A Wait of Duration*10ms is performed<LF>   <<0   Duration is treated as an event list and a <LF>          WaitUntilEvent is performed<LF>   =0   Enters Looping forever<LF>Duration and LocalVar 3-8 are preserved by the sub.
XXXXIf Bit 15 in the local variable TaskFlags is set <LF>Access Control is set up.<LF>Sets up motor control: Motor A Off, Motor B Rwd.<LF>After motor control is set up, the duration of the Sub<LF>is determined:<LF>Local variable Duration<LF>   >>0   A Wait of Duration*10ms is performed<LF>   <<0   Duration is treated as an event list and a <LF>          WaitUntilEvent is performed<LF>   =0   Enters Looping forever<LF>Duration and LocalVar 3-8 are preserved by the sub.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Duration:  Choose the duration of the Sub by stringing a single modifier.<LF><LF>TaskFlag:  String a single modifier.<LF>
XXXXIf Bit 15 in the local variable TaskFlags is set <LF>Access Control is set up.<LF>Sets up motor control: Motor A Rwd, Motor B Fwd.<LF>After motor control is set up, the duration of the Sub<LF>is determined:<LF>Local variable Duration<LF>   >>0   A Wait of Duration*10ms is performed<LF>   <<0   Duration is treated as an event list and a <LF>          WaitUntilEvent is performed<LF>   =0   Enters Looping forever<LF>Duration and LocalVar 3-8 are preserved by the sub.
XXXXIf Bit 15 in the local variable TaskFlags is set <LF>Access Control is set up.<LF>Sets up motor control: Motor A Rwd, Motor B Fwd.<LF>After motor control is set up, the duration of the Sub<LF>is determined:<LF>Local variable Duration<LF>   >>0   A Wait of Duration*10ms is performed<LF>   <<0   Duration is treated as an event list and a <LF>          WaitUntilEvent is performed<LF>   =0   Enters Looping forever<LF>Duration and LocalVar 3-8 are preserved by the sub.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Duration:  Choose the duration of the Sub by stringing a single modifier.<LF><LF>TaskFlag:  String a single modifier.<LF>
XXXXIf Bit 15 in the local variable TaskFlags is set <LF>Access Control is set up.<LF>Sets up motor control: Motor A Rwd, Motor B Off.<LF>After motor control is set up, the duration of the Sub<LF>is determined:<LF>Local variable Duration<LF>   >>0   A Wait of Duration*10ms is performed<LF>   <<0   Duration is treated as an event list and a <LF>          WaitUntilEvent is performed<LF>   =0   Enters Looping forever<LF>Duration and LocalVar 3-8 are preserved by the sub.
XXXXIf Bit 15 in the local variable TaskFlags is set <LF>Access Control is set up.<LF>Sets up motor control: Motor A Rwd, Motor B Off.<LF>After motor control is set up, the duration of the Sub<LF>is determined:<LF>Local variable Duration<LF>   >>0   A Wait of Duration*10ms is performed<LF>   <<0   Duration is treated as an event list and a <LF>          WaitUntilEvent is performed<LF>   =0   Enters Looping forever<LF>Duration and LocalVar 3-8 are preserved by the sub.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Duration:  Choose the duration of the Sub by stringing a single modifier.<LF><LF>TaskFlag:  String a single modifier.<LF>
XXXXIf Bit 15 in the local variable TaskFlags is set <LF>Access Control is set up.<LF>Sets up motor control: Motor A Rwd, Motor B Rwd.<LF>After motor control is set up, the duration of the Sub<LF>is determined:<LF>Local variable Duration<LF>   >>0   A Wait of Duration*10ms is performed<LF>   <<0   Duration is treated as an event list and a <LF>          WaitUntilEvent is performed<LF>   =0   Enters Looping forever<LF>Duration and LocalVar 3-8 are preserved by the sub.
XXXXIf Bit 15 in the local variable TaskFlags is set <LF>Access Control is set up.<LF>Sets up motor control: Motor A Rwd, Motor B Rwd.<LF>After motor control is set up, the duration of the Sub<LF>is determined:<LF>Local variable Duration<LF>   >>0   A Wait of Duration*10ms is performed<LF>   <<0   Duration is treated as an event list and a <LF>          WaitUntilEvent is performed<LF>   =0   Enters Looping forever<LF>Duration and LocalVar 3-8 are preserved by the sub.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Duration:  Choose the duration of the Sub by stringing a single modifier.<LF><LF>TaskFlag:  String a single modifier.<LF>
XXXXIf Bit 15 in the local variable TaskFlags is set <LF>Access Control is setup.<LF>It will do the AvoidLeft motion with the local variable<LF>MovTime between the steps.<LF><LF>All local variables except LocalVar2 are preserved by<LF>the sub.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>MovTime:  String a single modifier.<LF><LF>Task Flag:  String a single modifier.
XXXXIf Bit 15 in the local variable TaskFlags is set <LF>Access Control is setup.<LF>It will do the AvoidRight motion with the local variable <LF>MovTime between the steps.<LF><LF>All local variables except LocalVar2 are preserved by<LF>the sub.
XXXXIf Bit 15 in the local variable TaskFlags is set <LF>Access Control is setup.<LF>It will do the AvoidRight motion with the local variable <LF>MovTime between the steps.<LF><LF>All local variables except LocalVar2 are preserved by<LF>the sub.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>MovTime:  String a single modifier.<LF><LF>Task Flag:  String a single modifier.
XXXXIf Bit 15 in the local variable TaskFlags is set <LF>Access Control is setup.<LF>It will do the Bugshake motion with the local variable <LF>MovTime between the steps.<LF><LF>All local variables except LocalVar2 are preserved by<LF>the sub.
XXXXIf Bit 15 in the local variable TaskFlags is set <LF>Access Control is setup.<LF>It will do the Bugshake motion with the local variable<LF> MovTime between the steps.<LF><LF>All local variables except LocalVar2 are preserved by<LF>the sub.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>MovTime:  String a single modifier.<LF><LF>Task Flag:  String a single modifier.
XXXXIf Bit 15 in the local variable TaskFlags is set <LF>Access Control is setup.<LF>It will do the CircleLeft motion with the local variable <LF>Time between the steps.<LF><LF>Local variable Duration<LF>   >>0   Repeats CircleLeft step Duration times (loop)<LF>   <<0   Duration is treated as an event list and the<LF>          CircleLeft step is performed until the event<LF>          happens.<LF>          After expired duration Motor A and B are floated<LF>   =0   Repeats CircleLeft steps forever<LF><LF>Duration, Time and LocalVar 5-8 are preserved by<LF>the sub.
XXXXIf Bit 15 in the local variable TaskFlags is set <LF>Access Control is setup.<LF>It will do the CircleLeft motion with the local variable <LF>Time between the steps.<LF><LF>Local variable Duration<LF>   >>0   Repeats CircleLeft step Duration times (loop)<LF>   <<0   Duration is treated as an event list and the<LF>          CircleLeft step is performed until the event<LF>          happens.<LF>          After expired duration Motor A and B are floated<LF>   =0   Repeats CircleLeft steps forever<LF><LF>Duration, Time and LocalVar 5-8 are preserved by<LF>the sub.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Duration: String a single modifier.<LF><LF>Time:  String a single modifier.<LF><LF>Task Flag: String a single modifier.
XXXXIf Bit 15 in the local variable TaskFlags is set <LF>Access Control is setup.<LF>It will do the CircleRight motion with the local variable<LF>Time between the steps.<LF><LF>Local variable Duration<LF>   >>0   Repeats CircleRight step Duration times (loop)<LF>   <<0   Duration is treated as an event list and the<LF>          CircleRight step is performed until the event<LF>          happens.<LF>          After expired duration Motor A and B are floated<LF>   =0   Repeats CircleRight steps forever<LF><LF>Duration, Time and LocalVar 5-8 are preserved by the sub.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Duration: String a single modifier.<LF><LF>Time:  String a single modifier.<LF><LF>Task Flag: String a single modifier.
XXXXIf Bit 15 in the local variable TaskFlags is set <LF>Access Control is setup.<LF>It will do the CircleRight motion with the local variable<LF>Time between the steps.<LF><LF>Local variable Duration<LF>   >>0   Repeats CircleRight step Duration times (loop)<LF>   <<0   Duration is treated as an event list and the<LF>          CircleRight step is performed until the event<LF>          happens.<LF>          After expired duration Motor A and B are floated<LF>   =0   Repeats CircleRight steps forever<LF><LF>Duration, Time and LocalVar 5-8 are preserved by<LF>the sub.
XXXXIf Bit 15 in the local variable TaskFlags is set <LF>Access Control is setup.<LF>It will do the LoopAB motion with the local variable <LF>MovTime between the steps.<LF><LF>All local variables except LocalVar2 are preserved by<LF>the sub.
XXXXIf Bit 15 in the local variable TaskFlags is set <LF>Access Control is setup.<LF>it will do the AvoidLeft motion with the local variable<LF>MovTime between the steps.<LF><LF>All local variables except LocalVar2 are preserved by<LF>the sub.
XXXXIf Bit 15 in the local variable TaskFlags is set Access Control is set up.<LF>It will do the Zig Zag motion with the local variable Time between the steps.<LF><LF>Local Variable Duration<LF>   >>0   ZigZag Duration times (loop)<LF>   <<0   Duration is treated as an event list and the<LF>          ZigZag is performed until the event happenes<LF>   =0   ZigZags forever<LF>Duration, Time and LocalVar 5-8 are preserved by<LF>the sub.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Duration: String a single modifier.<LF><LF>Time:  String a single modifier.<LF><LF>Task Flag: String a single modifier.
XXXXIf Bit 15 in the local variable TaskFlags is set Access Control is setup.<LF>It will do the LoopAB motion with the local variable MovTime between the steps.<LF><LF>All local variables except LocalVar2 are preserved by the sub.<LF><LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>MovTime:  String a single modifier.<LF><LF>Task Flag:  String a single modifier.
XXXXIf Loop#
XXXXIf there is an X through this graphic then there is a problem with the IR Transmitter.  Try replacing the battery.
XXXXIf there is an X through this graphic then there is a problem with the RCX.  Make sure the RCX is turned on and near the IR transmitter.  The batteries in the RCX could be low.
XXXXIf there is an X through this graphic then there is a problem with the cable.  Make sure the cable is securely fastened or try a new cable.
XXXXIf there is an X through this graphic then there is a problem with the serial port assignment.  Try reassigning the COM port:<LF><LF>1.  Select Change COM Port from the Administrator screen.<LF><LF>or<LF><LF>2.   From an Inventor window, select Change COM Port from the Project menu.
XXXXIf this is true a dialog box will appear before the acquisition begins.
XXXXIf true, text appears in bold.<LF>
XXXXIf true, text appears in italic.<LF>
XXXXIf true, text appears in outline.<LF>
XXXXIf true, text appears in shadow.<LF>
XXXXIf true, text appears in strikeout.<LF>
XXXXIf true, text appears underlined.<LF>
XXXXIf you want to use the Rcx with this window open, you need to use an RCX start.
XXXXImage
XXXXImage 1
XXXXImage 1 + 2
XXXXImage 1 - 2
XXXXImage 1 AND 2
XXXXImage 1 OR 2
XXXXImage 1/2 or 1/ct
XXXXImage 1x2 or 1xct
XXXXImage 2
XXXXImage 2 Center
XXXXImage Browser In
XXXXImage Browser Out
XXXXImage Dst
XXXXImage Dst (RGB)
XXXXImage Dst Out
XXXXImage Dst Out (RGB)
XXXXImage In
XXXXImage Manipulation
XXXXImage Mask
XXXXImage Model
XXXXImage Name
XXXXImage Operation
XXXXImage Out
XXXXImage Pixels
XXXXImage Pixels (Complex)
XXXXImage Pixels (I16)
XXXXImage Pixels (SGL)
XXXXImage Pixels (U32)
XXXXImage Pixels (U8)
XXXXImage Pixels (float)
XXXXImage Pixels(U8)
XXXXImage Plane
XXXXImage Ratio
XXXXImage Replacement
XXXXImage Src
XXXXImage Src (RGB)
XXXXImage Src A
XXXXImage Src B
XXXXImage Subset
XXXXImage Template
XXXXImage Type
XXXXImage border size
XXXXImage border size in 
XXXXImage border size out
XXXXImage even
XXXXImage even Out
XXXXImage frame
XXXXImage frame Out
XXXXImage in
XXXXImage odd
XXXXImage odd Out
XXXXImage out
XXXXImage to Add
XXXXImages per Column
XXXXImages per Line
XXXXImaq 3DView
XXXXImaq Add
XXXXImaq AddPictToWindow
XXXXImaq And
XXXXImaq ArrayToColorImage
XXXXImaq ArrayToComplexImage
XXXXImaq ArrayToComplexPlane
XXXXImaq ArrayToImage
XXXXImaq AutoBThreshold
XXXXImaq AutoMThreshold
XXXXImaq BasicParticle
XXXXImaq Browser Delete
XXXXImaq Browser Focus
XXXXImaq Browser Focus Setup
XXXXImaq Browser Insert
XXXXImaq Browser Replace
XXXXImaq BuildKernel
XXXXImaq Caliper Tool
XXXXImaq Cast
XXXXImaq Centroid
XXXXImaq CharPtrToString
XXXXImaq ChooseMeasurements
XXXXImaq Circles
XXXXImaq ClipboardToImage
XXXXImaq ColorEqualize
XXXXImaq ColorHistogram
XXXXImaq ColorHistograph
XXXXImaq ColorImageToArray
XXXXImaq ColorThreshold
XXXXImaq ColorToRGB
XXXXImaq ColorUserLookup
XXXXImaq ColorValueToInteger
XXXXImaq Compare
XXXXImaq ComplexAdd
XXXXImaq ComplexAttenuate
XXXXImaq ComplexConjugate
XXXXImaq ComplexDivide
XXXXImaq ComplexFlipFrequency
XXXXImaq ComplexImageToArray
XXXXImaq ComplexMeasure
XXXXImaq ComplexMultiply
XXXXImaq ComplexParticle
XXXXImaq ComplexPlaneToArray
XXXXImaq ComplexPlaneToImage
XXXXImaq ComplexSubtract
XXXXImaq ComplexTruncate
XXXXImaq Convert
XXXXImaq ConvertByLookup
XXXXImaq Convex
XXXXImaq Convolute
XXXXImaq Coordinate Reference
XXXXImaq Copy
XXXXImaq Correlate
XXXXImaq Create
XXXXImaq Danielsson
XXXXImaq Dispose
XXXXImaq Distance
XXXXImaq Divide
XXXXImaq Draw
XXXXImaq DrawText
XXXXImaq Edge Tool
XXXXImaq EdgeDetection
XXXXImaq Equalize
XXXXImaq Error
XXXXImaq Expand
XXXXImaq Extract
XXXXImaq ExtractColorPlanes
XXXXImaq FFT
XXXXImaq FillHole
XXXXImaq FillImage
XXXXImaq Get Angles
XXXXImaq GetCalibration
XXXXImaq GetColorPixelLine
XXXXImaq GetColorPixelValue
XXXXImaq GetFileInfo
XXXXImaq GetHostType
XXXXImaq GetImageInfo
XXXXImaq GetImagePixelPtr
XXXXImaq GetImageSize
XXXXImaq GetKernel
XXXXImaq GetLastKey
XXXXImaq GetOffset
XXXXImaq GetPalette
XXXXImaq GetPixelLine
XXXXImaq GetPixelValue
XXXXImaq GetRowCol
XXXXImaq GetScreenSize
XXXXImaq GetUserPen
XXXXImaq GrayMorphology
XXXXImaq Group ROIs
XXXXImaq Histogram
XXXXImaq Histograph
XXXXImaq ImageBorderOperation
XXXXImaq ImageBorderSize
XXXXImaq ImageToArray
XXXXImaq ImageToClipboard
XXXXImaq ImageToComplexPlane
XXXXImaq IntegerToColorValue
XXXXImaq Interlace
XXXXImaq Interpolate 1D
XXXXImaq InverseFFT
XXXXImaq Label
XXXXImaq Line Gauge Tool
XXXXImaq LineProfile
XXXXImaq LinearAverages
XXXXImaq LogDiff
XXXXImaq LowPass
XXXXImaq MagicWand
XXXXImaq Mask
XXXXImaq MaskToROI
XXXXImaq MathLookup
XXXXImaq MemPeek
XXXXImaq Modulo
XXXXImaq Morphology
XXXXImaq MulDiv
XXXXImaq MultiThreshold
XXXXImaq Multiply
XXXXImaq NthOrder
XXXXImaq Or
XXXXImaq PointDistances
XXXXImaq Quantify
XXXXImaq RGBToColor
XXXXImaq ROI to Picture
XXXXImaq ROIProfile
XXXXImaq ROIToMask
XXXXImaq ReadFile
XXXXImaq RejectBorder
XXXXImaq RemoveParticle
XXXXImaq ReplaceColorPlane
XXXXImaq Resample
XXXXImaq Rotate
XXXXImaq Segmentation
XXXXImaq Separation
XXXXImaq SetCalibration
XXXXImaq SetColorPixelLine
XXXXImaq SetColorPixelValue
XXXXImaq SetImageSize
XXXXImaq SetOffset
XXXXImaq SetPixelLine
XXXXImaq SetPixelValue
XXXXImaq SetRowCol
XXXXImaq SetUserPen
XXXXImaq SetupBrush
XXXXImaq Shape Match Tool
XXXXImaq Shift
XXXXImaq Shift16To8
XXXXImaq Skeleton
XXXXImaq Status
XXXXImaq Subtract
XXXXImaq Symmetry
XXXXImaq Threshold
XXXXImaq Ungroup ROIs
XXXXImaq UserLookup
XXXXImaq WindCIN V 4.02
XXXXImaq WindDraw
XXXXImaq WindDrawRect
XXXXImaq WindEraseROI
XXXXImaq WindGetMouse
XXXXImaq WindGetROI
XXXXImaq WindGrid
XXXXImaq WindInterface
XXXXImaq WindLastEvent
XXXXImaq WindMove
XXXXImaq WindROIColor
XXXXImaq WindSetROI
XXXXImaq WindSetup
XXXXImaq WindShow
XXXXImaq WindSize
XXXXImaq WindToolsClose
XXXXImaq WindToolsMove
XXXXImaq WindToolsSelect
XXXXImaq WindToolsSetup
XXXXImaq WindToolsShow
XXXXImaq WindUserClose
XXXXImaq WindUserEvent
XXXXImaq WindUserMove
XXXXImaq WindUserSetup
XXXXImaq WindUserShow
XXXXImaq WindUserStatus
XXXXImaq WindXYZoom
XXXXImaq WindZoom
XXXXImaq WriteFile
XXXXImaq Xor
XXXXImport JPEG
XXXXImport a JPEG file from your computer into this space.
XXXXImport...
XXXXImproved Program
XXXXIn Tools 4 and 5 you are free to label your axes as you wish.
XXXXIncrement
XXXXIncremental Value
XXXXIndex
XXXXIndex Out
XXXXIndex Page Links
XXXXIndicates all the images created and the space in memory occupied.<LF><LF>This VI cannot be used as a subVI; it must be executed from its front panel. All existing images are written at intervals or step-by-step depending on the action chosen. This VI also gives the total space in kilobytes occupied by the existing images. It can be used during the writing of an application. 
XXXXIndicates and sets the position of an image window.<LF><LF>Window Number (0…15) is a number from 0 to 15 that specifies the image window. The default value is 0. <LF><LF>Coordinates (screen) is a structure that contains the screen coordinates, in X and Y positions, where the image window is located or where the image window will be placed. This input is only necessary when the input Get/Set Status? is set to TRUE (Set).<LF><LF>Get/Set Status? (Set) specifies if the user wants to know the coordinates of an image window or change the position of an image window. The default is set to TRUE (Set).<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Coordinates (screen) returns the present coordinates (X and Y) of an image window. <LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF>
XXXXIndicates and sets the size of an image window. You also can use this VI to set scroll bars for image windows and test for the presence of scroll bars in an image window. <LF><LF>Window Number is a number from 0 to 15 that specifies the image window. The default value is 0. <LF><LF>Width & Height is a cluster containing two elements. Setting the input Get/Set Status to TRUE (Set) allows the user to specify the width and height of an image window. If the input is not connected, or if the value is (0, 0), the image window is resized automatically to the image associated with it. <LF><LF>Note:	This value is independent of the size of the scroll bars. <LF><LF>Scrollbars? (N) controls the presence of scroll bars in an image window. By default, scroll bars are not used. An image window can be resized and moved by the user in the presence or absence of scroll bars. <LF><LF>Get/Set Status? (Set) determines if the user wants to know the position of an image window or specify the position of an image window. The default value is TRUE (Set). <LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Width & Height returns the present width and height of an image window. <LF><LF>Note:	The returned value includes the size of the scroll bars. <LF><LF>Has Scrollbars? returns the present scroll bar status for an image window. <LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXIndicates the sample rate for sound input or the update rate for sound  output
XXXXIndicates whether the sound is (should be) configured for 8 bit or 16 bit.
XXXXIndicates whether the sound is (should be) configured for mono(one channel) or stereo (two channels).
XXXXIndirect Var (0-47)
XXXXInfo
XXXXInit Internet Image
XXXXInit Large Image
XXXXInit Large Image.vi
XXXXInit Mic
XXXXInit Small Image
XXXXInit error code
XXXXInitial Point
XXXXInitialize Acceleration Sensor Logging
XXXXInitialize Barometeric Sensor Logging
XXXXInitialize Camera Sensor Logging
XXXXInitialize Clicks Sensor Logging
XXXXInitialize Container Logging
XXXXInitialize Fast Timer Logging
XXXXInitialize Generic Sensor Logging
XXXXInitialize HumiPro LogIT Sensor Logging
XXXXInitialize Light Sensor Logging
XXXXInitialize Lux Sensor Logging
XXXXInitialize Mail Logging
XXXXInitialize Position LogIT Sensor Logging
XXXXInitialize Pressure LogIT Sensor Logging
XXXXInitialize ProTemp LogIT Sensor Logging
XXXXInitialize Redox Sensor Logging
XXXXInitialize Rotation Sensor Logging
XXXXInitialize Sound LogIT Sensor Logging
XXXXInitialize Temperature (F) Sensor Logging
XXXXInitialize Temperature Sensor Logging
XXXXInitialize Timer Logging
XXXXInitialize Touch Sensor Logging
XXXXInitialize Voltmeter LogIT Sensor Logging 
XXXXInitialize pH LogIT Sensor Logging
XXXXInitializeTouch and Release Sensor Logging
XXXXInitializes a Container to take data and configures data logging settings.<LF><LF>The default is the Red Conatiner is selected and data is captured in the Red Data Set.<LF><LF>Note: This command must appear before any data logging of the container can begin.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container Value: String in the value of the container to be logged: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Data Set: String the data set modifier that corresponds to the data set you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Total Buffer Size: String in the maximum number of points in buffer.  This number ranges from 0-2000 and is dependent on the amount of memory used by the program.
XXXXInitializes a Container to take data and configures data logging settings.<LF><LF>The default is the Red Container is selected and data is captured in the Red Data Set.<LF><LF>Note: This command must appear before any data logging of the container can begin.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container Value: String in the value of the conatiner to be logged: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Data Set: String the data set modifier that corresponds to the data set you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Total Buffer Size: String in the maximum number of points in buffer.  This number ranges from 0-2000 and is dependent on the amount of memory used by the program.
XXXXInitializes a Container to take data and configures data logging settings.<LF><LF>The default is the Red Container is selected and data is captured in the Red Data Set.<LF><LF>Note: This command must appear before any data logging of the container can begin.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container Value: String in the value of the container to be logged: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Data Set: String the data set modifier that corresponds to the data set you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Total Buffer Size: String in the maximum number of points in buffer.
XXXXInitializes a Timer to take data and configures data logging settings.<LF><LF>The default is the Red Timer is selected and data is captured in the Red Data Set.<LF><LF>Note: This command must appear before any data logging of the timer can begin.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Timer Value: String in the value of the timer to be logged.<LF><LF>Data Set: String the data set modifier that corresponds to the data set you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Total Buffer Size: String in the maximum number of points in buffer.   
XXXXInitializes a Timer to take data and configures data logging settings.<LF><LF>The default is the Red Timer is selected and data is captured in the Red Data Set.<LF><LF>Note: This command must appear before any data logging of the timer can begin.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Timer Value: String in the value of the timer to be logged: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Data Set: String  the data set modifier that corresponds to the data set you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Total Buffer Size: String in the maximum number of points in buffer.   
XXXXInitializes a fast Timer to take data and configures data logging settings. (logs every 1/100th of a sec).<LF><LF>The default is the Red Timer is selected and data is captured in the Red Data Set.<LF><LF>Note: This command must appear before any data logging of the timer can begin.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Timer Value: String in the value of the timer to be logged.<LF><LF>Data Set: String the data set modifier that corresponds to the data set you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Total Buffer Size: String in the maximum number of points in buffer.   
XXXXInitializes a fast Timer to take data and configures data logging settings. (logs every 1/100th of a sec).<LF><LF>The default is the Red Timer is selected and data is captured in the Red Data Set.<LF><LF>Note: This command must appear before any data logging of the timer can begin.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Timer Value: String in the value of the timer to be logged: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Data Set: String  the data set modifier that corresponds to the data set you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Total Buffer Size: String in the maximum number of points in buffer.   
XXXXInitializes for a Acceleration Sensor to take data and configures data logging settings.<LF><LF>The default is the Sensor is set up on Port 1 and data is captured in the Red Data Set.<LF><LF>Note: This command must appear before any data logging of the sensor can begin.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port Value: String in the port that the sensor is connected to.<LF><LF>Data Set: String the data set modifier that corresponds to the data set you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Total Buffer Size: String in the maximum number of points in buffer.
XXXXInitializes for a Barometeric Sensor to take data and configures data logging settings.<LF><LF>The default is the Sensor is set up on Port 1 and data is captured in the Red Data Set.<LF><LF>Note: This command must appear before any data logging of the sensor can begin.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port Value: String in the port that the sensor is connected to.<LF><LF>Data Set: String the data set modifier that corresponds to the data set you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Total Buffer Size: String in the maximum number of points in buffer.
XXXXInitializes for a Generic Powered Sensor to take data and configures data logging settings.<LF><LF>The default is the Sensor is set up on Port 1 and data is captured in the Red Data Set.<LF><LF>Note: This command must appear before any data logging of the sensor can begin.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port Value: String in the port that the sensor is connected to.<LF><LF>Data Set: String the data set modifier that corresponds to the data set you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Total Buffer Size: String in the maximum number of points in buffer.
XXXXInitializes for a Generic Sensor to take data and configures data logging settings.<LF><LF>The default is the Sensor is set up on Port 1 and data is captured in the Red Data Set.<LF><LF>Note: This command must appear before any data logging of the sensor can begin.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port Value: String in the port that the sensor is connected to.<LF><LF>Data Set: String the data set modifier that corresponds to the data set you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Total Buffer Size: String in the maximum number of points in buffer.
XXXXInitializes for a Humidity Sensor to take data and configures data logging settings.<LF><LF>The default is the Sensor is set up on Port 1 and data is captured in the Red Data Set.<LF><LF>Note: This command must appear before any data logging of the sensor can begin.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port Value: String in the port that the humidity sensor is connected to.<LF><LF>Data Set: String the data set modifier that corresponds to the data set you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Total Buffer Size: String in the maximum number of points in buffer.
XXXXInitializes for a Lux Sensor to take data and configures data logging settings.<LF><LF>The default is the Sensor is set up on Port 1 and data is captured in the Red Data Set.<LF><LF>Note: This command must appear before any data logging of the sensor can begin.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port Value: String in the port that the sensor is connected to.<LF><LF>Data Set: String the data set modifier that corresponds to the data set you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Total Buffer Size: String in the maximum number of points in buffer.
XXXXInitializes for a Position Sensor to take data and configures data logging settings.<LF><LF>By default the sensor is set up on Port 1 and data is captured in the Red Data Set.<LF><LF>Note: This command must appear before any data logging of the sensor can begin.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port Value: String in the port that the Position Sensor is connected to.<LF><LF>Data Set: String the data set modifier that corresponds to the data set you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Total Buffer Size: String in the maximum number of points in buffer.
XXXXInitializes for a Position Sensor to take data and configures data logging settings.<LF><LF>By default the sensor is set up on Port 1 and data is captured in the Red Data Set.<LF><LF>Note: This command must appear before any data logging of the sensor can begin.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port Value: String in the port that the Position sensor is connected to.<LF><LF>Data Set: String the data set modifier that corresponds to the data set you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Total Buffer Size: String in the maximum number of points in buffer.
XXXXInitializes for a Pressure Sensor to take data and configures data logging settings.<LF><LF>The default is the Sensor is set up on Port 1 and data is captured in the Red Data Set.<LF><LF>Note: This command must appear before any data logging of the sensor can begin.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port Value: String in the port that the pressure sensor is connected to.<LF><LF>Data Set: String the data set modifier that corresponds to the data set you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Total Buffer Size: String in the maximum number of points in buffer.
XXXXInitializes for a Redox Sensor to take data and configures data logging settings.<LF><LF>The default is the Sensor is set up on Port 1 and data is captured in the Red Data Set.<LF><LF>Note: This command must appear before any data logging of the sensor can begin.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port Value: String in the port that the sensor is connected to.<LF><LF>Data Set: String the data set modifier that corresponds to the data set you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Total Buffer Size: String in the maximum number of points in buffer.
XXXXInitializes for a Sound Level Sensor to take data and configures data logging settings.<LF><LF>The default is the Sensor is set up on Port 1 and data is captured in the Red Data Set.<LF><LF>Note: This command must appear before any data logging of the sensor can begin.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port Value: String in the port that the sound level sensor is connected to.<LF><LF>Data Set: String the data set modifier that corresponds to the data set you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Total Buffer Size: String in the maximum number of points in buffer.
XXXXInitializes for a Temperature Sensor to take data and configures data logging settings.<LF><LF>The default is the Sensor is set up on Port 1 and data is captured in the Red Data Set.<LF><LF>Note: This command must appear before any data logging of the sensor can begin.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port Value: String in the port that the temperature sensor is connected to<LF><LF>Data Set: String the data set modifier that corresponds to the data set you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Total Buffer Size: String in the maximum number of points in buffer.
XXXXInitializes for a Voltage Sensor to take data and configures data logging settings.<LF><LF>The default is the Sensor is set up on Port 1 and data is captured in the Red Data Set.<LF><LF>Note: This command must appear before any data logging of the sensor can begin.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port Value: String in the port that the sensor is connected to<LF><LF>Data Set: String the data set modifier that corresponds to the data set you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Total Buffer Size: String in the maximum number of points in buffer.
XXXXInitializes for a pH Sensor to take data and configures data logging settings.<LF><LF>The default is the Sensor is set up on Port 1 and data is captured in the Red Data Set.<LF><LF>Note: This command must appear before any data logging of the sensor can begin.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port Value: String in the port that the pH sensor is connected to.<LF><LF>Data Set: String the data set modifier that corresponds to the data set you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Total Buffer Size: String in the maximum number of points in buffer.
XXXXInitializes system registers.<LF>All local variables are preserved by the sub.
XXXXInitializes the Light Sensor to take data and configures data logging settings.<LF><LF>The default is the Light Sensor is set up on Port 1 and data is captured in the Red Data Set.<LF><LF>Note: This command must appear before any data logging of the sensor can begin.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port Value: String in the port that the light sensor is connected to.<LF><LF>Data Set: String  the data set modifier that corresponds to the data set you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Total Buffer Size: String in the maximum number of points in buffer.   This number ranges from 0-2000 and is dependent on the amount of memory used by the program.
XXXXInitializes the Light Sensor to take data and configures data logging settings.<LF><LF>The default is the Light Sensor is set up on Port 1 and data is captured in the Red Data Set.<LF><LF>Note: This command must appear before any data logging of the sensor can begin.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port Value: String in the port that the light sensor is connected to.<LF><LF>Data Set: String the data set modifier that corresponds to the data set you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Total Buffer Size: String in the maximum number of points in buffer.  This number ranges from 0-2000 and is dependent on the amount of memory used by the program.
XXXXInitializes the RCX to take Mail data and configures data logging settings.<LF><LF>The default is the mail data is captured in the Red Data Set.<LF><LF>Note: This command must appear before any data logging of the mail can begin.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Data Set: String the data set modifier that corresponds to the data set you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Total Buffer Size: String in the maximum number of points in buffer.   This number ranges from 0-2000 and is dependent on the amount of memory used by the program.
XXXXInitializes the RCX to take Mail data and configures data logging settings.<LF><LF>The default is the mail data is captured in the Red Data Set.<LF><LF>Note: This command must appear before any data logging of the mail can begin.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Data Set: String the data set modifier that corresponds to the data set you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Total Buffer Size: String in the maximum number of points in buffer.  This number ranges from 0-2000 and  is dependent on the amount of memory used by the program.   
XXXXInitializes the Rotation Sensor to take data (16ths of a rotation) and configures data logging settings.<LF><LF>The default is the Rotation Sensor is set up on Port 1 and data is captured in the Red Data Set.  <LF><LF>Note: This command must appear before any data logging of the sensor can begin.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port Value: String in the port that the rotation sensor is connected to.<LF><LF>Data Set: String the data set modifier that corresponds to the data set you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Total Buffer Size: String in the maximum number of points in buffer. This number ranges from 0-2000 and is dependent on the amount of memory used by the program.
XXXXInitializes the Rotation Sensor to take data (16ths of a rotation) and configures data logging settings.<LF><LF>The default is the Rotation Sensor is set up on Port 1 and data is captured in the Red Data Set.<LF><LF>Note: This command must appear before any data logging of the sensor can begin.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port Value: String in the port that the rotation sensor is connected to.<LF><LF>Data Set: String the data set modifier that corresponds to the data set you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Total Buffer Size: String in the maximum number of points in buffer.  This number ranges from 0-2000 and is dependent on the amount of memory used by the  program.
XXXXInitializes the Temperature Sensor to take data and configures data logging settings.<LF><LF>The default is  the Temperature Sensor is set up on Port 1 and data is captured in Fahrenheit in the Red Data Set.<LF><LF>Note: This command must appear before any data logging of the sensor can begin.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port Value: String in the port that the temperature sensor is connected to.<LF><LF>Data Set: String  the data set modifier that corresponds to the data set you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Total Buffer Size: String in the maximum number of points in buffer.  This number ranges from 0-2000 and is dependent on the amount of memory used by the program.
XXXXInitializes the Temperature Sensor to take data and configures data logging settings.<LF><LF>The default is the Temperature Sensor is set up on Port 1 and data is captured in Fahrenheit in the Red Data Set.<LF><LF>Note: This command must appear before any data logging of the sensor can begin.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port Value: String in the port that the temperature sensor is connected to.<LF><LF>Data Set: String  the data set modifier that corresponds to the data set you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Total Buffer Size: String in the maximum number of points in buffer.  This number ranges from 0-2000 and is dependent on the amount of memory used by the program.
XXXXInitializes the Temperature Sensor to take data and configures data logging settings.<LF><LF>The default is the Temperature Sensor is set up on Port 1 and data is recorded in Celsius in the Red Data Set.<LF><LF>Note: This command must appear before any data logging of the sensor can begin.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port Value: String in the port that the temperature sensor is connected to.<LF><LF>Data Set: String  the data set modifier that corresponds to the data set you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF><LF>Total Buffer Size: String in the maximum number of points in buffer.<LF>This number ranges from 0-2000 and is dependent on the amount of memory used by the program.
XXXXInitializes the Temperature Sensor to take data and configures data logging settings.<LF><LF>The default is the Temperature Sensor is set up on Port 1 and data is recorded in Celsius in the Red Data Set.<LF><LF>Note: This command must appear before any data logging of the sensor can begin.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port Value: String in the port that the temperature sensor is connected to.<LF><LF>Data Set: String the data set modifier that corresponds to the data set you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Total Buffer Size: String in the maximum number of points in buffer.  This number ranges from 0-2000 and is dependent on the amount  of memory used by the program.
XXXXInitializes the Touch Sensor to take data and configures data logging settings.<LF><LF>The default is the Touch Sensor is set up on Port 1 and data is captured in the Red Data Set.<LF><LF>Note: This command must appear before any data logging of the sensor can begin.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port Value: String in the port that the touch sensor is connected to.<LF><LF>Data Set: String the data set modifier that corresponds to the data set you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Total Buffer Size: String in the maximum number of points in buffer.  This number ranges from 0-2000 and is dependent on the amount of  memory used by the program.
XXXXInitializes the Touch Sensor to take data based on the number of clicks and configures data logging settings.<LF><LF>The default is the Touch Sensor is set up on Port 1 and data is captured in the Red Data Set.<LF><LF>Note: This command must appear before any data logging of the sensor can begin.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port Value: String in the port that the touch sensor is connected to.<LF><LF>Data Set: String  the data set modifier that corresponds to the data set you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Total Buffer Size: String in the maximum number of points in buffer.  This number ranges from 0-2000 and is dependent on the amount of memory used by the program.
XXXXInitializes the Touch Sensor to take data based on the number of clicks and configures data logging settings.<LF><LF>The default is the Touch Sensor is set up on Port 1 and data is captured in the Red Data Set.<LF><LF>Note: This command must appear before any data logging of the sensor can begin.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port Value: String in the port that the touch sensor is connected to.<LF><LF>Data Set: String the data set modifier that corresponds to the data set you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Total Buffer Size: String in the maximum number of points in buffer. This number ranges from 0-2000 and is dependent on the amount of memory used by the program.
XXXXInitializes the Touch Sensor to take data based on the number of touches and releases and configures data logging settings.<LF><LF>The default is the Touch Sensor is set up on Port 1 and data is captured in the Red Data Set.<LF><LF>Note: This command must appear before any data logging of the sensor can begin.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port Value: String in the port that the touch sensor is connected to.<LF><LF>Data Set: String  the data set modifier that corresponds to the data set you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Total Buffer Size: String in the maximum number of points in buffer.  This number ranges from 0-2000 and is dependent on the amount of memory used by the program.
XXXXInput 1
XXXXInput 2
XXXXInput 3
XXXXInput 4
XXXXInput 5
XXXXInput 6
XXXXInput 7
XXXXInput 8
XXXXInput Data
XXXXInput Parameters
XXXXInput port modifier.<LF><LF>String this modifier to a command to select <LF>Input Port 1.
XXXXInput port modifier.<LF><LF>String this modifier to a command to select <LF>Input Port 2.
XXXXInput port modifier.<LF><LF>String this modifier to a command to select <LF>Input Port 3.
XXXXInput port modifier.<LF><LF>String this modifier to a command to select <LF>Input Port 4.
XXXXInput port modifier.<LF><LF>String this modifier to a command to select <LF>Input Port 5.
XXXXInput port modifier.<LF><LF>String this modifier to a command to select <LF>Input Port 6.
XXXXInput port modifier.<LF><LF>String this modifier to a command to select <LF>Input Port 7.
XXXXInput port modifier.<LF><LF>String this modifier to a command to select <LF>Input Port 8.
XXXXInput port modifier.<LF><LF>String this modifier to a command to select Input Port 1.
XXXXInput port modifier.<LF><LF>String this modifier to a command to select Input Port 2.
XXXXInput port modifier.<LF><LF>String this modifier to a command to select Input Port 3.
XXXXInput port modifier.<LF><LF>String this modifier to a command to select Input Port 4.
XXXXInput port modifier.<LF><LF>String this modifier to a command to select Input Port 5.
XXXXInput port modifier.<LF><LF>String this modifier to a command to select Input Port 6.
XXXXInput port modifier.<LF><LF>String this modifier to a command to select Input Port 7.
XXXXInput port modifier.<LF><LF>String this modifier to a command to select Input Port 8.
XXXXInputs
XXXXInsert
XXXXInsertion Mode
XXXXInsertion Point 
XXXXInserts text in an image.<LF>  	<LF>String (empty by default) is the text to write in an image. The string can be composed of multiple lines separated by a hard return.<LF>	<LF>Color is the mode for writing the text. The default is 0, which specifies white.<LF><LF>  0	White	(Default) White on the image background.<LF>  1	Black	Black on the image background.<LF>  2	Inverted	Text inverted on the image background.<LF>  3	Black on White	<LF>  4	White on Black	<LF><LF>Image Src is the image reference source. It must be an 8-bit or RGB image.<LF><LF>Image Dst is the reference of the image destination. If it is connected then it must be the same type as the Image Src. <LF><LF>Insertion Point is an array (x and y) specifying the location in which the text is inserted. The text position depends on the alignment mode chosen. The default is (0, 0).<LF><LF>Font, Size & Style is a cluster that enables the user to choose the font, size, style, and alignment and contains the following elements:<LF><LF>desired font specifies the character type of the text. The following values are possible:<LF><LF>  0	User-specified Font<LF>  1	(Default) Application Font<LF>  2	System Font<LF>  3	Dialog Font<LF><LF>user-specified font is a cluster containing the specific font characteristics for the text to draw. This specification is ignored unless the desired font control is set to User-specified Font.<LF><LF>Note:	The list of fonts on a Macintosh and Windows are different.<LF><LF>Font Name is the name of the user-specified font.<LF>	Strikeout? If TRUE, text appears in strikeout.<LF>	Italic? If TRUE, text appears in italic.<LF>	Underline? If TRUE, text appears underlined.<LF>	Outline? If TRUE, text appears outlined.<LF>	Shadow? If TRUE, text appears shadowed.<LF>	Bold? If TRUE, text appears in bold.<LF>	Size is the size of the font. The default is 9.<LF><LF>Alignment specifies the alignment of the text. The following values are possible: Left (default), Center, and Right.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Dst Out is the reference to the destination (output) image which receives the processing results of the VI. If the Image Dst is connected, the Image Dst Out is the same as Image Dst. Otherwise, Image Dst Out refers to the image referenced by Image Src.<LF><LF>String width returns the string length from the text.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXIntegrate
XXXXIntegrated Data Sets
XXXXIntensity
XXXXIntensity Graph
XXXXIntensity of current pixel.
XXXXInteractive Factory
XXXXInterlace/Separate (Interlace)
XXXXInternal Clk
XXXXInternal_Edge
XXXXInternet Begin
XXXXInternet End
XXXXInternet Upload
XXXXInterpolated array
XXXXInterpolation Type
XXXXInterrogate RCX
XXXXInterval Range
XXXXInterval Range 
XXXXInterval Width
XXXXIntgLimit (1-32767)
XXXXInvent Paths
XXXXInventor 1
XXXXInventor 2
XXXXInventor 3
XXXXInventor 4
XXXXInventor Level
XXXXInventor Path
XXXXInventor Programs
XXXXInventor Themes
XXXXInventor Vault
XXXXInvert
XXXXInverted
XXXXInvestigator
XXXXIs RCX in View?
XXXXItalic?
XXXXItem Names
XXXXItteration value of 0 will reload code into the RCX.  Any number other than 0 will run the existing code on the RCX.
XXXXJournal Area
XXXXJump Number
XXXXJump back to the Start of Loop command.<LF><LF>Note: The Start of Loop command is required earlier <LF>in the string.<LF>
XXXXJump back to the Start of Loop command.<LF><LF>Note: The Start of Loop command is required earlier in the string.<LF>
XXXXJumping
XXXXKeep original
XXXXKeep/Replace Value (Replace)
XXXXKeeps bits found in Image Src A that are absent from Image Src B.<LF>    	<LF>Constant is a constant value that can replace Image Src B for image-constant operations. The default is 0.<LF><LF>Image Src A is the reference to the source (input) image A.<LF><LF>Image Dst is the reference to the destination image. If it is connected, it must be the same type as Image Src A.<LF><LF>Image Src B is the reference to the source (input) image B.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Dst Out is the reference to the destination (output) image which receives the processing results of the VI. If the Image Dst is connected, then Image Dst Out is the same as Image Dst. Otherwise, Image Dst Out refers to the image referenced by Image Src A.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>This VI is performed for each pixel (x, y) in the following manner:<LF><LF>If two images are connected on input, then Dst(x, y) = SrcA(x, y) And Not (SrcB(x, y)).<LF><LF>If the input Image Src B is not connected, then Dst(x, y) = SrcA(x, y) And Not (Constant).
XXXXKernel
XXXXKernel Code
XXXXKernel Family
XXXXKernel Number
XXXXKernel Size (3,5,...)
XXXXKernel String
XXXXKernel code
XXXXKey present
XXXXKey pressed
XXXXKill all?
XXXXLASM View?
XXXXLCD
XXXXLCD / LED (LCD)
XXXXLCD/LED (LCD)
XXXXLED
XXXXLEGO Dacta
XXXXLEGO Image
XXXXLEGO Sensor ID
XXXXLF
XXXXLIST OF LINKS
XXXXLOCKED
XXXXLOW
XXXXLabel the bin by typing in the white square.
XXXXLabel1002:
XXXXLabels
XXXXLabels the particles in a binary image.<LF>  	<LF>Connectivity 4/8 (8) specifies the connectivity used for particle detection. The default is 8.<LF><LF>Image Src is the reference to the source (input) image.<LF><LF>Image Dst is the reference to the destination image. If it is connected, it must be the same type as the Image Src.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Dst Out is the reference to the destination (output) image which receives the processing results of the VI. If the Image Dst is connected, then Image Dst Out is the same as Image Dst. Otherwise, Image Dst Out refers to the image referenced by Image Src.<LF><LF>Number of Particles indicates the number of particles detected in the image.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>This operation applies a color to all pixels composing the same group of pixels (a particle). This color level is encoded in 8 or 16 bits, depending on the image type. Therefore, 255 particles can be labeled in an 8-bit image and 65535 particles in a 16-bit image. If you want to label more than 255 particles in an 8-bit image, you must perform a threshold operation with an interval of [255, 255] after processing the first 254 particles. The goal of this threshold operation is to eliminate the first 254 particles in order to visualize the next 254 particles. <LF><LF>Image Src is the input image and Image Dst is the resulting image. This operation requires that Image Src and Image Dst be the same image type and that the border for these images be greater or equal to 2. 
XXXXLamp
XXXXLamp A
XXXXLamp B
XXXXLamp C
XXXXLanding
XXXXLargetto
XXXXLargo
XXXXLast Error Code
XXXXLast Error Message
XXXXLast Path
XXXXLast filename
XXXXLast operation
XXXXLast theme
XXXXLast wait for
XXXXLatch
XXXXLavender Bin
XXXXLeft
XXXXLeft 1 pix? (No)
XXXXLeft hand A & Right hand
XXXXLeft hand B
XXXXLegato
XXXXLevel
XXXXLevel Type
XXXXLight
XXXXLight (percent)
XXXXLight / R,G,B (Light)
XXXXLight Blue Bin
XXXXLight Container
XXXXLight Data
XXXXLight Measurements
XXXXLight Sensor
XXXXLight Sensor .05s
XXXXLight Sensor .05s with motor
XXXXLight Sensor Equal Fork
XXXXLight Sensor Fork
XXXXLight Threshold
XXXXLight and Angle Sensor
XXXXLight entering Dark state
XXXXLight entering Light state
XXXXLight entering Normal state
XXXXLight value
XXXXLights up when an RCX is present.
XXXXLine
XXXXLine 1
XXXXLine Coordinates
XXXXLine Graph
XXXXLine Information
XXXXLine Slope
XXXXLine Titles
XXXXLine stuff
XXXXLineWidth(Pixels)
XXXXLines
XXXXLittle Endian (Intel)
XXXXLoad Color Palette? (No)
XXXXLoad Data
XXXXLoad Program File
XXXXLoad Scroll From File
XXXXLoad Sound
XXXXLoading files...
XXXXLoading...
XXXXLoads and configures the user window. <LF><LF>Window Number (17...22) is a number from 17 to 22 that specifies the user window. It is possible to manipulate six different user windows. The default value is 17.<LF><LF>Foreground Image is an 8-bit or RGB user image. The corresponding part of the image is displayed when a zone within this image is FALSE.<LF><LF>Background Image is an 8-bit or RGB user image. The corresponding part of the image is displayed when a zone within this image is TRUE.<LF><LF>User Mechanical Actions specifies the method of operation of each zone. Two modes are possible: <LF><LF>0	Switch	The first click causes the zone to pass to TRUE. A second click on the same zone causes it to change to FALSE.<LF>1	Latch	A click on the zone causes it to change to TRUE temporarily. <LF>Note:	In both cases, the status of the zone can be determined using IMAQ WindUserEvent or IMAQ WindUserStatus.<LF><LF>User Rectangles is a 2D array that defines the coordinates of each zone in the user window. Each line in this array must contain the four coordinates that specify the position of the zone. <LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXLocations
XXXXLock Context Help &L
XXXXLog
XXXXLog 2
XXXXLog Clock
XXXXLog Time Stamp
XXXXLog the reading on the clock to a Data Set.<LF>The default is to log the clock to the Red Data Set.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Data Set: String in the Data Set to be used for logging.<LF><LF>Total Buffer Size:  This ranges from 0-2000 and is dependent on the memory used by the computer.
XXXXLog the time to a Data Set.<LF>The default is to log the time since you began taking data to the Red Data Set.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Data Set: String in the Data Set to be used for logging.
XXXXLog/Don't Log
XXXXLogging info
XXXXLogs the value of the sensor or other item to a Data Set.<LF><LF>The default is the value of Port 1 is captured in the Red Data Set.<LF><LF>Note: Initialize Logging and Start Logging are still needed to use this command.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Data Set: String the data set modifier that corresponds to the data set you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Sensor value: String in the port or item to read value from. 
XXXXLongest Segment Coordinates
XXXXLongest Segment Length
XXXXLookup Table
XXXXLoop While Angle Sensor Is Greater Than
XXXXLoop While Angle Sensor Is Less Than 
XXXXLoop While Camera Sensor Is Greater Than
XXXXLoop While Camera Sensor Is Less Than
XXXXLoop While Celsius Is Less Than Or Equal To
XXXXLoop While Celsius is Greater Than
XXXXLoop While Clock Is Greater Than
XXXXLoop While Clock Value Is Less Than 
XXXXLoop While Container Is Greater Than
XXXXLoop While Container Value Is Less Than
XXXXLoop While Fahrenheit Is Greater Than
XXXXLoop While Fahrenheit Is Less Than 
XXXXLoop While Humidity is Greater Than (HumiPro LogIT)
XXXXLoop While Humidity is Less Than (HumiPro LogIT)
XXXXLoop While Light Sensor Is Greater Than
XXXXLoop While Light Sensor is Less Than 
XXXXLoop While Number Of Clicks Is Less Than 
XXXXLoop While Number Of Touches and Releases Is Less Than
XXXXLoop While Points in Data Set is Less Than
XXXXLoop While Pressure Is Greater Than (Pressure LogIT)
XXXXLoop While Pressure is Less Than (Pressure LogIT)
XXXXLoop While Sound Level is Greater Than (Sound LogIT)
XXXXLoop While Sound Level is Less Than (Sound LogIT)
XXXXLoop While Temperature (C) is Greater Than (ProTemp LogIT)
XXXXLoop While Temperature (C) is Less Than (ProTemp LogIT)
XXXXLoop While Touch Sensor Is Pushed
XXXXLoop While Touch Sensor Is Released
XXXXLoop While Value Of Mail Is Greater Than
XXXXLoop While Value Of Mail Is Less Than
XXXXLoop While Value Of Timer Is Greater Than
XXXXLoop While Value Of Timer Is Less Than 
XXXXLoop While Voltage Sensor Is Greater Than (Voltmeter LogIT)
XXXXLoop While Voltage Sensor is Less Than (Voltmeter LogIT)
XXXXLoop While pH is Greater Than (pH LogIT)
XXXXLoop While pH is Less Than (ph LogIT)
XXXXLow
XXXXLow Pass/High Pass (Low)
XXXXLow pass/High pass (Low pass)
XXXXLower Cutoff
XXXXLower Threshold
XXXXLower Threshold (0-10)
XXXXLower Threshold (0-15)
XXXXLower Value
XXXXLower value
XXXXLux LogIT
XXXXLux Sensor Container
XXXXLux Sensor Fork
XXXXMAIN TEXT
XXXXMachine Access List
XXXXMail Container
XXXXMail Value
XXXXMail box
XXXXMail received
XXXXMailbox Equal Fork
XXXXMailbox Fork
XXXXMake Curve
XXXXMake the program jump to a specific place in the <LF>string.<LF><LF>Note: The Red Land command is needed somewhere <LF>else in the same task.
XXXXMake the program jump to a specific place in the <LF>string.<LF>The default jump number is 1.<LF><LF>Note: The Landing command is needed somewhere <LF>else in the same task.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Jump Number: String in a single number from 1 to<LF> 20 to represent the jump number.  The same <LF>number must be used in the corresponding Landing command.
XXXXMake the program jump to a specific place in the string.<LF><LF>Note: The Black Land command is needed somewhere <LF>else in the same task.
XXXXMake the program jump to a specific place in the string.<LF><LF>Note: The Black Land command is needed somewhere else in the same task.
XXXXMake the program jump to a specific place in the string.<LF><LF>Note: The Blue Land command is needed somewhere else <LF>in the same task.
XXXXMake the program jump to a specific place in the string.<LF><LF>Note: The Blue Land command is needed somewhere else in the same task.
XXXXMake the program jump to a specific place in the string.<LF><LF>Note: The Green Land command is needed somewhere <LF>else in the same task.
XXXXMake the program jump to a specific place in the string.<LF><LF>Note: The Green Land command is needed somewhere else in the same task.
XXXXMake the program jump to a specific place in the string.<LF><LF>Note: The Red Land command is needed somewhere else in the same task.
XXXXMake the program jump to a specific place in the string.<LF><LF>Note: The Yellow Land command is needed somewhere <LF>else in the same task.
XXXXMake the program jump to a specific place in the string.<LF><LF>Note: The Yellow Land command is needed somewhere else in the same task.
XXXXMake the program jump to a specific place in the string.<LF>The default jump number is 1.<LF><LF>Note: The Landing command is needed somewhere else in the same task.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Jump Number: String in a single number from 1 to 20 to represent the jump number.  The same number must be used in the corresponding Landing command.
XXXXManual
XXXXMark
XXXXMask
XXXXMask BMP
XXXXMask Color
XXXXMask?
XXXXMath
XXXXMatrix Indexes
XXXXMatrix Indexes Out
XXXXMax
XXXXMax Info
XXXXMax Number
XXXXMax Radius
XXXXMax Random Number
XXXXMax number of vectors in ROI
XXXXMax random time (sec)
XXXXMaxima
XXXXMaximal Value
XXXXMaximum
XXXXMaximum Value
XXXXMaximum height
XXXXMean
XXXXMean Reaction Time
XXXXMean Value
XXXXMeans
XXXXMeasure
XXXXMeasure 
XXXXMeasure Tools
XXXXMeasurement
XXXXMeasurement shows the current measurement retrieved by AI Single Scan.<LF><LF>For further details on the retrieved data values, please refer to the LabVIEW Data Acquisition On-Line Help.
XXXXMeasures the distance between selected edges with high-precision subpixel accuracy. The IMAQ Line Gauge Tool VI supports different measurement modes. For example, you can use this VI to measure distances between points and edges and vice versa. The IMAQ Line Gauge Tool VI also can step and repeat its measurements across the image. Depending on the type of the measurement, this VI first determines the relevant edges in the image before computing the distances.<LF>    	  <LF>Base Reference is a cluster containing the following elements.<LF><LF>   Origin is a point cluster that specifies the origin of the <LF>   base-reference coordinate system.<LF>	<LF>   Angle is the angle the base-reference coordinate system makes   <LF>   with the image coordinate system.<LF><LF>SubPixel Information is a cluster containing the following parameters for subpixel analysis.<LF><LF>    Interpolation Type specifies the method used to perform the   <LF>    interpolation. Two values are possible.<LF><LF>      1	Quadratic <LF>      2	Cubic Spline<LF>  <LF>  SubPixel Accuracy specifies the number of samples that are     <LF>  obtained from a pixel. A subpixel accuracy of one fourth specifies     <LF>  that each pixel is split into four subpixels.<LF><LF>Image is the input source image. 8-bit, 16-bit, and floating-point images are supported.<LF>	<LF>Line Coordinates is an array specifying the pixel coordinates that form the end points of the line. <LF>	<LF>Edge Parameters is a cluster defining the characteristics of the filter used to detect edges. This cluster consists of the following parameters.<LF><LF><LF>    contrast specifies the threshold for the contrast of the edge. Only <LF>    edges with a contrast greater than this value are considered in <LF>    the detection process. Contrast is defined as the difference <LF>    between the average pixel intensity before the edge and the<LF>    average pixel intensity after the edge. <LF>	<LF>   filter width specifies the number of pixels that are averaged to find <LF>   the contrast at either side of the edge.<LF> 	  <LF>  Steepness specifies the slope of the edge. This value represents <LF>   the number of pixels that correspond to the transition area of the <LF>   edge.<LF><LF>Measurement Type specifies the type of measurement you want to perform. The following values are possible.<LF><LF>   1	Edge To Edge	Measures the distance between two edge <LF>      locations in an image.<LF>   2	Edge To Point	Measures the distance between an edge in the <LF>     image and another point in the image.<LF>  3	Point To Edge	Measures the distance between a point and an  <LF>     edge in the image.<LF>   4	Point To Point	Measures the distance between two points in <LF>       the image.<LF>Note:	Subpixel information is not used when measuring distances between points. <LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF>	<LF>Offset Array is an array of point clusters that specifies the shift in the start and end points of the pixel coordinates. The Offset Array is used for repeating the measurement across the image.<LF><LF>New Reference is a cluster containing the following elements.<LF><LF>    Origin is a point cluster that specifies the origin of the <LF>    new-reference coordinate system.<LF><LF>   	Angle is the angle the new-reference coordinate system makes <LF>    with the image coordinate system.<LF><LF>Distances is an array containing the measured distances.<LF>	<LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXMeasures the light level averaged over 5 samples and returns it in local variable AvrLight (LocalVar1).<LF><LF>LocalVar4-8 is preserved by the sub.
XXXXMeasures the light level averaged over 5 samples<LF>and returns it in the local variable AvrLight <LF>(LocalVar1).<LF><LF>LocalVar4-8 is preserved by the sub.
XXXXMedia
XXXXMem Used
XXXXMem total
XXXXMemory Allocation
XXXXMemory Map
XXXXMenu
XXXXMenu Bar
XXXXMerge the two strings of a Fork back together.<LF><LF>Note: All Forks need a Merge, so that there will <LF>always be an equal number of Merges as there are <LF>Forks.<LF>
XXXXMerge the two strings of a Fork back together.<LF><LF>Note: All Forks need a Merge, so that there will always be an equal number of Merges as there are Forks.<LF>
XXXXMethod
XXXXMin
XXXXMin Info
XXXXMin Radius
XXXXMinima
XXXXMinimal Value
XXXXMinimum
XXXXMinor Incr
XXXXMirror
XXXXMisc
XXXXMode
XXXXModerato
XXXXModifier to read
XXXXModifier to set
XXXXModifier to view
XXXXModifiers
XXXXModifies the resolution of an image.<LF>     	<LF>Image is the reference to the image whose size has to be modified.<LF><LF>X Resolution gives the new horizontal resolution of the image. <LF><LF>Y Resolution gives the new vertical resolution of the image.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Out is the reference to the image whose size is modified to a resolution specified by the X Resolution and Y Resolution parameters.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Note:	This function reuses the space previously occupied by the pixels of the image. This function is used in preparation for a fill-in and does not transfer the original image into a new memory space. The original image is lost.
XXXXMonel?
XXXXMonitors access control  of sound.<LF><LF>If any task of higher priority wants control of the sound,  the program will jump  to the red access land<LF><LF>Note: Task priority can be set using the Task Priority command
XXXXMonitors access control - if any task of higher priority wants control of the outputs,  jump to the red event land<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Ports Monitored: String in the ports of the output(s) to be monitored.<LF>
XXXXMonitors access control of motor(s) or output(s).<LF><LF>If any task of higher priority wants control of the motor(s) or output(s),  the program will jump  to the red access land<LF><LF>Note: Task priority can be set using the Task Priority command<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Ports Monitored:  String in the ports of the output(s) to be monitored.
XXXXMonitors events - if any events occur the program will jump to the Scout Event Landing.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Event: This is which event(s) is being watched.<LF>
XXXXMonitors events - if any events occur the program<LF>will jump to the  Scout Event Landing.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Event: This is which event(s) is being watched.<LF>
XXXXMorph_AutoMedian
XXXXMorph_Close
XXXXMorph_Dilation
XXXXMorph_Erosion
XXXXMorph_ExternalEdge
XXXXMorph_HitMiss
XXXXMorph_InternalEdge
XXXXMorph_Open
XXXXMorph_ProperClose
XXXXMorph_ProperOpen
XXXXMorph_Thick
XXXXMorph_Thin
XXXXMorphology
XXXXMotion
XXXXMotor A forward
XXXXMotor A reverse
XXXXMotor B forward
XXXXMotor B reverse
XXXXMotor C forward
XXXXMotor C reverse
XXXXMotor Current (2)
XXXXMotor Status (0,1,2)
XXXXMotor forward
XXXXMotor random
XXXXMotor reverse
XXXXMotor speeds
XXXXMovTime (1 - 32767)
XXXXMove event
XXXXMovement Type
XXXXMovie Cntrls
XXXXMultiLine
XXXXMultiplies two images or an image and a constant.<LF>    	    <LF>Constant. The input Image Src A is multiplied by the Constant value for image-constant operations. The default is 1.<LF><LF>Image Src A is the reference to the source (input) image A.<LF><LF>Image Dst is the reference to the destination image.<LF><LF>Image Src B is the reference to the source (input) image B.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Dst Out is the reference to the destination (output) image which receives the processing results of the VI. If the Image Dst is connected, then Image Dst Out is the same as Image Dst. Otherwise, Image Dst Out refers to the image referenced by Image Src A.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXMultiplies two images where the first is a complex image, or multiples a complex image and a complex constant.<LF>  <LF>Constant. The input Image Src A is multiplied by this complex constant for image-constant operations. The default is 0.<LF>	<LF>Image Src A is the handle of the first source image and must be a complex image.<LF>	<LF>Image Dst is the handle of the complex image that contains the resulting FFT image. This input can accept only a complex image.<LF>	<LF>Image Src B s the handle of the second source image. This input can accept an 8-bit, 16-bit, 32-bit floating-point, or complex image.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF>	<LF>Image Dst Out is the reference to the destination (output) image which receives the processing results of the VI. If the Image Dst is connected, then Image Dst Out is the same as Image Dst. Otherwise, Image Dst Out refers to the image referenced by Image Src A.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>An operation between an image and a constant occurs when the input Image Src B is not connected. The two possibilities are distinguished in the following equations.<LF><LF>Dst(x, y) = SrcA(x, y) × SrcB(x, y), or<LF>Dst(x, y) = SrcA(x, y) × Constant.
XXXXMultiply
XXXXMultiply a number to the container.<LF>The default is to multiply the Red Container value by 2.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier that corresponds to the <LF>container you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Number to multiply:  String a number to multiply to <LF>the container.
XXXXMultiply a number to the container.<LF>The default is to multiply the Red Container value by 2.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier that corresponds to the container you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Number to multiply:  String a number to multiply to the container.
XXXXMultiply to Container
XXXXMusic
XXXXMusic Modifier<LF><LF>Duration: Eighth note<LF><LF>String one or more modifiers into music commands <LF>to set the duration of the note or rest.<LF><LF>When more than one musical duration modifier is <LF>used the durations are added together.
XXXXMusic Modifier<LF><LF>Duration: Eighth note<LF><LF>String one or more modifiers into music commands to set the duration of the note or rest.<LF><LF>When more than one musical duration modifier is used the durations are added together.
XXXXMusic Modifier<LF><LF>Duration: Half note<LF><LF>String one or more modifiers into music commands <LF>to set the duration of the note or rest.<LF><LF>When more than one musical duration modifier is <LF>used the durations are added together.
XXXXMusic Modifier<LF><LF>Duration: Half note<LF><LF>String one or more modifiers into music commands to set the duration of the note or rest.<LF><LF>When more than one musical duration modifier is used the durations are added together.
XXXXMusic Modifier<LF><LF>Duration: Quarter note<LF><LF>String one or more modifiers into music commands <LF>to set the duration of the note or rest.<LF><LF>When more than one musical duration modifier is <LF>used the durations are added together.
XXXXMusic Modifier<LF><LF>Duration: Quarter note<LF><LF>String one or more modifiers into music commands to set the duration of the note or rest.<LF><LF>When more than one musical duration modifier is used the durations are added together.
XXXXMusic Modifier<LF><LF>Duration: Sixteenth note<LF><LF>String one or more modifiers into music commands <LF>to set the duration of the note or rest.<LF><LF>When more than one musical duration modifier is <LF>used the durations are added together.<LF>
XXXXMusic Modifier<LF><LF>Duration: Sixteenth note<LF><LF>String one or more modifiers into music commands to set the duration of the note or rest.<LF><LF>When more than one musical duration modifier is used the durations are added together.
XXXXMusic Modifier<LF><LF>Duration: Whole note<LF><LF>String one or more modifiers into music commands <LF>to set the duration of the note or rest.<LF><LF>When more than one musical duration modifier is <LF>used the durations are added together.
XXXXMusic Modifier<LF><LF>Duration: Whole note<LF><LF>String one or more modifiers into music commands to set the duration of the note or rest.<LF><LF>When more than one musical duration modifier is used the durations are added together.
XXXXMusic Modifier<LF><LF>Octave: Down<LF><LF>String one or more modifiers into music <LF>commands to decrease the pitch by one octave <LF>or more.  When more than one 'Down an Octave' <LF>modifier is used the pitch is changed by multiple <LF>octaves.
XXXXMusic Modifier<LF><LF>Octave: Down<LF><LF>String one or more modifiers into music commands to decrease the pitch by one octave or more.<LF>When more than one 'Down an Octave' modifier is used the pitch is changed by multiple octaves.
XXXXMusic Modifier<LF><LF>Octave: Up<LF><LF>String one or more modifiers into music commands <LF>to increase the pitch by one octave or more.<LF>When more than one 'Up an Octave' modifier is<LF>used the pitch is changed by multiple octaves.
XXXXMusic Modifier<LF><LF>Octave: Up<LF><LF>String one or more modifiers into music commands to increase the pitch by one octave or more.<LF>When more than one 'Up an Octave' modifier is used the pitch is changed by multiple octaves.
XXXXMusic Note A
XXXXMusic Note A# (Bb)
XXXXMusic Note B
XXXXMusic Note C
XXXXMusic Note C# (Db)
XXXXMusic Note D
XXXXMusic Note D# (Eb)
XXXXMusic Note E
XXXXMusic Note F
XXXXMusic Note F# (Gb)
XXXXMusic Note G
XXXXMusic Note G# (Ab)
XXXXMute Sound
XXXXMy Programs
XXXXMy Projects
XXXXMy Songs
XXXXN error code
XXXXNA
XXXXNK
XXXXNO
XXXXNU
XXXXName
XXXXName of Program
XXXXNational Instruments
XXXXNational Instruments Patents:<LF>US 4,901,221 US 5,291,587 5,301,301 5,497,500<LF>Euro 0242131  4,914,568 5,481,741 5,481,740<LF>Can 0242131  5,301,336 5,475,851 5,504,917
XXXXNb Circles
XXXXNb Detected Edges
XXXXNb of Erosion
XXXXNeedle Base
XXXXNeedle color
XXXXNew Image
XXXXNew Page
XXXXNew Picture
XXXXNew Project
XXXXNew Reference
XXXXNew Task
XXXXNew scroll
XXXXNew value
XXXXNew...
XXXXNew... &N
XXXXNext
XXXXNo  event
XXXXNo Change
XXXXNo RCX
XXXXNo Song
XXXXNo Trigger
XXXXNone
XXXXNone<CR>Switch<CR>Temperature<CR>Reflection<CR>Angle<CR>ID0 Switch<CR>ID1 Switch<CR>ID2 Switch<CR>
XXXXNormal
XXXXNot used<LF>NU<LF>Not used<LF>NU<LF>Not used<LF>NU<LF>SERIAL PORT INITIALIZATION ERROR (%d bytes read on port %d):  ROBOLAB could not initialize the serial port - is there something already controlling that port?  (Mac Users - check AppleTalk)  Try another port.<LF>SERIAL PORT INITIALIZATION ERROR (%d bytes read on port %d):  ROBOLAB could not initialize the serial port - is there something already controlling that port?  (Mac Users - check AppleTalk)  Try another port.<LF>BUFFER SIZE ERROR (%d bytes read on port %d): ROBOLAB got an error when trying to use the computer's serial port.  Try using another port.<LF>BUFFER SIZE ERROR (%d bytes read on port %d): ROBOLAB got an error when trying to use the computer's serial port.  Try using another port.<LF>SERIAL READ ERROR (%d bytes read on port %d): ROBOLAB got an error when trying to use the computer's serial port.  Try using another port.<LF>SERIAL READ ERROR (%d bytes read on port %d): ROBOLAB got an error when trying to use the computer's serial port.  Try using another port.<LF>SERIAL WRITE ERROR (%d bytes read on port %d): ROBOLAB got an error when trying to use the computer's serial port.  Try using another port.<LF>SERIAL WRITE ERROR (%d bytes read on port %d): ROBOLAB got an error when trying to use the computer's serial port.  Try using another port.<LF>SERIAL SIZE ERROR (%d bytes read on port %d): ROBOLAB got an error when trying to use the computer's serial port.  Try using another port.<LF>SERIAL SIZE ERROR (%d bytes read on port %d): ROBOLAB got an error when trying to use the computer's serial port.  Try using another port.<LF>SERIAL READ ERROR (%d bytes read on port %d): ROBOLAB got an error when trying to use the computer's serial port.  Try using another port.<LF>SERIAL READ ERROR (%d bytes read on port %d): ROBOLAB got an error when trying to use the computer's serial port.  Try using another port.<LF>NO TOWER RESPONSE (%d bytes read on port %d): ROBOLAB did not get any response from your tower - check that the green light turns on when you hit ""try again"" - make sure that the cable is well connected.  If you are still having problems, try a new battery in the tower or a different port.<LF>WRONG TOWER RESPONSE (%d bytes read on port %d): ROBOLAB got an incorrect response from your tower - check that the green light turns on when you hit ""try again"" - make sure that the cable is well connected. This error is usually a result of a bad cable connection (some garbled information is returned to the computer).  Set the switch on the bottom of the tower to Low. If you are still having problems, try a new battery in the tower, a new cable, or a different port.<LF>CHECKSUM ERROR (%d bytes read on port %d): ROBOLAB got an error in the RCX reply.  Try transmitting again (hit ""try again"" a few times).  If that is still not working - try turning the RCX off and on again.  This can also happen because there is too much light in the room, try blocking or reducing the background lighting.  If you are still having problems, try replacing the batteries in the RCX.<LF>CHECKSUM ERROR (%d bytes read on port %d): ROBOLAB got an error in the RCX reply.  Try transmitting again (hit ""try again"" a few times).  If that is still not working - try turning the RCX off and on again.  This can also happen because there is too much light in the room, try blocking or reducing the background lighting.  If you are still having problems, try replacing the batteries in the RCX.<LF>NO RCX RESPONSE (%d bytes read on port %d):  ROBOLAB is not getting any response from your RCX.  Check to make sure it is on and that it has fresh batteries.  Try transmitting again (hit ""try again"" a few times).  If that is still not working - try turning the RCX off and on again.  This can also happen because there is too much light in the room, try blocking or reducing the background lighting.  If you are still having problems, try replacing the batteries in the RCX..<LF>WRONG RCX RESPONSE (%d bytes read on port %d):  ROBOLAB is getting a garbled response from your RCX.  Check to make sure it is on and that it has fresh batteries.  Try transmitting again (hit ""try again"" a few times).  If that is still not working - try turning the RCX off and on again.  Try switching the tower to Low power (switch at bottom of tower). This can also happen because there is too much light in the room, try blocking or reducing the background lighting.  If you are still having problems, try replacing the batteries in the RCX..<LF>Not used<LF>NU<LF>Not used<LF>NU
XXXXNote : 16 bits far for Win 3.1,<LF>32 bits flat pointer otherwise.
XXXXNote Length
XXXXNotes
XXXXNothing
XXXXNum Plots
XXXXNum lines
XXXXNum of Pts
XXXXNumber
XXXXNumber (0 - 1)
XXXXNumber of Basic Particles
XXXXNumber of Classes
XXXXNumber of Clicks
XXXXNumber of Complex Particles
XXXXNumber of Edge Pairs
XXXXNumber of Edges
XXXXNumber of Erosion
XXXXNumber of Holes
XXXXNumber of Loops
XXXXNumber of Matches
XXXXNumber of Particles
XXXXNumber of Plots
XXXXNumber of Points in Spline
XXXXNumber of Points in curve
XXXXNumber of data points (max 2000)
XXXXNumber of points
XXXXNumber to AND
XXXXNumber to OR
XXXXNumber to add
XXXXNumber to divide
XXXXNumber to find absolute value
XXXXNumber to find sign of
XXXXNumber to multiply
XXXXNumber to send in mail?
XXXXNumber to subtract
XXXXNumbers
XXXXNumeric
XXXXOCTAVE 5
XXXXOFF
XXXXOFF/ON
XXXXOK
XXXXOLD Inventor Level
XXXXOLD Pilot Level
XXXXOLD RCX
XXXXON
XXXXOPEN EXAMPLE
XXXXOPENING...
XXXXOR Container
XXXXOR the container by a Boolean.  <LF>The default is to OR the Red Container value by 1.<LF><LF>Note: Numbers are rounded down to the nearest integer.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier that corresponds to the <LF>container you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Number to OR:  String a number to which the container will be <LF>ORed.
XXXXOR the container by a Boolean.  <LF>The default is to OR the Red Container value by 1.<LF><LF>Note: Numbers are rounded down to the nearest integer.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier that corresponds to the container you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Number to OR:  String a number to which the container will be <LF>ORed.
XXXXObject Size
XXXXObtains a pointer on the pixels of an image. This VI also returns information on the organization of the image pixels in memory.<LF>   	<LF>Function has three modes:<LF><LF>   0	Map Pixel Pointer	Obtains the pointer on a pixel of an image <LF>     and obtains information related to the organization of the pixels      <LF>     of this image in memory.<LF>  1	Unmap Pixel Pointer	Frees the pointer and related information <LF>  previously obtained using Map Pixel Pointer.<LF>  2	Get Pixels Infos	Obtains information related to the organization   <LF>  of the pixels of an image in memory without mapping a pointer.<LF><LF>Image is the reference of the image on which the pointer is obtained.<LF>	<LF>Pixel Pointer in is only used in the Unmap Pixel Pointer mode (see the Function description). When the VI is executed to obtain a pointer (using the Map Pixel Pointer function), some information regarding the pointer that is required to unmap the pixel pointer is recorded.<LF><LF>Note:	You need to give this pointer to the VI to retrieve this information when executing the Unmap Pixel Pointer function.<LF><LF>X Coordinate allows you to select the X coordinate of the pixel in the image on which the pointer is required. This parameter is not used in the mode Unmap Pixel Pointer mode. The default is 0.<LF>	<LF>Y Coordinate allows you to select the Y coordinate of the pixel in the image on which the pointer is required. This parameter is not used in the mode Unmap Pixel Pointer mode. The default is 0.<LF>	<LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image border size is the border size of the image.<LF>	<LF>Pixel Pointer Out is the pointer on the pixels of the image. This pointer is obtained only in the Map Pixel Pointer mode. The following table gives the pointer type for different platforms.<LF><LF>Platform	Pointer Type<LF>     IMAQ Vision for LabVIEW 4 for Windows 3.1	16-bit FAR<LF>     Other platforms	32-bit flat<LF><LF>LineWidth (Pixels) returns the total number of pixels in a horizontal line in the image. This is the sum of the X size of the image, the borders of the image, and the left and right alignments of the image, as shown in the following image. This number may not match the horizontal size of the image.<LF><LF>Pixel Size (Bytes) returns the size in bytes of each pixel in the image. This value multiplied with the LineWidth gives the number of bytes occupied by a line of the image in memory.<LF>	<LF>Transfer Max Size returns the number of bytes from the pixel pointer to the end of the image. This size represents the maximum size of bytes that can be transferred. For example, for an 8-bit image of size 256 × 256 and border 1, the line width is 272 and the maximum transfer size from pixel (0, 0) is 69632 bytes.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXObtains information regarding the contents of the file. This information is supplied only if the file has a standard file format (APD, BMP, TIF, PICT).<LF><LF>File Path: is the complete path name, including drive, directory, and filename, for the file to be loaded. This path can be supplied either by the user or the VI File Dialog from LabVIEW or BridgeVIEW.<LF><LF>error in (no error): is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Calibration: is a cluster containing the following elements:<LF><LF>X Step: is the horizontal distance separating two adjacent pixels in user units.<LF><LF>	Y Step: is the vertical distance separating two adjacent pixels in user units.<LF><LF>	Unit: is the user unit associated with the image. It can have the following values:<LF><LF>Note :	This data is accessible only if the image is saved in the internal APD file format. For all other file types, this VI returns the values (in mm) X Step = 1, Y Step = 1, and Unit = 3.<LF><LF>File Type: indicates the file type that is read. This string contains the three indicative characters of the read file: APD (internal file format), BMP, TIF, or PICT (Macintosh only).<LF><LF>File Data Type: indicates the pixel size defined in the header for standard image file types.<LF><LF>	X Resolution: indicates the horizontal resolution in pixels of the image file.<LF><LF>	Y Resolution: indicates the vertical resolution in pixels of the image file.
XXXXObtains or modifies the status of each zone in a user window.<LF><LF>Window Number (17...22) is a number from 17 to 22 that specifies the user window. The default value is 17.<LF><LF>Region status modifies the status of a user zone (TRUE or FALSE) when the input Get/Set Status? is TRUE (Set).<LF><LF>Get/Set Status? (Set) specifies whether the user needs to know the present status or modify the status of the zones. The default is TRUE (Set).<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Regions status returns the present status (TRUE or FALSE) of each zone. <LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXObtains or modifies the status of the grid. The grid can be used to help trace a region of interest accurately.<LF><LF>Grid Size is a structure containing two elements that encode the size of the horizontal and vertical steps for the grid. The cursor is moved by steps, as defined in this VI, when tracing a region of interest. The default value is (1, 1).<LF><LF>Get / Set Status? (Set) specifies whether the user wants to know the present status or modify the step values for the grid. The default is TRUE (Set).<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Grid Size returns the present grid step size. <LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>
XXXXObtains or modifies the status of the regions tools.<LF><LF>Tool (Point) can have the following values:<LF><LF>Number	Icon	Tool Name	Function<LF>0	NA	No Selection	NA<LF>1		Point	Select a pixel in the image.<LF>2		Line	Draw a line in the image.<LF>3		Rectangle	Draw a rectangle (or square) in the image.<LF>4		Oval	Draw an oval (or circle) in the image.<LF>5		Polygon	Draw a polygon in the image.<LF>6		Free	Draw a freehand region in the image.<LF>7	NA	Unused 1	NA<LF>8		Zoom	Zoom-in or zoom-out in an image.<LF>9	NA	Unused 2	NA<LF>10		Broken Line	Draw a broken line in the image.<LF>11		Freehand Line	Draw a free hand line in the image.<LF>Get / Set Status? (Set) specifies if the user wants to know the present status or modify the status of the available regions tools. The default is TRUE (Set).<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Tool returns the chosen region tool.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Note:	This VI can be used even if the WindTools palette is not displayed.<LF><LF>
XXXXObtains or modifies the status of the zoom factor.<LF><LF>Window Number (0…15) is a number from 0 to 15 that specifies the image window. The default value is 0. <LF><LF>Zoom Factor can have the following values: 1 to 16 and –1 to –16. The default value is 1 (image is displayed at its original size). <LF><LF>Center Point is a structure containing two elements containing the (x, y) coordinates used to center the image in the image window. This enables the user to center an image with respect to a user-chosen region. Additionally, Center Point can be used to place only a part of an image into an image window.<LF><LF>This value is adjusted automatically when Center Point is not coherent with the size of the image window and the zoom factor. For example, an image at 256 × 256 displayed in an image window of 256 × 256 containing a zoom factor of 1 by definition has a single Center point of (127, 127). An erroneously entered figure automatically is corrected, making the output value different than the input value.<LF><LF>Get / Set Status? (Set) specifies if the user wants to know the present status or modify the Zoom Factor and Center Point. The default is TRUE (Set).<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Zoom Factor returns the present zoom factor. <LF><LF>Center Point returns the present coordinates of the Center Point. <LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXObtains or modifies the status regarding the visibility of a user window. This VI functions in the same way as IMAQ WindShow, which is used for displaying image windows.<LF><LF>Window Number (17...22) is a number from 17 to 22 that specifies the user window. The default value is 17.<LF><LF>Hide/Show (Show) specifies whether the tools palette is visible. Use this input only when Get/Set Status? (Set) is TRUE (Set).<LF><LF>Get/Set Status? (Set) specifies whether the user needs to know the present status or modify the status of the zones. The default is TRUE (Set).<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Visible? returns the present visibility status of the tools palette. A visible tools palette returns TRUE.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF>
XXXXObtains or sets the position of a user window. This VI functions in the same way as IMAQ WindMove, which is used for moving image windows.<LF><LF>Window Number (17...22) is a number from 17 to 22 that specifies the user window. The default value is 17.<LF><LF>Coordinates is a structure that contains the screen coordinates (in X and Y positions) where the tools palette is located or where the tools palette will be placed. This input is necessary only when Get/Set Status? (Set) is set to TRUE (Set).<LF><LF>Get/Set Status? (Set) specifies whether the user needs to know the present status or modify the status of the zones. The default is TRUE (Set).<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Coordinates indicates the relative position of the event.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>
XXXXObtains or sets the position of the WindTools palette. This VI functions in the same way as IMAQ WindMove, which is used for moving image windows.<LF><LF>Coordinates is a structure that contains the screen coordinates (in X and Y positions) where the tools palette is located or where the tools palette will be placed. This input is necessary only when Get/Set Status? (Set) is set to TRUE (Set).<LF><LF>Get/Set Status?(Set) specifies if the user wants to know the present status or modify the status of the available region tools. The default is TRUE (Set).<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Coordinates indicates the relative position of the event.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXObtains the present image calibration.<LF>        	  <LF>Image is the reference to the source (input) image.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Unit is the measuring unit associated with the image. It can have the following values:<LF><LF>  0	undefined<LF>  1	Angstrom<LF>  2	micrometer<LF>  3	millimeter<LF>  4	centimeter<LF>  5	meter<LF>  6	kilometer<LF>  7	microinch<LF>  8	inch<LF>  9	feet <LF>  10	nautical miles<LF>  11	standard miles<LF><LF>X Step specifies the horizontal distance separating two adjacent pixels in the specified Unit.<LF><LF>Y Step specifies the vertical distance separating two adjacent pixels in the specified Unit.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXOccurences
XXXXOctave
XXXXOffset Array
XXXXOffset Left/Top
XXXXOffset to Data
XXXXOffsets
XXXXOk
XXXXOld Inventor Projects
XXXXOld Pilot Projects
XXXXOld choice
XXXXOld theme
XXXXOlive Bin
XXXXOne can see that the temperature steadily dropped during the night.  As the sun came up, its rays hit the temperature sensor, raising the local temperature above ambient.
XXXXOp Type
XXXXOpen
XXXXOpen Display
XXXXOpen File
XXXXOpen Song
XXXXOpen... &O
XXXXOpen?
XXXXOpening http://www.ceeo.tufts.edu/<LF><LF><FONT style='B'>Tufts University
XXXXOpening http://www.ifactory.com<LF><LF><FONT style='B'>Interactive Factory Web site
XXXXOpening http://www.lego.com/dacta/<LF><LF><FONT style='B'>LEGO Dacta
XXXXOpening http://www.natinst.com/robolab/<LF><LF><FONT style='B'>National Instruments LabVIEW
XXXXOperation
XXXXOperation 1
XXXXOperation 2
XXXXOperator
XXXXOption
XXXXOptional Max Value
XXXXOptional Min Value
XXXXOptional Rectangle
XXXXOr
XXXXOr/Nor (Or)
XXXXOrange Bin
XXXXOrder #
XXXXOrders (or classifies) the pixel values surrounding the pixel being processed. The data is placed into an array and the pixel being processed is set to the Nth pixel value, the Nth pixel being the ordered number. <LF>    	    <LF>Size & Order # is a cluster that specifies the following variables:<LF><LF> X size is the size of the horizontal matrix axis. The default is 3.<LF> Y size is the size of the vertical matrix axis. The default is 3.<LF> Order # is the order number chosen after classing the values. The   <LF>  default is 4.<LF><LF>Image Src is the image reference source.<LF><LF>Image Mask is an 8-bit image that specifies the region in the image to modify. Only pixels in the original image that correspond to the equivalent pixel in the mask are replaced by the values in the lookup table (provided that the value in the mask is not 0). All pixels not corresponding to this criteria keep their original value. The complete image is modified if Image Mask is not connected. <LF><LF>Image Dst is the reference to the destination image. If it is connected, it must be the same type as the Image Src.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Dst Out is the reference to the destination (output) image which receives the processing results of the VI. If the Image Dst is connected, then Image Dst Out is the same as Image Dst. Otherwise, Image Dst Out refers to the image referenced by Image Src.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Note:	See the Nonlinear Filters section of Chapter 5, Spatial Filtering, in the IMAQ Vision for G Reference Manual for more information about the Nth order filter.<LF><LF>Any image connected to the input Image Dst must be the same image type connected to Image Src. The image type connected to the input Image Mask must be an 8-bit image.<LF><LF>The connected source image must have been created with a border capable of supporting the size of the convolution matrix. A 3 × 3 matrix must have a minimum border of 1, a 5 × 5 matrix must have a minimum border of 2, and so forth. The border size of the destination image is not important.<LF><LF>The default for this VI is a 3 × 3 Median operation with X = 3, Y = 3, and Order = 4. To change to a 5 × 5 Median operation, the cluster must take the values X = 5, Y = 5, and Order = 12. In this last example, the order number is determined by calculating the central pixel number in the array. For a 5 × 5 convolution, Order = 12 (the thirteenth pixel) because that pixel is the center pixel number for a 2D array of 25 pixels. <LF><LF>A lighter image results when using a higher order number (such as 7 in a 3 × 3 matrix). Darker images result when using a lower order number (such as 1 in a 3 × 3 matrix). <LF><LF>A median (center-pixel) operation is advantageous because it standardizes the gray-level values without significantly modifying the form of the objects or the overall brightness in the image.<LF>If the order value that is entered is 0, then the image obtained is representative of the local minimum from the source image. If the order value that is passed is equal to [(X Size × Y Size) – 1], then the obtained image is representative of the local maximum from the source image.
XXXXOrientation
XXXXOrigin
XXXXOriginal Page Names
XXXXOriginal and fitted curves
XXXXOther
XXXXOther Parameters
XXXXOutline?
XXXXOutput A
XXXXOutput B
XXXXOutput C
XXXXOutput D
XXXXOutput E
XXXXOutput Element
XXXXOutput F
XXXXOutput G
XXXXOutput H
XXXXOutput Parameters
XXXXOutput port modifier.<LF><LF>String this modifier to a command to <LF>select Output Port A.<LF>To select more than one output port, <LF>string additional modifiers into the bottom<LF>of this icon (additional modifiers).
XXXXOutput port modifier.<LF><LF>String this modifier to a command to <LF>select Output Port C.<LF>To select more than one output port, <LF>string additional modifiers into the bottom<LF>of this icon (additional modifiers).
XXXXOutput port modifier.<LF><LF>String this modifier to a command to <LF>select Output Port H.<LF>To select more than one output port, <LF>string additional modifiers into the bottom<LF>of this icon (additional modifiers).
XXXXOutput port modifier.<LF><LF>String this modifier to a command to select <LF>Output Port B.<LF>To select more than one output port, <LF>string additional modifiers into the bottom<LF>of this icon (additional modifiers).
XXXXOutput port modifier.<LF><LF>String this modifier to a command to select <LF>Output Port C.<LF>To select more than one output port, <LF>string additional modifiers into the bottom<LF>of this icon (additional modifiers).
XXXXOutput port modifier.<LF><LF>String this modifier to a command to select <LF>Output Port D.<LF>To select more than one output port, <LF>string additional modifiers into the bottom<LF>of this icon (additional modifiers).
XXXXOutput port modifier.<LF><LF>String this modifier to a command to select <LF>Output Port E.<LF>To select more than one output port, <LF>string additional modifiers into the bottom<LF>of this icon (additional modifiers).
XXXXOutput port modifier.<LF><LF>String this modifier to a command to select <LF>Output Port F.<LF>To select more than one output port, <LF>string additional modifiers into the bottom<LF>of this icon (additional modifiers).
XXXXOutput port modifier.<LF><LF>String this modifier to a command to select <LF>Output Port G.<LF>To select more than one output port, <LF>string additional modifiers into the bottom<LF>of this icon (additional modifiers).
XXXXOutput port modifier.<LF><LF>String this modifier to a command to select Output Port A.<LF>To select more than one output port, string additional modifiers into the bottom of this icon (additional modifiers).
XXXXOutput port modifier.<LF><LF>String this modifier to a command to select Output Port B.<LF>To select more than one output port, string additional modifiers into the bottom of this icon (additional modifiers).
XXXXOutput port modifier.<LF><LF>String this modifier to a command to select Output Port C.<LF>To select more than one output port, string additional modifiers into the bottom of this icon (additional modifiers).
XXXXOutput port modifier.<LF><LF>String this modifier to a command to select Output Port D.<LF>To select more than one output port, string additional modifiers into the bottom of this icon (additional modifiers).
XXXXOutput port modifier.<LF><LF>String this modifier to a command to select Output Port E.<LF>To select more than one output port, string additional modifiers into the bottom of this icon (additional modifiers).
XXXXOutput port modifier.<LF><LF>String this modifier to a command to select Output Port F.<LF>To select more than one output port, string additional modifiers into the bottom of this icon (additional modifiers).
XXXXOutput port modifier.<LF><LF>String this modifier to a command to select Output Port G.<LF>To select more than one output port, string additional modifiers into the bottom of this icon (additional modifiers).
XXXXOutput port modifier.<LF><LF>String this modifier to a command to select Output Port H.<LF>To select more than one output port, string additional modifiers into the bottom of this icon (additional modifiers).
XXXXOutput string
XXXXOutput value
XXXXOutputs
XXXXOval
XXXXOverview
XXXXPICTURE PATHS
XXXXPICTURENAMES
XXXXPLANE
XXXXPLAY VIDEO
XXXXPWM Output Settings
XXXXPad
XXXXPage
XXXXPage 1
XXXXPage Areas
XXXXPage Controls
XXXXPage Title
XXXXPages
XXXXPaint
XXXXPaint mode
XXXXPalette Color
XXXXPalette Number (gray)
XXXXParameter
XXXXParameters
XXXXPath
XXXXPath To Project_Images
XXXXPath to Investigator
XXXXPath to Project
XXXXPath to ROBOLAB
XXXXPath to ROBOLAB program 
XXXXPath to RoboLAB
XXXXPath to Vault (Themes)   
XXXXPath to file
XXXXPath to lv_quit
XXXXPath to original project
XXXXPath to page
XXXXPath to program files
XXXXPath to project
XXXXPath to splash
XXXXPaths
XXXXPause
XXXXPeak Time
XXXXPen
XXXXPen pattern
XXXXPen pattern (8x8)
XXXXPen style
XXXXPen transfer mode
XXXXPen width
XXXXPercent
XXXXPercent data
XXXXPercent done
XXXXPercent prgms
XXXXPercent used
XXXXPercentage of scale
XXXXPerform two mathematical operations on Bins and put the result into a new Bin.
XXXXPerforms a user-chosen lookup table transformation by remapping the pixel values in an image.<LF>  	  <LF>Lookup Table is a color replacement table. This array can contain 256 elements (8-bit) or 65536 elements (16-bit) depending on the type of image. Individual pixels within the image are not modified in cases in which the lookup table is missing a corresponding value.<LF><LF>Image Src is the reference to the source (input) image.<LF><LF>Image Mask is an 8-bit image that specifies the region in the image to modify. Only pixels in the original image that correspond to the equivalent pixel in the mask are replaced by the values in the lookup table (provided that the value in the mask is not 0). All pixels not corresponding to this criteria keep their original value. The complete image is modified if Image Mask is not connected. <LF><LF>Image Dst is the reference to the destination image. If it is connected, it must be the same type as the Image Src.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Dst Out is the reference to the destination (output) image which receives the processing results of the VI. If the Image Dst is connected, then Image Dst Out is the same as Image Dst. Otherwise, Image Dst Out refers to the image referenced by Image Src.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXPerforms an AND or NAND operation on two images or an image and a constant.<LF>    	    <LF>And/Nand (And) is the result from a logic operation. If set to TRUE, the result of a logic operation is the negative of the performed logic operation (NAND instead of AND). The default is FALSE, which specifies a positive operation (AND).<LF><LF>Image Src A is the reference to the source (input) image A.<LF><LF>Image Dst is the reference to the destination image. If it is connected, it must be the same type as Image Src A.<LF><LF>Image Src B is the reference to the source (input) image B.<LF><LF>Constant is a binary constant used for image-constant operations. The default is 0.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Dst Out is the reference to the destination (output) image which receives the processing results of the VI. If the Image Dst is connected, then Image Dst Out is the same as Image Dst. Otherwise, Image Dst Out refers to the image referenced by Image Src A.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>All connected images must be the same image type. An operation between an image and a constant occurs when the input Image Src B is not connected. <LF><LF>This VI is performed for each pixel (x, y) in the following manner:<LF><LF>If two images are connected on input, then Dst(x, y) = SrcA(x, y) AND SrcB(x, y).<LF><LF>If the input Image Src B is not connected, then Dst(x, y) = SrcA(x, y) AND Constant.
XXXXPerforms an OR or NOR operation on two images or an image and a constant.<LF>    	    <LF>Or/Nor (Or) is the result from a logic operation. If set to TRUE, the result of a logic operation is the negative of the performed logic operation (NOR instead of OR). The default is FALSE, which specifies a positive operation (OR).<LF><LF>Image Src A is the reference to the source (input) image A.<LF><LF>Image Dst is the reference to the destination image. If it is connected, it must be the same type as Image Src A.<LF><LF>Image Src B is the reference to the source (input) image B.<LF><LF>Constant is a binary constant used for image-constant operations. The default is 0.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Dst Out is the reference to the destination (output) image which receives the processing results of the VI. If the Image Dst is connected, then Image Dst Out is the same as Image Dst. Otherwise, Image Dst Out refers to the image referenced by Image Src A.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>All connected images must be the same image type. An operation between an image and a constant occurs when the input Image Src B is not connected. <LF><LF>This VI is performed for each pixel (x, y) in the following manner:<LF><LF>If two images are connected on input, then Dst(x, y) = SrcA(x, y) OR SrcB(x, y).<LF><LF>If the input Image Src B is not connected, then Dst(x, y) = SrcA(x, y) OR Constant.
XXXXPerforms an XOR or XNOR operation on two images or an image and a constant.<LF>    	    <LF>Xor/Xnor (Xor) is the result from a logic operation. If set to TRUE, the result of a logic operation is the negative of the performed logic operation (XNOR instead of XOR). The default is FALSE, which specifies a positive operation (XOR).<LF><LF>Image Src A is the reference to the source (input) image A.<LF><LF>Image Dst is the reference to the destination image. If it is connected, it must be the same type as Image Src A.<LF><LF>Image Src B is the reference to the source (input) image B.<LF><LF>Constant is a binary constant used for image-constant operations. The default is 0.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Dst Out is the reference to the destination (output) image which receives the processing results of the VI. If the Image Dst is connected, then Image Dst Out is the same as Image Dst. Otherwise, Image Dst Out refers to the image referenced by Image Src A.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>All connected images must be the same image type. An operation between an image and a constant occurs when the input Image Src B is not connected.<LF> <LF>This VI is performed for each pixel (x, y) in the following manner:<LF><LF>If two images are connected on input, then Dst(x, y) = SrcA(x, y) XOR SrcB(x, y)<LF><LF>If the input Image Src B is not connected, then Dst(x, y) = SrcA(x, y) XOR Constant.
XXXXPerforms morphological transformations that can be directly applied to gray-level images. All source and destination image types must be the same. The connected source image for a morphological transformation must have been created with a border capable of supporting the size of the structuring element. A 3 × 3 structuring element requires a minimal border of 1, a 5 × 5 structuring element requires a minimal border of 2, and so forth. The border size of the destination image is not important.<LF>    	    <LF>Square/Hexa (Square) specifies whether the pixel frame is treated as square or hexagonal during the transformation. The default is square.<LF><LF>Image Src is the reference to the source (input) image.<LF>	<LF>Image Dst is the reference to the destination image. If it is connected, it must be the same type as the Image Src.<LF>	<LF>Operation specifies the type of morphological transformation procedure to use. The default is 0.<LF><LF>  0	AutoM	(Default) Auto median.<LF>  1	Close	Dilation followed by an erosion<LF>  2	Dilate	Dilation<LF>  3	Erode	Erosion<LF>  4	unused	<LF>  5	unused	<LF>  6	unused	<LF>  7	unused	<LF>  8	Open	Erosion followed by a dilation<LF>  9	PClose	A succession of 7 closings and openings<LF>  10	POpen	A succession of 7 openings and closings<LF><LF>Structuring Element is a 2D array that contains the structuring element to be applied to the image. The size of the structuring element (the size of this array) determines the processing size. A structuring element of 3 × 3 is used if this input is not connected. <LF>	<LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Dst Out is the reference to the destination (output) image which receives the processing results of the VI. If the Image Dst is connected, then Image Dst Out is the same as Image Dst. Otherwise, Image Dst Out refers to the image referenced by Image Src.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>A structuring element must have odd-sized dimensions so that it contains a central pixel. The function does not take into account the odd boundary, farthest out on the matrix, if one of the dimensions for the structuring element is even. For example, if the input structuring element is 6 × 4 (X = 6 and Y = 4), the actual processing is performed at 5 × 3. Both the sixth line and the fourth row are ignored. Recall that the second dimension in a G array is the vertical direction (Y). The processing speed is correlated with the size of the structuring element. For example, a 3 × 3 convolution processes nine pixels while a 5 × 5 convolution processes 25 pixels.
XXXXPerforms movement sequences and plays sounds. <LF><LF>Ports: Select the movement type (Dance, Bug, <LF>Random, Jitter) and duration. <LF><LF>Time and LocalVar4-8 are preserved by the sub.
XXXXPerforms movement sequences and plays sounds. <LF><LF>Ports: Select the movement type (Dance, Bug, <LF>Random, Jitter) and duration. <LF><LF>Time and LocalVar4-8 are preserved by the sub.<LF><LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Movement Type:  String a modifier to choose a movement and sound sequence.<LF><LF>Time:  String a single modifier.
XXXXPerforms one loop of the basic motion types.  The <LF>local variable Time sets the duration of each step<LF>in the motion. <LF><LF>All local variables are preserved by the sub.
XXXXPerforms one loop of the basic motion types.  The <LF>local variable Time sets the duration of each step<LF>in the motion. <LF><LF>All local variables are preserved by the sub.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Movement Type:  Choose which type of motion you wish by stringing in a modifier.<LF><LF>Time: String in a modifier to set the duration of each step in the motion. The value can range from 1 to 32767.<LF><LF>
XXXXPerforms primary morphological transformations. All source images must be 8-bit binary images. The connected source image for a morphological transformation must have been created with a border capable of supporting the size of the structuring element. A 3 × 3 structuring element requires a minimal border of 1, a 5 × 5 structuring element requires a minimal border of 2, and so forth. The border size of the destination image is not important.<LF>    <LF>Square/Hexa (Square) specifies whether the pixel frame is treated as square or hexagonal during the transformation. The default is square.<LF>	<LF>Image Src is the reference to the source (input) image.<LF>	<LF>Image Dst is the reference to the destination image. If it is connected, it must be the same type as the Image Src.<LF>	<LF>Operation specifies the type of morphological transformation procedure to use. The default is 0.<LF><LF> 0	AutoM	(Default) Auto median<LF> 1	Close	Dilation followed by an erosion.<LF> 2	Dilate	Dilation (the opposite of an erosion)<LF> 3	Erode	Erosion that eliminates isolated background pixels<LF> 4 	Gradient 	Extraction of internal and external contours of a <LF>     particle<LF>  5	Gradient out	Extraction of exterior contours of a particle.<LF>  6	Gradient in	Extraction of interior contours of a particle<LF>  7	Hit miss	Elimination of all pixels that do not have the same <LF>    pattern as found in the structuring element<LF>  8	Open	Erosion followed by a dilation<LF>  9	PClose	A succession of 7 closings and openings<LF>  10	POpen	A succession of 7 openings and closings<LF>  11	Thick	Activation of all pixels matching the pattern in the <LF>       structuring element<LF>  12	Thin	Activation of all pixels matching the pattern in the   <LF>       structuring element<LF><LF>Structuring Element is a 2D array that contains the structuring element to be applied to the image. The size of the structuring element (the size of this array) determines the processing size. A structuring element of 3 × 3 is used if this input is not connected. <LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Dst Out is the reference to the destination (output) image which receives the processing results of the VI. If the Image Dst is connected, then Image Dst Out is the same as Image Dst. Otherwise, Image Dst Out refers to the image referenced by Image Src.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>A structuring element must have odd-sized dimensions so that it contains a central pixel. The function does not take into account the odd boundary, furthest out on the matrix, if one of the dimensions for the structuring element is even. For example, if the input structuring element is 6 × 4 (X = 6 and Y = 4), the actual processing is performed at 5 × 3. Both the sixth line and the fourth row are ignored. Recall that the second dimension in a G array is the vertical direction (Y). The processing speed is correlated with the size of the structuring element; for example, a 3 × 3 convolution processes nine pixels while a 5 × 5 convolution processes 25 pixels.
XXXXPerforms the avoid sequence avoiding right or left.  <LF>Avoiding right has random turn time.<LF><LF>Local variable Time, Movement Type and LocalVar4-8 are preserved by the sub.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Movement Type:  String in a single modifier. <LF>                           (0= Avoid Left, 1= Avoid Right)<LF><LF>Time:  String a single modifier.
XXXXPerforms the avoid sequence avoiding right or left.  <LF>Avoiding right has random turn time.<LF><LF>Local variable Time, Movement Type and LocalVar4-8<LF>are preserved by the sub.
XXXXPerimeter
XXXXPerimeter (pixels)
XXXXPerio. Counter
XXXXPeriod
XXXXPhotometric
XXXXPiano
XXXXPiano Cntrls
XXXXPiano Player
XXXXPicture
XXXXPicture 1
XXXXPicture 2
XXXXPicture in
XXXXPicture to add (none)
XXXXPilot 1
XXXXPilot 2
XXXXPilot 3
XXXXPilot 4
XXXXPilot Cmds
XXXXPilot Level
XXXXPilot Paths
XXXXPilot Programs
XXXXPilot Themes
XXXXPilot Vault
XXXXPixel Array
XXXXPixel Average
XXXXPixel Color
XXXXPixel Coordinates
XXXXPixel Pointer in
XXXXPixel Pointer out
XXXXPixel Position
XXXXPixel Position Out
XXXXPixel Size (Bytes)
XXXXPixel Sum
XXXXPixel Value
XXXXPixel Value (I16)
XXXXPixel Value (SGL)
XXXXPixel Value (U32)
XXXXPixel Value (U8)
XXXXPixel Value (U8, I16, Float)
XXXXPixels (I16)
XXXXPixels (SGL)
XXXXPixels (U8)
XXXXPixels Line
XXXXPixels Line (I16)
XXXXPixels Line (SGL)
XXXXPixels Line (U32)
XXXXPixels Line (U8)
XXXXPixels Line(Float)
XXXXPixels Line(I16)
XXXXPixels Line(U32)
XXXXPixels Line(U8)
XXXXPixels(Float)
XXXXPixels(I16)
XXXXPixels(U8)
XXXXPixvalue
XXXXPlane
XXXXPlay
XXXXPlay Any Note
XXXXPlay Current Song
XXXXPlay Sound
XXXXPlay Sound #4
XXXXPlay Video
XXXXPlay a short beep  (sound #4).
XXXXPlay any note according to a specified frequency.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Frequency: String in a frequency in Hertz (Hz) for <LF>the note to be played.<LF><LF>Duration:  String in a number in seconds.
XXXXPlay any note according to a specified frequency.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Frequency: String in a frequency in Hertz (Hz) for the note to be played. <LF> <LF>Duration:  String in a number in seconds.
XXXXPlay one of six different beeping sounds.<LF>The default sound (6) is a fast increasing sweeping <LF>sound.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Sound Type:  String a number between 1 and 6 to <LF>change the sound type:<LF><LF>1 = Key-click  <LF>2 = BeepBeep<LF>3 = Descending sweep<LF>4 = Rising sweep<LF>5 = Buzz<LF>6 = Fast rising sweep
XXXXPlay one of six different beeping sounds.<LF>The default sound (6) is a fast rising sweep sound.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Sound Type:  String a number between 1 and 6 to change the sound type:<LF><LF>1 = Key-click  <LF>2 = BeepBeep<LF>3 = Descending sweep<LF>4 = Rising sweep<LF>5 = Buzz<LF>6 = Fast rising sweep
XXXXPlay sound #4.
XXXXPlay the musical note 'A# (Bb)'.<LF>The default is a quarter note in the standard scale.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Duration:  String in the musical duration: whole, half, quarter or sixteenth note. <LF><LF>Octave:  String in one or more 'Down an Octave' or 'Up an Octave' modifiers to change the pitch by one or more octaves.
XXXXPlay the musical note 'A# (Bb)'.<LF>The default is a quarter note in the standard scale.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Duration:  String in the musical duration: whole, half,<LF>quarter or sixteenth note. <LF><LF>Octave:  String in one or more 'Down an Octave' or 'Up an <LF>Octave' modifiers to change the pitch by one or more octaves.
XXXXPlay the musical note 'A'.<LF>The default is a quarter note in the standard scale.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Duration:  String in the musical duration: whole, half, <LF>quarter or sixteenth note. <LF><LF>Octave:  String in one or more 'Down an Octave' or 'Up an <LF>Octave' modifiers to change the pitch by one or more octaves.
XXXXPlay the musical note 'A'.<LF>The default is a quarter note in the standard scale.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Duration:  String in the musical duration: whole, half, quarter or sixteenth note. <LF><LF>Octave:  String in one or more 'Down an Octave' or 'Up an Octave' modifiers to change the pitch by one or more octaves.
XXXXPlay the musical note 'B'.<LF>The default is a quarter note in the standard scale.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Duration:  String in the musical duration: whole, half, <LF>quarter or sixteenth note. <LF><LF>Octave:  String in one or more 'Down an Octave' or 'Up an <LF>Octave' modifiers to change the pitch by one or more octaves.
XXXXPlay the musical note 'B'.<LF>The default is a quarter note in the standard scale.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Duration:  String in the musical duration: whole, half, quarter or sixteenth note. <LF><LF>Octave:  String in one or more 'Down an Octave' or 'Up an Octave' modifiers to change the pitch by one or more octaves.
XXXXPlay the musical note 'C# (Db)'.<LF>The default is a quarter note in the standard scale.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Duration:  String in the musical duration: whole, half, <LF>quarter or sixteenth note. <LF><LF>Octave:  String in one or more 'Down an Octave' or 'Up an <LF>Octave' modifiers to change the pitch by one or more octaves.
XXXXPlay the musical note 'C# (Db)'.<LF>The default is a quarter note in the standard scale.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Duration:  String in the musical duration: whole, half, quarter or sixteenth note. <LF><LF>Octave:  String in one or more 'Down an Octave' or 'Up an Octave' modifiers to change the pitch by one or more octaves.
XXXXPlay the musical note 'C'.<LF>The default is a quarter note in the standard scale.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Duration:  String in the musical duration: whole, half, <LF>quarter or sixteenth note. <LF><LF>Octave:  String in one or more 'Down an Octave' or 'Up an <LF>Octave' modifiers to change the pitch by one or more octaves..
XXXXPlay the musical note 'C'.<LF>The default is a quarter note in the standard scale.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Duration:  String in the musical duration: whole, half, quarter or sixteenth note. <LF><LF>Octave:  String in one or more 'Down an Octave' or 'Up an Octave' modifiers to change the pitch by one or more octaves.
XXXXPlay the musical note 'D# (Eb)'.<LF>The default is a quarter note in the standard scale.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Duration:  String in the musical duration: whole, half, <LF>quarter or sixteenth note. <LF><LF>Octave:  String in one or more 'Down an Octave' or 'Up an <LF>Octave' modifiers to change the pitch by one or more octaves.
XXXXPlay the musical note 'D# (Eb)'.<LF>The default is a quarter note in the standard scale.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Duration:  String in the musical duration: whole, half, quarter or sixteenth note. <LF><LF>Octave:  String in one or more 'Down an Octave' or 'Up an Octave' modifiers to change the pitch by one or more octaves.
XXXXPlay the musical note 'D'.<LF>The default is a quarter note in the standard scale.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Duration:  String in the musical duration: whole, half, quarter <LF>or sixteenth note. <LF><LF>Octave:  String in one or more 'Down an Octave' or 'Up an <LF>Octave' modifiers to change the pitch by one or more octaves.
XXXXPlay the musical note 'D'.<LF>The default is a quarter note in the standard scale.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Duration:  String in the musical duration: whole, half, quarter or sixteenth note. <LF><LF>Octave:  String in one or more 'Down an Octave' or 'Up an Octave' modifiers to change the pitch by one or more octaves.
XXXXPlay the musical note 'E'.<LF>The default is a quarter note in the standard scale.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Duration:  String in the musical duration: whole, half, <LF>quarter or sixteenth note. <LF><LF>Octave:  String in one or more 'Down an Octave' or 'Up an <LF>Octave' modifiers to change the pitch by one or more octaves.
XXXXPlay the musical note 'E'.<LF>The default is a quarter note in the standard scale.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Duration:  String in the musical duration: whole, half, quarter or sixteenth note. <LF><LF>Octave:  String in one or more 'Down an Octave' or 'Up an Octave' modifiers to change the pitch by one or more octaves.
XXXXPlay the musical note 'F# (Gb)'.<LF>The default is a quarter note in the standard scale.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Duration:  String in the musical duration: whole, half, <LF>quarter or sixteenth note. <LF><LF>Octave:  String in one or more 'Down an Octave' or 'Up an <LF>Octave' modifiers to change the pitch by one or more octaves.
XXXXPlay the musical note 'F# (Gb)'.<LF>The default is a quarter note in the standard scale.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Duration:  String in the musical duration: whole, half, quarter or sixteenth note. <LF><LF>Octave:  String in one or more 'Down an Octave' or 'Up an Octave' modifiers to change the pitch by one or more octaves.
XXXXPlay the musical note 'F'.<LF>The default is a quarter note in the standard scale.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Duration:  String in the musical duration: whole, half, <LF>quarter or sixteenth note. <LF><LF>Octave:  String in one or more 'Down an Octave' or 'Up an <LF>Octave' modifiers to change the pitch by one or more octaves.
XXXXPlay the musical note 'F'.<LF>The default is a quarter note in the standard scale.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Duration:  String in the musical duration: whole, half, quarter or sixteenth note. <LF><LF>Octave:  String in one or more 'Down an Octave' or 'Up an Octave' modifiers to change the pitch by one or more octaves.
XXXXPlay the musical note 'G# (Ab)'.<LF>The default is a quarter note in the standard scale.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Duration:  String in the musical duration: whole, <LF>half, quarter or sixteenth note. <LF><LF>Octave:  String in one or more 'Down an Octave' or 'Up an <LF>Octave' modifiers to change the pitch by one or more octaves.
XXXXPlay the musical note 'G# (Ab)'.<LF>The default is a quarter note in the standard scale.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Duration:  String in the musical duration: whole, half, quarter or sixteenth note. <LF><LF>Octave:  String in one or more 'Down an Octave' or 'Up an Octave' modifiers to change the pitch by one or more octaves.
XXXXPlay the musical note 'G'.<LF>The default is a quarter note in the standard scale.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Duration:  String in the musical duration: whole, <LF>half, quarter or sixteenth note. <LF><LF>Octave:  String in one or more 'Down an Octave' or 'Up an <LF>Octave' modifiers to change the pitch by one or more octaves.
XXXXPlay the musical note 'G'.<LF>The default is a quarter note in the standard scale.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Duration:  String in the musical duration: whole, half, quarter or sixteenth note. <LF><LF>Octave:  String in one or more 'Down an Octave' or 'Up an Octave' modifiers to change the pitch by one or more octaves.
XXXXPlay the sound in a container.  <LF>The default is to play the sound in the Red Container for 1 sec.<LF><LF>Note: Frequencies are rounded down to the nearest integer.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier that corresponds to the <LF>container you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Time (sec):  String  in a number for how long to play the note
XXXXPlays a system sound according to the local <LF>variable Status A and the local variable Status B.  <LF><LF><LF>All local variables are preserved by the sub.<LF><LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>StatusA:  String a single modifier.<LF><LF>StatusB:  String a single modifier.
XXXXPlays a system sound according to the local <LF>variable Status A and the local variable Status B.  <LF><LF>All local variables are preserved by the sub.
XXXXPlot
XXXXPlot 0
XXXXPlot 1
XXXXPlot 10
XXXXPlot 11
XXXXPlot 12
XXXXPlot 13
XXXXPlot 2
XXXXPlot 3
XXXXPlot 4
XXXXPlot 5
XXXXPlot 6
XXXXPlot 7
XXXXPlot 8
XXXXPlot 9
XXXXPlot Attributes
XXXXPlot Color
XXXXPlot Color 2
XXXXPlot Style
XXXXPlot of Area
XXXXPlot of Maximum
XXXXPlot of Mean
XXXXPlot of Minimum
XXXXPlot of Slope
XXXXPlot of Statistic
XXXXPlot of Statistic 2
XXXXPoint
XXXXPoint 0
XXXXPoint Number
XXXXPoint Symbol
XXXXPoints
XXXXPoints Arc
XXXXPoints Container
XXXXPoints and Lines
XXXXPolarity
XXXXPoll Interface Box
XXXXPolygon
XXXXPort
XXXXPort 1
XXXXPort 2
XXXXPort 3
XXXXPort A
XXXXPort B
XXXXPort C
XXXXPort Value
XXXXPort or memory allocation where value is being read from.
XXXXPorts
XXXXPorts Monitored
XXXXPos. X
XXXXPos. Y
XXXXPosition
XXXXPosition Container (Position LogIT)
XXXXPosition LogIT
XXXXPosition Sensor Fork (Position LogIT)
XXXXPower
XXXXPower A
XXXXPower B
XXXXPower C
XXXXPower Level
XXXXPower Level 1
XXXXPower Level 2
XXXXPower Level 3
XXXXPower Level 4
XXXXPower Level 5
XXXXPower Level Modifier<LF><LF>String this modifier into the lamp or motor <LF>commands to set the power level to 2.
XXXXPower Level Modifier<LF><LF>String this modifier into the lamp or motor <LF>commands to set the power level to 3.
XXXXPower Level Modifier<LF><LF>String this modifier into the lamp or motor <LF>commands to set the power level to 4.
XXXXPower Level Modifier<LF><LF>String this modifier into the lamp or motor <LF>commands to set the power level to 5.
XXXXPower Level Modifier<LF><LF>String this modifier into the lamp or motor commands <LF>to set the power level to 1.
XXXXPower Level Modifier<LF><LF>String this modifier into the lamp or motor commands to set the power level to 1.
XXXXPower Level Modifier<LF><LF>String this modifier into the lamp or motor commands to set the power level to 2.
XXXXPower Level Modifier<LF><LF>String this modifier into the lamp or motor commands to set the power level to 3.
XXXXPower Level Modifier<LF><LF>String this modifier into the lamp or motor commands to set the power level to 4.
XXXXPower Level Modifier<LF><LF>String this modifier into the lamp or motor commands to set the power level to 5.
XXXXPowerdown time (min)
XXXXPrecision (degrees)
XXXXPreloading
XXXXPresent
XXXXPresentation
XXXXPressed
XXXXPressure Container (Pressure LogIT)
XXXXPressure LogIT
XXXXPressure Sensor Fork (Pressure LogIT)
XXXXPressure sensor
XXXXPresto
XXXXPreview
XXXXPrevious
XXXXPrgm#
XXXXPrgms
XXXXPrint
XXXXPrint ?
XXXXPrint?
XXXXPriority
XXXXProTemp LogIT
XXXXProcess
XXXXProcessed Image
XXXXProcessor
XXXXProduces a histogram equalization of an image. This VI redistributes the pixel values of an image in order to provide an accumulated linear histogram. It is necessary to execute IMAQ Histogram prior to this VI in order to supply Histogram Report as input. The precision of the VI is dependent on the histogram precision, which in turn is dependent on the number of classes used in the histogram. <LF>    	  <LF>Histogram Report is the histogram from the source image. This histogram is supplied from the output of the VI IMAQ Histogram. No processing occurs if this input is not connected, therefore you need to connect the same image to both IMAQ Histogram and this VI. <LF><LF>Image Src is the reference to the source (input) image.<LF><LF>Image Mask is an 8-bit image that specifies the region in the image to modify. Only pixels in the original image that correspond to the equivalent pixel in the mask are replaced by the values in the lookup table (provided that the value in the mask is not 0). All pixels not corresponding to this criteria keep their original value. The complete image is modified if Image Mask is not connected. <LF><LF>Image Dst is the reference to the destination image. If it is connected, it must be the same type as the Image Src.<LF>	<LF>Range is a cluster containing the minimum and maximum values for the range to equalize. The equalization of the entire image occurs if this cluster is not connected (or the defaults 0 and 0 are used as input). In this case, the Minimal Value and Maximal Value contained in Histogram Report are considered to be the min and max. The default is (0, 0).<LF><LF>The following elements are specified in this cluster:<LF><LF>Minimum is the smallest value used for processing. After processing, all pixel values that are less than or equal to the Minimum (in the original image) are set to 0 for an 8-bit image. In 16-bit and 32-bit floating-point images, these pixel values are set to the smallest pixel value found in the original image.<LF>	<LF>Maximum is the largest value used for processing. After processing, all pixel values that are greater than or equal to the Maximum (in the original image) are set to 255 for an 8-bit image. In 16-bit and 32-bit floating-point images, these pixel values are set to the largest pixel value found in the original image.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Dst Out is the reference to the destination (output) image which receives the processing results of the VI. If the Image Dst is connected, then Image Dst Out is the same as Image Dst. Otherwise, Image Dst Out refers to the image referenced by Image Src.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Note:	The modification to the pixel value is dependent on the histogram contents, regardless of the image type used. All pixels entering into the same histogram class have an identical value after equalization. 
XXXXProgram
XXXXProgram 1
XXXXProgram Area
XXXXProgram Level 1
XXXXProgram Level 2
XXXXProgram Level 3
XXXXProgram Level 4
XXXXProgram Level 5
XXXXProgram Number
XXXXProgram Page
XXXXProgrammer
XXXXProgramming 1
XXXXProgramming 2
XXXXProject
XXXXProject Name
XXXXProject Name 2
XXXXProject Refnum OUT
XXXXProject Title
XXXXProjection x
XXXXProjection y
XXXXProjects
XXXXProper close morph
XXXXProper_Close
XXXXProper_Open
XXXXPublish
XXXXPublish type
XXXXPurple Bin
XXXXPut the absolute value of a number in the container.  <LF>The default is to put the absolute value of 0 in the Red Container.<LF><LF>Note: Numbers are rounded down to the nearest integer.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier that corresponds to the <LF>container you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Number to find absolute value:  String in the number.
XXXXPut the absolute value of a number in the container.  <LF>The default is to put the absolute value of 0 in the Red Container.<LF><LF>Note: Numbers are rounded down to the nearest integer.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier that corresponds to the container you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Number to find absolute value:  String in the number.
XXXXPut the contents of a Plot into a bin.<LF>The default bin is the red bin.
XXXXPut the sign of a number in the container.  <LF>The default is to put a 0 in the Red Container.<LF><LF>Note: Numbers are rounded down to the nearest integer.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier that corresponds to <LF>the container you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Sign of Number:  String a number, the sign of which will be put into <LF>the container.  If you string a negative number, a -1 will be put into <LF>the container, a positive number will put a 1 in the container, and a <LF>0 will put a 0 in the container.
XXXXPut the sign of a number in the container.  <LF>The default is to put a 0 in the Red Container.<LF><LF>Note: Numbers are rounded down to the nearest integer.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier that corresponds to the container you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Sign of Number:  String a number, the sign of which will be put into the container.  If you string a negative number, a -1 will be put into the container, a positive number will put a 1 in the container, and a 0 will put a 0 in the container.
XXXXQuantifies the contents of an image or the regions within an image. The region definition is performed with a labeled image mask. Each mask possesses a single unique value.<LF>    	  <LF>Image is the input source image.<LF>	<LF>Image Mask is an 8-bit image specifying the regions to quantify in the image. Only pixels in the original image that correspond to the equivalent pixel in the mask are used for the quantification. Each pixel in this image (mask) indicates, by its value, which region belongs the corresponding pixel in  Image. 255 different regions can be quantified directly from the Image. A quantification is performed on the complete image if the Image Mask is not connected.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF>	<LF>Global Report is a cluster containing the quantification data relative to all the regions within an image (or the entire image if the Image Mask is not connected). The following elements are contained in this cluster:<LF><LF>    Mean Value of the pixels is returned. <LF>	   <LF>    Standard Deviation of the pixel values is returned. It indicates <LF>    the distribution of the values in relation to the average. The   <LF>    higher this value, the better the distribution of the pixel values.<LF>	   <LF>     Minimal Value returns the smallest pixel value. <LF>   	<LF>     Maximal Value returns the largest pixel value. <LF>    	<LF>     Area (calibrated) returns the analyzed surface area in user-units. <LF>    <LF>     Area (pixels) returns the analyzed surface area in pixels.<LF>   <LF>     % returns the percentage of the analyzed surface in relation to <LF>     the complete image. <LF><LF>Regions Report is a cluster containing the quantification data relative to each region within an image (or the entire image if the Image Mask is not connected). The nth element in this array contains the data regarding the nth region. The size of this array is equal to the largest pixel value in Image Mask. The returned data is identical to the data in Global Report. <LF>	<LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXQuarter note
XXXXQuit
XXXXRCX
XXXXRCX BATTERY LEVEL
XXXXRCX Battery Level
XXXXRCX Battery Power
XXXXRCX Error
XXXXRCX FIRMWARE VERSION
XXXXRCX Firmware Version
XXXXRCX IR POWER SETTING
XXXXRCX IR Power Setting
XXXXRCX Location
XXXXRCX Multimeter
XXXXRCX Oscilloscope
XXXXRCX Output Control
XXXXRCX POWERDOWN TIME
XXXXRCX PROGRAMS 1 & 2
XXXXRCX Powerdown Time
XXXXRCX Present
XXXXRCX Programs 1 & 2
XXXXRCX Running and in range?
XXXXRCX Running?
XXXXRCX SETTINGS
XXXXRCX Settings
XXXXRCX Tower Power
XXXXRCX errors
XXXXRCX in View?
XXXXRGB
XXXXRGB Chunky
XXXXRIS
XXXXROBO Text
XXXXROBO Text 2
XXXXROBOLAB
XXXXROBOLAB Help
XXXXROBOLAB Internet Server
XXXXROBOLAB Settings
XXXXROBOLAB was developed at the Tufts University College of Engineering.
XXXXROI
XXXXROI Descriptor
XXXXROI Descriptor in
XXXXROI Descriptor out
XXXXROI Descriptors
XXXXROI Descriptors out
XXXXROI Graph
XXXXROI Pixel Statistics
XXXXRS
XXXXRadial Points
XXXXRadius
XXXXRandom Colors
XXXXRandom Direction
XXXXRandom Fill Container
XXXXRandom Fork
XXXXRandom Number
XXXXRandom Number Modifier<LF><LF>A random value between zero and eight.
XXXXRange
XXXXRange Point
XXXXRaw
XXXXReaction Time
XXXXRead BMP
XXXXRead JPEG
XXXXRead Last Error
XXXXRead Raw File
XXXXRead Run Status
XXXXRead Tower Power
XXXXRead Value
XXXXRead and Display Value
XXXXRead error code
XXXXRead the Run Status of the RCX.<LF><LF>(This tells you if the little person is running on the RCX screen)<LF><LF>This returns a TRUE if the RCX is out of range or if the RCX is in range and the person is running.
XXXXRead the transmitter power of the RCX.<LF><LF>(The transmitter power of the infrared transmitter has to be set manually with the switch on the front of the tower).<LF><LF>Outputs true if the RCX is set to Hi Power.
XXXXReads LCD indicators, using an input image and the descriptor of the ROI calculated by the Vi Get LCD ROI . It returns the number as a double and as a string. It also indicates via the status output if the number was properly recognized or if one of the digit hasn't been well recognized, thanks to the status output. This output returns the status of each digits of the indicator.<LF>This Vi can read LCD or electroluminescent indicators. It is robust to light drift.<LF><LF>- 	Image is the reference of the image to be treated.<LF><LF>- 	ROI Descriptor is the descriptor of the area of interest calculated by the Vi Get LCD ROI that contains the quadrilaterals surrounding each digit.<LF><LF>- 	Threshold (default=8) is used to determine if a segment is on or off. This value is compared to the standard deviation of the line profiles. This value may be increased when using contrasted images or lowered in case of poorly contrasted images.<LF><LF>- 	Search sign indicates if the algorithm has to read the sign of the indicator.<LF><LF>- 	Search Decimal Separator (default FALSE) search and not the decimal separator after each digit.<LF><LF>- 	LCD/LED (LCD) (default FALSE) is a Boolean used to choose the indicator type. FALSE corresponds to LCD indicators, TRUE to electroluminescent indicators.<LF><LF>- 	error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>- 	Output string contains the read number. If the decimal separator is on and the control Search Decimal Separator is true, it is represented in the string by a dot “.” symbol.<LF><LF>- 	Output value is the double containing the value of the number represented by the indicator number.<LF><LF>-  Segments status is a array of clusters of booleans that contains the state of the segments.<LF><LF>- 	error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF>
XXXXReads a predefined kernel. This VI uses the contents of a convolution catalog (imaqknl.txt). This VI outputs a specified kernel after reading the kernel-associated code. This code consists of three separate units: Kernel Family, Kernel Size, and Kernel Number. If you already know the code, then you can enter directly it with Kernel Code.<LF><LF>Kernel Family determines the type of matrix. The valid values are between 1 and 4, each associated with a particular type. This value corresponds to the thousandth unit in the researched code.<LF><LF>  1	Gradient <LF>  2	Laplacian <LF>  3	Smoothing<LF>  4	Gaussian<LF><LF>Kernel Size (3,5,...) determines the horizontal and vertical matrix size. The values are 3, 5, and 7, corresponding to the convolutions 3 × 3, 5 × 5, and 7 × 7 supplied in the matrix catalog. This value corresponds to the hundredth unit in the researched code.<LF><LF>Kernel Number is the matrix family number. It is a two-digit number, between 0 and n, belonging to a family and a size. A number of predefined matrices are available for each type and size. <LF><LF>Kernel Code is a code that permits direct access to a convolution matrix cataloged in the file imaqknl.txt. Each code specifies a specific convolution matrix. This input is used under the conditions that it is connected and is not 0. The kernel located in the file then is transcribed into a 2D G array that is available from the output Kernel. The user can use the codes to specify a predefined kernel as well as to create new user-coded kernels. The coding syntax is simple to employ and is broken down in the following manner. <LF> <LF>  FSnn where F is the kernel family (1 to 4),<LF>  S is the kernel size (3,5, and so forth), and<LF>  nn is the kernel number (based on the family and size of the   <LF>  kernel).<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Divider is the normalization factor associated with the retrieved kernel.<LF><LF>Kernel is the resulting matrix. It corresponds to a kernel encoded by a code specified from the inputs Kernel Family, Kernel Size, and Kernel Number or from a code directly passed through the input Kernel Code. This output can be connected directly to the input Kernel in IMAQ Convolute.<LF><LF>Kernel code indicates the code that was used to retrieve the kernel.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXReads a single seven segment digit from a rectangular area of interest drawn around this digit. It can read LCD and electroluminescent indicators. It returns a value as a string and a cluster that contains the state of each segment (on or off).<LF><LF>- 	Image is the reference of the image containing the seven segment digit.<LF><LF>- 	ROI Descriptor is the descriptor of the area of interest drawn by the user that corresponds to a quadrilateral surrounding the digit. It is compatible with the type ROI Descriptor of IMAQä Vision for G. It can be returned by the VI IMAQ WindGetRoi. The type of ROI must be rectangle or polygonal.<LF><LF>- 	Threshold (default=8) is used to determine if a segment is on or off. This value is compared to the standard deviation of the line profiles. This value may be increased when using images with high contrast or lowered in case of poor contrast images.<LF><LF>- 	LCD/LED (LCD) (default FALSE) is a Boolean used to choose the indicator type. FALSE corresponds to LCD indicators and TRUE to electroluminescent indicators.<LF><LF>- 	Search Decimal Separator (default FALSE) determines whether to look for the decimal separator after each digit.<LF><LF>- 	error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>- 	String contains the value of the digit and decimal separator. If the decimal separator is on and the control Search Decimal Separator is true, it is represented in the string by a dot “.” symbol.<LF><LF>- 	Number contains the read digit.<LF><LF>- 	Segments status is a cluster of booleans that contains the state of the segments.  <LF><LF>- 	error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF>
XXXXReads an image file. The file format can be a standard format [APD, TIF, BMP , and PICT (Macintosh Only)] .<LF><LF>Image is the reference to the image structure to which the data from the image file is applied.<LF><LF>Load Color Palette? (No) determines whether the user wants to load the color table present in the file (if it exists). If loaded, this table is read and made available to the output Color palette. The default is FALSE.<LF><LF>File Options is a cluster of user-optional values that permits the user to read non-standard file formats. The file structure must be known to the user. This cluster consists of the following elements:<LF><LF>File Data Type indicates how the image file is encoded. The possible formats are :<LF><LF>  0	1-bit <LF>  1	2-bits<LF>  2	4-bits<LF>  3	8 bits (default)<LF>  4	16 bits (unsigned)<LF>  5	16 bits (signed)<LF>  6	16 bits (RGB chunky)<LF>  7	24 bits (RGB chunky)<LF>  8	24 bits (RGB planar)<LF>  9	32 bits (unsigned)<LF>  10	32 bits (signed)<LF>  11	32 bits (RGB chunky)<LF>  12	32 bits (float)<LF>  13	48 bits (Complex 2 × 24 int)<LF>  14	64 bits (Complex 2 × 32 float)<LF><LF>Offset to Data specifies the size, in bytes, of the file header. This part of the file is not taken into account when read. The pixel values are read from the byte immediately after the offset size. The default is 0.<LF>	<LF>Use Min Max determines if the user is using a predetermined minimum and maximum. The technique to determine this minimum and maximum depends on the following input values:<LF><LF>0	Don't use min max	Minimum and maximum are dependent on the type of image. For an 8-bit image, min = 0 and max = 255.<LF>1	Use file values	The pixel values from the file are scanned one time to determine the minimum and maximum. Then, a linear interpolation is performed before loading the image. <LF>2	Use optional values	Uses the two values described below. <LF><LF>Optional Min Value is the minimum value of the pixels if Use Min Max is selected in mode 2 (Use optional values). In this case, pixels with a smaller value are altered to match the chosen minimum. The default is 0.<LF><LF>Optional Max Value is the maximum value of the pixels if Use Min Max is selected in mode 2 (Use optional values). In this case, pixels with a greater value are truncated to match the chosen maximum. The default is 255.<LF><LF>Byte Order determines if the byte weight is to be swapped (Intel or Motorola). The default is FALSE, which specifies Big endian (Motorola). TRUE specifies Little endian (Intel). This function is only useful if the pixels are encoded on more than 8 bits.<LF><LF>File Path is the complete path name, including drive, directory, and filename, for the file to be loaded. This path can be supplied either by the user or the VI File Dialog from LabVIEW or BridgeVIEW.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Out is the reference to the image structure containing the data read from the image file.<LF><LF>File Type indicates the file type that is read. This string contains the three indicative characters of the read file: APD (internal file format), TIF, BMP (Windows only), and PICT (Macintosh only.) File Type returns xxx if the file format is unknown.<LF><LF>File Data Type indicates the pixel size defined in the header for standard image file types. File Options are not necessary for reading standard image files. For other types of image files, the returned values are passed from File Options/File Data Type. Note that the original file type is never modified because only the image in memory is converted. <LF><LF>Color Palette contains the RGB color table (if the file has one) read from the file when the user passes the value TRUE for the input Load Color Palette? (No).<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>You can use this VI to open and display an image, as illustrated in the following graphic:
XXXXReads or extracts a pixel value from an image. <LF>    	<LF>Image is the reference to the source (input) image.<LF><LF>X Coordinate is the horizontal coordinate of the pixel to read. <LF><LF>Y Coordinate is the vertical coordinate of the pixel to read. <LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Pixel value (U8) returns the specified pixel value. This output is only used for an 8-bit image.<LF><LF>Pixel value (I16) returns the specified pixel value. This output is only used for an 8-bit or 16-bit image.<LF><LF>Pixel value (SGL) returns the specified pixel value. The SGL format can accept values from all image types supported (8-bit, 16-bit, or 32-bit floating point).<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXReads the pixel values from a color image. This VI returns the pixel value as an unsigned 32-bit integer indicator. This indicator can be converted into a cluster containing three elements possessing either (R, G, B), (H, S, L), or (H, S, V) using the VI IMAQ IntegerToColorValue.<LF><LF>Image must be an RGB-chunky image.<LF><LF>X Coordinate is the horizontal position of the pixel. <LF><LF>Y Coordinate is the vertical position of the pixel.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Pixel Value (U32) returns the pixel value as an unsigned 32-bit integer indicator.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXReads the position of the needle from the base of the needle and the array of the points of the arc curved by the extremity of the needle. It can read meters with a dark needle on a light background or vu-meters with a light needle on a light background. It returns the localition of the tip of the needle as a percentage of the full range of the meter.<LF><LF>- 	Image is the reference of the image to be treated.<LF><LF>- 	Needle base is a cluster containing the coordinates of the rotation center of the needle.<LF><LF>- 	Arc Points is an array of clusters containing the coordinates of the points of the bow curved by the extremity of the needle.<LF><LF>- 	Needle color (default FALSE) is a Boolean used to choose the color of the needle.<LF>	FALSE corresponds to a dark needle on a light background.<LF>	TRUE corresponds to a light needle on a dark background.<LF><LF>- 	error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>- 	Percentage of  scale contains the angle pointed by the needle, in percentage of the full scale angle.<LF><LF>- 	Point is a cluster containing the coordinates of the extremity of the needle.<LF><LF>- 	error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.    <LF>
XXXXReconnect
XXXXRecopies the Image Src into the Image Dst. If a pixel value is 0 (OFF) in the Image Mask, then all corresponding pixels in Image Dst are reset to 0.<LF>        	    <LF>Image Src is the reference to the source (input) image.<LF><LF>Image Mask is an 8-bit image that specifies the region in the image to modify. Only pixels in the original image that correspond to the equivalent pixel in the mask are replaced by the values in the lookup table (provided that the value in the mask is not 0). All pixels not corresponding to this criteria keep their original value. The complete image is modified if Image Mask is not connected.<LF><LF>Image Dst is the reference to the destination image. If it is connected, it must be the same type as Image Src.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Dst Out is the reference to the destination (output) image which receives the processing results of the VI. If the Image Dst is connected, then Image Dst Out is the same as Image Dst. Otherwise, Image Dst Out refers to the image referenced by Image Src.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>The Image Mask contents are considered to be binary. All pixel values other than zero are lit and all pixel values of 0 are turned off. Image Mask must be an 8-bit image if it is different than the Image Src. Image Dst must be the same image type as Image Src.
XXXXRecord
XXXXRect
XXXXRectangle
XXXXRed
XXXXRed (or Hue) Histogram Graph
XXXXRed (or Hue) Histogram Report
XXXXRed (or Hue) Lookup Table
XXXXRed (or Hue) Plane
XXXXRed (or Hue) Plane out
XXXXRed (or Hue) Range
XXXXRed (or Hue) value
XXXXRed Bin
XXXXRed Container
XXXXRed Data Set
XXXXRed Event
XXXXRed Event State
XXXXRed Jump
XXXXRed Land
XXXXRed Scroll
XXXXRed Timer
XXXXRed Timer  (sec)
XXXXRed scroll
XXXXRed value
XXXXRedox LogIT
XXXXRedox Sensor Container
XXXXRedox Sensor Fork
XXXXRedraw image ? (Y)
XXXXReentry?
XXXXRef. Point X
XXXXRef. Point Y
XXXXReference Center
XXXXReference Image
XXXXReflection
XXXXRefreshes a rectangle in an image window. The advantage of this VI is that refreshing a part of an image is always faster than drawing the whole image.<LF><LF>Window Number (0...15) selects the window to refresh. The default is 0.<LF><LF>Update Rectangle is an array of elements. They are the coordinates of the rectangle to be refreshed (Left / Top / Right / Bottom).<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Note:	There is a direct relationship between a window number and the last drawn image. Therefore, specifying only the window number is enough to know which image is to be refreshed.
XXXXRegion Reports
XXXXRegion Status
XXXXRegroups all comparison operations between two images or an image and a constant. An operation between an image and a constant occurs when the input Image Src B is not connected. <LF>    	    <LF>Operator specifies the comparison operator to use. The valid operators are described in the following table:<LF><LF>  0	Average	Calculates the average.<LF>  1	Min	Extracts the smallest value. <LF>  2	Max	Extracts the largest value.<LF>  3	Clear if <<	If SrcA(x, y) << SrcB(x, y) or a constant,<LF>     then Dst (x, y) = 0,<LF>     else Dst(x, y) = SrcA(x, y).<LF>  4	Clear if << or =	If SrcA(x, y)  SrcB(x, y) or a constant,<LF>     then Dst (x, y) = 0,<LF>     else Dst(x, y) = SrcA(x, y).<LF>  5	Clear if = 	If SrcA(x, y) = SrcB(x, y) or a constant,<LF>     then Dst (x, y) = 0, <LF>     else Dst(x, y) = SrcA(x, y).<LF>  6	Clear if >> or =	If SrcA(x, y)  SrcB(x, y) or a constant,<LF>     then Dst (x, y) = 0,<LF>     else Dst(x, y) = SrcA(x, y).<LF>   7	Clear if >>	If SrcA(x, y) >> SrcB(x, y) or a constant,<LF>     then Dst (x, y) = 0,<LF>     else Dst(x, y) = SrcA(x, y).<LF><LF>Image Src A is the reference to the source (input) image A.<LF><LF>Image Dst is the reference to the destination image. If it is connected, it must be the same type as Image Src A.<LF><LF>Image Src B is the reference to the source (input) image B.<LF><LF>Constant is the value used in comparison with Image Src A for image-constant operations. The default is 0.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Dst Out is the reference to the destination (output) image which receives the processing results of the VI. If the Image Dst is connected, then Image Dst Out is the same as Image Dst. Otherwise, Image Dst Out refers to the image referenced by Image <LF>Src A.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>
XXXXRegular Page Links
XXXXReject Border? (No)
XXXXReleased
XXXXRemain Tasks
XXXXRemote Error String
XXXXRemote Run
XXXXRemote site IP number
XXXXRemote site IP number:  String in the IP number or name of the computer that you are trying to access.  
XXXXRemove from Container
XXXXReorganization Mode
XXXXReplace Value
XXXXReplaces one or more image planes from a color image (RGB, HSL, or HSV). Only the planes connected at the input are replaced. If all three planes are connected then the input Image Src is not necessary and only the Image Dst is used. The image is resized to the dimensions of the planes passed on input; therefore, their size must be identical. If one or two planes are connected, then the planes must have the same dimension as the source image. <LF><LF>Color Mode defines the image color format to use for the operation. The default is 0, which specifies RGB.<LF><LF>0	(Default) RGB<LF>1	HSL<LF>2	HSV<LF>Image Src (RGB) is the reference to an image that has its three color planes replaced. It must be an RGB-chunky image. This image is not necessary if the destination image and the three color planes are connected. <LF><LF>Image Dst (RGB) is the reference to the destination image. It must be an RGB-chunky image.<LF><LF>Red (or Hue) Plane is the reference to the first color plane. This plane can be either the red plane (Color Mode 0) or the hue plane (Color Mode 1 or 2). It must be an 8-bit image. The color plane is not replaced if the input is not connected.<LF><LF>Green (or Sat) Plane is the reference to the second color plane. This plane can be either the green plane (Color Mode 0) or the saturation plane (Color Mode 1 or 2). It must be an 8-bit image. The color plane is not replaced if the input is not connected.<LF><LF>Blue (or Light or Val) Plane is the reference to the third color plane. This plane can be either the blue plane (Color Mode 0), the lightness plane (Color Mode 1), or the value plane (Color Mode 2). It must be an 8-bit image. The color plane is not replaced if the input is not connected.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Dst Out (RGB) is the reference to the output RGB image that is obtained by replacing one or more planes of the source color image.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXReplaces the real part or the imaginary part of a complex image, starting from a 2D array of floating-point values.<LF>  <LF>Plane specifies which component of the complex image is replaced with the values encoded in the array of floating points Image Pixels. The following values are valid:<LF><LF>  0	  (Default) Real<LF>  1  	Imaginary<LF><LF>Image is the reference to the input complex image.<LF>	<LF>Image Pixels (float) is a 2D floating-point array (Line, Column) containing all the pixel values that form the image. The first index corresponds to the vertical axis and the second to the horizontal index. The final size of the image is equal to the size of the array. The image passed in the input Image is forced to the same size as the array encoded by Input Pixels.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF>	<LF>Image Out is the reference to the destination (output) image.<LF>	<LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXReread?
XXXXResamples an array of pixels from an image using multiple interpolation functions. Use this VI to perform subpixel analysis of pixel profiles in the image.<LF> 	  <LF>Image Src is the input source image used for calculating the ROI profile. <LF>	<LF>   Coordinate Points is an array consisting of the spatial coordinates   <LF>   of pixels in the image.<LF>	  SubPixel Information is a cluster containing the following <LF>   parameters for subpixel analysis.<LF><LF>Interpolation Type specifies the method used to perform the interpolation. Three values are possible.<LF><LF>   0	Bi-Linear<LF>   1	Quadratic<LF>   2	Cubic Spline<LF><LF>SubPixel Accuracy specifies the number of samples that are obtained from a pixel. A subpixel accuracy of one fourth specifies that each pixel is split into four subpixels.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF>	<LF>Interpolated array contains the resampled pixel data.<LF>	<LF>Array Size specifies the size of the interpolated array.<LF>	<LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXReserved
XXXXReset Event
XXXXReset Scrolls
XXXXReset event
XXXXReset the RCX mailbox to a value.<LF><LF>The default is to fill the mailbox with the number 0.<LF><LF>Modifiers <LF><LF>Fill Value: String in the number to fill the mailbox with. <LF><LF>Note: This number must be between 0 - 256.  It must be a numeric constant (cannot be a container etc...)
XXXXReset the RCX mailbox to a value.<LF><LF>The default is to fill the mailbox with the number 0.<LF><LF>Modifiers <LF><LF>Fill Value: String in the number to fill the mailbox with. <LF><LF>Note: This number must be between 0 - 256.  It must be a numeric constant (cannot be a container etc...)<LF><LF>
XXXXReset the RCX mailbox to zero.<LF>This empties the mailbox so that mail can be received <LF>from another RCX.
XXXXReset the RCX mailbox to zero.<LF>This empties the mailbox so that mail can be received from another RCX.
XXXXReset the angle sensor to zero.<LF>The default is Port 1.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where your sensor is connected.
XXXXReset the angle sensor to zero.<LF>The default is Port 1.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where your sensor is connected.
XXXXReset the container to zero.<LF>The default is to set the Red Container to zero.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier <LF>corresponding to which container you want to <LF>use: red, yellow, or blue.
XXXXReset the container to zero.<LF>The default is to set the Red Container to zero.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier corresponding to which container <LF>you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.
XXXXReset the light sensor.<LF>The default is Port 1.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where your sensor is connected.
XXXXReset the light sensor.<LF>The default is Port 1.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where your sensor is connected.
XXXXReset the number of Touch and Release of the touch sensor to zero.<LF>The default is Port 1.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where your sensor is connected.
XXXXReset the number of Touch and Releases using the touch sensor to zero.<LF>The default is Port 1.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where your sensor is connected.
XXXXReset the number of clicks of the touch sensor to zero.<LF>The default is Port 1.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where your sensor is connected.
XXXXReset the number of clicks using the touch sensor to zero.<LF>The default is Port 1.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where your sensor is connected.
XXXXReset the temperature sensor to Celsius.<LF>The default is Port 1.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where your sensor is connected.
XXXXReset the temperature sensor to Celsius.<LF>The default is Port 1.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where your sensor is connected.
XXXXReset the temperature sensor to Fahrenheit.<LF>The default is Port 1.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where your sensor is connected.
XXXXReset the temperature sensor to Fahrenheit.<LF>The default is Port 1.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where your sensor is connected.
XXXXReset the timer to zero.<LF>The default is to set the Red Timer to zero.<LF><LF>Note:  This command is required before using the timer <LF>fork or wait for timer command. <LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Timer: String in a timer modifier to represent the <LF>timer you are resetting.
XXXXReset the timer to zero.<LF>The default is to set the Red Timer to zero.<LF><LF>Note:  This command is required before using the timer fork or wait for timer command. <LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Timer: String in a timer modifier to represent the timer you are resetting.
XXXXReset the touch sensor.<LF>The default is Port 1.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where your sensor is connected.
XXXXReset the touch sensor.<LF>The default is Port 1.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where your sensor is connected.
XXXXResets monitoring for an event.<LF>The default is to reset the Red Event with the value of port 1.<LF><LF>Modifiers: <LF><LF>Event: String in the event which you want to set up:  red, yellow, blue. <LF><LF>Event Source: String in the source of information for the event. <LF>   -Sensor based events: Value of Port 1,2,3<LF>   -Container based events: Value of container   <LF>   -Mail based events: Value of mailbox <LF>   -Timer based events: Value of timer
XXXXResets monitoring for an event.<LF>The default is to reset the Red Event with the value of port 1.<LF><LF>Modifiers: <LF><LF>Event: String in the event which you want to set up:  red, yellow, blue.<LF><LF>Event Source: String in the source of information for the event. <LF>   -Sensor based events: Value of Port 1,2,3<LF>   -Container based events: Value of container   <LF>   -Mail based events: Value of mailbox <LF>   -Timer based events: Value of timer
XXXXResize to Image Size? (Y)
XXXXResnap
XXXXRest
XXXXRest.<LF>The default is a quarter rest (the same length as a quarter note).<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Duration: String in a duration for which to rest.
XXXXRest.<LF>The default is a quarter rest <LF>(the same length as a quarter note).<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Duration: String in a duration for which to rest..
XXXXResume Logging
XXXXResume data logging for corresponding data set that has been stopped <LF><LF>The default is data logging is resumed for the Red Data Set.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Data Set: String the data set modifier that corresponds to the data set you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF>
XXXXResume data logging for corresponding data set that has been stopped. <LF><LF>The default is data logging is resumed for the Red Data Set.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Data Set: String the data set modifier that corresponds to the data set you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>
XXXXReturns a distance map based on the algorithms of Danielsson. The Danielsson distance map produces images and data that are similar to IMAQ Distance but are much more accurate. In most cases it is recommended that you use this function instead of IMAQ Distance. <LF>  <LF>Image Src is the reference to the source (input) image.<LF><LF>Image Dst is the reference to the destination image. If it is connected, it must be the same type as the Image Src.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Dst Out is the reference to the destination (output) image which receives the processing results of the VI. If the Image Dst is connected, then Image Dst Out is the same as Image Dst. Otherwise, Image Dst Out refers to the image referenced by Image Src.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXReturns a selection of particle measurements that are sent from IMAQ BasicParticle or IMAQ ComplexParticle based on a minimum and maximum criteria. With this VI, you choose which measurements you want to obtain from a particle detection process.<LF>  <LF>Reject Border? (No) determines whether particles touching the border should be measured. If set to TRUE, the measurements for particles touching the border are rejected. In this case, the input image source must be connected to the input Image. The default is FALSE<LF>	<LF>Image is the same input source image that is used to measure the particle coefficients by IMAQ BasicParticle or IMAQ ComplexParticle. This input is used only in a case in which particles touching the border are discarded for measurement calculations (Reject Border? is set to TRUE). <LF><LF>Basic Reports is the output array of measurements from IMAQ BasicParticle. The measurements stored in each element of this array are described in the IMAQ BasicParticle section.<LF>	<LF>Complex Reports is the output array of measurements from IMAQ ComplexParticle. The measurements stored in each element of this array are described in the IMAQ ComplexParticle section.<LF>	<LF>Selection Values is an array of selection criteria. Each criteria is composed of the following elements:<LF><LF>  Parameter is an indicator that determines the coefficient <LF>  ( measurement) to be selected. Parameter can have values    <LF>  compatible to those described in IMAQ ComplexMeasure. The  <LF>  validity of these values depends on the type of measurements <LF>  passed as input (for example, through Basic Reports or Complex<LF>  Reports).<LF><LF>	The following Parameter values are possible for selecting basic measurements (from Basic Reports).<LF><LF>           0	Area (pixels)	surface area of particle in pixels<LF>           1	Area (calibrated)	surface area of particle in user units<LF>           2 -9	unused	<LF>           10	Left Column (X)	left X coordinate of bounding rectangle<LF>           11	Upper Row (Y)	top Y coordinate of bounding rectangle<LF>           12	Right Column (X)	right X coordinate of bounding <LF>                rectangle<LF>           13	Lower Row (Y)	bottom Y coordinate of bounding <LF>                rectangle<LF>           14 - 27	unused	<LF><LF>The following Parameter values are possible for selecting complex measurements (from Complex Reports).<LF><LF>        0	Area (pixels)	surface area of particle in pixels<LF>        1	Area (calibrated)	surface area of particle in user units<LF>        2	Number of holes	number of holes<LF>        3	Hole's area (pixels)	surface area of the holes in pixels<LF>        4 - 9	unused	<LF>        10	Left Column (X)	left X coordinate of bounding rectangle<LF>        11	Upper Row (Y)	top Y coordinate of bounding rectangle<LF>        12	Right Column (X)	right X coordinate of bounding rectangle<LF>        13	Lower Row (Y)	bottom Y coordinate of bounding rectangle<LF>         14 - 15	unused	<LF>          16	Longest segment length	length of longest horizontal line         <LF>               segment<LF>           17	Longest segment left column (X)	left-most X coordinate of <LF>                longest horizontal line<LF>           18	Longest segment top row (Y)	Y coordinate of longest <LF>                horizontal line segment<LF>           19	Perimeter	length of outer contour of particle<LF>           20	Hole's Perimeter	perimeter of all holes<LF>           21	SumX	sum of the X-axis for each pixel of the particle<LF>           22	 SumY	sum of the Y-axis for each pixel of the particle<LF>           23	 SumXX	sum of the X-axis squared for each pixel of the  <LF>                 particle<LF>           24	 SumYY	sum of the Y-axis squared for each pixel of the <LF>                 particle<LF>           25	 SumXY	sum of the X-axis and Y-axis for each pixel of the <LF>                 particle<LF>           26	 Corrected projection x	projection corrected in x<LF>           27 	Corrected projection y	projection corrected in y<LF>Note:	Only the particle measurements that respond to the selection criteria are selected. The coefficient values must be contained in the interval between Lower Value and Upper Value.<LF><LF>   Lower Value is the minimum value (boundary) for the values to be <LF>   selected. <LF>	   <LF>    Upper Value is the maximum value (boundary) for the values to <LF>    be selected. <LF><LF>Selection Value is a selection criteria. This value is used only if the array of selection criteria is not connected to Selection Values. The selection criteria possess the same structure as each element in the array Selection Values. The default value for Parameter is –1, which specifies that all measurements are made (no selection). <LF>	<LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Basic Reports Out is an output containing an array of the basic measurements selected. <LF>	<LF>Number of Basic Particles is an output containing the number of basic measurements selected. <LF>	<LF>Complex Reports Out is an output containing an array of the complex measurements selected. <LF>	<LF>Number of Complex Particles is an output containing the number of complex measurements selected. <LF>	<LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXReturns different characteristics of the image.<LF><LF>Image is the reference to the image whose size has to be modified.<LF><LF>Image Type is the type of the image.<LF><LF>Unit is the measuring unit associated with the image. It can have the following values:<LF><LF>    0	undefined<LF>    1	Angstrom<LF>    2	micrometer<LF>    3	millimeter<LF>    4	centimeter<LF>    5	meter<LF>    6	kilometer<LF>    7	microinch<LF>    8	inch<LF>    9	feet<LF>   10	nautical miles<LF>   11	standard miles<LF><LF>X Resolution gives the horizontal resolution of the image. <LF><LF>Y Resolution gives the vertical resolution of the image.<LF><LF>X Step specifies the horizontal distance separating two adjacent pixels in the specified Unit.<LF><LF>Y Step specifies the vertical distance separating two adjacent pixels in the specified Unit.<LF>	<LF>	
XXXXReturns information about the host computer.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Host type returns the type of the host computer. The returned type is either Macintosh, Windows, Sun, or PowerMacintosh.<LF><LF>32 Bits? returns TRUE if the host computer has a 32-bit system.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXReturns the descriptor for an ROI.<LF><LF>Window Number (0…15) is a number from 0 to 15 that specifies the image window. The default value is 0. <LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>ROI Descriptor returns the descriptor for an ROI.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXReturns the events generated through the image windows as well as the data associated with them. <LF><LF>Event list (all) specifies which events to obtain. The default case returns all events generated through the image windows as well as the data associated with them. This VI enables you to specify the image window events that interest you.<LF><LF>0	No event	No event.<LF>1	Click event	A user has clicked in an image window. <LF>2	Draw event	A user has drawn in an image window. <LF>3	Move event	A user has moved an image window. <LF>4	Size event	A user has resized an image window. <LF>5	Scroll event	A user has moved the scroll bars in an image window. <LF>6	Activate event	A user has chosen (clicked once to activate) an image window. <LF>7	Close event	A user has closed an image window. <LF>8	Reserved	<LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Window Number (0...15) indicates the image window that is queried for events. <LF><LF>Event indicates the type of event. <LF><LF>Tool returns a code indicating the region tool used.<LF><LF>Coordinates indicates the relative position of the event. <LF><LF>Other Parameters supplies information associated with an event, such as positioning and regions distances. <LF><LF>The following table describes the possible values for the Event, Tool, Coordinates, and Other Parameters indicators.<LF><LF>Event	Tool	Coordinates	Other Parameters<LF>0  None	NA	empty	empty<LF>1  Click	0  Cursor	[0, 1]  position (x, y) of click	[0, 1, 2]  pixel value*<LF>8  Zoom	[0, 1]  position of click[2, 3]  position of image center	[0]  zoom factor<LF>2  Draw	1  Line	[0, 1]  position of starting point[2, 3]  position of ending point	[0, 1]  width and height[2]  vertical segment angle [3]  segment length<LF>2  Rectangle	[0…3]  bounding rectangle 	[0, 1]  width and height<LF>3  Oval	[0…3]  bounding rectangle 	[0, 1]  width and height<LF>4  Polygon	[0…3]  bounding rectangle 	[0, 1]  width and height<LF>5  Freehand	[0…3]  bounding rectangle 	[0, 1]  width and height<LF>3  Move	NA	[0, 1]  position of image window	empty<LF>4  Size 	NA	[0, 1]  width and height of image window 	empty<LF>5  Scroll	NA	[0, 1]  center position of image	empty<LF>6  Activate	NA	empty	empty<LF>7  Close	NA	empty	empty<LF>*Pixel values are stored in the first element of the array for 8-bit, 16-bit, and floating-point images. The RGB values of color images are stored in the order [0, 1, 2]. The real and imaginary values of a complex image are stored in the order [0, 1].<LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXReturns the events generated through the user windows and the data associated with them. <LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Window Number (17...22) indicates the image window that is queried for events. <LF><LF>User Click returns TRUE if a zone has been chosen by a user.<LF><LF>User Number returns the zone number chosen by the user.<LF><LF>User State returns the present status (TRUE or FALSE) of each zone. after a click has been registered. This output is by definition TRUE when the Mechanical Action of the zone is Latch; reading this event causes the zone to pass to FALSE.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXReturns the last key pressed when the focus was on the window indicated by the Window ID input.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Window number indicates the window in which the key was caught.<LF><LF>Key Present. If TRUE, a new key was pressed. If FALSE, no new keys were pressed and the VI returns the last key pressed.<LF><LF>Key Pressed indicates the last key pressed.<LF><LF>Modifiers specifies a set of flags that identifies the modifiers. Some flags are platform dependent.<LF><LF>·	Option<LF><LF>·	Shift<LF><LF>·	Caps Lock<LF><LF>·	Cmd<LF><LF>·	Ctrl<LF><LF>·	Menu<LF><LF>·	NumPad<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXReturns the position of an image mask in relation to the origin of the coordinate system (0, 0). The default offset value [0, 0] is established when the image is initially created by IMAQ Create. The offset is only used for masked images. With this offset, the mask can be moved to any location in the image without having to create a new image for each mask. <LF>  <LF>Image is the reference to the source (input) image.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>	X Offset specifies the horizontal offset of the image mask. <LF><LF>	Y Offset specifies the vertical offset of the image mask.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXReturns the screen size in pixels.<LF><LF>Ref. Point X. Unused.<LF><LF>Ref. Point Y. Unused.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Screen Width gives the X size of screen.<LF><LF>Screen Height gives Y size of screen.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXReturns the user pen status.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Paint mode is used for zoom factors greater than 3. If the value is Paint, the rectangles which compose the ROI bounds are painted; if the value is Frame, these rectangles are framed (only the contour is traced).<LF><LF>Pen transfer mode is the actual transfer mode. Pen transfer mode has four possible values:<LF><LF>srcCopy	Overwrites the background and foreground with specified colors.<LF>scrOr	Overwrites only the foreground.<LF>srxXor	Inverts the pixels below the foreground pixels. The new value equals 255 minus the old value; this operation occurs for each plane of an RGB image.<LF>srcBic	Forces the background color on foreground pixels.<LF>Pen style is the actual pen style. Pen style has five possible values: Solid, Dash, Dot, DashDot, and DashDotDot.<LF><LF>Foreground color is the actual foreground color. <LF><LF>Background color is the actual background color.<LF><LF>Pen pattern is the actual pen pattern. TRUE values are assigned to the foreground while FALSE values are assigned to the background. The pattern size is a 8 × 8 2D array.<LF><LF>User pen active. If TRUE, the user pen is active.<LF><LF>Pen width is the actual pen width.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXReverse
XXXXRight
XXXXRing
XXXXRise triggers when it rises above the <LF>given value 
XXXXRock
XXXXRotate
XXXXRotates an image.<LF>      	<LF>Color Replace Value is a cluster containing the Alpha, Red, Green, and Blue channel values used for filling a color image. The default is 0.<LF>	<LF>Image Src is the reference to the source (input) image.<LF>	<LF>Image Dst is the reference of the image destination. If it is connected, it must be the same type as the Image Src.<LF><LF>	Angle (degrees) defines the angle (in degrees) to rotate. The default is 0.<LF><LF>Replace Value defines the filling value created by the rotation. The default is 0.<LF>	<LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF>	<LF>Image Dst Out is the reference to the destination (output) image which receives the processing results of the VI. If the Image Dst is connected, then Image Dst Out is the same as Image Dst. Otherwise, Image Dst Out refers to the image referenced by Image Src.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXRotates and translates an ROI in an image to transform the ROI from one coordinate system (Base Reference) to another (New Reference).<LF>  <LF>ROI Descriptor is the descriptor that defines the region of interest.<LF>	<LF>Base Reference is a cluster containing the following elements.<LF><LF>   Origin is a point cluster that specifies the origin of the <LF>   base-reference coordinate system.<LF>	<LF>    Angle is the angle the base-reference coordinate system makes     <LF>   with the image coordinate system.<LF><LF>New Reference is a cluster containing the following elements.<LF><LF>   Origin is a point cluster that specifies the origin of the <LF>   new-reference coordinate system.<LF>  	<LF>   Angle is the angle the new-reference coordinate system makes <LF>   with the image coordinate system.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF>	<LF>ROI Descriptor out contains the new descriptor for the transformed ROI.<LF>	<LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXRotation (1/16)
XXXXRotation Sensor Equal Fork
XXXXRotation Sensor Fork
XXXXRotation Threshold
XXXXRotations
XXXXRotations of Angle Sensor
XXXXRow
XXXXRow / Column
XXXXRow / Column (Row)
XXXXRow of Max
XXXXRow of Min
XXXXRows
XXXXRows Per Strip
XXXXRun
XXXXRun Mode
XXXXRun Program On RCX
XXXXRun Subroutine
XXXXRun any Subroutine that has been created.<LF><LF>The default subroutine is to run subroutine 0.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Subroutine number: String in a number (0-7)  to pick which subroutine to run.<LF>
XXXXRunCamera
XXXXRunning
XXXXRunning?
XXXXSB
XXXXSELECT COM PORT
XXXXSH
XXXXSHIFT
XXXXSHOW ADMINISTRATOR BUTTON
XXXXSI
XXXXSO
XXXXSTOP
XXXXSX
XXXXSY
XXXXSample Data Set
XXXXSample one hour
XXXXSample one min
XXXXSample one sec
XXXXSample one tenth sec
XXXXSample ten sec
XXXXSampling Rate
XXXXSampling Rate (Hz)
XXXXSampling Rate Modifier<LF><LF>String this modifier into a Start Data Logging subroutine <LF>to capture data every 0.1 sec.
XXXXSampling Rate Modifier<LF><LF>String this modifier into a Start Data Logging subroutine <LF>to capture data every 1 hr.
XXXXSampling Rate Modifier<LF><LF>String this modifier into a Start Data Logging subroutine <LF>to capture data every 1 min.
XXXXSampling Rate Modifier<LF><LF>String this modifier into a Start Data Logging subroutine <LF>to capture data every 1 sec.
XXXXSampling Rate Modifier<LF><LF>String this modifier into a Start Data Logging subroutine <LF>to capture data every 10 sec.
XXXXSampling Rate Modifier<LF><LF>String this modifier into a Start Data Logging subroutine <LF>to capture data every time you press the Touch Sensor on Port 2.
XXXXSampling Rate Modifier<LF><LF>String this modifier into a Start Data Logging subroutine <LF>to capture data every time you write to a data set and mark the data with the time.  The time will rollover every 2^16 10ths of a second.
XXXXSampling Rate Modifier<LF><LF>String this modifier into a Start Data Logging subroutine <LF>to capture data every time you write to the data set.
XXXXSampling Rate Modifier<LF><LF>String this modifier into a Start Data Logging subroutine to capture data every 0.1 sec.
XXXXSampling Rate Modifier<LF><LF>String this modifier into a Start Data Logging subroutine to capture data every 1 min.
XXXXSampling Rate Modifier<LF><LF>String this modifier into a Start Data Logging subroutine to capture data every 1 sec.
XXXXSampling Rate Modifier<LF><LF>String this modifier into a Start Data Logging subroutine to capture data every 10 sec.
XXXXSampling Rate Modifier<LF><LF>String this modifier into a Start Data Logging subroutine to capture data every hour.
XXXXSampling Rate Modifier<LF><LF>String this modifier into a Start Data Logging subroutine to capture data every time you write on the data set and mark the data with the time. The time will rollover every 2^16 10ths of a second.
XXXXSampling Rate Modifier<LF><LF>String this modifier into a Start Data Logging subroutine to capture data every time you write to the data set.
XXXXSampling Rate Modifier<LF><LF>String this modifier into a Start Datalogging subroutine to capture data every time you press the Touch Sensor on Port 2.  The port is configured as counting clicks.  You will have to zero the sensor separately in your program.
XXXXSampling frequency (max 100 Hz)
XXXXSave
XXXXSave &S
XXXXSave As
XXXXSave As...
XXXXSave BMP
XXXXSave Blue Scroll
XXXXSave Data
XXXXSave File
XXXXSave Image
XXXXSave JPG
XXXXSave Picture
XXXXSave Pilot File
XXXXSave Program File
XXXXSave Red Scroll
XXXXSave Scroll
XXXXSave Sound
XXXXSave Yellow Scroll
XXXXSave image
XXXXSave in Theme
XXXXSave the Pilot file.
XXXXSave the current image to a bitmap file.
XXXXSave the current image to a file.
XXXXSave... &S
XXXXScale Invariance? (Yes)
XXXXScore
XXXXScout
XXXXScout Ambient Light Sensor Set Triggers
XXXXScout Auto Adjust Light Sub
XXXXScout Avoid Left Sub
XXXXScout Avoid Right Sub
XXXXScout Avoid Sub
XXXXScout Basic Motion Sub
XXXXScout Bugshake Sub
XXXXScout Circle Left Sub
XXXXScout Circle Right Sub
XXXXScout Event Landing
XXXXScout Event Sound
XXXXScout Find Bright Sub
XXXXScout Forward Sub
XXXXScout Forward Turn Left Sub
XXXXScout Forward Turn Right Sub
XXXXScout Get Average Light Sub
XXXXScout Get Motor Status Sub
XXXXScout Get Sema0 Sub
XXXXScout Get Sema1 Sub
XXXXScout Get Sema2 Sub
XXXXScout Global Sound Settings
XXXXScout Init Sys Sub
XXXXScout Light Geiger Sub
XXXXScout Light On/Off
XXXXScout Light Sensor Blink Time
XXXXScout Loop AB Sub
XXXXScout Motor Drive Sub
XXXXScout Motor to Sound Sub
XXXXScout Movements Sub
XXXXScout Rwd Sub
XXXXScout Rwd Turn Left Sub
XXXXScout Rwd Turn Right Sub
XXXXScout Seek Sub
XXXXScout Select Various Parameters
XXXXScout Send VLL
XXXXScout Set Counter Value
XXXXScout Set Light Sensor Hysteresis
XXXXScout Set Light Sensor Low Threshold
XXXXScout Set Light Sensor Upper Threshold
XXXXScout Set Timer Limit
XXXXScout Spin Left Sub
XXXXScout Spin Right Sub
XXXXScout Stand Alone or Power Mode
XXXXScout VLL Commander Code Pilot
XXXXScout VLL Commander Micro Scout
XXXXScout Zig Zag Sub
XXXXScreen Height
XXXXScreen Width
XXXXScroll
XXXXScroll 
XXXXScroll Backwards
XXXXScroll Down
XXXXScroll Fowards
XXXXScroll Up
XXXXScroll backwards through extra help items for this palette
XXXXScroll down
XXXXScroll down is used to move backwards to view earlier parts in a song
XXXXScroll event
XXXXScroll up
XXXXScroll up is used to move forward to view later parts in the song
XXXXScrollbars? (N)
XXXXScrolling
XXXXSearch Decimal Separator
XXXXSearch Pattern
XXXXSearch Sign
XXXXSegments status
XXXXSelect COM Port
XXXXSelect Camera
XXXXSelect Computer
XXXXSelect RCX
XXXXSelect Region of Interest
XXXXSelect a bin color and plot style to display your data.
XXXXSelect a light value from 1 to 100 (100 is the brightest).
XXXXSelect a note to record.
XXXXSelect any line (names are from the names you choose on the Upload pages) to find it on the plot.  Open symbols are data from the Upload Area and closed symbols are from the Compute Area.
XXXXSelect the Sensor you are using with the Sensor Adapter.
XXXXSelect the Vision sensor definition file you are using for the blue container.
XXXXSelect the Vision sensor definition file you are using for the red container.
XXXXSelect the Vision sensor definition file you are using for the yellow container.
XXXXSelect to which port the tower is connected.
XXXXSelect whether you want to wait for the touch sensor to be pushed or released.
XXXXSelect whether you want to wait until the light sensor reads a value that is greater than (brighter than) the specified value or less than (darker than) the specified value. 
XXXXSelect which theme to save you program in.
XXXXSelection Mode
XXXXSelection Value
XXXXSelection Values
XXXXSelects Scout Motion, Touch, Light, Time, and FX rules for the Scout <LF>Stand Alone mode.<LF><LF>RULES:<LF><LF>Motion:  No Motion (0), Forward (1), ZigZag (2), Circle Right (3), Circle Left (4),<LF>              Loop A (5), Loop B (6), Loop AB (7).<LF>Touch:   Ignore (0), Reverse (1) [When T1 or T2 is hit direction on both motors is<LF>              changed], Avoid (2) [When T1 is hit the model will back up and turn to <LF>              the right,  When T2 is hit the model will back up and turn to the left], <LF>              Wait For (3) [The model waits for T1 or T2 to get hit, then action <LF>              starts], Brake (4) [While T1 is pressed, Motor A is braked, While T2 is<LF>              pressed, Motor B is braked]<LF>Light:     Ignore (0), Seek Light (1) [Model turns around every now and then and <LF>              finds the brightest direction],  Seek Dark (2) [Model turns around every<LF>              now and then and finds the darkest direction], Avoid (3) [If it gets <LF>              Bright or Dark, then action starts], Brake (5) [While the light is Bright <LF>              or Dark both motors are braked]<LF>Time:     Short (0) [Scale factor 1], Medium (1) [Scale factor 2], Long (2) [Scale<LF>              factor 4]<LF>FX:         No Theme (0), Bug (1) [Does the Bug-dance every now and then], <LF>              Alarm (2) [Alarm-sound depending on the motor drive], <LF>              Random (3) [Does a sequence of random  movements now and then], <LF>              Science (4) [Sound beeping Geiger function on the light sensor]<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Motion:  String a single modifier.<LF>Touch:   String a single modifier.<LF>Light:    String a single modifier.<LF>Time:    String a single modifier.<LF>FX:        String a single modifier.
XXXXSelects Scout Motion, Touch, Light, Time, and<LF>FX rules for the Scout Stand Alone mode.
XXXXSelects Stand Alone (SA) or Power Mode<LF><LF>Legal range for ""number"":  0 (Stand Alone Mode),<LF>                                         1 (Power Mode)
XXXXSelects Stand Alone (SA) or Power Mode<LF><LF>Legal range for ""number"":  0 (Stand Alone Mode),<LF>                                         1 (Power Mode)<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Number:  String in a modifier to control the mode.
XXXXSelects a display palette. Five predefined palettes are available. To activate a color palette choose a code (0 to 4) for Palette Number and connect the output Color Palette to the input Palette Number of IMAQ WindDraw.<LF><LF>Palette Number (gray) enables the user to select one of the five predefined palettes. The relationship between the value and Palette Number is described below.<LF><LF>Gray	Gray scale is the default palette. The color tables are all identical.<LF>Binary	Binary palette is designed especially for binary images.<LF>Gradient	Gradient palette.<LF>Rainbow	Rainbow palette.<LF>Temperature	Temperature palette.<LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Color Palette indicates an array of clusters composed of 256 elements for each of the three color planes. A specific color is the result of applying a value between 0 and 255 for each of the three color planes (red, green, and blue). If the three planes have the identical value, then a gray level is obtained (0 specifies black and 255 specifies white). This output is to be directly connected to the input Color Palette of IMAQ WindDraw.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXSelects the color of ROI lines.<LF><LF>Color of ROI is a cluster that specifies the color of the ROI. The default color is white.<LF><LF>Red gives the red plane intensity. The default is 255.<LF><LF>Green gives the green plane intensity. The default is 255.<LF><LF>Blue gives the blue plane intensity. The default is 255.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and <LF>Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXSelects which (external) events should result in a <LF>system sound being played.<LF><LF>Legal sources are: 0 (variable), 2 (constant value)<LF>                             and 4 (random number).<LF><LF>The resulting value has the same structure as an<LF>event list with each bit corresponding to a system<LF>event.
XXXXSelects which (external) events should result in a system sound being played.<LF><LF>Legal sources are: 0 (variable), 2 (constant value)<LF>                             and 4 (random number).<LF><LF>The resulting value has the same structure as an<LF>event list with each bit corresponding to a system<LF>event.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Source:  String a modifier.<LF><LF>Value:  String a single modifier.
XXXXSend Mail
XXXXSend mail to another RCX.<LF>This sends a number to the mailbox of another RCX.<LF>The default is to send the number 1.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Number to send:  String in the number you want to send.
XXXXSends a 7-bit VLL command out over the <LF>VLL output.<LF><LF>Legal range for 'source': 0 (variable)<LF>                                      2 (constant value).
XXXXSends a 7-bit VLL command out over the <LF>VLL output.<LF><LF>Legal range for 'source': 0 (variable)<LF>                                      2 (constant value).<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Source:  String a single modifier.<LF>Number: String a single modifier.<LF>
XXXXSensor
XXXXSensor 1
XXXXSensor 1 Info
XXXXSensor 2
XXXXSensor 2 Info
XXXXSensor 3
XXXXSensor 3 Info
XXXXSensor Adapter
XXXXSensor Bool. (0,1,2)
XXXXSensor File
XXXXSensor ID
XXXXSensor ID (light)
XXXXSensor Mode
XXXXSensor Mode  (0,1,2)
XXXXSensor Name
XXXXSensor Operation
XXXXSensor Raw (0,1,2)
XXXXSensor Threshold
XXXXSensor Title
XXXXSensor Title 2
XXXXSensor Type
XXXXSensor Type (0,1,2)
XXXXSensor Value
XXXXSensor Value (0,1,2)
XXXXSensor Value In
XXXXSensor Value Out
XXXXSensor channel
XXXXSensor description
XXXXSensors
XXXXSeparate the X and Y coordinates of a Data Set into two arrays.<LF>The default Data Set number is 0.
XXXXSeparates a ROI descriptor (describing many contours) into an array of simple ROI descriptors. Each of the ROI descriptor returned contains a single contour.<LF><LF>- 	ROI Descriptor is of type ROI Descriptor of IMAQä Vision for G. <LF><LF>- 	error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>-  	ROI Descriptors is the returned array of ROI descriptors. Each ROI descriptor contains a single contour.<LF><LF>- 	error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXSeparates overlapping circular objects and classifies them based on their radius, surface area, and perimeter. Starting from a binary image, it finds the radius and center of the circular objects even when multiple circular objects overlap. In addition, this VI can trace the circles in the destination image. It constructs and uses a Danielsson distance map to determine the radius of each object. <LF>  <LF>Note:	IMAQ Circles works correctly only for circles that have a radius less than or equal to 256 pixels.<LF><LF>Image Src is the reference to the source (input) image.<LF>	<LF>Image Dst is the reference to the destination image. If it is connected, it must be the same type as the Image Src.<LF>	<LF>Min Radius is the smallest radius (in pixels) that is detected. Circles possessing a radius smaller than this value do not appear in the destination image and have a negative radius value in the output Circles Data. The default is 1.<LF><LF>Max Radius (default 10) is the largest radius (in pixels) that is detected. Circles possessing a radius larger than this value do not appear in the destination image and have a negative radius value in the output Circles Data. The default is 10.<LF>	<LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Dst Out is the reference to the destination (output) image which receives the processing results of the VI. If the Image Dst is connected, then Image Dst Out is the same as Image Dst. Otherwise, Image Dst Out refers to the image referenced by Image Src.<LF>	<LF>Nb Circles returns the number of detected circles in the image.<LF><LF>Note:	Circles with a radius outside the limits of Min Radius or Max Radius also are included in this number. <LF><LF>Circles Data returns an array of measurements for all detected circles. Each element in the array has a structure containing the following elements: <LF><LF>  Pos. X is the horizontal position (in pixels) of the center of the <LF>  circle. <LF>	<LF>  Pos. Y is the vertical position (in pixels) of the center of the circle. <LF><LF>  Radius is the radius of the circle (in pixels). Circles with a radius <LF>  outside the limits of Min Radius or Max Radius contain negative <LF>  radius values.<LF><LF>  Core Area is the surface area (in pixels) of the nucleus of the circle   <LF>  as defined by the Danielsson distance map. <LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXSeparates touching particles, particularly small isthmuses found between particles. It performs n erosions (n = Nb of erosions) and then reconstructs the final image based on the results of the erosion. If during the erosion process an existing isthmus has been broken or removed, then the particles are reconstructed without the isthmus. The reconstructed particles, however, have the same size as the initial particles except that they are separated. If during the erosion process no isthmus has been broken, then the particles are reconstructed as they were initially found (no changes are made). The source image must be an 8-bit binary image. The source image must have a border greater than or equal to 1. <LF>  <LF>Square/Hexa (Square) specifies whether the pixel frame is treated as square or hexagonal during the transformation. The default is square.<LF>	<LF>Image Src is the reference to the source (input) image.<LF>	<LF>Image Dst is the reference to the destination image. If it is connected, it must be the same type as the Image Src.<LF>	<LF>Nb of Erosion specifies the number of erosions that are used to separate the particles. The default is 1.<LF><LF>Structuring Element is a 2D array that contains the structuring element to be applied to the image. The size of the structuring element (the size of this array) determines the processing size. A structuring element of 3 × 3 is used if this input is not connected. <LF>	<LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Dst Out is the reference to the destination (output) image which receives the processing results of the VI. If the Image Dst is connected, then Image Dst Out is the same as Image Dst. Otherwise, Image Dst Out refers to the image referenced by Image Src.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXSeparation
XXXXSeparation Dev.
XXXXSerial Comm errors
XXXXSet Change Rate Event
XXXXSet Click Event
XXXXSet Clock
XXXXSet Display
XXXXSet Double Click Event
XXXXSet Error Condition
XXXXSet Generic Down Event
XXXXSet Generic Up Event
XXXXSet Modifier Value
XXXXSet Motor A or Motor B according to the <LF>Movement Type variable.<LF>All local variables are preserved by the sub.<LF><LF>Movement Type 0 - 8:   Motor A, Motor B<LF>Movement Type 9-11: VLL
XXXXSet Motor A or Motor B according to the Movement Type variable.<LF><LF>All local variables are preserved by the sub.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Movement Type:  String in a modifier to control the type of movement of<LF>                           Motor A or B, or the command sent over the VLL port.<LF><LF>Values for Movement Type:<LF><LF> 0: A Fwd, B Fwd          5: A Rwd, B Off             9: C Fwd<LF> 1: A Rwd, B Rwd          6: A Off, B Fwd          10: C Rwd<LF> 2: A Fwd, B Rwd          7: A Off, B Rwd          11: C Off<LF> 3: A Rwd, B Fwd          8: A Off, B Off<LF> 4: A Fwd, B Off
XXXXSet RCX Powerdown time
XXXXSet RCX powerdown time<LF>Equivalent of changing settings in Administrator<LF><LF>The default is to wait for 15 minutes before powerdown.<LF><LF>Modifier<LF><LF>Power down time: String in number of minutes to wait for powerdown.
XXXXSet Titles
XXXXSet Up Clicks Event
XXXXSet Up Dark Event
XXXXSet Up Decrease in Container Event
XXXXSet Up Decrease in Rotation Event
XXXXSet Up Decrease in Temp (C) Event
XXXXSet Up Decrease in Temp (F) Event
XXXXSet Up Enter Hi Event
XXXXSet Up Enter Low Event
XXXXSet Up Enter Normal Event
XXXXSet Up Increase in Container Event
XXXXSet Up Increase in Rotation Event
XXXXSet Up Increase in Temp (C) Event
XXXXSet Up Increase in Temp (F) Event
XXXXSet Up Increase in Timer Event
XXXXSet Up Light Event
XXXXSet Up Mail Event
XXXXSet Up Pressed Event
XXXXSet Up Released Event
XXXXSet Up Touch and Release Event
XXXXSet a Container to the value of the Clock.<LF>The default is to set the Red Container to the value of <LF>the Clock.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier that corresponds to the <LF>container you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.
XXXXSet any writeable source and value.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Modifier to set: This is any of the writeable sources.<LF><LF>New value:  This is any of the readable sources.
XXXXSet lower threshold, upper threshold and hysteresis for the light sensor around the local variable CenterLight according to the local variable ThPercent and the local variable HPercent.<LF><LF>CenterLight, ThPercent, HPercent and LocalVar5-8 are preserved by the sub.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Center Light:  String a single modifier.<LF><LF>ThPercent:  String a single modifier.<LF><LF>HPercent: String a single modifier.
XXXXSet lower threshold, upper threshold and<LF>hysteresis for the light sensor around the local<LF>variable CenterLight according to the local variable <LF>ThPercent and the local variable HPercent.<LF><LF>CenterLight, ThPercent, HPercent and<LF>LocalVar5-8 are preserved by the sub.
XXXXSet the Container to the value of the Clock.<LF>The default is to set the Red Container to the value of the Clock.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier that corresponds to the container you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.
XXXXSet the RCX LCD display to show a <LF>a certain value.<LF><LF>The default is to display the value of the<LF>red container.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Decimal Point: String in the decimal point position<LF>for the value displaed<LF><LF>Modifier to view: String in the value to be displayed<LF>(ex. Value of Port 1, Value of Red Container)<LF>
XXXXSet the RCX LCD display to show a a certain value.<LF><LF>The default is to display the value of the red container.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Decimal Point: String in the decimal point position for the value displayed<LF><LF>Modifier to view: String in the value to be displayed<LF>(ex. Value of Port 1, Value of Red Container)<LF>
XXXXSet the RCX powerdown time.<LF>This is the equivalent of changing the powerdown time settings in Administrator.<LF><LF>The default is to wait for 15 minutes before powerdown.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Power down time: String in number of minutes to wait for powerdown.
XXXXSet the container a formula.<LF>The default is to set the Red Container to 1.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier that corresponds to the container you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Set container to: this is the formula string for the container.  Precedence is given for multiplication and division only.  The formula can contain:<LF>+...addition<LF>-...subtraction<LF>*...multiplication<LF>/...division<LF>&...bitwise and<LF>|...bitwise or<LF><LF> and<LF><LF>c...container [0-20]  (e.g. c0 is the red container)<LF>m...mail value<LF>r...random number with max value [1-32767]  (e.g. r5 is a # from 1 to 5)<LF>s...sensor value [1-3]  (e.g. s1 is sensor 1)<LF>t...timer [1..3]   (e.g. t1 is the red timer)<LF>w...clock value<LF><LF>For example:  s1/10 + 3*m would be one tenth of the value of sensor 1 plus three times the mail value.  Remember that all math is carried out on integers so it is an integer divide.
XXXXSet the container to
XXXXSet the container to a certain event state.  Tells whether the event is in the low, normal or high state depending on the set thresholds. The eventstate may also be undefined or calibrating.<LF>0 == Low<LF>1 == Normal<LF>2 == High<LF>3 == Undefined<LF>4 == Start calibrating<LF>5 == Calibrating in process<LF>The default is to set the Red Container to Event 1.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier that corresponds to the <LF>container you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Event:  This defines which event you are looking at (0-15)
XXXXSet the container to a certain value on a remote RCX.<LF><LF>The default is to set the Red Container on the Remote RCX  to 1.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier that corresponds to the <LF>container on the remote RCX you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Set container to: Set the container to this value.
XXXXSet the container to a certain value.<LF>The default is to set the Red Container to 1.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier that corresponds to the <LF>container you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Set container to: Set the container to this value.
XXXXSet the container to a certain value.<LF>The default is to set the Red Container to 1.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier that corresponds to the container you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Set container to: Set the container to this value.
XXXXSet the container to a copy of the bit register of the successful event(s) for the current task.<LF>The default is to set the Red Container to the register.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier that corresponds to the  container you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.  It corresponds to a 16 bit number.  The bit corresponds to the event number.<LF>  <LF>1(2^0) corresponds to event 0<LF>2 (2^1) corresponds to event 1 <LF>3 (2^0+2^1) corresponds to events 0 and 1
XXXXSet the container to a copy of the bit register of the successful event(s) for the current task.<LF>The default is to set the Red Container to the register.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier that corresponds to the  container you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.  It corresponds to a 16 bit number. The bit corresponds to the event number.<LF>  <LF>1(2^0) corresponds to event 0<LF>2 (2^1) corresponds to event 1 <LF>3 (2^0+2^1) corresponds to events 0 and 1
XXXXSet the container to a random value.<LF>The default is to set the Red Container to a random number between 0 and 8.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier that corresponds to the container you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Max random number: String in a number to be the maximum random number to set the container to.
XXXXSet the container to the Celsius value of the <LF>temperature sensor.  The default is to set the Red Container <LF>to the value of the temperature sensor connected to Port 1.<LF> (Takes only the integer part, hence 27.6°C becomes 27°C).<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier that corresponds to the <LF>container you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Port Value: String in the port that the temperature <LF>sensor is connected to.
XXXXSet the container to the Celsius value of the temperature sensor. (Takes only the integer part, hence 27.6°C becomes 27°C).<LF>The default is to set the Red Container to the value of the temperature sensor connected to Port 1.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier that corresponds to the container you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Port Value: String in the port that the temperature sensor is connected to.
XXXXSet the container to the Fahrenheit value of the <LF>temperature sensor.  The default is to set the Red <LF>Container to the value of the temperature sensor <LF>connected to Port 1.   (Takes only the integer part, <LF>hence 70.6°F becomes 70°F).<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier that corresponds to the <LF>container you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Port Value: String in the port that the temperature <LF>sensor is connected to.
XXXXSet the container to the Fahrenheit value of the temperature sensor.<LF>The default is to set the Red Container to the value of the temperature sensor connected to Port 1.  (Takes only the integer part, hence 70.6°F becomes 70°F).<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier that corresponds to the container you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Port Value: String in the port that the temperature sensor is connected to.
XXXXSet the container to the number of points that have been captured in a Data Set.<LF>The default is to set the Red Container to the value of the number of points captured on the Red Data Set. <LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container: String in the container modifier that corresponds to the container you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Data Set: String in the Data Set that points are being captured in: red, yellow, or blue.
XXXXSet the container to the number of points that have been captured<LF>in a Data Set.<LF>The default is to set the Red Container to the value of <LF>the number of points captured on the Red Data Set. <LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container: String in the container modifier that corresponds to the <LF>container you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Data Set Value: String in the Value of the Data Set that you wish to <LF>use: red, yellow, or blue.
XXXXSet the container to the value of the Voltage Sensor. The default is to set the Red Container to the value of the Voltage Sensor connected to Port 1.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier that corresponds to the container you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Port Value: String in a Port that the sensor adapter is connected to.
XXXXSet the container to the value of the Voltage Sensor.<LF>The default is to set the Red Container to the value of <LF>the Voltage Sensor connected to Port 1.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier that corresponds to the <LF>container you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Port Value: String in a Port that the sensor adapter is <LF>connected to.
XXXXSet the container to the value of the acceleration sensor adapter.<LF>The default is to set the Red Container to the value of <LF>the sensor adapter  connected to Port 1.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier that corresponds to the <LF>container you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Port Value: String in a Port that the sensor adapter is <LF>connected to.
XXXXSet the container to the value of the angle sensor.<LF>The default is to set the Red Container to the value of <LF>the angle sensor connected to Port 1.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier <LF>corresponding to which container you want to <LF>use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Port Value: String in the port that the angle sensor <LF>is connected to.
XXXXSet the container to the value of the angle sensor.<LF>The default is to set the Red Container to the value of the angle sensor connected to Port 1.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier that corresponds to the container you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Port Value: String in the port that the angle sensor is connected to.
XXXXSet the container to the value of the barometeric sensor adapter.<LF>The default is to set the Red Container to the value of <LF>the sensor adapter  connected to Port 1.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier that corresponds to the <LF>container you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Port Value: String in a Port that the sensor adapter is <LF>connected to.
XXXXSet the container to the value of the generic sensor adapter. The default is to set the Red Container to the value of the sensor adapter connected to Port 1.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier that corresponds to the container you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Port Value: String in a Port that the sensor adapter is connected to.
XXXXSet the container to the value of the generic sensor adapter.<LF>The default is to set the Red Container to the value of <LF>the sensor adapter  connected to Port 1.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier that corresponds to the <LF>container you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Port Value: String in a Port that the sensor adapter is <LF>connected to.
XXXXSet the container to the value of the humidity sensor. <LF>The default is to set the Red Container to the value of <LF>the humidity sensor connected to Port 1.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier that corresponds to the <LF>container you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Port Value: String in a Port that the humidity sensor is <LF>connected to.
XXXXSet the container to the value of the light sensor.<LF>The default is to set the Red Container to the value of <LF>the light sensor connected to Port 1.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier that corresponds to the <LF>container you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Port Value: String in a Port that the light sensor is <LF>connected to.
XXXXSet the container to the value of the light sensor.<LF>The default is to set the Red Container to the value of the light sensor connected to Port 1.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier that corresponds to the container you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Port Value: String in a Port that the light sensor is connected to.
XXXXSet the container to the value of the lux sensor adapter.<LF>The default is to set the Red Container to the value of <LF>the sensor adapter  connected to Port 1.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier that corresponds to the <LF>container you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Port Value: String in a Port that the sensor adapter is <LF>connected to.
XXXXSet the container to the value of the mailbox.<LF>The default is to set the Red Container to the value of <LF>the mailbox.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier that corresponds to the <LF>container you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF>
XXXXSet the container to the value of the mailbox.<LF>The default is to set the Red Container to the value of the mailbox.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier that corresponds to the container you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF>
XXXXSet the container to the value of the number of Touch and Release of the<LF> touch sensor.<LF>The default is to set the Red Container to the value of <LF>Touch and Release of the touch sensor connected to port 1.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier that corresponds to the <LF>container you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Port Value: String in the Port that the touch sensor <LF>is connected to.
XXXXSet the container to the value of the number of Touch and Releases of the  touch sensor.<LF>The default is to set the Red Container to the value of Touch and Release of the touch sensor connected to port 1.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier that corresponds to the container you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Port Value: String in the Port that the touch sensor is connected to.
XXXXSet the container to the value of the number of clicks of the  touch sensor.<LF>The default is to set the Red Container to the value of clicks of the touch sensor connected to port 1.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier that corresponds to the container you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Port Value: String in the Port that the touch sensor is connected to.
XXXXSet the container to the value of the number of clicks of the<LF> touch sensor.<LF>The default is to set the Red Container to the value of <LF>clicks of the touch sensor connected to port 1.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier that corresponds to the <LF>container you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Port Value: String in the Port that the touch sensor <LF>is connected to.
XXXXSet the container to the value of the pH sensor.<LF>The default is to set the Red Container to the value of <LF>the pH sensor connected to Port 1.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier that corresponds to the <LF>container you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Port Value: String in a Port that the pH sensor is <LF>connected to.
XXXXSet the container to the value of the position sensor. <LF>The default is to set the Red Container to the value of <LF>the position sensor connected to Port 1.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier that corresponds to the <LF>container you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Port Value: String in a Port that the position sensor is <LF>connected to.
XXXXSet the container to the value of the pressure sensor. <LF>The default is to set the Red Container to the value of <LF>the pressure sensor connected to Port 1.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier that corresponds to the <LF>container you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Port Value: String in a Port that the pressure sensor is <LF>connected to.
XXXXSet the container to the value of the redox sensor adapter.<LF>The default is to set the Red Container to the value of <LF>the sensor adapter  connected to Port 1.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier that corresponds to the <LF>container you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Port Value: String in a Port that the sensor adapter is <LF>connected to.
XXXXSet the container to the value of the sound level sensor.<LF>The default is to set the Red Container to the value of <LF>the sound level sensor connected to Port 1.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier that corresponds to the <LF>container you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Port Value: String in a Port that the sound level sensor is <LF>connected to.
XXXXSet the container to the value of the temperature sensor.<LF>The default is to set the Red Container to the value of <LF>the temperature sensor connected to Port 1.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier that corresponds to the <LF>container you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Port Value: String in a Port that the temperature sensor is <LF>connected to.
XXXXSet the container to the value of the timer.<LF>The default is to set the Red Container to the value of <LF>the Red Timer.  <LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier that corresponds to the <LF>container you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Timer Value: String in a Timer Value to represent <LF>which timer to put into the container.
XXXXSet the container to the value of the timer.<LF>The default is to set the Red Container to the value of the Red Timer.  <LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier that corresponds to the container you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Timer Value: String in a Timer Value to represent which timer to put into the container.
XXXXSet the container to the value of the touch sensor.<LF>The default is to set the Red Container to the value of <LF>the touch sensor connected to port 1.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier that corresponds to the <LF>container you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Port Value: String in the Port that the touch sensor <LF>is connected to.
XXXXSet the container to the value of the touch sensor.<LF>The default is to set the Red Container to the value of the touch sensor connected to port 1.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier that corresponds to the container you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Port Value: String in the Port that the touch sensor is connected to.
XXXXSet the counter value (for overflow detection and event generation).<LF><LF>Legal range for 'number': 0-1<LF>Legal range for 'source': 0 [variable], <LF>                                    2 [constant value], <LF>                                    4 [random value].<LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Number:  String a single modifier.<LF>Source:   String a single modifier.<LF>Value:     String a single modifier.
XXXXSet the counter value (for overflow<LF>detection and event generation).<LF><LF>Legal range for 'number': 0-1<LF>Legal range for 'source':   0 [variable], <LF>                                      2 [constant value], <LF>                                      4 [random value].
XXXXSet the the container to
XXXXSet the transmitter power of the RCX.<LF>(The transmitter power of the infrared transmitter has to be set manually with the switch on the front of the tower).<LF>The default power is Low.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF>Power: The power level (High or Low) of the infrared transmitter on the RCX.
XXXXSet-up
XXXXSets the Light Sensor Blink Time<LF><LF>Legal range for Source:  0 (variable), 2 (constant value)<LF>Legal range for Value:    1- 32767 (measured in 0.01 sec)
XXXXSets the Light Sensor Blink Time<LF><LF>Legal range for Source:  0 (variable), 2 (constant value)<LF>Legal range for Value:    1- 32767 (measured in 0.01 sec)<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Source:  String a single modifier.<LF><LF>Value:  String a single modifier.
XXXXSets the Light Sensor Hysteresis<LF><LF>Legal range for Source:  0 (variable), 2 (constant value)<LF>Legal range for Value:    1- 1020
XXXXSets the Light Sensor Hysteresis<LF><LF>Legal range for Source:  0 (variable), 2 (constant value)<LF>Legal range for Value:    1- 1020<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Source:  String a single modifier.<LF><LF>Value:  String a single modifier.
XXXXSets the Light Sensor low threshold<LF><LF>Legal range for Source:  0 (variable), 2 (constant value)<LF>Legal range for Value:    1- 1020 (a low value indicates <LF>                                      a bright environment)
XXXXSets the Light Sensor low threshold<LF><LF>Legal range for Source:  0 (variable), 2 (constant value)<LF>Legal range for Value:    1- 1020 (a low value indicates <LF>                                      a bright environment)<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Source:  String a single modifier.<LF><LF>Value:  String a single modifier.
XXXXSets the Light Sensor upper threshold<LF><LF>Legal range for Source:  0 (variable), 2 (constant value)<LF>Legal range for Value:    1- 1020 (a low value indicates <LF>                                      a bright environment)
XXXXSets the Light Sensor upper threshold<LF><LF>Legal range for Source:  0 (variable), 2 (constant value)<LF>Legal range for Value:    1- 1020 (a low value indicates <LF>                                      a bright environment)<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Source:  String a single modifier.<LF><LF>Value:  String a single modifier.
XXXXSets the border size of the image and determines the current border size of the image.<LF>        	<LF>Get/Set Status (Set) determines whether the image border size is changed to the Image border size value (Set) or  the current image border size value is retrieved (Get).<LF>	<LF>Image in is the reference to the image that has to be modified.<LF>	<LF>Image border size in determines the new border size of the image.<LF>	<LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image out is the reference to the destination (output) image.<LF>	<LF>Image border size out is the border size of the image.<LF>	<LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXSets the calibration scale for an image. <LF>        	  <LF>Unit is the measuring unit associated with the image. It can have the following values:<LF><LF>  0	undefined<LF>  1	Angstrom<LF>  2	micrometer<LF>  3	millimeter<LF>  4	centimeter<LF>  5	meter<LF>  6	kilometer<LF>  7	microinch<LF>  8	inch<LF>  9	feet<LF>  10	nautical miles<LF>  11	standard miles<LF><LF>Image is the reference to the source (input) image.<LF><LF>X Step specifies the horizontal distance separating two adjacent pixels in the specified Unit.<LF><LF>Y Step specifies the vertical distance separating two adjacent pixels in the specified Unit.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Out is the reference to the destination (output) image.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXSets the event to happen when a click occurs<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Event: This is which event is getting defined<LF><LF>Event Source: This is the sensor etc that is defining the event
XXXXSets the event to happen when a doubleclick occurs<LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Event: This is which event is getting defined<LF><LF>Event Source: This is the sensor etc that is defining the event
XXXXSets the event to happen when it goes above the upper threshold<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Event: This is which event is getting defined<LF><LF>Event Source: This is the sensor etc that is defining the event
XXXXSets the timer limit (for overflow/wrap-around <LF>detection and event generation.)<LF><LF>Legal range for Source:  0 (variable), 2 (constant value), <LF>                                     4 (random number).
XXXXSets the timer limit (for overflow/wrap-around detection and event generation.)<LF><LF>Legal range for Source:  0 (variable), 2 (constant value), <LF>                                     4 (random number).<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Number:  String a single modifier.<LF>Source:  String a single modifier.<LF>Value:  String a single modifier.
XXXXSets up an event to be triggered when the value of the event source goes above the upper threshold<LF><LF>Note: The Define Settings command should follow this command. Use the Define Settings command to specify the upper threshold.  If a sensor is being used for the event source, the sensor should be zero-ed prior to starting event monitoring.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Event: String in the event which you want to set up:  red, yellow, blue <LF><LF>Event Source: String in the source of information for the event. <LF>   -Sensor based events: Value of Port 1,2,3<LF>   -Container based events: Value of container<LF>     (red, blue, yellow)<LF>   -Mail based events: Value of mailbox   <LF>   -Timer based event: Value of timer (red, blue, yellow)
XXXXSets up an event to be triggered when the value of the event source goes below the lower threshold<LF><LF>Note: The Define Settings command should follow this command. Use <LF>the Define Settings command to specify the lower threshold.  If a <LF>sensor is being used for the event source, the sensor should be zero-ed <LF>prior to starting event monitoring.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Event: String in the event which you want to set up:  red, yellow, blue <LF><LF>Event Source: String in the source of information for the event. <LF>   -Sensor based events: Value of Port 1,2,3<LF>   -Container based events: Value of container<LF>     (red, blue, yellow)<LF>   -Mail based events: Value of mailbox   <LF>   -Timer based event: Value of timer (red, blue, yellow)
XXXXSets up an event to be triggered when the value of the event source goes between the lower & upper threshold<LF><LF>Note: The Define Settings command should follow this command. Use the Define Settings command to specify the lower & upper threshold.  If a sensor is being used for the event source, the sensor should be zero-ed prior to starting event monitoring.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Event: String in the event which you want to set up:  red, yellow, blue <LF><LF>Event Source: String in the source of information for the event. <LF>   -Sensor based events: Value of Port 1,2,3<LF>   -Container based events: Value of container<LF>     (red, blue, yellow)<LF>   -Mail based events: Value of mailbox   <LF>   -Timer based event: Value of timer (red, blue, yellow)
XXXXSets up an event to occur based on the number of clicks of the <LF>touch sensor . The default is to set up the Red Event to be triggered<LF>when 10 clicks of the touch sensor on Port 1 have occurred .<LF><LF>Note: This command must appear before event monitoring is started. <LF>When this event occurs, the program will jump to the event land command.<LF><LF>Modifiers: <LF><LF>Event: String in the event which you want to set up:  red, yellow, blue <LF><LF>Event Source: String in the source of information for the event. <LF>   -Sensor based events: Value of Port 1,2,3<LF>   -Container based events: Value of container   <LF>   -Mail based events: Value of mailbox <LF><LF>Clicks Threshold:  String in the number of clicks.
XXXXSets up an event to occur based on the number of clicks of the <LF>touch sensor. The default is to set up the Red Event to be triggered<LF>when 10 clicks of the touch sensor on Port 1 have occurred .<LF><LF>Note: This command must appear before event monitoring is started. <LF>When this event occurs, the program will jump to the event land command.<LF><LF>Modifiers: <LF><LF>Event: String in the event which you want to set up:  red, yellow, blue <LF><LF>Event Source: String in the source of information for the event. <LF>   -Sensor based events: Value of Port 1,2,3<LF>   -Container based events: Value of container   <LF>   -Mail based events: Value of mailbox <LF><LF>Clicks Threshold:  String in the number of clicks.
XXXXSets up an event to occur based on the number of touches and releases of the touch sensor. The default is to set up the Red Event to be triggered when 10 touches and releases of the touch sensor on Port 1 have occurred .<LF><LF>Note: This command must appear before event monitoring is started. <LF>When this event occurs, the program will jump to the event land command.<LF><LF>Modifiers: <LF><LF>Event: String in the event which you want to set up:  red, yellow, blue <LF><LF>Event Source: String in the source of information for the event. <LF>   -Sensor based events: Value of Port 1,2,3<LF>   -Container based events: Value of container   <LF>   -Mail based events: Value of mailbox <LF><LF>TR Threshold:  String in the number of clicks and releases.
XXXXSets up an event to occur based on the number of touches and releases of the touch sensor. The default is to set up the Red Event to be triggered when 10 touches and releases of the touch sensor on Port 1 have occurred .<LF><LF>Note: This command must appear before event monitoring is started. <LF>When this event occurs, the program will jump to the event land command.<LF><LF>Modifiers: <LF><LF>Event: String in the event which you want to set up:  red, yellow, blue <LF><LF>Event Source: String in the source of information for the event. <LF>   -Sensor based events: Value of Port 1,2,3<LF>   -Container based events: Value of container   <LF>   -Mail based events: Value of mailbox <LF><LF>TR Threshold: String in the number of clicks and releases.
XXXXSets up an event to occur when mail is received. <LF><LF>The default is to set up the Red Event to be triggered when mail is received by the RCX.<LF><LF>Note: This command must appear before event monitoring is started. <LF>When this event occurs, the program will jump to the event land command.<LF><LF>Modifiers: <LF><LF>Event: String in the event which you want to set up:  red, yellow, blue <LF>
XXXXSets up an event to occur when mail is received. <LF><LF>The default is to set up the Red Event to be triggered when mail is received by the RCX.<LF><LF>Note: This command must appear before event monitoring is started. <LF>When this event occurs, the program will jump to the event land command.<LF><LF>Modifiers: <LF><LF>Event: String in the event which you want to set up:  red, yellow, blue <LF><LF>Event Source: String in the source of information for the event. <LF>   -Sensor based events: Value of Port 1,2,3<LF>   -Container based events: Value of container   <LF>   -Mail based events: Value of mailbox 
XXXXSets up an event to occur when the touch sensor is pressed.<LF>The default is to set up the Red Event to be triggered<LF>when the touch sensor on Port 1 is pressed.<LF><LF>Note: This command must appear before event monitoring is started.  When this event occurs, the program will jump to the event land command.<LF><LF>Modifiers: <LF><LF>Event: String in the event which you want to set up:  red, yellow, blue <LF><LF>Event Source: String in the source of information for the event. <LF>   -Sensor based events: Value of Port 1,2,3<LF>   -Container based events: Value of container<LF>   -Mail based events: Value of mailbox 
XXXXSets up an event to occur when the touch sensor is pressed.<LF>The default is to set up the Red Event to be triggered<LF>when the touch sensor on Port 1 is pressed.<LF><LF>Note: This command must appear before event monitoring is started.  When this event occurs, the program will jump to the event land command.<LF><LF>Modifiers: <LF><LF>Event: String in the event which you want to set up:  red, yellow, blue <LF><LF>Event Source: String in the source of information for the event. <LF>   -Sensor based events: Value of Port 1,2,3<LF>   -Container based events: Value of container<LF>   -Mail based events: Value of mailbox  
XXXXSets up an event to occur when the touch sensor is released.<LF>The default is to set up the Red Event to be triggered when the touch sensor <LF>on Port 1 is released.<LF><LF>Note: This command must appear before event monitoring is started.<LF>When this event occurs, the program will jump to the event land command.<LF><LF>Modifiers: <LF><LF>Event: String in the event which you want to set up:  red, yellow, blue <LF><LF>Event Source: String in the source of information for the event. <LF>   -Sensor based events: Value of Port 1,2,3<LF>   -Container based events: Value of container<LF>   -Mail based events: Value of mailbox 
XXXXSets up an event to occur when the value of the  sensor goes below the threshold. <LF><LF>The default is to set up the Red Event to be triggered when the light sensor on Port 1 goes above 2V.<LF><LF>Note: This command must appear before event monitoring is started.  When this event occurs, the program will jump to the event land command.<LF><LF>Modifiers: <LF><LF>Event: String in the event which you want to set up:  red, yellow, blue <LF><LF>Light Threshold: String in the value to trigger the event.<LF>  <LF>Event Source: String in the source of information for the event. <LF>   -Sensor based events: Value of Port 1,2,3<LF>   -Container based events: Value of container<LF>   -Mail based events: Value of mailbox <LF><LF>Sensor ID: This is the first three numbers on the sensors file in the floder ROBOLAB/Engine/Sensors.<LF><LF>For instance:  Humidity = 201<LF>                      SPL        = 202    and so on
XXXXSets up an event to occur when the value of the  sensor<LF>goes above the threshold. <LF><LF>The default is to set up the Red Event to be triggered<LF>when the light sensor on Port 1 goes above 2V.<LF><LF>Note: This command must appear before event monitoring is started.  When this event occurs, the program will jump to the event land command.<LF><LF>Modifiers: <LF><LF>Event: String in the event which you want to set up:  red, yellow, blue <LF><LF>Light Threshold: String in the value to trigger the event.<LF>  <LF>Event Source: String in the source of information for the event. <LF>   -Sensor based events: Value of Port 1,2,3<LF>   -Container based events: Value of container<LF>   -Mail based events: Value of mailbox <LF><LF>Sensor ID: This is the first three numbers on the sensors file in the floder ROBOLAB/Engine/Sensors.<LF><LF>For instance:  Humidity = 201<LF>                      SPL        = 202    and so on
XXXXSets up an event to occur when the value of the  sensor<LF>goes above the threshold. <LF><LF>The default is to set up the Red Event to be triggered<LF>when the light sensor on Port 1 goes above 2V.<LF><LF>Note: This command must appear before event monitoring is started.  When this event occurs, the program will jump to the event land command.<LF><LF>Modifiers: <LF><LF>Event: String in the event which you want to set up:  red, yellow, blue <LF><LF>Light Threshold: String in the value to trigger the event.<LF>  <LF>Event Source: String in the source of information for the event. <LF>   -Sensor based events: Value of Port 1,2,3<LF>   -Container based events: Value of container<LF>   -Mail based events: Value of mailbox <LF><LF>Sensor ID: This is the first three numbers on the sensors file in the floder ROBOLAB/Engine/Sensors.<LF><LF>For instance:  Humidity = 201<LF>                      SPL        = 202    and so on<LF><LF>For instance:  Humidity = 201<LF>                      SPL        = 202    and so on
XXXXSets up an event to occur when the value of the container goes above the threshold. Dont forget to zero the container.<LF><LF>The default is to set up the Red Event to be triggered<LF>when the red container goes above 1.<LF><LF>Note: This command must appear before event monitoring is started.  When this event occurs, the program will jump to the event land command.<LF><LF>Modifiers: <LF><LF>Event: String in the event which you want to set up:  red, yellow, blue <LF><LF>Container Threshold: String in the value to trigger the event.<LF><LF>Event Source: String in the source of information for the event. <LF>   -Sensor based events: Value of Port 1,2,3<LF>   -Container based events: Value of container<LF>   -Mail based events: Value of mailbox 
XXXXSets up an event to occur when the value of the container goes above the threshold.<LF><LF>The default is to set up the Red Event to be triggered<LF>when the red container goes above 1.<LF><LF>Note: This command must appear before event monitoring is started.  When this event occurs, the program will jump to the event land command.<LF><LF>Modifiers: <LF><LF>Event: String in the event which you want to set up:  red, yellow, blue <LF><LF>Container Threshold: String in the value to trigger the event.<LF><LF>Event Source: String in the source of information for the event. <LF>   -Sensor based events: Value of Port 1,2,3<LF>   -Container based events: Value of container<LF>   -Mail based events: Value of mailbox 
XXXXSets up an event to occur when the value of the container goes below the threshold.<LF><LF>The default is to set up the Red Event to be triggered<LF>when the red container is equal to or goes below 1.<LF><LF>Note: This command must appear before event monitoring is started.  When this event occurs, the program will jump to the event land command.<LF><LF>Modifiers: <LF><LF>Event: String in the event which you want to set up:  red, yellow, blue <LF><LF>Container Threshold: String in the value to trigger the event.<LF><LF>Event Source: String in the source of information for the event. <LF>     -Sensor based events: Value of Port 1,2,3<LF>   -Container based events: Value of container<LF>     (red, blue, yellow)<LF>   -Mail based events: Value of mailbox   <LF>   -Timer based event: Value of timer (red, blue, yellow)
XXXXSets up an event to occur when the value of the light  sensor goes above the threshold. <LF><LF>The default is to set up the Red Event to be triggered<LF>when the light sensor on Port 1 goes above 55.<LF><LF>Note: This command must appear before event monitoring is started.  When this event occurs, the program will jump to the event land command.<LF><LF>Modifiers: <LF><LF>Event: String in the event which you want to set up:  red, yellow, blue <LF><LF>Light Threshold: String in the value to trigger the event.<LF>  <LF>Event Source: String in the source of information for the event. <LF>   -Sensor based events: Value of Port 1,2,3<LF>   -Container based events: Value of container<LF>   -Mail based events: Value of mailbox 
XXXXSets up an event to occur when the value of the light  sensor goes below the threshold. <LF><LF>The default is to set up the Red Event to be triggered<LF>when the light sensor on Port 1 iis equal to or goes below 55.<LF><LF>Note: This command must appear before event monitoring is started.  When this event occurs, the program will jump to the event land command.<LF><LF>Modifiers: <LF><LF>Event: String in the event which you want to set up:  red, yellow, blue <LF><LF>Light Threshold: String in the value to trigger the event.<LF>  <LF>Event Source: String in the source of information for the event. <LF>   -Sensor based events: Value of Port 1,2,3<LF>   -Container based events: Value of container<LF>   -Mail based events: Value of mailbox 
XXXXSets up an event to occur when the value of the light  sensor<LF>goes above the threshold. <LF><LF>The default is to set up the Red Event to be triggered<LF>when the light sensor on Port 1 goes above 55.<LF><LF>Note: This command must appear before event monitoring is started.  When this event occurs, the program will jump to the event land command.<LF><LF>Modifiers: <LF><LF>Event: String in the event which you want to set up:  red, yellow, blue <LF><LF>Light Threshold: String in the value to trigger the event.<LF>  <LF>Event Source: String in the source of information for the event. <LF>   -Sensor based events: Value of Port 1,2,3<LF>   -Container based events: Value of container<LF>   -Mail based events: Value of mailbox 
XXXXSets up an event to occur when the value of the light  sensor<LF>goes below the threshold. <LF><LF>The default is to set up the Red Event to be triggered<LF>when the light sensor on Port 1 is equal to or goes below 55.<LF><LF>Note: This command must appear before event monitoring is started.  When this event occurs, the program will jump to the event land command.<LF><LF>Modifiers: <LF><LF>Event: String in the event which you want to set up:  red, yellow, blue <LF><LF>Light Threshold: String in the value to trigger the event.<LF>  <LF>Event Source: String in the source of information for the event. <LF>   -Sensor based events: Value of Port 1,2,3<LF>   -Container based events: Value of container<LF>   -Mail based events: Value of mailbox 
XXXXSets up an event to occur when the value of the rotation sensor goes above the threshold.<LF><LF>The default is to set up the Red Event to be triggered<LF>when the rotation sensor on Port 1 goes above 16 (16th of a rotation).<LF><LF>Note: This command must appear before event monitoring is started.  When this event occurs, the program will jump to the event land command.<LF><LF>Modifiers: <LF><LF>Event: String in the event which you want to set up:  red, yellow, blue <LF><LF>Rotation Threshold: String in the value to trigger the event<LF>(in 16th of a rotation).  The event is sign dependent. (clockwise rotations produce positive values, counter clockwise rotations produce negative values).<LF><LF>Event Source: String in the source of information for the event. <LF>   -Sensor based events: Value of Port 1,2,3<LF>   -Container based events: Value of container<LF>   -Mail based events: Value of mailbox 
XXXXSets up an event to occur when the value of the rotation sensor goes below the threshold.<LF><LF>The default is to set up the Red Event to be triggered<LF>when the rotation sensor on Port 1 is equal to or goes below 16 (16th of a rotation).<LF><LF>Note: This command must appear before event monitoring is started.  When this event occurs, the program will jump to the event land command.<LF><LF>Modifiers: <LF><LF>Event: String in the event which you want to set up:  red, yellow, blue <LF><LF>Rotation Threshold: String in the value to trigger the event<LF>(in 16th of a rotation).  The event is sign dependent. (clockwise rotations produce positive values, counter clockwise rotations produce negative values).<LF><LF>Event Source: String in the source of information for the event. <LF>   -Sensor based events: Value of Port 1,2,3<LF>   -Container based events: Value of container<LF>   -Mail based events: Value of mailbox 
XXXXSets up an event to occur when the value of the temperature sensor goes above the threshold (in Celsius). <LF><LF>The default is to set up the Red Event to be triggered<LF>when the temperature sensor on Port 1 goes above 30.<LF><LF>Note: This command must appear before event monitoring is started.  When this event occurs, the program will jump to the event land command.<LF><LF>Modifiers: <LF><LF>Event: String in the event which you want to set up:  red, yellow, blue <LF><LF>Temperature Threshold: String in the value to trigger the event.<LF> (in Celsius). If the value of a container is used here, the number must be 10 times the desired threshold temperature (401 for 40.1 degrees).<LF><LF>Event Source: String in the source of information for the event. <LF>   -Sensor based events: Value of Port 1,2,3<LF>   -Container based events: Value of container<LF>   -Mail based events: Value of mailbox 
XXXXSets up an event to occur when the value of the temperature sensor goes above the threshold (in Fahrenheit). <LF><LF>The default is to set up the Red Event to be triggered<LF>when the temperature sensor on Port 1 goes above 80.<LF><LF>Note: This command must appear before event monitoring is started.  When this event occurs, the program will jump to the event land command.<LF><LF>Modifiers: <LF><LF>Event: String in the event which you want to set up:  red, yellow, blue <LF><LF>Temperature Threshold: String in the value to trigger the event<LF> (in Fahrenheit). If the value of a container is used here, the number must be 10 times the desired threshold temperature (401 for 40.1 degrees).<LF><LF>Event Source: String in the source of information for the event. <LF>   -Sensor based events: Value of Port 1,2,3<LF>   -Container based events: Value of container<LF>   -Mail based events: Value of mailbox 
XXXXSets up an event to occur when the value of the temperature sensor goes below the threshold (in Celsius). <LF><LF>The default is to set up the Red Event to be triggered<LF>when the temperature sensor on Port 1 is equal to or goes below 30.<LF><LF>Note: This command must appear before event monitoring is started.  When this event occurs, the program will jump to the event land command.<LF><LF>Modifiers: <LF><LF>Event: String in the event which you want to set up:  red, yellow, blue <LF><LF>Temperature Threshold: String in the value to trigger the event<LF>(in Celsius). If the value of a container is used here, the number must be 10 times the desired threshold temperature (401 for 40.1 degrees).<LF><LF>Event Source: String in the source of information for the event. <LF>   -Sensor based events: Value of Port 1,2,3<LF>   -Container based events: Value of container<LF>   -Mail based events: Value of mailbox 
XXXXSets up an event to occur when the value of the temperature sensor goes below the threshold (in Fahrenheit). <LF><LF>The default is to set up the Red Event to be triggered<LF>when the temperature sensor on Port 1 is equal to or goes below  80.<LF><LF>Note: This command must appear before event monitoring is started.  When this event occurs, the program will jump to the event land command.<LF><LF>Modifiers: <LF><LF>Event: String in the event which you want to set up:  red, yellow, blue <LF><LF>Temperature Threshold: String in the value to trigger the event<LF>(in Fahrenheit). If the value of a container is used here, the number must be 10 times the desired threshold temperature (401 for 40.1 degrees).<LF><LF>Event Source: String in the source of information for the event. <LF>   -Sensor based events: Value of Port 1,2,3<LF>   -Container based events: Value of container<LF>   -Mail based events: Value of mailbox 
XXXXSets up an event to occur when the value of the temperature sensor<LF>goes above the threshold (in Celsius). <LF><LF>The default is to set up the Red Event to be triggered<LF>when the temperature sensor on Port 1 goes above 30.<LF><LF>Note: This command must appear before event monitoring is started.  When this event occurs, the program will jump to the event land command.<LF><LF>Modifiers: <LF><LF>Event: String in the event which you want to set up:  red, yellow, blue <LF><LF>Temperature Threshold: String in the value to trigger the event.<LF> (in Celsius). If the value of a container is used here, the number must be 10 times the desired threshold temperature (401 for 40.1 degrees).<LF><LF>Event Source: String in the source of information for the event. <LF>   -Sensor based events: Value of Port 1,2,3<LF>   -Container based events: Value of container<LF>   -Mail based events: Value of mailbox 
XXXXSets up an event to occur when the value of the timer goes above the threshold.<LF><LF>The default is to set up the Red Event to be triggered<LF>when the red timer goes above 1 second.<LF><LF>Note: This command must appear before event monitoring is started.  When this event occurs, the program will jump to the event land command.<LF><LF>Modifiers: <LF><LF>Event: String in the event which you want to set up:  red, yellow, blue <LF><LF>Timer Threshold: String in the value to trigger the event in seconds.<LF><LF>Event Source: String in the source of information for the event. <LF>   -Sensor based events: Value of Port 1,2,3<LF>   -Container based events: Value of container<LF>     (red, blue, yellow)<LF>   -Mail based events: Value of mailbox   <LF>   -Timer based event: Value of timer (red, blue, yellow)
XXXXSetup
XXXXShadow?
XXXXShape Report
XXXXShape to draw
XXXXShift
XXXXShift Value
XXXXShow Context Help &H
XXXXShow Coordinates? (T)
XXXXShow other values, such as the Containers, Timers, Sensors, the Clock, and the Mail.
XXXXShow page
XXXXShow/Hide Administrator Button
XXXXShows data acquired in Port 1, allows the user to define the type of data acquired.
XXXXShows data acquired in Port 2, allows the user to define the type of data acquired.
XXXXShows data acquired in Port 3, allows the user to define the type of data acquired.
XXXXShows or hides an image window. <LF><LF>Window Number (0…15) specifies the image window to show or hide. It is specified by a number from 0 to 15. The default value is 0. <LF><LF>Hide/Show (Show) specifies if an image window is visible. This input only is used when Get/Set Status? is TRUE (Set). <LF><LF>Bring To Front? (N) determines if a window is to be brought to the front. This input is only used when Get/Set Status? is TRUE (Set) and Hide/Show is also TRUE.<LF><LF>Get/Set Status? (Set) specifies if the user wants to know if the image window is visible or if the user wants to modify the visibility of an image window. The default is set to TRUE (Set).<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Visible? returns the present visibility status of the window. A visible image window returns TRUE. <LF><LF>Frontmost Window? returns TRUE if an image window is in the front. <LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF>
XXXXShows or hides the WindTools palette and sets the regions status. This VI functions in the same way as IMAQ WindShow, which is used for displaying image windows.<LF><LF>Hide/Show (Show) specifies whether the tools palette is visible. Use this input only when Get/Set Status? (Set) is TRUE (Set).<LF><LF>Get/Set Status?(Set) specifies if the user wants to know the present status or modify the status of the available region tools. The default is TRUE (Set).<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Visible? returns the present visibility of the tools palette. A visible tools palette returns TRUE.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>
XXXXShrink Image
XXXXSign Container
XXXXSince we needed to log timers, we had to use the upper programming levels.  The first program is in Level 4.  We take advantage of the touch sensor logging option to log the timer when the touch sensor is hit.  The disadvantage of this code is that the program will log the time every time the touch sensor is hit - regardless of whether or not the light is on.
XXXXSingle waveform acquisition
XXXXSixteenth note
XXXXSize
XXXXSize & Order #
XXXXSize & Tolerance
XXXXSize event
XXXXSize reduction
XXXXSize(Byte)
XXXXSkip It
XXXXSkip it
XXXXSlide
XXXXSlide #
XXXXSlope
XXXXSlopes
XXXXSnap
XXXXSnap 2nd Image
XXXXSnap Image
XXXXSnap Image and Wait
XXXXSnap a new image.
XXXXSnap an image to use.  For instance, if you selected subtract, then this sensor would  subtract this image from whatever the camera sees.
XXXXSnap image
XXXXSnapping Image
XXXXSnatch
XXXXSolid
XXXXSong Dwnld?
XXXXSong Name
XXXXSong Path
XXXXSound
XXXXSound Container
XXXXSound FX
XXXXSound In
XXXXSound Level Container (Sound LogIT)
XXXXSound Level Sensor Fork (Sound LogIT)
XXXXSound LogIT
XXXXSound Out
XXXXSound Profile
XXXXSound Type (from 1 to 6)
XXXXSource
XXXXSource (0,2,4)
XXXXSpacer
XXXXSpaces
XXXXSpecifies a RCX code reset
XXXXSpecifies the color depth of 'data'.  Its possible values are 1, 4, or 8 bits per pixel.  Its default is 8.
XXXXSpecifies the color of the line.  This sets the pen's color.  The default is black.
XXXXSpecifies the color of the rectangle.  This sets the pen's color.  The default is black.
XXXXSpecifies the depth of the BMP.
XXXXSpecifies the font for the text to draw. You can chose from the following predefined settings:<LF>0    User-specified Font<LF>1    Application Font (default)<LF>2    System Font<LF>3    Dialog Font
XXXXSpline fit to Data Sets
XXXXSquare/Hexa (Square)
XXXXSrate
XXXXStacatto
XXXXStandard  Deviation
XXXXStandard  Variation
XXXXStandard <CR>Variation
XXXXStandard Deviation
XXXXStandard Deviations
XXXXStandard Program
XXXXStandard Variation
XXXXStart
XXXXStart  remote programming of RCX(s)<LF><LF>Note: This command must be used to the remote programming of RCX(s). It starts the dowlaoding of programs.
XXXXStart Data Logging
XXXXStart Data Logging w/clicks
XXXXStart Direct RCX Communication
XXXXStart Monitoring for Output Access Control
XXXXStart Monitoring for Sound Access Control
XXXXStart Monitoring for an Event
XXXXStart Remote Program
XXXXStart Task(s)
XXXXStart a loop that repeats while the Touch Sensor is <LF>pushed.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the <LF>Touch Sensor on Port 1 is pushed.<LF>  <LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in <LF>the string after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF>.
XXXXStart a loop that repeats while the Touch Sensor is <LF>released.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the value of the<LF>Touch Sensor on Port 1 is released. <LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in <LF>the string after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF>
XXXXStart a loop that repeats while the Touch Sensor is pushed.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the Touch Sensor on Port 1 is pressed in. <LF>  <LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in the string after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where the sensor is connected.
XXXXStart a loop that repeats while the Touch Sensor is released.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the value of the Touch Sensor on Port 1 is released. <LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in the string after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where the sensor is connected.
XXXXStart a loop that repeats while the number of clicks of the <LF>Touch Sensor is less than a specified number.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the Touch Sensor on Port 1 has a number of clicks less than 10. <LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in the string after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the <LF>number of clicks.
XXXXStart a loop that repeats while the number of clicks of the Touch Sensor is less than a specified number.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the Touch Sensor on Port 1 has a number of clicks less than 10. <LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in the string after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the number of clicks.
XXXXStart a loop that repeats while the number of points in a data set is less than a specified number.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the number of points in the Red Data Set is less than 1.<LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in the string after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier: <LF><LF>Data Set: String the data set modifier that corresponds to the data set you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the number of points in the data set.
XXXXStart a loop that repeats while the number of times the <LF>Touch Senssor has been touched and released is less than a specified number.<LF><LF>Note: Every touch registers two counts -- one for the push down and one for the release up.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the Touch Sensor on Port 1 has been touched and released less than 10 times.<LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in the string after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF> <LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the number of touches and releases.
XXXXStart a loop that repeats while the number of times the Touch Sensor has been touched and released is less than a specified number.<LF><LF>Note: Every touch registers two counts -- one for the push down and one for the release up.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the Touch Sensor on Port 1 has been touched and released less than 10 times.<LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in the string after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF> <LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the number of touches and releases.
XXXXStart a loop that repeats while the value of a Container is greater than a specified number.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the value of the Red Container is greater than 1. The loop will stop repeating when the value of the Red Container is less than 1. <LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in the string after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Choose a container:  String in the container modifier that corresponds to the container you want to use.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the value of the container. 
XXXXStart a loop that repeats while the value of a Container is greater than a specified number.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the value of the<LF>Red Container is greater than 1. The loop will stop repeating when the value of the Red Container is less than 1. <LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in <LF>the string after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Choose a container:  String in the container modifier that <LF>corresponds to the container you want to use.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the <LF>value of the container. 
XXXXStart a loop that repeats while the value of a Container is less than a specified number.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the value of the Red Container is less than or equal to 1. <LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in the string after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Choose a container:  String in the container modifier that corresponds to the container you want to use.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the value of the container.
XXXXStart a loop that repeats while the value of a Container is less than a specified number.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the value of the<LF>Red Container is less than or equal to 1. <LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in <LF>the string after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Choose a container:  String in the container modifier that <LF>corresponds to the container you want to use.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the <LF>value of the container.
XXXXStart a loop that repeats while the value of the Acceleration Sensor is greater than a specified number.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the value of the<LF>Acceleration Sensor on Port 1 is greater than 25 m/s/s. The loop will stop repeating when the value of the Acceleration Sensor on Port 1 is less than 25 m/s/s.<LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in <LF>the string after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the <LF>value of the Acceleration sensor.
XXXXStart a loop that repeats while the value of the Acceleration Sensor is less than a specified number.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the value of the<LF>Acceleration Sensor on Port 1 is less than 25 m/s/s. The loop will stop repeating when the value of the Accleration Sensor on Port 1 is greater than 25m/s/s.<LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in <LF>the string after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the <LF>value of the acceleration sensor.
XXXXStart a loop that repeats while the value of the Angle Sensor is greater than a specified number.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the value of the Angle Sensor on Port 1 is greater than 16 (one rotation). <LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in the string after this command.<LF><LF>Note: To properly use this command you will need a Zero Angle Sensor in the string somewhere before this while loop.  <LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the Angle Sensor value in sixteenths of a rotation.<LF><LF>
XXXXStart a loop that repeats while the value of the Angle Sensor is greater than a specified number.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the value of the Angle Sensor on Port 1 is greater than 16 (one rotation).<LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in the string after this command.<LF><LF>Note: To properly use this command you will need a Zero Angle Sensor in the string somewhere before this while loop.  <LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the Angle Sensor value in sixteenths of a rotation.<LF>
XXXXStart a loop that repeats while the value of the Angle Sensor is less than a specified number.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the value of the Angle Sensor on Port 1 is less than 16 (one rotation). <LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in the string after this command.<LF><LF>Note: To properly use this command you will need a Zero Angle Sensor in the string somewhere before this while loop.  <LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the Angle Sensor value in sixteenths of a rotation.<LF><LF>
XXXXStart a loop that repeats while the value of the Barometeric Sensor  is greater than a specified number.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the value of the<LF>Barometeric Sensor on Port 1 is Greater than 1000 hPa. The loop will stop repeating when the value of the Barometeric Sensor on Port 1 is less than 1000 hPa.<LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in <LF>the string after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the <LF>value of the barometeric sensor.
XXXXStart a loop that repeats while the value of the Barometeric Sensor is less than a specified number.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the value of the<LF>Barometeric Sensor on Port 1 is less than 1000 hPa. The loop will stop repeating when the value of the Barometeric Sensor on Port 1 is greater than 1000 hPa.<LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in <LF>the string after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the <LF>value of the barometeric sensor.
XXXXStart a loop that repeats while the value of the Clock is greater than a specified number.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the value of the Clock is greater than 1. The loop will stop repeating when the value of the Clock is less than 1 min. <LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in the string after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Compare to (min):  String in the number to compare with the value of the Clock. 
XXXXStart a loop that repeats while the value of the Clock is greater than a specified number.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the value of the<LF>Clock is greater than 1. The loop will stop repeating when the value of the  Clock is less than 1. <LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in <LF>the string after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Compare to (min):  String in the number to compare with the <LF>value of the Clock. 
XXXXStart a loop that repeats while the value of the Clock is less than a specified number.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the value of the Clock is less than or equal to 1 min. <LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in the string after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Compare to (min):  String in the number to compare with the value of the Clock.
XXXXStart a loop that repeats while the value of the Clock is less than a specified number.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the value of the<LF>Clock is less than or equal to 1 min. <LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in <LF>the string after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Compare to (min):  String in the number to compare with the value of the Clock.
XXXXStart a loop that repeats while the value of the Generic Sensor<LF>is greater than a specified number.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the value of the Generic Sensor on Port 1 is greater than 2V. <LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in <LF>the string after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the <LF>value of the generic sensor.
XXXXStart a loop that repeats while the value of the Light Sensor is greater than a specified number.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the value of the Light Sensor on Port 1 is greater than 55. <LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in the string after this command.<LF><LF>Note: The Light Sensor reads a value between 1 (dark) and 100 (bright).<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the value of the light sensor.
XXXXStart a loop that repeats while the value of the Light Sensor is less than a specified number.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the value of the Light Sensor on Port 1 is less than 55. <LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in the string after this command.<LF><LF>Note: The Light Sensor reads a value between 1 (dark) and 100 (bright).<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the value of the light sensor.
XXXXStart a loop that repeats while the value of the Light Sensor is less than a specified number.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the value of the<LF>Light Sensor on Port 1 is less than 55. <LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in the string after this command.<LF><LF>Note: The Light Sensor reads a value between 1 <LF>(dark) and 100 (bright).<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the <LF>value of the light sensor.
XXXXStart a loop that repeats while the value of the Light Sensor<LF>is greater than a specified number.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the value of the<LF>Light Sensor on Port 1 is greater than 55. <LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in <LF>the string after this command.<LF><LF>Note: The Light Sensor reads a value between 1 <LF>(dark) and 100 (bright).<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the <LF>value of the light sensor.
XXXXStart a loop that repeats while the value of the Lux Sensor  is greater than a specified number.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the value of the<LF>Lux Sensor on Port 1 is greater than 10000 lux. The loop will stop repeating when the value of the Lux Sensor on Port 1 is less than 10000 lux.<LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in <LF>the string after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the <LF>value of the lux sensor.
XXXXStart a loop that repeats while the value of the Lux Sensor  is less than a specified number.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the value of the<LF>Lux Sensor on Port 1 is less than 10000 lux. The loop will stop repeating when the value of the Lux Sensor on Port 1 is greater than 10000 lux.<LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in <LF>the string after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the <LF>value of the lux sensor.
XXXXStart a loop that repeats while the value of the Redox Sensor is greater than a specified number.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the value of the Redox Sensor on Port 1 is greater than 625 mV.  The loop will stop repeating when the value of the Redox Sensor on Port 1 is less than 625 mV.  <LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in <LF>the string after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the <LF>value of the redox sensor.
XXXXStart a loop that repeats while the value of the Redox Sensor<LF>is greater than a specified number.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the value of the Redox Sensor on Port 1 is greater than 625 mV.  The loop will stop repeating when the value of the Redox Sensor on Port 1 is less than 625 mV.  <LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in <LF>the string after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the <LF>value of the redox sensor.
XXXXStart a loop that repeats while the value of the Redox Sensor<LF>is less than a specified number.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the value of the Redox Sensor on Port 1 is less than 625 mV.  The loop will stop repeating when the value of the Redox Sensor is greater than 625 mV.<LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in <LF>the string after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the <LF>value of the redox sensor.
XXXXStart a loop that repeats while the value of the Sound Pressure Level Sensor is less than a specified number.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the value of the  sound pressure sensor on Port 1 is less than 60 decibels. <LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in <LF>the string after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the <LF>value of the sound pressure level sensor.
XXXXStart a loop that repeats while the value of the Temperature Sensor reported in Celsius is less than a specified number.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the value of the Temperature Sensor on Port 1 is less than 30 Celsius. <LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in the string after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the value of the temperature sensor. If the value of a container is used here, the number must be 10 times the desired threshold temperature (401 for 40.1 degrees).
XXXXStart a loop that repeats while the value of the Temperature Sensor reported in Fahrenheit is greater than a specified number.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the value of the Temperature Sensor on Port 1 is greater than 80 Fahrenheit. <LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in the string after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the value of the temperature sensor. If the value of a container is used here, the number must be 10 times the desired threshold temperature (401 for 40.1 degrees).
XXXXStart a loop that repeats while the value of the Temperature Sensor reported in Fahrenheit is greater than a specified number.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the value of the Temperature Sensor on Port 1 is greater than 80 Fahrenheit. <LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in the string after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the value of the temperature sensor. If the value of a container is used here, the number must be 10 times the desired threshold temperature (401 for 40.1 degrees).
XXXXStart a loop that repeats while the value of the Temperature Sensor reported in Fahrenheit is less than a specified number.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the value of the Temperature Sensor on Port 1 is less than 80 Fahrenheit. <LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in the string after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the value of the temperature sensor. If the value of a container is used here, the number must be 10 times the desired threshold temperature (401 for 40.1 degrees).
XXXXStart a loop that repeats while the value of the Temperature Sensor, reported in Celsius, is greater than a specified number.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the value of the Temperature Sensor on Port 1 is greater than 30 Celsius. <LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in the string after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the value of the temperature sensor. If the value of a container is used here, the number must be 10 times the desired threshold temperature (401 for 40.1 degrees).
XXXXStart a loop that repeats while the value of the Temperature Sensor, reported in Celsius, is greater than a specified number.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the value of the<LF>Temperature Sensor on Port 1 is greater than 30 Celsius. <LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in the string after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the value of the temperature sensor. If the value of a container is used here, the number must be 10 times the desired threshold temperature (401 for 40.1 degrees).
XXXXStart a loop that repeats while the value of the Temperature Sensor, reported in Celsius, is less than a specified number.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the value of the<LF>Temperature Sensor on Port 1 is less than 30 Celsius. <LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in the string after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the <LF>value of the temperature sensor. If the value of a container is used here, the number must be 10 times the desired threshold temperature (401 for 40.1 degrees).
XXXXStart a loop that repeats while the value of the Temperature Sensor, reported in Fahrenheit, is less than a specified number.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the value of the Temperature Sensor on Port 1 is less than 80 Fahrenheit. <LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in the string after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the value of the temperature sensor. If the value of a container is used here, the number must be 10 times the desired threshold temperature (401 for 40.1 degrees).
XXXXStart a loop that repeats while the value of the Timer is greater than a specified number.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the value of the Red Timer is greater  than 5 seconds. <LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in the string after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Timer:  String in a Timer modifier corresponding to the Timer you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the <LF>value of the timer.
XXXXStart a loop that repeats while the value of the Timer is greater than a specified number.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the value of the Red Timer is greater than 5 seconds. <LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in the string after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Timer:  String in a Timer modifier corresponding to the Timer you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the <LF>value of the timer.
XXXXStart a loop that repeats while the value of the Timer is less than a specified number.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the value of the Red Timer is less than 5 seconds. <LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in the string after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Timer:  String in a Timer modifier corresponding to the Timer you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the <LF>value of the timer.
XXXXStart a loop that repeats while the value of the Timer is less than a specified number.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the value of the Red Timer is less than 5 seconds. <LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in the string after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Timer:  String in a Timer modifier corresponding to the Timer you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the value of the timer.
XXXXStart a loop that repeats while the value of the Voltage Sensor is greater than a specified number.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the value of the Voltage Sensor on Port 1 is greater than 2V. <LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in <LF>the string after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the <LF>value of the volt sensor.
XXXXStart a loop that repeats while the value of the Voltage Sensor is greater than a specified number.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the value of the Voltage Sensor on Port 1 is greater than 2V. <LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in the string after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the value of the volt sensor.
XXXXStart a loop that repeats while the value of the Voltage Sensor is less than a specified number.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the value of the Voltage Sensor on Port 1 is less than 2V. The loop will stop repeating when the value of the sensor on Port 1 is greater than 2V.<LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in the string after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the value of the voltmeter.
XXXXStart a loop that repeats while the value of the Voltage Sensor is less than a specified number.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the value of the<LF>Voltage Sensor on Port 1 is less than 2V. The loop will stop repeating when the value of the sensor on Port 1 is greater than 2V.<LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in <LF>the string after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the <LF>value of the volt sensor.
XXXXStart a loop that repeats while the value of the humidity sensor is less than a specified value.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the value of the<LF>humidity sensor on Port 1 is less than 5O%. The loop will stop repeating when the value of the humidity sensor on Port 1 is greater than 5O%.<LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in <LF>the string after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the <LF>value of the humidity sensor.
XXXXStart a loop that repeats while the value of the humidity sensor<LF>is greater than a specified value.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the value of the humidity sensor on Port 1 is greater than 50%. <LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in <LF>the string after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the <LF>value of the humidity sensor.
XXXXStart a loop that repeats while the value of the mail in the mailbox is greater than a specified number.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the value of the mail in the mailbox is greater than 1.  <LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in the string after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the value of the mail.
XXXXStart a loop that repeats while the value of the mail in the mailbox is greater than a specified number.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the value of the mail in the mailbox is greater than 1. <LF>`<LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in the string after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the value of the mail.
XXXXStart a loop that repeats while the value of the mail in the mailbox is less than a specified number.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the value of the mail in the mailbox is less than 1.  <LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in the string after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the value of the mail.
XXXXStart a loop that repeats while the value of the mail in the mailbox is less than a specified number.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the value of the mail in the mailbox is less than 1. <LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in the string after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the <LF>value of the mail.
XXXXStart a loop that repeats while the value of the pH Sensor is less than a specified number.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the value of the pH Sensor on Port 1 is less than 7. <LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in <LF>the string after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the <LF>value of the pH sensor.
XXXXStart a loop that repeats while the value of the pH sensor<LF>is greater than a specified number.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the value of the pH sensor on Port 1 is greater than 7. <LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in <LF>the string after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the <LF>value of the pH sensor.
XXXXStart a loop that repeats while the value of the position sensor is greater than a specified value.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the value of the position sensor on Port 1 is greater than 180 degrees. <LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in the string after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to (degrees):  String in the number to compare with the <LF>value of the position sensor.
XXXXStart a loop that repeats while the value of the position sensor is less than a specified value.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the value of the<LF>position sensor on Port 1 is less than 180 degrees. The loop will stop repeating when the value of the position sensor on Port 1 is greater than 180 degrees.<LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in <LF>the string after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to (degrees):  String in the number to compare with the <LF>value of the position sensor.
XXXXStart a loop that repeats while the value of the position sensor is less than a specified value.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the value of the<LF>position sensor on Port 1 is less than 180 degrees. The loop will stop repeating when the value of the position sensor on Port 1 is greater than 180 degrees.<LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in <LF>the string after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to (degrees):  String in the number to compare with the value of the position sensor.
XXXXStart a loop that repeats while the value of the position sensor<LF>is greater than a specified value.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the value of the position sensor on Port 1 is greater than 180 degrees. <LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in <LF>the string after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to (degrees):  String in the number to compare with the <LF>value of the position sensor.
XXXXStart a loop that repeats while the value of the pressure sensor is less than a specified number.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the value of the<LF>pressure sensor on Port 1 is less than 100 kPa. The loop will stop repeating when the value of the pressure sensor on Port 1 is greater than 100 kPa.<LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in <LF>the string after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the <LF>value of the pressure sensor.
XXXXStart a loop that repeats while the value of the pressure sensor<LF>is greater than a specified value.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the value of the pressure sensor on Port 1 is greater than 100 kPa. <LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in <LF>the string after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the <LF>value of the pressure sensor.
XXXXStart a loop that repeats while the value of the pressure sensoris greater than a specified value.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the value of the pressure sensor on Port 1 is greater than 100 kPa. <LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in <LF>the string after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the <LF>value of the pressure sensor.
XXXXStart a loop that repeats while the value of the sound pressure level sensor is greater than a specified number.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the value of the sound pressure sensor on Port 1 is greater than 60 decibels. <LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in <LF>the string after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the <LF>value of the sound pressure level sensor.
XXXXStart a loop that repeats while the value of the temperature sensor is less than a specified value.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the value of the<LF>temperature sensor on Port 1 is less than 30 degrees C. The loop will stop repeating when the value of the temperature sensor on Port 1 is greater than 30 degrees C.<LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in <LF>the string after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the <LF>value of the temperature sensor.
XXXXStart a loop that repeats while the value of the temperature sensor<LF>is greater than a specified number.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the value of the temperature sensor on Port 1 is greater than 30 degrees Celsius. <LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in <LF>the string after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the <LF>value of the temperature sensor.
XXXXStart a loop that repeats while the value of the temperature sensoris greater than a specified number.<LF><LF>The default is to repeat the loop while the value of the temperature sensor on Port 1 is greater than 30 degrees Celsius. <LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in <LF>the string after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where the sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Compare to:  String in the number to compare with the <LF>value of the temperature sensor.
XXXXStart a loop.<LF>The default is to loop twice.<LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in the string after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Number of loops: String in a number to represent the number of loops (Max. 15 imbedded loops).
XXXXStart a loop.<LF>The default is to loop twice.<LF><LF>Note: The End of Loop command is needed somewhere in the string<LF>after this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Number of loops: String in a number to represent the number of <LF>loops (Max. 15 imbedded loops).
XXXXStart a new task with this command in order to run multiple tasks <LF>simultaneously.<LF><LF>Note: Each task that splits off will need its own separate End <LF>command (Red Traffic Light).
XXXXStart a new task with this command in order to run multiple tasks simultaneously.<LF><LF>Note: Each task that splits off will need its own separate End command (Red Traffic Light).
XXXXStart characters
XXXXStart communication with remote RCX(s)<LF><LF>Note: This command must be used to start  direct communication with remote RCX(s). <LF><LF>
XXXXStart of Loop
XXXXStart one task.<LF><LF>The default is to start task 1.<LF><LF>Note: Separate tasks are generated by multi-tasking forks or by adding data logging to a program. <LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Task Number: String in the number of the task you wish to restart (starting with task 1).
XXXXStart one task.<LF><LF>The default is to start task 1.<LF><LF>Note: Separate tasks are generated by multi-tasking forks or by adding data logging to a program. <LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Task Number: String in the number of the task you wish to restart.
XXXXStart the current program in the RCX.<LF><LF>This is the equivalent of pushing the green run button on RCX.
XXXXStart the current program in the RCX.<LF><LF>This is the equivalent of starting a program by clicking the green run button on the RCX. 
XXXXStart the data logging for corresponding data set and clicks every time it takes a data point. <LF><LF>The default is  data logging is started for the Red Data Set and data is captured every second.<LF><LF>Note: One of the Initialize Logging commands must come before<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Data Set: String  the data set modifier that corresponds to the data set you want to use: red, yellow, or blue<LF><LF>Wait (sec): String in the time to wait between capturing data points.
XXXXStart the data logging for the corresponding data set.<LF><LF>The default is data logging is started for the Red Data Set and data is captured every second.<LF><LF>Note: One of the Initialize Logging commands must come before this one.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Data Set: String  the data set modifier that corresponds to the data set you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Wait (sec): String in the time to wait between capturing data points.
XXXXStart the data logging for the item in the corresponding data set.<LF><LF>The default is data logging is started for the item initialized in the Red Data Set and data is captured every second.<LF><LF>Note: One of the Initialize Logging commands must come before this one.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Data Set: String  the data set modifier that corresponds to the data set you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Wait (sec): String in the time to wait between capturing data points.
XXXXStart time
XXXXStart/End
XXXXStartDirectMode
XXXXStarter Set
XXXXStarting Value
XXXXStarting from a binary image, calculates a skeleton from particles within an image or the lines delineating the zones of influence (skeleton of an inverse image). The source image must have a border greater than or equal to 1. <LF>  	  <LF>Mode specifies the type of skeleton to perform. The default is 0.<LF><LF>  0	Skeleton L uses this type structuring element:<LF>  1	Skeleton M uses this type structuring element:<LF>  2	Skiz is an inverse skeleton (Skeleton L on an inverse image).<LF><LF>Image Src is the reference to the source (input) image.<LF>	<LF>Image Dst is the reference to the destination image. If it is connected, it must be the same type as the Image Src.<LF>	<LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Dst Out is the reference to the destination (output) image which receives the processing results of the VI. If the Image Dst is connected, then Image Dst Out is the same as Image Dst. Otherwise, Image Dst Out refers to the image referenced by Image Src.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXStarting from a labeled image, calculates the zones of influence between particles. Each labeled particle grows until the particles reach their neighbors, at which time this growth is stopped. The source image must have a border greater than or equal to 1.<LF>  <LF>Image Src is the reference to the source (input) image.<LF>	<LF>Image Dst is the reference to the destination image. If it is connected, it must be the same type as the Image Src.<LF>	<LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Dst Out is the reference to the destination (output) image which receives the processing results of the VI. If the Image Dst is connected, then Image Dst Out is the same as Image Dst. Otherwise, Image Dst Out refers to the image referenced by Image Src.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXStarts Direct Commands sent to other RCXs.<LF><LF>Note: This command must be used to start direct communication with remote RCX(s).  
XXXXStarts Direct Commands sent to other RCXs<LF><LF>Note: This command must be used to start remote programming of RCX(s).  It starts  the downloading of programs.
XXXXStarts monitoring for the corresponding event(s)<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Event: String in the event which you want <LF>to start monitoring for:  red, yellow, blue <LF>
XXXXStarts monitoring for the corresponding event(s)<LF>The default is to start monitoring for the Red Event.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Event: String in the event which you want <LF>to start monitoring for:  red, yellow, blue <LF><LF>
XXXXStarts the motors and lamps.  This will not set any power settings or direction.  It will use the last defined settings.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Ports:  String in which ports to start.
XXXXStarts the motors and lamps.  This will not set any power<LF>settings or direction.  It will use the last defined settings.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Ports:  String in which ports to start.
XXXXState
XXXXState In
XXXXState Out
XXXXStatistic
XXXXStatistics
XXXXStatus
XXXXStatusA (0-2)
XXXXStatusB (0-2)
XXXXSteepness
XXXXStep
XXXXStep # 1 of 2
XXXXSteps
XXXXStop
XXXXStop A
XXXXStop Access Control Monitoring
XXXXStop All Outputs
XXXXStop B
XXXXStop C
XXXXStop Event Monitoring
XXXXStop Logging
XXXXStop Outputs
XXXXStop Task(s)
XXXXStop all event monitoring.
XXXXStop character
XXXXStop one or all tasks in a program.<LF><LF>The default is to stop all tasks in a program.<LF><LF>Note: Separate tasks are generated by multi-taking forks or by adding data logging to a program. <LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Task Number: String in the number of the task you wish to stop.  
XXXXStop one or all tasks in a program.<LF><LF>The default is to stop all tasks in a program.<LF><LF>Note: Separate tasks are generated by multi-tasking forks or by adding data logging to a program. <LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Task Number: String in the number of the task you wish to stop.  
XXXXStop the data logging for the item in the corresponding data set.<LF><LF>The default is data logging is stopped for the Red Data Set.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Data Set: String  the data set modifier that corresponds to the data set you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF>
XXXXStop the data logging for the item in the corresponding data set.<LF><LF>The default is data logging is stopped for the Red Data Set.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Data Set: String the data set modifier that corresponds to the data set you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>
XXXXStop the motor or lamp connected to port A.
XXXXStop the motor or lamp connected to port B.
XXXXStop the motor or lamp connected to port C.
XXXXStop the motors and lamps connected to all ports.
XXXXStop the motors and lamps.<LF>The default is to stop all motors and lamps.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Ports:  String in which ports to stop.
XXXXStop time (100msec)
XXXXStrikeout?
XXXXString
XXXXString a command in after this one to run the following commands immediately in direct <LF>mode (no download).  Make sure the RCX is near the IR Transmitter to communicate directly with it.<LF>
XXXXString a command in after this one to run the following commands immediately in direct mode (no download).  
XXXXString a command in after this one to run the following commands immediately in direct mode (no download).  Make sure the RCX is near the IR Transmitter to communicate directly with it.<LF><LF>Modifiers: <LF>Check - is it on?:  if true (default), then the program will ping the RCX.   You HAVE to do this if you send the same command twice.<LF>
XXXXString a command in after this one to run the following commands immediately in direct mode (no download).  Make sure the Scout is near the IR Transmitter to communicate directly with it.<LF>
XXXXString a command in after this one to run<LF>the following commands immediately in direct <LF>mode (no download).  
XXXXString a command in after this one to run<LF>the following commands immediately in direct <LF>mode (no download).  Make sure the RCX is near<LF>the IR Transmitter to communicate directly with it.<FONT style='B'><LF>
XXXXString a command in after this one to run<LF>the following commands immediately in direct <LF>mode (no download).  Make sure the RCX is near<LF>the IR Transmitter to communicate directly with it<FONT size=10>.<FONT style='B'><LF>
XXXXString a command in after this one to run<LF>the following commands immediately in direct <LF>mode (no download).  Make sure the Scout is near<LF>the IR Transmitter to communicate directly with it.<FONT style='B'><LF>
XXXXString width
XXXXStringofLandI
XXXXStrings []
XXXXStructuring Element
XXXXSub-Pixel Accuracy
XXXXSubPixel Accuracy
XXXXSubPixel Information
XXXXSubroutine number
XXXXSubtract
XXXXSubtract a number from a container.<LF>The default is to subtract 1 from the Red Container.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier that corresponds to the <LF>container you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Number to subtract:  String in a number to subtract <LF>from the container.
XXXXSubtract a number from a container.<LF>The default is to subtract 1 from the Red Container.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier that corresponds to the container you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Number to subtract:  String in a number to subtract from the container.
XXXXSubtracts one image from another or a constant from an image.<LF>    	    <LF>Constant is the value subtracted from the input Image Src A for image-constant operations. The constant is rounded down in cases in which the image is encoded as an integer. The default is 0.<LF><LF>Image Src A is the reference to the source (input) image A.<LF><LF>Image Dst is the reference to the destination image.<LF><LF>Image Src B is the reference to the source (input) image B.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Dst Out is the reference to the destination (output) image which receives the processing results of the VI. If the Image Dst is connected, then Image Dst Out is the same as Image Dst. Otherwise, Image Dst Out refers to the image referenced by Image Src A.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXSubtracts two images where the first is a complex image, or subtracts a complex constant from a complex image.<LF>  <LF>Constant is the complex constant subtracted from the input Image Src A for image-constant operations. The default is 0.<LF>	<LF>Image Src A is the handle of the first source image and must be a complex image.<LF>	<LF>Image Dst is the handle of the complex image that contains the resulting FFT image. This input can accept only a complex image.<LF>	<LF>Image Src B is the handle of the second source image. This input can accept an 8-bit, 16-bit, 32-bit floating-point, or complex image. If the image is not a complex image, then the imaginary part of the Image Dst is equal to Image Src A.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Dst Out is the reference to the destination (output) image which receives the processing results of the VI. If the Image Dst is connected, then Image Dst Out is the same as Image Dst. Otherwise, Image Dst Out refers to the image referenced by Image Src A.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>An operation between an image and a constant occurs when the input Image Src B is not connected. The two possibilities are distinguished in the following equations.<LF><LF>Dst(x, y) = SrcA(x, y) – SrcB(x, y), or<LF>Dst(x, y) = SrcA(x, y) – Constant.
XXXXSuccessful Events
XXXXSuperimposes objects (rectangles, ovals, lines, text, and so forth) on an image window. These superimposed objects normally are drawn in a LabVIEW or BridgeVIEW picture using the Picture Control Toolkit for G Development Environments.<LF><LF>Redraw image? (Y) Specifies whether the image is redrawn in the window after the picture is superimposed on the window.<LF><LF>Window Number (0...15) specifies the window in which the picture is superimposed.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Picture to add (none) contains the objects (rectangles, ovals, lines, text, and so forth) that are superimposed on the window These superimposed objects normally are drawn in a LabVIEW or BridgeVIEW picture using the Picture Control Toolkit for G Development Environments.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXSuppress Error Codes? (F)
XXXXSuppress Upload bar?
XXXXSwitch
XXXXSynchronous
XXXXTBS
XXXXTEST RCX COMMUNICATION
XXXXTIFF Options
XXXXTR
XXXXTR Threshold
XXXXTRUE
XXXXTab Control
XXXXTable
XXXXTable 2
XXXXTach Speed (0,1)
XXXXTacho Counter (0,1)
XXXXTask
XXXXTask 1
XXXXTask Events (0-9)
XXXXTask ID
XXXXTask ID in
XXXXTask ID out
XXXXTask Number
XXXXTask Priority
XXXXTask Split
XXXXTaskFlags (0-1)
XXXXTasks
XXXXTemp (C) Container
XXXXTemp (F) Container
XXXXTemperature
XXXXTemperature (Celsius)
XXXXTemperature Container (ProTemp LogIT)
XXXXTemperature Data
XXXXTemperature Sensor Fork (ProTemp LogIT)
XXXXTemperature Threshold
XXXXTemplate
XXXXTemplate Bounds
XXXXTemplate Names
XXXXTemplate page
XXXXTemplates should be file names
XXXXTempo
XXXXTest
XXXXTest (Data)
XXXXTest RCX Communication
XXXXText
XXXXText 1
XXXXText 2
XXXXText Mode (No RCX Communication)
XXXXText version
XXXXThPercent (1-100)
XXXXThe Battery Level of the RCX.
XXXXThe Describe Project page allows you to write about your findings.
XXXXThe JPEG picture you have chosen.
XXXXThe Presentation pages.
XXXXThe RCX stores certain information.  You can use this program to see the values stored in its memory.<LF><LF>This is the value of the item whose picture is in the box to the left.
XXXXThe Task ID defines which configuration you are using.
XXXXThe VLL command sends out a code over<LF>the VLL port to the Micro Scout. <LF><LF>D:  signify direct commands.<LF>S:  signify scripting commands.<LF>
XXXXThe VLL command sends out a code over<LF>the VLL port to the Micro Scout. <LF><LF>D:  signify direct commands.<LF>S:  signify scripting commands.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>VLL Command:  String a single modifier to <LF>choose the command to send to the MicroScout.
XXXXThe VLL command sends out a code to an other<LF>device that can be controlled by a VLL port. 
XXXXThe VLL command sends out a code to an other<LF>device that can be controlled by a VLL port. <LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>VLL Command:  String a single modifier to <LF>choose the command to send out.
XXXXThe X-axis label comes from the Data Set.
XXXXThe Y-axis label is the same as the bin name.  Change the bin name by clicking on the name below the picture of the bin.  If you delete the name, the next time you upload data it will take the name from the Data Set.
XXXXThe battery level.
XXXXThe command clears all the 16 events. Tasks that are actively waiting/monitoring for events are not alerted to this fact. 
XXXXThe command empties the sound buffer and ignores future sounds. System generated sounds from e.g. button presses or low battery detection will still play.
XXXXThe command immediately empties the sound buffer in the RCX from any and all queued tones or system sounds. This can be used to implement immediate sound feedback for events. 
XXXXThe command restarts the sound buffer to play sounds.
XXXXThe command sets the thresholds and hysteresis for the specified event number. The settings are calculated from the sensor measurements taken, and the sensor mode. In order to secure “correct” parameters, several measurements are taken. From these measurements the average EventValue is calculated. No of measurements is as follows: Physical sensors : 8 measurements Virtual sensors : 1 measurement When using the ‘cale’ command, the program must be halted for some time, in order to allow the firmware to do the calibration. To see how the actual calculations are done, please refer to the chapter Events, page 100. The command is not useful for calibrating an event that monitors a switch sensor. <LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Event: This is which event is getting defined<LF>
XXXXThe duration of the tone, in seconds.
XXXXThe equations for the lines.
XXXXThe last value captured in the Blue Data Set.
XXXXThe last value captured in the Red Data Set.
XXXXThe last value captured in the Yellow Data Set.
XXXXThe light sensor and the angle sensor are both reporting approximately 29 rotations in 5 seconds, which when multiplied by 12 comes to 348 rotations per 60 seconds, or 348 Revolutions Per Minute (RPM).<LF><LF>The speed of the motor is supposed to be 350 RPM, so our spinner is accurate.  Our spinner is also as accurate as the LEGO angle sensor.
XXXXThe picture to which you want to add the array of data. It defaults to an empty picture if you do not wire it.
XXXXThe power level (High or Low) of the infrared transmitter on the RCX.
XXXXThe resulting picture.
XXXXThe speed of the motor or the intensity of the lamp.
XXXXThe time between captured data points.  The fastest you can sample at these levels is 0.05 sec between points.
XXXXThe time between captured data points. The fastest you can sample at these levels is 0.05 sec between points.
XXXXThe time left in loading the Investigator Areas.
XXXXThe title of your Investigator Project.
XXXXThe top left point of the drawn bitmap.
XXXXThe value is the battery voltage level multiplied by 1000.
XXXXThe value is the battery voltage level multiplied by<LF>1000.
XXXXThe value is the firmware version number multiplied by 100.
XXXXThe value is the firmware version number<LF>multiplied by 100.
XXXXThe value of Port 1.
XXXXThe value of Port 2.
XXXXThe value of Port 3.
XXXXThe value of Port 4.
XXXXThe value of Port 5.
XXXXThe value of Port 6.
XXXXThe value of Port 7.
XXXXThe value of Port 8.
XXXXThe value of a generic container.<LF><LF>You can string in a number anywhere from 0 to 20 to <LF>select any of the 21 available container variables.<LF><LF>0 corresponds to the Red Container<LF>1 corresponds to the Yellow Container<LF>2 corresponds to the Blue Container<LF>3 to 20 correspond to generic user defined container <LF>variables.
XXXXThe value of a generic container.<LF><LF>You can string in a number anywhere from 0 to 20 to select any of the 21 available conatainer variables.<LF><LF>0 corresponds to the Red Container<LF>1 corresponds to the Yellow Container<LF>2 corresponds to the Blue Container<LF>3 to 20 correspond to generic user defined container variables.
XXXXThe value of a generic container.<LF><LF>You can string in a number anywhere from 0 to 20 to select any of the 21 available container variables.<LF><LF>0 corresponds to the Red Container<LF>1 corresponds to the Yellow Container<LF>2 corresponds to the Blue Container<LF>3 to 20 correspond to generic user defined container variables.
XXXXThe value of mail in the RCX mailbox.
XXXXThe value of the Blue Container.
XXXXThe value of the Blue Timer.
XXXXThe value of the Red Container.
XXXXThe value of the Red Timer.
XXXXThe value of the Red timer.
XXXXThe value of the Yellow Container.
XXXXThe value of the Yellow Timer.
XXXXThe value of the Yellow timer.
XXXXThe value of the clock in the RCX (what you see <LF>on the display) in minutes since 00:00.
XXXXThe value of the container as specified by another container.<LF><LF>You can string in a number anywhere from 0 to 20 to <LF>select any of the 21 available conatainer variables.<LF><LF>0 corresponds to the Red Container<LF>1 corresponds to the Yellow Container<LF>2 corresponds to the Blue Container<LF>3 to 20 correspond to generic user defined container <LF>variables.
XXXXThe value of the duration for the blue event
XXXXThe value of the duration for the generic event
XXXXThe value of the duration for the red event
XXXXThe value of the duration for the yellow event
XXXXThe value of the hystersis for the blue event
XXXXThe value of the hystersis for the generic event
XXXXThe value of the hystersis for the red event
XXXXThe value of the hystersis for the yellow event
XXXXThe value of the lower threshold for the blue event
XXXXThe value of the lower threshold for the generic event
XXXXThe value of the lower threshold for the red event
XXXXThe value of the lower threshold for the yellow event
XXXXThe value of the red event
XXXXThe value of the upper threshold for the blue event
XXXXThe value of the upper threshold for the generic event
XXXXThe value of the upper threshold for the red event
XXXXThe value of the upper threshold for the yellow event
XXXXTheme Name
XXXXThemes
XXXXThese buttons allow you choose which area you want to work in.
XXXXThese buttons allow you to add and delete pages to your project.
XXXXThese buttons allow you to return to the main Investigator screen, quit out of ROBOLAB, or see the help menu.
XXXXThick
XXXXThin
XXXXThis Level 5 program takes advantage of the Free Sampling option (with time stamp) to sample the timer only after the light goes on and the user pushes the touch sensor.
XXXXThis VI Extracts a single color plane from the image.
XXXXThis VI adds two images pixel by pixel or a constant to one image.  If <<B>>Image 2<</B>> is unwired, the <<B>>constant<</B>> is added to the image.  (Does not work on a color image)
XXXXThis VI adds two images pixel by pixel or a constant<LF> to one image.  If Image 2 is unwired, the constant <LF>is added to the image. (Does not work on a color image)
XXXXThis VI allows the user to take data and send a waveform out to the motors at the same time (to within 10 msec).
XXXXThis VI allows the user to take data and send multiple waveforms out to the motors at the same time with full triggering and clock control.
XXXXThis VI allows the user to trigger acquisition sweeps along with using a sensor as a clock source for the acquisition.
XXXXThis VI allows the user to trigger waveforms sent out along with using a sensor as a clock source for the waveform.
XXXXThis VI automatically thresholds a histogram using <LF>the triangle method.  It outputs the threshold value.
XXXXThis VI automatically thresholds a histogram using the triangle method.  It outputs the threshold value.
XXXXThis VI automatically thresholds an image (clustering method).  <LF>Pixels within the determined range  are given the value 1, while <LF>pixels outside this range  are given the value 0.  The output image is binary.
XXXXThis VI automatically thresholds an image (clustering method).  Pixels within the determined range are given the value 1, while pixels outside this range are given the value 0.  The output image is binary.
XXXXThis VI automatically thresholds an image (clustering method).  Pixels within the determined range maintain their original value, while pixels outside this range are given the value 0.  (Does not work with color images)
XXXXThis VI automatically thresholds an image (clustering method).  Pixels within the determined range maintain their original value, while pixels outside this range are given the value 0.  The output image is greyscale.
XXXXThis VI automatically thresholds an image(clustering method).<LF>Pixels within the determined range  maintain their original value, while pixels outside this range are given the value 0.   (Does not work with color images)
XXXXThis VI automatically thresholds an image(clustering method).<LF>Pixels within the determined range <LF>maintain their original value, while pixels outside this <LF>range are given the value 0.  The output image is <LF>greyscale.
XXXXThis VI changes the correlation image from frequency representation (low frequencies at the corners) to optical representation (low frequencies at the center) and vice-versa.
XXXXThis VI closes the camera.
XXXXThis VI closes the floating tools window
XXXXThis VI closes the floating user window
XXXXThis VI closes the microphone.
XXXXThis VI collects one second of sound data
XXXXThis VI collects one second of sound data.
XXXXThis VI collects sound data until stopped
XXXXThis VI computes the correlation of two images.
XXXXThis VI converts a 2-dimensional array to an image.  <LF>The image resolution is equal to the number of <LF>columns by the number of rows. <LF><LF>Modifier: <LF>Flip: If true, this will flip the image so that the image looks right in the Intensity graph (element 0,0  in a picture is the upper left corner but in a graph is in the lower left).  Default is False.
XXXXThis VI converts a 2-dimensional array to an image.  The image resolution is equal to the number of columns by the number of rows.<LF><LF>Modifier: <LF>Flip: If true, this will flip the image so that the image looks right in the Intensity graph (element 0,0  in a picture is the upper left corner but in a graph is in the lower left).  Default is False.
XXXXThis VI converts a ROBOLAB image type to a IMAQ image type.
XXXXThis VI converts an IMAQ image type to a ROBOLAB image type and disposes of the IMAQ image.
XXXXThis VI converts an image into a 2-dimensional array <LF>of rows and columns (e.g. 320 columns and 240 rows).<LF><LF>Modifier: <LF>Flip: If true, this will flip the image so that the image looks right in the Intensity graph (element 0,0  in a picture is the upper left corner but in a graph is in the lower left). Default is False.
XXXXThis VI converts an image into a 2-dimensional array of rows and columns (e.g. 320 columns and 240 rows).<LF><LF>Modifier: <LF>Flip: If true, this will flip the image so that the image looks right in the Intensity graph (element 0,0  in a picture is the upper left corner but in a graph is in the lower left).
XXXXThis VI converts an image to a LabView picture, and <LF>autoscales the pixel values from 0 to 255.  A binary <LF>image, for example, would show up as an image of <LF>zeroes and 255s (as opposed to zeroes and ones).<LF><LF>If 24-bit color table is wired, this VI will apply <LF>that color table to the picture.
XXXXThis VI converts an image to a LabView picture, and autoscales the pixel values from 0 to 255.  A binary image, for example, would show up as an image of zeroes and 255s (as opposed to zeroes and ones).<LF><LF>If <<B>>24-bit color table<</B>> is wired, this VI will apply that color table to the picture.
XXXXThis VI converts an image to a LabView picture.
XXXXThis VI counts the number of blobs in an image.<LF><LF>Input must be a binary image.<LF><LF>The output image has each blobl labeled with a different number (up to 255), and the # of blobs is returned.
XXXXThis VI counts the number of blobs in an image.<LF><LF>Input must be a binary image.<LF><LF>The output image has each blobl labeled with a different<LF>number (up to 255), and the # of blobs is returned.
XXXXThis VI divides two images pixel by pixel or one <LF>image by a constant.  If Image 2 is unwired, <LF>the constant input is used to divide the image.<LF>(Does not work on a color image)
XXXXThis VI divides two images pixel by pixel or one image by a constant.  If <<B>>Image 2<</B>> is unwired, the <<B>>constant<</B>> input is used to divide the image. (Does not work on a color image)
XXXXThis VI does a Fourier Transform on the one second <LF>of sound grabbed.
XXXXThis VI does a Fourier Transform on the one second of sound grabbed.
XXXXThis VI draws a 1, 4 or 8 bit pixmap or a 24 bit RGB pixmap into a LabVIEW picture.  This VI takes a 1D array of bytes as input and assumes all packing and padding is done by the user.
XXXXThis VI extracts a subImage from the original image
XXXXThis VI extracts the nearest power of two subset of an image for faster processing using the FFT.  For example, a 320x240 image would be cropped to a 256x256 image (the image is cropped from the right and bottom).
XXXXThis VI fills tiny holes and smooths the inner  contour of particles with respect to the value of Connectivity.
XXXXThis VI fills tiny holes and smooths the inner contour of particles with respect to the value of <<B>>Connectivity<</B>>.
XXXXThis VI functions as a barcode reader, that decodes the alphanumeric characters encoded with the standard Codabar barcode. It returns the results as a string.<LF><LF>- 	Image is the reference of the image which contains the barcode.<LF><LF>- 	ROI Descriptor in is the descriptor of the area of interest drawn by the user. This area of interest must be rectangular and must cross the barcode. It is compatible with the type ROI Descriptor of IMAQä Vision for G. It can be returned by the VI IMAQ WindGetRoi.<LF><LF>- 	Check character (False) (default False) indicates if a check character is encoded in the barcode. (This standard has an optional check character.)<LF><LF>- 	error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>- 	Output string contains the read code.<LF><LF>- 	error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXThis VI functions as a barcode reader, that decodes the alphanumeric characters encoded with the standard Code 128 barcode. It returns the results as a string.<LF><LF>-  Image is the reference of the image which contains the barcode.<LF><LF>-  ROI Descriptor in is the descriptor of the area of interest drawn by the user. This area of interest must be rectangular and must cross the barcode. It is compatible with the type ROI Descriptor of IMAQä Vision for G. It can be returned by the VI IMAQ WindGetRoi.<LF><LF>-  error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>-  Output string contains the read code.<LF><LF>-  error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXThis VI functions as a barcode reader, that decodes the alphanumeric characters encoded with the standard Code 39 barcode. It returns the results as a string.<LF><LF>- 	Image is the reference of the image which contains the barcode.<LF><LF>- 	ROI Descriptor in is the descriptor of the area of interest drawn by the user. This area of interest must be rectangular and must cross the barcode. It is compatible with the type ROI Descriptor of IMAQä Vision for G. It can be returned by the VI IMAQ WindGetRoi.<LF><LF>- 	Check character (False) (default False) indicates if a check character is encoded in the barcode. (This standard has an optional check character.)<LF><LF>- 	error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>- 	Output string contains the read code.<LF><LF>- 	error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXThis VI functions as a barcode reader, that decodes the alphanumeric characters encoded with the standard Code 93 barcode. It returns the results as a string.<LF><LF>- 	Image is the reference of the image which contains the barcode.<LF><LF>- 	ROI Descriptor in is the descriptor of the area of interest drawn by the user. This area of interest must be rectangular and must cross the barcode. It is compatible with the type ROI Descriptor of IMAQä Vision for G. It can be returned by the VI IMAQ WindGetRoi.<LF><LF>- 	error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>- 	Output string contains the read code.<LF><LF>- 	error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXThis VI functions as a barcode reader, that decodes the numeric characters encoded with the EAN13 barcode. It returns the results as a string.<LF><LF>-	Image is the reference of the image which contains the barcode.<LF><LF>-	ROI Descriptor in is the descriptor of the area of interest drawn by the user. This area of interest must be rectangular and must cross the barcode. It is compatible with the type ROI Descriptor of IMAQä Vision for G. It can be returned by the VI IMAQ WindGetRoi.<LF><LF>-	First flag character (default 3) is the first character of the code. This user specified character determines the way the other characters are encoded.<LF><LF>-	error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>-	Output string contains the read code.<LF><LF>-	error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXThis VI functions as a barcode reader, that decodes the numeric characters encoded with the interleaved 2 of 5 standard barcode. It returns the results as a string.<LF><LF>-  Image is the reference of the image which contains the barcode.<LF><LF>- 	ROI Descriptor in is the descriptor of the area of interest drawn by the user. This area of interest must be rectangular and must cross the barcode. It is compatible with the type ROI Descriptor of IMAQä Vision for G. It can be returned by the VI IMAQ WindGetRoi.<LF><LF>- 	Check character (False) (default False) indicates if a check character is encoded in the barcode. (This standard has an optional check character.)<LF><LF>- 	error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>- 	Output string contains the read code.<LF><LF>- 	error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXThis VI functions as a barcode reader, that decodes the numeric characters encoded with the standard EAN 8 barcode. It returns the results as a string.<LF><LF>- 	Image is the reference of the image which contains the barcode.<LF><LF>- 	ROI Descriptor in is the descriptor of the area of interest drawn by the user. This area of interest must be rectangular and must cross the barcode. It is compatible with the type ROI Descriptor of IMAQä Vision for G. It can be returned by the VI IMAQ WindGetRoi.<LF><LF>- 	error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>- 	Output string contains the read code.<LF><LF>- 	error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXThis VI functions as a barcode reader, that decodes the numeric characters encoded with the standard MSI barcode. It returns the results as a string.<LF><LF>- 	Image is the reference of the image which contains the barcode.<LF><LF>- 	ROI Descriptor in is the descriptor of the area of interest drawn by the user. This area of interest must be rectangular and must cross the barcode. It is compatible with the type ROI Descriptor of IMAQä Vision for G. It can be returned by the VI IMAQ WindGetRoi.<LF><LF>- 	error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>- 	Output string contains the read code.<LF><LF>- 	error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXThis VI functions as a barcode reader, that decodes the numeric characters encoded with the standard UPC A barcode. It returns the results as a string.<LF><LF>- 	Image is the reference of the image which contains the barcode.<LF><LF>- 	ROI Descriptor in is the descriptor of the area of interest drawn by the user. This area of interest must be rectangular and must cross the barcode. It is compatible with the type ROI Descriptor of IMAQä Vision for G. It can be returned by the VI IMAQ WindGetRoi.<LF><LF>- 	error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>- 	Output string contains the read code.<LF><LF>- 	error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXThis VI generates color tables for all four planes - Red, Green, Blue and Greyscale, as well as a table of 256 random 24-bit colors. 
XXXXThis VI generates color tables for all four planes <LF>- Red, Green, Blue and Greyscale, as well as a table <LF>of 256 random 24-bit colors. 
XXXXThis VI gets the value of the pixel located at the specified <<B>>Position<</B>> and returns its value (either as an 8-bit number or an <<B>>RGB<</B>> cluster).
XXXXThis VI gets the value of the pixel located at the specified <LF>Position and returns its value (either as an 8-bit <LF>number or an RGB cluster).
XXXXThis VI grabs a single image from an initialized <LF>camera.  The image is taken in all planes creating an<LF>RGB image.
XXXXThis VI grabs a single image from an initialized <LF>camera.  The image is taken in the blue plane.
XXXXThis VI grabs a single image from an initialized <LF>camera.  The image is taken in the green plane.
XXXXThis VI grabs a single image from an initialized <LF>camera.  The image is taken in the greyscale<LF> plane.
XXXXThis VI grabs a single image from an initialized <LF>camera.  The image is taken in the red plane.
XXXXThis VI grabs a single image from an initialized camera.  The color of the image is specified by <<B>>Image Type<</B>> (default is greyscale).
XXXXThis VI grabs a single image from an initialized camera. <LF> The color of the image is specified by image type<LF> (default is greyscale).
XXXXThis VI initializes the camera at Internet Settting (320x240).
XXXXThis VI initializes the camera at its large setting (640x480)
XXXXThis VI initializes the camera at its large setting <LF>(320x240).
XXXXThis VI initializes the camera at its large setting <LF>(640x480)
XXXXThis VI initializes the camera at its small setting (160x120).
XXXXThis VI initializes the camera at its small setting <LF>(160x120).  
XXXXThis VI initializes the camera on the internet at its large setting <LF>(320x240).
XXXXThis VI initializes the microphone.
XXXXThis VI inverts the input image.  (Does not work on a color image)
XXXXThis VI inverts the input image.  <LF>(Does not work on a color image)
XXXXThis VI is reserved for internal use.
XXXXThis VI is similar to IMAQ WindZoom, but allows the user to zoom the image at different scales in X and Y. IMAQ WindXYZoom produces rectangular pixels in displaying the image.<LF><LF>Window number (0...15) is a number that specifies the image window. The default value is 0.<LF><LF>Zoom Factors X and Y is a cluster containing the zoom factors for X and Y scale.<LF><LF>Zoom Factor X ranges from –16 to +16.<LF><LF>Zoom Factor Y ranges from –16 to +16.<LF><LF>Center Point is a structure containing two elements that describe the (x, y) coordinates used to center the image in the image window. Using Center Point, you can center an image with respect to a user-chosen region. Additionally, you can use Center Point to place only a part of an image into an image window.<LF><LF>X is the horizontal coordinate of the center point.<LF><LF>Y is the vertical coordinate of the center point.<LF><LF>This value is adjusted automatically in cases in which the Center Point value is not coherent with the size of the image window and zoom factor. For example, an image at 256 × 256 displayed in an image window of 256 × 256 containing a zoom factor of (1, 1) by definition has a single Center Point of (127, 127). An erroneously entered value is corrected, which produces an output value that is different than the input value.<LF><LF>Get/Set Status? (Set) specifies whether the user wants to know the present status or modify the Zoom Factor and Center Point.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Zoom Factors X and Y returns the actual Zoom Factor in both the axis.<LF><LF>Zoom Factor X returns the horizontal Zoom Factor.<LF>Zoom Factor Y returns the vertical Zoom Factor.<LF><LF>Center Point returns the actual Center Point.<LF><LF>X is the horizontal coordinate.<LF><LF>Y is the vertical coordinate.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Note:	The interactive zoom tool produces the same results as a homogeneous X and Y zoom: it doubles (or reduces, by shift-clicking) the dimensions of the pixels in the image window by a factor of 2. For example, if you have a 5 × 3 zoom and you click with the zoom tool, you produce a 10 × 6 zoom. If you shift-click, you produce a 2 × 1 zoom. Zoom is bounded by the highest absolute value in X or Y: if you have a 10 × 2, you cannot zoom in because the double of 10 is greater than 16.
XXXXThis VI loads an image from a BMP file.
XXXXThis VI loads an image from a JPEG file.  It treats all images as color images (extract a plane if you only one greyscale).
XXXXThis VI loads an image from a JPEG file.<LF>It treats all images as color images (extract<LF>a plane if you only one greyscale).
XXXXThis VI mirrors the input image (vertical symmetry).  The image may be any <LF>type (binary, greyscale or RGB).
XXXXThis VI mirrors the input image (vertical symmetry).  The image may be any type (binary, greyscale or RGB).
XXXXThis VI multiplies two images pixel by pixel or one <LF>image by a constant.  If Image 2 is unwired, <LF>the constant input is used to multiply the image.	<LF>(Does not work on a color image)
XXXXThis VI multiplies two images pixel by pixel or one image by a constant.  If <<B>>Image 2<</B>> is unwired, the <<B>>constant<</B>> input is used to multiply the image. (Does not work on a color image)
XXXXThis VI performs a Hit-or-Miss morphological <LF>operation on the input image.  All pixel neighborhoods <LF>matching the given connectivity are kept.  All <LF>others are removed.  Input image must be binary.
XXXXThis VI performs a Hit-or-Miss morphological operation on the input image.  All pixel neighborhoods matching the given <<B>>connectivity<</B>> are kept.  All others are removed.  Input image must be binary.
XXXXThis VI performs a bitwise AND on two images. (Does not work on a color image)
XXXXThis VI performs a bitwise AND on two images.<LF>(Does not work on a color image)
XXXXThis VI performs a bitwise OR on two images. (Does not work on a color image)
XXXXThis VI performs a bitwise OR on two images.<LF>(Does not work on a color image)
XXXXThis VI performs a depth-first search on an image to <LF>determine the number of blobs and returns a parameter<LF>of  the blob.<LF><LF>Input must be a binary image.  <LF><LF>Connectivity defines the way in which blobs are <LF>searched.  4-connectivity will yield more small blobs, <LF>since diagonals are not considered connections.<LF>8-connectivity will yield fewer, larger blobs.  <LF><LF>Output is an image in which each blob is identified by <LF>a number.  All pixels corresponding to blob #1 are <LF>given the value 1, while all those corresponding to <LF>blob #2 are given the value 2 and so on.  Also, an array<LF>of blob sizes indicates the number of blobs<LF>found and each of their sizes.
XXXXThis VI performs a depth-first search on an image to determine the number of blobs.  <LF><LF>Input must be a binary image.  <LF><LF><<B>>Connectivity<</B>> defines the way in which blobs are searched.  4-connectivity will yield more small blobs, since diagonals are not considered connections.  8-connectivity will yield fewer, larger blobs.  <LF><LF>Output is an image in which each blob is identified by a number.  All pixels corresponding to blob #1 are given the value 1, while all those corresponding to blob #2 are given the value 2 and so on.  Also, an array of <<B>>blob sizes<</B>> indicates the number of blobs found and each of their sizes.
XXXXThis VI performs an erosion on the input image using <LF>the given connectivity.  This typically shrinks <LF>features in binary images.
XXXXThis VI performs an erosion on the input image using the given <<B>>connectivity<</B>>.  This typically shrinks features in binary images.
XXXXThis VI performs an external egde detection on the <LF>input image.  The result is an image containing only <LF>the external edges of the features in the original image.
XXXXThis VI performs an external egde detection on the input image.  The result is an image containing only the external edges of the features in the original image.
XXXXThis VI performs an internal egde detection on the <LF>input image.  The result is an image containing only <LF>the internal edges of the features in the original image.
XXXXThis VI performs an internal egde detection on the input image.  The result is an image containing only the internal edges of the features in the original image.
XXXXThis VI performs dilation on the input image using the <LF>given connectivity.  This typically enlarges <LF>features in binary images.
XXXXThis VI performs dilation on the input image using the given <<B>>connectivity<</B>>.  This typically enlarges features in binary images.
XXXXThis VI performs the selected Morphological operation <LF>using the given Connectivity.<LF><LF>The possible operations are:<LF><LF>Dilation<LF>Erosion<LF>Open<LF>Close<LF>External Edge Detection<LF>Internal Edge Detection<LF>Thin<LF>Thick<LF>Proper Open<LF>Proper Close<LF>Auto-Median<LF>Add<LF>Subtract<LF>Multiply<LF>Divide
XXXXThis VI performs the selected Morphological operation using the given <<B>>Connectivity<</B>>.<LF><LF>The possible operations are:<LF><LF>Dilation<LF>Erosion<LF>Open<LF>Close<LF>External Edge Detection<LF>Internal Edge Detection<LF>Thin<LF>Thick<LF>Proper Open<LF>Proper Close<LF>Auto-Median<LF>Add<LF>Subtract<LF>Multiply<LF>Divide
XXXXThis VI plays sound data
XXXXThis VI reads sound data from a .wav file
XXXXThis VI removes bright spots isolated in dark regions <LF>and smooths boundaries.
XXXXThis VI removes bright spots isolated in dark regions and smooths boundaries.
XXXXThis VI removes dark spots isolated in bright <LF>regions and smooths boundaries.
XXXXThis VI removes dark spots isolated in bright regions and smooths boundaries.<LF>
XXXXThis VI removes small particles and smooths the <LF>contour of particles with respect to the value of <LF>Connectivity.
XXXXThis VI removes small particles and smooths the contour of particles with respect to the value of <<B>>Connectivity<</B>>.
XXXXThis VI rotates the input image.  The image may be any  type (binary, greyscale or RGB).<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF>Angle (degrees) This is the amount to rotate (default is 45 degrees) 
XXXXThis VI rotates the input image.  The image may be any  type (binary, greyscale or RGB).<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF>Angle (degrees): This is the amount to rotate (default is 45 degrees) 
XXXXThis VI saves an image to a BMP file.
XXXXThis VI saves an image to a JPEG file.
XXXXThis VI saves sound data to a .wav file
XXXXThis VI shrinks an image to half its original size (1:2).
XXXXThis VI subtracts two images pixel by pixel or a <LF>constant from one image.  If Image 2 is unwired, <LF>the constant is subtracted from the image.<LF>(Does not work on a color image)
XXXXThis VI subtracts two images pixel by pixel or a constant from one image.  If <<B>>Image 2<</B>> is unwired, the <<B>>constant<</B>> is subtracted from the image. (Does not work on a color image)
XXXXThis VI thresholds an image based on the specified <<B>>Range<</B>>.  Pixels within this range are given the value 1, while pixels outside this range are given the value 0.  The output image is binary.
XXXXThis VI thresholds an image based on the specified <<B>>Range<</B>>.  Pixels within this range maintain their original value, while pixels outside this range are given the value 0.  The output image is greyscale.
XXXXThis VI thresholds an image based on the specified <LF>range.  Pixels within this range are given the <LF>value 1, while pixels outside this range are given the <LF>value 0.  The output image is binary.
XXXXThis VI thresholds an image based on the specified <LF>range.  Pixels within this range maintain their <LF>original value, while pixels outside this range are given <LF>the value 0.  The output image is greyscale.
XXXXThis VI uses dual combinations of openings and closings.  <LF>It generates simpler particles that have fewer details.
XXXXThis VI uses dual combinations of openings and closings.  It generates simpler particles that have fewer details.
XXXXThis VI will continually change the motor speed on a given channel based on an input array of numbers from -8 to 8 (0=stop).  The rate at which these speeds are changed is dictated by the scan rate.
XXXXThis VI will have the RCX measure a waveform of a specified length and sampling rate on a specified channel.  It returns a 1-D array of data points measured.
XXXXThis VI will pause action until the current lighting reaches this lighting.
XXXXThis VI will pause action until the current temperature reaches this temperature.
XXXXThis adds the Data Set defined by the X and Y numbers to an existing bin.<LF>The default bin is the red bin.
XXXXThis allows you to adjust the camera settings.
XXXXThis allows you to choose which tool you want to draw your mask.
XXXXThis allows you to lock or unlock RCX program slots 1 & 2.<LF><LF>The RCX can retain up to 5 programs in memory at once.<LF><LF>It may be useful to lock programs 1 & 2 on the RCX.  If they are locked, you can not download new programs into slots 1 & 2 and if you attempt to do so, the program will automatically be downloaded into slot 3 instead.
XXXXThis allows you to read the 8bit intensity on either image by moving the cursor around in either image.
XXXXThis allows you to view the data sets in any bin.  The default is for the red bin.  The plot attributes are the labels for the X and Y axis.
XXXXThis allows you to view the data sets in any bin.  The default is for the red bin.  The plot attributes<LF>are the labels for the X and Y axis.
XXXXThis area allows you to change between pages in your Presentation.
XXXXThis averages all the Data Sets in a bin together. <LF>It assumes that all lines have the same spacing in time.  If they<LF>are not, you will get an error, except if you have suppressed<LF>error codes by stringing a boolean true to 'Suppress Error Codes'.
XXXXThis button will resnap the second image.  Motion is detected by grabbing two images and looking at the change in pixel intensity from the first image to the second.  Snap will re-grab both images, resnap will only regrab the second image.
XXXXThis changes a selected note's length to 1 or will change the length of the  next note to be created to 1.
XXXXThis changes a selected note's length to 1/16 or will change the length of the  next note to be created to 1/16.
XXXXThis changes a selected note's length to 1/2 or will change the length of the  next note to be created to 1/2.
XXXXThis changes a selected note's length to 1/4 or will change the length of the  next note to be created to 1/4.
XXXXThis changes a selected note's length to 1/8 or will change the length of the  next note to be created to 1/8.
XXXXThis changes the length of the selected note inside the beat.  The three options are regular, slurred, and staccato.  
XXXXThis changes the shape of the mask to be applied to a circle.
XXXXThis changes the shape of the mask to be applied to a square.
XXXXThis changes the shape of the mask to be applied to a user defined polygon.
XXXXThis chooses the color bin
XXXXThis chooses the color bin.
XXXXThis chooses which part of the bin you want to plot on the X axis:  the X value, Y value, or point number of all data sets in the bin.
XXXXThis chooses which part of the bin you want to plot on the Y axis:  the X value, Y value, or point number of all data sets in the bin.
XXXXThis cluster allows the user to set up a trigger and a clock.  If left unwired it will default to no trigger and internal clock pulses (as defined by the sampling rate).
XXXXThis cluster contains all of the settings for the acquisition of a waveform.
XXXXThis cluster defines the settings needed to trigger the start of a data acquisition event.
XXXXThis command gives back the memory allotment within the RCX.
XXXXThis command is where the program will jump to <LF>when the Black Jump command is used.<LF><LF>Note: The Black Jump command is needed somewhere <LF>else in the same task.
XXXXThis command is where the program will jump to <LF>when the Green Jump command is used.<LF><LF>Note: The Green Jump command is needed somewhere<LF>else in the same task.
XXXXThis command is where the program will jump to <LF>when the Jumping command is used.<LF><LF>Note: The Jumping command is needed somewhere <LF>else in the same task.
XXXXThis command is where the program will jump to <LF>when the Jumping command is used.<LF><LF>Note: The Jumping command is needed somewhere <LF>else in the same task.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Jump Number: String in a single number from 1 to 20 <LF>to represent the jump number.  The same number must be <LF>used in the corresponding Jumping command.
XXXXThis command is where the program will jump to when <LF>the Blue Jump command is used.<LF><LF>Note: The Blue Jump command is needed somewhere <LF>else in the same task.
XXXXThis command is where the program will jump to when <LF>the Yellow Jump command is used.<LF><LF>Note: The Yellow Jump command is needed somewhere <LF>else in the same task.
XXXXThis command is where the program will jump to when another tasks of higher priority wants to control the outputs (motors, sounds, lights etc...).<LF><LF>
XXXXThis command is where the program will jump to when any event is triggered.  You have to use the Event Register Container to figure out which event was triggered if you have more than one event.<LF><LF>Note: Events must be set up and monitoring must be started before this command can be used.
XXXXThis command is where the program will jump to when the <LF>Red Jump command is used.<LF><LF>Note: The Red Jump command is needed somewhere else <LF>in the same task.
XXXXThis command is where the program will jump to when the Black Jump command is used.<LF><LF>Note: The Black Jump command is needed somewhere else in the same task.
XXXXThis command is where the program will jump to when the Blue Jump command is used.<LF><LF>Note: The Blue Jump command is needed somewhere else in the same task.
XXXXThis command is where the program will jump to when the Green Jump command is used.<LF><LF>Note: The Green Jump command is needed somewhere else in the same task.
XXXXThis command is where the program will jump to when the Jumping command is used.<LF><LF>Note: The Jumping command is needed somewhere else in the same task.
XXXXThis command is where the program will jump to when the Jumping command is used.<LF><LF>Note: The Jumping command is needed somewhere else in the same task.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Jump Number: String in a single number from 1 to 20 to represent the jump number.  The same number must be used in the corresponding Jumping command.
XXXXThis command is where the program will jump to when the Red Jump command is used.<LF><LF>Note: The Red Jump command is needed somewhere else in the same task.
XXXXThis command is where the program will jump to when the Yellow Jump command is used.<LF><LF>Note: The Yellow Jump command is needed somewhere else in the same task.
XXXXThis command is where the program will stop access control monitoring.<LF>
XXXXThis command is where the program will stop access control monitoring.<LF><LF>
XXXXThis command will poll the Control Lab for the value of any memory location (sensor value, container value, mail value, etc.).<LF>Outputs the value as a number.<LF><LF>The default is to poll the value of Port 1.
XXXXThis command will poll the RCX for the value of any memory location (sensor value, container value, mail value, etc.) and displays it to the user.<LF><LF>The default is to poll the value of Port 1.
XXXXThis command will poll the RCX for the value of any memory location (sensor value, contanier value, mail value, etc.). Outputs the value as a number.<LF><LF>The default is to poll the value of Port 1.
XXXXThis command will poll the RCX for the value of any memory location (sensor value, contanier value, mail value, etc.).<LF>Outputs the value as a number.<LF><LF>The default is to poll the value of Port 1.
XXXXThis completes the direct mode calls. It must be on the end of every direct mode string.
XXXXThis completes the direct mode calls.<LF>It must be on the end of every direct mode string.
XXXXThis container control allows you to specify more than just red, yellow and blue containers.  You will need to wire this into the Generic Container or Value of Generic Container modifier.<LF><LF>User 0-2 are the red, yellow, and blue containers.  <LF>User 23-29 are used in data logging.<LF>variables 33-47 are task specific variables and are used for loops and in Wait for Angle and Play System Sound.
XXXXThis contains the speeds for the motor - ranging from -8 to 8.  0 imples stopping the motor and negative values rotate the motor in the opposite direction of positive values.  Lights behave similarly (with no difference between positive and negative values).
XXXXThis control/indicator defines a sequence of execution.  In remote mode it includes the command list.  
XXXXThis control/indicator defines a sequence of execution.  In remote mode it includes the command list.  The ID number corresponds to the port used:<LF>0   Modem Port (COM1)<LF>1   Printer Port  (COM2)<LF>2   PBrick Direct Modem<LF>3   PBrick Direct Printer<LF>4   PBrick Remote Modem<LF>5   PBrick Remote Printer
XXXXThis controls the tempo at which the song is played.  This is displayed in Beats/min.
XXXXThis defines on which plane of the image your sensor will operate.  For instance if you want to look for a red LEGO brick, then look for large (bright) values in the red plane.  All planes vary from 0 (dark) to 255 (light).
XXXXThis defines the clock type:<LF>  Internal clock - the cluster is ignored<LF>  rising - the RCX will take a measurement when the clock sensor is greater than or equal to the value.  The RCX will then wait for the sensor to fall below the cutoff value before again waiting for the next clock pulse.<LF>  falling - the RCX will take a measurement when the clock sensor equals or falls below the value. The RCX will then wait for the sensor to rise above the cutoff value before again waiting for the next clock pulse.<LF>
XXXXThis defines the trigger type:<LF>  No trigger - the cluster is ignored<LF>  rising trigger - the sweep will start when the trigger sensor is greater than or equal to the value<LF>  falling trigger - the sweep will start when the trigger sensor equals or falls below the value.
XXXXThis defines which bin you want to use.
XXXXThis defines which pixels are affected with the morphology or particle analysis.
XXXXThis deletes the selected note
XXXXThis describes which sensor will act as the external clock source.
XXXXThis describes which sensor will act as the trigger.
XXXXThis differentiates every Data Set in the bin separately and returns a plot of the differentiated Data Sets.
XXXXThis displays a histogram of the different pixel values of light in the image that is displayed.  Pixel values in between the two lines are kept, while pixel values outside of the two lines are discarded.
XXXXThis displays the current date and time.
XXXXThis displays the current step in the program.
XXXXThis displays the date and  time.
XXXXThis displays the different blobs with the measurement associated with each blob.
XXXXThis displays the image with the applied image operations.
XXXXThis displays the musical term that corrisponds to the selected tempo.  The tempo can not be changed here.
XXXXThis displays the path to the ROBOLAB program files on your hard drive.
XXXXThis displays the path to your ROBOLAB program files.
XXXXThis displays the total number of notes in the song, or the number of the current note while the song is being played by the computer
XXXXThis displays the unaltered image.
XXXXThis displays what the camera sees.  Click on the ""OK"" button to keep the image.
XXXXThis displays whether the indicated program is open and running or not.
XXXXThis extracts the measured values in a Data Set when the Data Set value is between two values. For instance you can use this to measure the time the temperature in a room is between two temperatures.  You can extract the data from the same data set or another one - for instance, you can extract the light values for when the temperature falls within a given range.<LF><LF>The default Cutoffs are 0 and 100.
XXXXThis filters out the given values of blobs depending on the type of blob math that is selected.  Only blobs between Min and Max will be kept.   If Max<<= Min then the filter is ignored.  If Max = -1 then just the maximum blob is kept.
XXXXThis finds the time that the measured value in a Data Set exceeds a given threshold value. For instance you can use this to measure the time the temperature in a room exceeds a given number.<LF><LF>The default Cutoff value is 0.
XXXXThis finds the time that the measured value in a Data Set is below a given threshold value. For instance you can use this to measure the time the temperature in a room is below a given number.<LF><LF>The default Cutoff value is 0.
XXXXThis functions works on 8bit, 16bit, float and RGB images.<LF><LF>Redraws an image in a user-defined size. This VI is useful for displaying a reduced or enlarged image (for example, a zoom-in or zoom-out image).<LF>  	<LF>Interpolation Type specifies the type of interpolation (zero-order or bilinear) used to resample the image.<LF>	<LF>Optional Rectangle defines an array (four elements) containing the coordinates (Left / Top / Right / Bottom) of the region to redraw. The operation is applied to the entire image if the input is empty or not connected. <LF><LF>Image Src is the reference to the source (input) image.<LF><LF>Image Dst is the reference to the destination image. If it is connected, it must be the same type as the Image Src.<LF><LF>X Resolution gives the final horizontal size of the image.<LF><LF>Y Resolution gives the final vertical size of the image.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Dst Out is the reference to the destination (output) image which receives the processing results of the VI. If the Image Dst is connected, the Image Dst Out is the same as Image Dst. Otherwise, Image Dst Out refers to the image referenced by Image Src.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXThis indicate the version number of the firmware on the RCX.  It may be useful for updating your RCX in the future.
XXXXThis indicates the current firmware version of the RCX.  If this window says No RCX then communication with the RCX through the IR transmitter was unsuccessful.
XXXXThis indicates the life of the batteries in your RCX.  If this value gets low, the outputs will run slowly and your RCX may not communicate with the IR Transimitter properly.
XXXXThis initializes the microphone.
XXXXThis input holds the data to be processed. The data can be either a single array or consecutive blocks of data, the latter being useful for large data arrays or for realtime processing. Note that in realtime processing, peaks/valleys are not detected until about width/2 data points past the peak/valley.
XXXXThis inserts a rest into the song.  The length of the rest can be changed the same as the notes
XXXXThis integrates every Data Set in the bin separately and returns a plot of the integrated Data Sets.
XXXXThis integrates every Data Set in the bin separately and returns a plot of the integrated Data Sets.  The integrals (trapizoidal method) show the integral from time t0 to the arbitary time t (your X axis).
XXXXThis is a list of VI's which will be allowed to be accessed from another machine.  
XXXXThis is a list of machines that are allowed access.  Your own machine is automatically included.  A * allows all machines to have access.
XXXXThis is a list of the commands that are sent to the RCX.
XXXXThis is a list of the current themes in your  Vault.  To add a theme, type a name in the field below and click on Add Theme.  To delete a theme, highlight it and click on Delete Theme.
XXXXThis is a simple example of a server which exports VIs to be called from another machine.  You may run both the client.llb and server.llb on the same machine without modifying the access list.  If you wish to run the client on another machine that is not in your domain you will have to list the name of the client in the Machine Access List. <LF><LF>The VIs listed in the Exported VI list are exported by the server.<LF><LF>To run this example start this VI First, then start the client.llb on all machines you want to try as clients. If you change either of the above lists, you must restart this VI for the changes to take effect.<LF><LF>Click the ""Stop"" button to quit.  This will turn off the server, terminating all client connections, and  restore the previous access lists to their original values.  
XXXXThis is an Inventor SubVI (or collapsed area).  <LF>You can see the collapsed code by selecting Show Diagram <LF>  from the Windows menu.<LF>You can edit the icon by double clicking on it in this window.
XXXXThis is one run of measurements.  The light sensor had a reading of 41 when nobody was coming in or going out of the room.  The light reading got lower when somebody walked into or out of the room.
XXXXThis is the X axis of the current plotted bin.
XXXXThis is the Y-axis of the current plotted bin.
XXXXThis is the beginning of the program.
XXXXThis is the container number.
XXXXThis is the current image being seen by the camera.  It's appearance can be changed using the Plane button.
XXXXThis is the end of the program.
XXXXThis is the list of ports to turn on/off
XXXXThis is the mask display.  I allows you to draw a mask on your image.
XXXXThis is the maximum allowable blob.
XXXXThis is the minimum allowable blob.
XXXXThis is the number of samples the RCX acquires before the acquisition is complete.   This number must be less than 2000.  The more complex your code, the lower this number.<LF>
XXXXThis is the path to where your ROBOLAB program is.
XXXXThis is the power to the motors (0-8).
XXXXThis is the resulting array of data sets taken.
XXXXThis is the resulting array of data taken.
XXXXThis is the sensor for the first data set.
XXXXThis is the size of the current region of interest (ROI).
XXXXThis is the title of your Invent and Investigate Project.
XXXXThis is the type of LEGO sensor attached to the channel.  One for each channel.  The possible IDs are:<LF><LF>0 .. clicks (# of times the touch sensor is hit)<LF>1 .. light<LF>2 .. Temperature (Celsius)<LF>3 .. Temperature (Fahrenheit)<LF>4 .. Angle (degrees)<LF>5 .. Rotation (1/16 of a rotation)<LF>6 .. None<LF>7 .. touch sensor (returns a 0 or 1)<LF>8 .. Touch and Release (like sensor 0 only counts every touch and release rather than every touch)<LF>-2 .. 100 msec timer (specify which timer with the channel)<LF>-5 .. 10 msec timer<LF><LF>DCP Sensors<LF>101 .. Generic (unpowered 5v max)<LF>200 .. Temperature<LF>201 .. Humidity<LF>202 .. SPL<LF>204 .. Ph<LF>205 .. Pressure<LF>206 .. Position<LF>212 .. HiVolt
XXXXThis is the type of LEGO sensor attached to the channel>>  The possible IDs are:<LF><LF>0 .. clicks (# of times the touch sensor is hit)<LF>1 .. light<LF>2 .. Temperature (Celsius)<LF>3 .. Temperature (Fahrenheit)<LF>4 .. Angle (degrees)<LF>5 .. Rotation (1/16 of a rotation)<LF>6 .. None<LF>7 .. touch sensor (returns a 0 or 1)<LF>8 .. Touch and Release (like sensor 0 only counts every touch and release rather than every touch)<LF>-2 .. 100 msec timer (specify which timer with the channel)<LF>-5 .. 10 msec timer<LF><LF>DCP Sensors<LF>101 .. Generic (unpowered 5v max)<LF>200 .. Temperature<LF>201 .. Humidity<LF>202 .. SPL<LF>204 .. Ph<LF>205 .. Pressure<LF>206 .. Position<LF>212 .. HiVolt
XXXXThis is the type of sensor for this data set.
XXXXThis is the type of sensor used as a clock.
XXXXThis is the type of sensor used as a trigger.
XXXXThis is the value currently being given from the selected sensor.
XXXXThis is the value of the above statistic
XXXXThis is the value of the statistic chosen to the left.
XXXXThis is the window where the notes of the song are displayed.  You can view different parts of the Scroll by using the Scroll Up or Scroll Down buttons on either side of the Scroll.<LF><LF>
XXXXThis lets you choose your line type (numbers, points, line points and line, or bar graph).
XXXXThis lets you choose your line type (points and lines, lines, points, bar graph, or numbers).
XXXXThis lets you confirm that you want to print.
XXXXThis lets you stop waiting for the RCX.
XXXXThis lets you use robolab with other LEGO hardware.
XXXXThis lists all of the operations you want to use to process your image.  A few of the operations can only be used once.  These commands are then saveed as a program that can be run either in Vision Center or in Inventor 4.  Double-clicking on a page disables the page from the processing (this is in Define Sensor ONLY - Vision Center will run all commands).
XXXXThis plays the current song through the computer.  Tempos might be played differently then the actual tempo
XXXXThis provides a visual display of the current RCX battery level.
XXXXThis reads the Data Set from a spreadsheet file.
XXXXThis returns a histogram for each Data Set.<LF><LF>Modifier: <LF>Bins:This is the desired number of bins in the histogram.<LF>The default number of bins is 10.
XXXXThis routine will add the musical notes currently in a file into your inventor program.  If you do not specify a path, you will get a dialog box when you run your program.
XXXXThis routine will add the musical notes currently on the blue scroll into your inventor program.  You can define the scroll by recording a sequence of notes on the Piano Player and then pressing the blue scroll button.    The default song is ""Row, Row, Row Your Boat.""
XXXXThis routine will add the musical notes currently on the blue scroll into your inventor program.  You can define the scroll by recording a sequence of notes on the Piano Player and then pressing the blue scroll button.  The default song is ""Row, Row, Row Your Boat.""
XXXXThis routine will add the musical notes currently on the red scroll into your inventor program.  You can define the scroll by recording a sequence of notes on the Piano Player and then pressing the red scroll button.  The default song is ""Frere Jaques.""
XXXXThis routine will add the musical notes currently on the saved scroll into your inventor program.  You can define the scroll by recording a sequence of notes on the Piano Player (available in your Project menu after you have installed Extras) and then pressing the save scroll button.
XXXXThis routine will add the musical notes currently on the yellow scroll into your inventor program.  You can define the scroll by recording a sequence of notes on the Piano Player and then pressing the yellow scroll button.  The default song is ""Twinkle Little Star.""
XXXXThis saves the Data Set to a spreadsheet file.
XXXXThis selects the RCX as the device which plays the notes
XXXXThis selects the computer as the device which plays the notes
XXXXThis selects the correct octave
XXXXThis selects which color plane to view the image in.  Selecting a container will allow you to view the manipulated image for that sensor.
XXXXThis sets the clock on the RCX.  If you do not specify hours, it will set the clock to the current time on your computer.  The clock's time will appear on the LCD display of the RCX.
XXXXThis sets the clock on the RCX. If you do not specify <LF>hours, it will set the clock to the current time on your <LF>computer.  The clock's time will appear on the LCD <LF>display of the RCX.
XXXXThis sets the motor direction randomly.  It does not turn the motor on.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Ports:  Choose which motors to turn randomly by stringing together any combination of output port modifiers A, B and C.
XXXXThis sets the motor direction randomly.  It does<LF>not turn the motor on.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Ports:  Choose which motors to turn randomly by stringing <LF>together any combination of output port modifiers A, B<LF>and C.
XXXXThis sets the priority of any task. <LF><LF>Note: 0 is the highest priority.<LF><LF>Modifiers<LF><LF>Priority: String in the priority you wish to assign to the task. <LF>0 is the highest priority.   <LF><LF>Note: This can ONLY be  a number from 0 - 255.  You cannot use container values and other modifiers.
XXXXThis shows a plot of the data acquired
XXXXThis shows a plot of the motor speeds sent out.
XXXXThis shows all computed lines.  You can select only a subset of the data points by zooming on on the plot.  Only the visible data points will be entered into the choosen bin.
XXXXThis shows all visible lines
XXXXThis shows all visible lines.  For increased accuracy in sensor readings, go to the robolab website: http://www.lego.com/dacta/robolab.
XXXXThis shows how fast Vision Center is working.  The number is the number of frames a second computed per second.  This number can be increased by disabling virtual memory, minimizing the number of tasks in your sensor, and by closing the image.  10-15 Hz is very fast (hardly any computation and no RCX communication), 5 Hz is a good rate when talking to the RCX, and slower than 1 Hz means your sensor is too complicated.
XXXXThis shows that the computer is waiting for the RCX to come into view.
XXXXThis shows the current status of the web page build.
XXXXThis shows the current threshold values.
XXXXThis shows the download process
XXXXThis shows the errors in communication
XXXXThis shows the image used by the operation.  For instance, if you selected subtract, then this sensor would  subtract this image from whatever the camera sees.
XXXXThis shows the percent of the download process completed.
XXXXThis shows the percent of the upload process completed.
XXXXThis shows the upload process.
XXXXThis shows which task (or subroutine) is being downloaded.
XXXXThis shows you the status of your printing operation.
XXXXThis simply sets the motor direction to go forward.  It does not turn the motor on.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Ports:  Choose which motors to reverse by stringing together any combination of output port modifiers A, B and C.
XXXXThis simply sets the motor direction to go forward.  It does<LF>not turn the motor on.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Ports:  Choose which motors to go forward by stringing <LF>together any combination of output port modifiers A, B<LF>and C.
XXXXThis simply sets the motor direction to reverse.  It does not turn the motor on.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Ports:  Choose which motors to reverse by stringing together any combination of output port modifiers A, B and C.
XXXXThis simply sets the motor direction to reverse.  It does<LF>not turn the motor on.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Ports:  Choose which motors to reverse by stringing <LF>together any combination of output port modifiers A, B<LF>and C.
XXXXThis specifies the camera port you want to use.  Click here to change it.
XXXXThis specifies the serial port to which the IR Transmitter is connected.  Click here to change it.<LF><LF>If you choose AUTODETECT, ROBOLAB will automatically check to see which port the IR transmitter is connected to when downloading a program.
XXXXThis toggles whether or not the notes being played are kept on the scroll.
XXXXThis will abort the download process.
XXXXThis will abort the upload process.
XXXXThis will fit a curve to the desired Data Set.<LF>The default order for the curve is second order.
XXXXThis will fit a line of the form y=a ln(x) + b to the desired Data Set.
XXXXThis will fit a line to the desired Data Set.
XXXXThis will fit a spline to the desired Data Set.
XXXXThis will fit an exponential curve to the desired Data Set.
XXXXThis will fit y=AlnX + B line to the desired Data Set.
XXXXThis will stop the loading of the current Project.
XXXXThis will tell Vision Control to snap an image and save it in the Image Folder - It will wait until the image is snapped before continuing.<LF><LF>Note: Camera sensors read a value between 0 and 255... watch the Vision Center Panel to see what value you are reading.<LF><LF>Modifiers: none
XXXXThis will tell Vision Control to snap an image and save it in the Image Folder. <LF>(This will only work with Vision Control open).<LF><LF>Modifiers: none<LF><LF>
XXXXThis will tell Vision Control to snap an image and save it in the Image Folder.<LF><LF>Note: Camera sensors read a value between 0 and 255... watch the Vision Center Panel to see what value you are reading.<LF><LF>Modifiers: none
XXXXThis will tell Vision Control to snap an image and save it in the Image Folder<LF><FONT predef=DLGFONT> - It will wait until the image is snapped before continuing<FONT predef=APPFONT>. <LF>(This will only work with Vision Control open).<LF><LF>Modifiers: none<LF><LF>
XXXXThreshold
XXXXThreshold 0,64,71
XXXXThreshold Binary
XXXXThreshold Data
XXXXThreshold Greyscale
XXXXThreshold Level
XXXXThreshold Parameters
XXXXThreshold Value
XXXXTime
XXXXTime (1 - 32767)
XXXXTime (1-32767)
XXXXTime (min)
XXXXTime (sec)
XXXXTime above threshold
XXXXTime below threshold
XXXXTime between samples
XXXXTime between samples (10msec)
XXXXTime to Hit (sec)
XXXXTimer
XXXXTimer (10ms) (0-3)
XXXXTimer 0 on limit
XXXXTimer 1 on limit
XXXXTimer 2 on limit
XXXXTimer Equal Fork
XXXXTimer Fork
XXXXTimer Modifier<LF><LF>String this to a timer command to select the <LF>Blue Timer.
XXXXTimer Modifier<LF><LF>String this to a timer command to select the <LF>Red Timer.
XXXXTimer Modifier<LF><LF>String this to a timer command to select the <LF>Yellow Timer.
XXXXTimer Modifier<LF><LF>String this to a timer command to select the Blue Timer.
XXXXTimer Modifier<LF><LF>String this to a timer command to select the Red Timer.
XXXXTimer Modifier<LF><LF>String this to a timer command to select the Yellow Timer.
XXXXTimer Threshold
XXXXTimer Value
XXXXTimer Value Container
XXXXTitle
XXXXTitle Page
XXXXTolerance
XXXXToo much vectors?
XXXXTool
XXXXTool (Point)
XXXXTools
XXXXTools 1
XXXXTools 2
XXXXTools 3
XXXXTools 4
XXXXTools 5
XXXXTools Type
XXXXTop
XXXXTotal Buffer Size
XXXXTotal Path
XXXXTotal Path copy
XXXXTouch & Release
XXXXTouch 1 pressed
XXXXTouch 1 releaed
XXXXTouch 2 pressed
XXXXTouch 2 released
XXXXTouch Container
XXXXTouch Sampling
XXXXTouch Sensor Fork
XXXXTouch and Release Container
XXXXTouch and Release Equal Fork
XXXXTouch and Release Fork
XXXXTower
XXXXTrack
XXXXTrans. Counter
XXXXTransfer Max Size
XXXXTransforms a region of interest into a mask.<LF><LF>Image Model serves as a template for the destination image where the mask is placed. Image takes the characteristics of Image Model (size and location of ROI) when Image Model is connected. However, the connection of Image Model is optional. This can be any image type supported by IMAQ Vision.<LF><LF>Image is the destination image where the mask is copied. This image must be an 8-bit image type.<LF><LF>ROI Descriptor is the descriptor that defines the region of interest.<LF><LF>Filling Value (255) is the pixel value of the mask. All pixels inside of the region of interest take this value. The default value is 255.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Out is the reference to the destination (output) image.<LF><LF>Coordinates out of space? returns TRUE if any ROI data is found outside the space associated with the image.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXTransforms an image mask into a region of interest.<LF><LF>External edges only (T) specifies whether only the external edges are transformed. The default is TRUE.<LF><LF>Image is the image containing the image mask that is transformed into a region of interest. This image must be an 8-bit image.<LF><LF>Max number of vectors in ROI is the limit of points that define the contour of a region of interest. This value is 2500 by default but can be increased if necessary. <LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>ROI Descriptor returns the descriptor for a region of interest.<LF><LF>Too many vectors? returns TRUE if the number of vectors needed to represent the ROI exceeds the value specified by Max number of vectors in ROI.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXTransforms an image through its symmetry.<LF>    	<LF>Type of Symmetry specifies the symmetry used. The default is 0.<LF><LF>   0	Horizontal	(Default) Based on the horizontal axis of the image<LF>   1	Vertical	Based on the vertical axis of the image<LF>   2	Central	Based on the center of the image<LF>   3	1st Diagonal	Based on the first diagonal of the image<LF>    (the image must be squared)<LF>   4	2nd Diagonal	Based on the second diagonal of the image <LF>     (the image must be squared)<LF><LF>Image Src is the reference to the source (input) image.<LF>	<LF>Image Dst is the reference of the image destination. If it is connected, it must be the same type as the Image Src.<LF>	<LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Dst Out is the reference to the destination (output) image which receives the processing results of the VI. If the Image Dst is connected, then Image Dst Out is the same as Image Dst. Otherwise, Image Dst Out refers to the image referenced by Image Src.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXTransition
XXXXTranslates an image based on a horizontal and vertical offset.<LF>      	<LF>Replace Value defines the filling value created by the shift. The default is 0.<LF>	<LF>Image Src is the reference to the source (input) image.<LF>	<LF>Image Dst is the reference of the image destination. If it is connected, it must be the same type as the Image Src.<LF>	<LF>XOffset is the horizontal offset added to the image. The default is 0.<LF><LF>YOffset is the vertical offset added to an image. The default is 0.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF>	<LF>Image Dst Out is the reference to the destination (output) image which receives the processing results of the VI. If the Image Dst is connected, then Image Dst Out is the same as Image Dst. Otherwise, Image Dst Out refers to the image referenced by Image Src.<LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.
XXXXTransmission Error
XXXXTransposes the complex components of an FFT image of a complex image. The high and low frequency components of an FFT image are inverted to produce a central symmetric representation of the spatial frequencies.<LF>  <LF>Image Src is the handle of the source image for the image to be transposed. This input can accept only a complex image. <LF>	<LF>Image Dst is the handle of the complex image that contains the resulting FFT image. This input can accept only a complex image. <LF>	<LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Dst Out is the reference to the destination (output) image which receives the processing results of the VI. If the Image Dst is connected, then Image Dst Out is the same as Image Dst. Otherwise, Image Dst Out refers to the image referenced by Image Src.<LF>	<LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>
XXXXTrig/Clock
XXXXTrigger
XXXXTrue
XXXXTruncates the frequencies of a complex image.<LF>  <LF>Low pass/High pass (Low pass) determines which frequencies are truncated. Choose low pass (F) to remove the high frequencies or high pass (T) to remove the low frequencies. The default is FALSE, which specifies low pass.<LF>	<LF>Image Src is the image reference source. It must be an 8-bit or RGB image.<LF>	<LF>Image Dst is the reference of the image destination. If it is connected, it must be the same type as the Image Src.<LF><LF>Truncation Frequency % is the percentage of the frequencies that are retained within a Fourier-transformed image. This percentage is expressed with respect to the length of the diagonal of the FFT image and the Boolean Low pass/High pass (Low pass). The default value is 10.<LF>	<LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Image Dst Out is the reference to the destination (output) image which receives the processing results of the VI. If the Image Dst is connected, then Image Dst Out is the same as Image Dst. Otherwise, Image Dst Out refers to the image referenced by Image Src.<LF>	<LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>For example, the defaults Low pass (F) and 10 result in retaining 10 percent of the frequencies starting from the center (low frequencies). The selection of High pass and 10 results in retaining 10 percent of the frequencies starting from the outer periphery.
XXXXTruncation Frequency %
XXXXTry Again
XXXXTry again
XXXXTry to get access to a resource through the <LF>glaobal variable GlobalVar1.<LF>All local variables are preserved by the sub.
XXXXTry to get access to a resource through the <LF>global variable Sema0.<LF>All local variables are preserved by the sub.
XXXXTry to get access to a resource through the gloabal<LF>variable GlobalVar2.<LF>All local variables are preserved by the sub.
XXXXTry to get access to a resource through the global variable GlobalVar1.<LF>All local variables are preserved by the sub.
XXXXTry to get access to a resource through the global variable GlobalVar2.<LF><LF>All local variables are preserved by the sub.
XXXXTry to get access to a resource through the global variable Sema0.<LF><LF>All local variables are preserved by the sub.
XXXXTufts University
XXXXTufts University College of Engineering
XXXXTurn Outputs On
XXXXTurn RCX Power Off
XXXXTurn on lamps.<LF>The default is to turn on all ports at power level 5.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Ports:  Choose which lamps to turn on by stringing together <LF>any combination of output port modifiers A, B and C.<LF><LF>Power Level:  String a single modifier to choose the power <LF>level for the lamps.
XXXXTurn on lamps.<LF>The default is to turn on all ports at power level 5.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Ports:  Choose which lamps to turn on by stringing together any combination of output port modifiers A, B and C.<LF><LF>Power Level:  String a single modifier to choose the power level for the lamps.
XXXXTurn on motors in a random direction.<LF>The default is to turn on all ports at power level 5.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Ports:  Choose which motors to turn on by stringing <LF>together any combination of output port modifiers A, B<LF>and C.<LF><LF>Power Level:  String a single modifier to choose the <LF>power level for the motors.
XXXXTurn on motors in a random direction.<LF>The default is to turn on all ports at power level 5.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Ports:  Choose which motors to turn on by stringing together any combination of output port modifiers A, B and C.<LF><LF>Power Level:  String a single modifier to choose the power level for the motors.
XXXXTurn on motors in the forward direction.  <LF>The default is to turn on all ports at power level 5.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Ports:  Choose which motors to turn on by stringing together any combination of output port modifiers A, B and C.<LF><LF>Power Level:  String a single modifier to choose the power level for the motors.
XXXXTurn on motors in the forward direction.<LF>The default is to turn on all ports at power level 5.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Ports:  Choose which motors to turn on by stringing <LF>together any combination of output port modifiers A, B <LF>and C.<LF><LF>Power Level:  String a single modifier to choose the <LF>power level for the motors.
XXXXTurn on motors in the reverse direction.<LF>The default is to turn on all ports at power level 5.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Ports:  Choose which motors to turn on by stringing <LF>together any combination of output port modifiers A, B<LF>and C.<LF><LF>Power Level:  String a single modifier to choose the <LF>power level for the motors.
XXXXTurn on motors in the reverse direction.<LF>The default is to turn on all ports at power level 5.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Ports:  Choose which motors to turn on by stringing together any combination of output port modifiers A, B and C.<LF><LF>Power Level:  String a single modifier to choose the power level for the motors.
XXXXTurn on the lamp connected to port A <LF>at full power.
XXXXTurn on the lamp connected to port A at full power.
XXXXTurn on the lamp connected to port A.<LF>The default is at full power.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Power Level:  String a single modifier to <LF>choose the power level for the lamp.
XXXXTurn on the lamp connected to port A.<LF>The default is at full power.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Power Level:  String a single modifier to choose the power level for the lamp.
XXXXTurn on the lamp connected to port B <LF>at full power.
XXXXTurn on the lamp connected to port B at full power.
XXXXTurn on the lamp connected to port B.<LF>The default is at full power.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Power Level:  String a single modifier to <LF>choose the power level for the lamp.
XXXXTurn on the lamp connected to port B.<LF>The default is at full power.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Power Level:  String a single modifier to choose the power level for the lamp.
XXXXTurn on the lamp connected to port C <LF>at full power.
XXXXTurn on the lamp connected to port C at full power.
XXXXTurn on the lamp connected to port C.<LF>The default is at full power.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Power Level:  String a single modifier to <LF>choose the power level for the lamp.
XXXXTurn on the lamp connected to port C.<LF>The default is at full power.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Power Level:  String a single modifier to choose the power level for the lamp.
XXXXTurn on the motor connected <LF>to port A at full power in the <LF>forward direction.
XXXXTurn on the motor connected to <LF>port A at full power in the reverse <LF>direction.
XXXXTurn on the motor connected to <LF>port B at full power in the forward <LF>direction.
XXXXTurn on the motor connected to <LF>port B at full power in the reverse <LF>direction.
XXXXTurn on the motor connected to <LF>port C at full power in the forward <LF>direction.
XXXXTurn on the motor connected to <LF>port C at full power in the reverse <LF>direction.
XXXXTurn on the motor connected to port A <LF>in the forward direction.  <LF>The default is at full power.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Power Level:  String a single modifier to <LF>choose the power level for the motor.
XXXXTurn on the motor connected to port A at full power in the forward direction.
XXXXTurn on the motor connected to port A at full power in the reverse direction.
XXXXTurn on the motor connected to port A in the forward direction.  The default is at full power.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Power Level:  String a single modifier to choose the power level for the motor.
XXXXTurn on the motor connected to port A in the reverse direction.  The default is at full power.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Power Level:  String a single modifier to choose the power level for the motor.
XXXXTurn on the motor connected to port A<LF>in the reverse direction.  The default is at <LF>full power.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Power Level:  String a single modifier to <LF>choose the power level for the motor.
XXXXTurn on the motor connected to port B <LF>in the forward direction.  The default is at <LF>full power.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Power Level:  String a single modifier to <LF>choose the power level for the motor.
XXXXTurn on the motor connected to port B at full power in the forward direction.
XXXXTurn on the motor connected to port B at full power in the reverse direction.
XXXXTurn on the motor connected to port B in the forward direction.  The default is at full power.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Power Level:  String a single modifier to choose the power level for the motor.
XXXXTurn on the motor connected to port B in the reverse direction.  The default is at full power.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Power Level:  String a single modifier to choose the power level for the motor.
XXXXTurn on the motor connected to port B<LF>in the reverse direction.  The default is at <LF>full power.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Power Level:  String a single modifier to <LF>choose the power level for the motor.
XXXXTurn on the motor connected to port C at full power in the forward direction.
XXXXTurn on the motor connected to port C at full power in the reverse direction.
XXXXTurn on the motor connected to port C in the forward direction.  The default is at full power.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Power Level:  String a single modifier to choose the power level for the motor.
XXXXTurn on the motor connected to port C in the reverse direction.  The default is at full power.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Power Level:  String a single modifier to choose the power level for the motor.
XXXXTurn on the motor connected to port C<LF>in the forward direction.  The default is at <LF>full power.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Power Level:  String a single modifier to <LF>choose the power level for the motor.
XXXXTurn on the motor connected to port C<LF>in the reverse direction.  The default is at <LF>full power.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Power Level:  String a single modifier to <LF>choose the power level for the motor.
XXXXTurn the RCX Off.<LF>This is the equivalent of pushing red On-Off button on the RCX.
XXXXTurn the RCX Off.<LF>This is the equivalent of pushing the red On-Off button on the RCX.
XXXXTurns the VLL output (the red LED) on or<LF>off for decorative purposes.<LF><LF>Legal range for 'onoff': 0-1 (Boolean)
XXXXTurns the VLL output (the red LED) on or<LF>off for decorative purposes.<LF><LF>Legal range for onof: 0-1 (Boolean)<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>On/Off:  String a single modifier.<LF>
XXXXType
XXXXType in an amount of time to wait for.<LF><LF>If you want to wait for a random amount of time, make sure you have selected the dice in the space to the left of this number and enter a maximum random number in this space.
XXXXType in here the name of your bin.
XXXXType in the number to compare to the value of the sensor.
XXXXType infomation about this page of your Project below.
XXXXType of Symmetry
XXXXType of log
XXXXType the name of a theme you want to delete in the field above or highlight it in the list and then click this button to delete it.
XXXXType the number to compare to the value of the sensor.
XXXXU32 value
XXXXUART Setup (0-17)
XXXXUNLOCKED
XXXXUNTITLED
XXXXUnaltered image
XXXXUnderline?
XXXXUndo
XXXXUndo the mask that was applied.
XXXXUnique ID
XXXXUnit
XXXXUnits
XXXXUnits read by the sensor.
XXXXUnmute Sound
XXXXUnused0
XXXXUnused1
XXXXUnused2
XXXXUp 2
XXXXUp an Octave
XXXXUpdate Rectangle
XXXXUpload
XXXXUpload Area
XXXXUpload Data
XXXXUpload Data from the RCX.
XXXXUpload Page
XXXXUpload Tools
XXXXUploaded Data
XXXXUploaded Data 2
XXXXUpper Cutoff
XXXXUpper Threshold
XXXXUpper Threshold (0-15)
XXXXUpper Value
XXXXUpper value
XXXXUse Camera Sensor
XXXXUse Min Max
XXXXUse TIFF Options
XXXXUse Vertex (No)  
XXXXUse this area to define which project pages you want to print.
XXXXUse this field to select the name of a theme you want to create or delete.  You can type a name in this field or click on an exisitng theme from the list above.
XXXXUse this input to reject peaks/valleys that are too small. For peaks, any peak found with a fitted amplitude that is less than threshold is ignored. Valleys are ignored if the fitted trough is greater than threshold.
XXXXUser Click
XXXXUser Mechanical Actions
XXXXUser Number
XXXXUser Project VIs *
XXXXUser Rectangles
XXXXUser Source
XXXXUser State
XXXXUser pen active
XXXXUser pen active ? (no)
XXXXUser10
XXXXUser11
XXXXUser12
XXXXUser13
XXXXUser14
XXXXUser15
XXXXUser16
XXXXUser17
XXXXUser18
XXXXUser19
XXXXUser20
XXXXUser21
XXXXUser22
XXXXUser23
XXXXUser24
XXXXUser25
XXXXUser26
XXXXUser27
XXXXUser28
XXXXUser29
XXXXUser3
XXXXUser30
XXXXUser31
XXXXUser4
XXXXUser5
XXXXUser6
XXXXUser7
XXXXUser8
XXXXUser9
XXXXUses ambient light levels for setting up the <LF>light sensor trigger levels.  This command <LF>sets upper and lower thresholds and the <LF>hysteresis for the light sensor.<LF><LF>This command takes no parameters.
XXXXUses ambient light levels for setting up the light sensor trigger levels.  This command sets upper and lower thresholds and the hysteresis for the light sensor.<LF><LF>This command takes no parameters.
XXXXVLL Command
XXXXValue
XXXXValue (time)
XXXXValue defines the cutoff number for the external clock.
XXXXValue defines the cutoff number for the trigger.
XXXXValue for Operation
XXXXValue of Battery
XXXXValue of Blue Container
XXXXValue of Blue Data Set
XXXXValue of Blue Event
XXXXValue of Blue Timer
XXXXValue of Clock
XXXXValue of Container's Container
XXXXValue of Firmware
XXXXValue of Generic Container
XXXXValue of Generic Event
XXXXValue of Mail
XXXXValue of Port 1
XXXXValue of Port 2
XXXXValue of Port 3
XXXXValue of Port 4
XXXXValue of Port 5
XXXXValue of Port 6
XXXXValue of Port 7
XXXXValue of Port 8
XXXXValue of Red Container
XXXXValue of Red Data Set
XXXXValue of Red Event
XXXXValue of Red Timer
XXXXValue of Yellow Container
XXXXValue of Yellow Data Set
XXXXValue of Yellow Event
XXXXValue of Yellow Timer
XXXXValue of operation
XXXXValue of the Blue Lower Threshold
XXXXValue of the Blue Upper Threshold
XXXXValue of the Container, Timer, Sensor, Clock, or Mail.
XXXXValue of the Generic Lower Threshold
XXXXValue of the Generic Upper Threshold
XXXXValue of the Red Lower Threshold
XXXXValue of the Red Upper Threshold
XXXXValue of the Yellow Lower Threshold
XXXXValue of the Yellow Upper Threshold
XXXXValue of the blue duration
XXXXValue of the blue hysteresis
XXXXValue of the generic duration
XXXXValue of the generic hysteresis
XXXXValue of the red duration
XXXXValue of the red event
XXXXValue of the red hysteresis
XXXXValue of the yellow duration
XXXXValue of the yellow hysteresis
XXXXValue out
XXXXValue read
XXXXValue to read
XXXXValues
XXXXVar
XXXXVariable (0-31)
XXXXVault
XXXXVertex
XXXXVertical
XXXXView
XXXXView All
XXXXView Area
XXXXView Modifier
XXXXView Page
XXXXView Printed Manuals...
XXXXView and Compare Area
XXXXVisible?
XXXXVision
XXXXVision Center
XXXXVision Template
XXXXVoltage Container (Voltmeter LogIT)
XXXXVoltage Fork (Voltmeter LogIT)
XXXXVoltage LogIT
XXXXVoltmeter
XXXXVolume
XXXXWait  (sec)
XXXXWait (1/100 sec)
XXXXWait (min)
XXXXWait For Clock
XXXXWait For Container
XXXXWait Time (sec)
XXXXWait for
XXXXWait for 1 sec
XXXXWait for 1 second.
XXXXWait for 10 Points
XXXXWait for 10 points to be captured in a Data Set.<LF><LF>The default is to wait for 10 points to be captured in the Red Data Set.<LF><LF>Modifiers: <LF>   <LF>Data Set: String the data set modifier that corresponds to the data set you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.
XXXXWait for 10 points to be captured in a Data Set.<LF><LF>The default is to wait for 10 points to be captured in the Red Data Set.<LF><LF>Modifiers: <LF>   <LF>Data Set: String the data set modifier that corresponds to the data set you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF>
XXXXWait for 10 sec
XXXXWait for 10 seconds.
XXXXWait for 100 Points
XXXXWait for 100 points to be captured in a Data Set.<LF><LF>The default is to wait for 100 points to be captured in the Red Data Set.<LF><LF>Modifiers: <LF>   <LF>Data Set: String the data set modifier that corresponds to the data set you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF>
XXXXWait for 2 sec
XXXXWait for 2 seconds.
XXXXWait for 4 sec
XXXXWait for 4 seconds.
XXXXWait for 500 Points
XXXXWait for 500 points to be captured in a Data Set.<LF><LF>The default is to wait for 500 points to be captured in the Red Data Set.<LF><LF>Modifiers: <LF>   <LF>Data Set: String the data set modifier that corresponds to the data set you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.
XXXXWait for 500 points to be captured in a Data Set.<LF><LF>The default is to wait for 500 points to be captured in the Red Data Set.<LF><LF>Modifiers: <LF>   <LF>Data Set: String the data set modifier that corresponds to the data set you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF>
XXXXWait for 6 sec
XXXXWait for 6 seconds.
XXXXWait for 8 sec
XXXXWait for 8 seconds.
XXXXWait for Angle
XXXXWait for Brighter
XXXXWait for Change
XXXXWait for Change (%)
XXXXWait for Clicks
XXXXWait for Dark
XXXXWait for Darker
XXXXWait for Decrease in Acceleration
XXXXWait for Decrease in Barometeric Pressure
XXXXWait for Decrease in Camera Sensor
XXXXWait for Decrease in Lux 
XXXXWait for Decrease in Redox 
XXXXWait for Decrease in Voltage (Generic)
XXXXWait for Decrease in Voltage (Voltmeter LogIT)
XXXXWait for Decreasing Humidity (HumiPro LogIT)
XXXXWait for Decreasing Pressure (Pressure LogIT)
XXXXWait for Decreasing Sound Level (Sound LogIT)
XXXXWait for Decreasing Temp (C)
XXXXWait for Decreasing Temp (F)
XXXXWait for Decreasing Temperature (C) (ProTemp LogIT)
XXXXWait for Decreasing pH (ph LogIT)
XXXXWait for Increase in Acceleration
XXXXWait for Increase in Barometeric Pressure
XXXXWait for Increase in Camera Sensor
XXXXWait for Increase in Lux 
XXXXWait for Increase in Redox 
XXXXWait for Increase in Voltage (Generic)
XXXXWait for Increase in Voltage (Voltmeter LogIT)
XXXXWait for Increasing Humidity (HumiPro LogIT)
XXXXWait for Increasing Pressure (Pressure LogIT)
XXXXWait for Increasing Sound Level (Sound LogIT)
XXXXWait for Increasing Temp (C)
XXXXWait for Increasing Temp (F)
XXXXWait for Increasing Temperature (C) (ProTemp LogIT)
XXXXWait for Increasing pH (pH LogIT)
XXXXWait for LetGo
XXXXWait for Light
XXXXWait for Mail
XXXXWait for N Points
XXXXWait for N hundredths of a sec
XXXXWait for Position Decrease (Position LogIT)
XXXXWait for Position Increase (Position LogIT)
XXXXWait for Push
XXXXWait for RCX to be in View
XXXXWait for Random Time
XXXXWait for Rotation
XXXXWait for Rotation w/o Reset
XXXXWait for Time
XXXXWait for Time (min)
XXXXWait for Timer
XXXXWait for a random amount of time.  The default is <LF>to  wait for a random amount of  time between <LF>0 and 5 seconds.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Max random time (sec):  String in a number <LF>corresponding to the maximum random number <LF>you want to wait for.
XXXXWait for a random amount of time.<LF>The default is to wait for a random amount of time between 0 and 5 seconds.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Max random time (sec):  String in a number corresponding to the maximum random number you want to wait for.
XXXXWait for a specified amount of time in minutes.<LF>The default time is 1 min.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Wait (min):  String in a number of <LF>minutes to wait for.
XXXXWait for a specified amount of time in minutes.<LF>The default time is 1 min.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Wait (min):  String in a number of minutes to wait for.
XXXXWait for a specified amount of time.<LF>The default time is 1 second.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Wait (1/100 sec):  String in a number of <LF>hundredths of seconds to wait for.
XXXXWait for a specified amount of time.<LF>The default time is 1 second.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Wait (1/100 sec):  String in a number of hundredths of seconds to wait for.
XXXXWait for a specified amount of time.<LF>The default time is 1 second.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Wait (in seconds):  String in a number of <LF>seconds to wait for.
XXXXWait for a specified amount of time.<LF>The default time is 1 second.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Wait (in seconds):  String in a number of seconds to wait for.
XXXXWait for darker? or brighter?
XXXXWait for release? or push?
XXXXWait for specified number of points to be captured in a Data Set.<LF><LF>The default is to wait for 1 point to be captured in the Red Data Set.<LF><LF>Modifiers: <LF>   <LF>Number of points: String in the number of points to wait for.<LF><LF>Data Set: String  the data set modifier that corresponds to the data set you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF>
XXXXWait for the light sensor to read a value that is 5 greater than <LF>the current value.  The default port is Port 1.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to <LF>where your sensor is connected.
XXXXWait for the light sensor to read a value that is 5 greater than the current value.   The default port is Port 1.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where your sensor is connected.
XXXXWait for the light sensor to read a value that is 5 less than <LF>the current value.  The default port is port 1.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to <LF>where your sensor is connected.
XXXXWait for the light sensor to read a value that is 5 less than the current value.  The default port is port 1.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where your sensor is connected.
XXXXWait for the light sensor to read a value that is brighter <LF>than the current value.  The default is to wait until the <LF>light sensor value on Port 1 has increased by 5.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds <LF>to where your sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Wait for Change:  Wait until the light sensor value has <LF>increased by the number specified.
XXXXWait for the light sensor to read a value that is brighter than the current value.  The default is to wait until the light sensor value on Port 1 has increased by 5.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where your sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Wait for change:  Wait until the light sensor value has increased by the number specified.
XXXXWait for the light sensor to read a value that is darker <LF>than the current value.  The default is to wait until the <LF>light sensor value on Port 1 has decreased by 5.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds <LF>to where your sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Wait for Change:  Wait until the light sensor reads a value that <LF>is decreased by the number specified.
XXXXWait for the light sensor to read a value that is darker than the current value.  You can specify how much darker it should wait for.  The default is to wait for a value that is 5 less than the current value with the light sensor on Port 1.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  The input port that the light sensor is connected to.<LF><LF> Wait for change:  Wait until the light sensor reads a value that is decreased by the number specified.
XXXXWait for the touch sensor to read a number of clicks<LF>that is greater than the specified number. <LF>The default is to wait until the number of clicks on the <LF>touch sensoron Port 1 is greater than 5.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds <LF>to where your sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Cutoff Clicks:  String in the number of clicks to  wait for
XXXXWait for the touch sensor to read a number of clicksthat is greater than the specified number. <LF>The default is to wait until the number of clicks on the touch sensoron Port 1 is greater than 5.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where your sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Cutoff Clicks:  String in the number of clicks to wait for
XXXXWait for this amount of time.
XXXXWait for?
XXXXWait for? 2
XXXXWait greater? or less?
XXXXWait time
XXXXWait time (sec)
XXXXWait until Clock equals (min)
XXXXWait until Timer is: (tenths of seconds)
XXXXWait until Voltage is greater than the <LF>value specified.  The default is a Voltage Sensor on Port<LF>1 that is waiting until it reads a value greater than 2V.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where your sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Cutoff Voltage:  String in a number that the sensoris to <LF>wait for.
XXXXWait until all of the Investigator Areas have been loaded.
XXXXWait until mail equals
XXXXWait until the Angle Sensor value is greater than the <LF>angle specified (in either direction).  The default is to <LF>wait for an angle sensor value on Port 1 to be greater <LF>than 180 degrees.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds <LF>to the where your sensor is.<LF><LF>Cutoff Angle:  String in the angle to wait for (in degrees).
XXXXWait until the Angle Sensor value is greater than the <LF>number of rotations specified (in 16ths of a rotation) <LF>in either direction.  The default is to wait for an angle <LF>sensor value on Port 1 to be greater than 16 (one <LF>rotation).  This program does NOT reset the sensor.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds <LF>to the where your sensor is.<LF><LF>Cutoff Rotation:  String in the number of rotations to <LF>wait for (in sixteenths of a rotation).
XXXXWait until the Angle Sensor value is greater than the <LF>number of rotations specified (in 16ths of a rotation) <LF>in either direction.  The default is to wait for an angle <LF>sensor value on Port 1 to be greater than 16 (one <LF>rotation).<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds <LF>to the where your sensor is.<LF><LF>Cutoff Rotation:  String in the number of rotations to <LF>wait for (in sixteenths of a rotation).
XXXXWait until the Angle Sensor value is greater than the angle specified (in either direction).  The default is to wait for an angle sensor value on Port 1 to be greater than 180 degrees.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to the where your sensor is.<LF><LF>Cutoff Angle:  String in the angle to wait for (in degrees).
XXXXWait until the Angle Sensor value is greater than the number of rotations specified (in 16ths of a rotation) in either direction.  The default is to wait for an angle sensor value on Port 1 to be greater than 16 (one rotation). This program does NOT zero the sensor each time.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to the where your sensor is.<LF><LF>Cutoff Rotation:  String in the number of rotations to wait for (in sixteenths of a rotation).
XXXXWait until the Angle Sensor value is greater than the number of rotations specified (in 16ths of a rotation) in either direction.  The default is to wait for an angle sensor value on Port 1 to be greater than 16 (one rotation).<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to the where your sensor is.<LF><LF>Cutoff Rotation:  String in the number of rotations to wait for (in sixteenths of a rotation).
XXXXWait until the Barometeric sensor reading is less than the <LF>value specified.  The default is a barometeric sensor on<LF>Port 1 that is waiting until it reads a value less than<LF>1000 hPa.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where your sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Cutoff Pressure:  String in a number that the sensor is<LF>to wait for.
XXXXWait until the Camera Sensor reads a value that is greater than <LF>the number specified.  The default is for a camera sensor on the red container <LF>to wait until it reads a brightness greater than 55.<LF><LF>Note: Camera sensors read a value between 0 and 255... watch <LF>the Vision Center Panel to see what value you are reading.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container container modifier corresponding to the Camera sensor.<LF>You can assign (and build) sensors on the Vision Center Panel.<LF><LF>Cutoff Brightness:  String in a number that is the brightness level <LF>to wait  for (0 to 255).
XXXXWait until the Camera Sensor reads a value that is greater than the number specified.  The default is for a camera sensor on the red container to wait until it reads a brightness greater than 55.<LF><LF>Note: Camera sensors read a value between 0 and 255... watch the Vision Center Panel to see what value you are reading.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier corresponding to the Camera sensor.  You can assign (and build) sensors on the Vision Center Panel.<LF><LF>Cutoff Brightness:  String in a number that is the brightness level to wait  for (0 to 255).
XXXXWait until the Camera Sensor reads a value that is less than <LF>the number specified.  The default is for a camera sensor on the red container <LF>to wait until it reads a value equal to or less than 55.<LF><LF>Note: Camera sensors read a value between 0 and 255... watch <LF>the Vision Center Panel to see what value you are reading.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier corresponding to the Camera sensor.<LF>You can assign (and build) sensors on the Vision Center Panel.<LF><LF>Cutoff Brightness:  String in a number that is the sensor value <LF>to wait  for (0 to 255).
XXXXWait until the Camera Sensor reads a value that is less than the number specified.  The default is for a camera sensor on the red container to wait until it reads a value equal to or less than 55.<LF><LF>Note: Camera sensors read a value between 0 and 255... watch the Vision Center Panel to see what value you are reading.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier corresponding to the Camera sensor.  You can assign (and build) sensors on the Vision Center Panel.<LF><LF>Cutoff Brightness:  String in a number that is the value to wait  for (0 to 255).
XXXXWait until the Clock is equal to the number specified. The default is to wait for the Clock to be equal to 1 min.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Wait until clock equals (min):  String in the amount of time to wait for.
XXXXWait until the Clock is equal to the number specified. The default is to wait for the Clock to be equal to 1 min.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Wait until clock equals (min):  String in the amount of time to wait for.<LF>
XXXXWait until the Container is equal to the number <LF>specified. The default is to wait for the Red <LF>Container to be equal to 1.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container <LF>modifier corresponding to which container <LF>you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Wait until the container equals:  String in the <LF>number to wait for.
XXXXWait until the Container is equal to the number specified. The default is to wait for the Red Container to be equal to 1.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Container:  String in the container modifier corresponding to which container you want to use: red, yellow, or blue.<LF><LF>Wait until the container equals:  String in the number to wait for.
XXXXWait until the Light Sensor reads a value that is brighter than <LF>the number specified.  The default is for a light sensor on Port 1 <LF>to wait until it reads a brightness greater than 55.<LF><LF>Note: Light sensors read a value between 1 and 100... watch <LF>the RCX display panel to see what light level you are reading.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to <LF>where your sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Cutoff Brightness:  String in a number that is the brightness level <LF>to wait  for (1 to 100).
XXXXWait until the Light Sensor reads a value that is brighter than the number specified.  The default is for a light sensor on Port 1 to wait until it reads a brightness greater than 55.<LF><LF>Note: Light sensors read a value between 1 and 100... watch the RCX display panel to see what light level you are reading.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where your sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Cutoff Brightness:  String in a number that is the brightness level to wait  for (1 to 100).
XXXXWait until the Light Sensor reads a value that is darker than <LF>the number specified.  The default is for a light sensor on Port 1 <LF>to wait until it reads a brightness that is less than 55.<LF><LF>Note: Light sensors read a value between 1 and 100... watch <LF>the RCX display panel to see what light level you are reading.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to <LF>where your sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Cutoff Brightness:  String in a number that is the brightness level <LF>to wait  for (1 to 100)
XXXXWait until the Light Sensor reads a value that is darker than the number specified.  The default is for a light sensor on Port 1 to wait until it reads a brightness that is less than 55.<LF><LF>Note: Light sensors read a value between 1 and 100... watch the RCX display panel to see what light level you are reading.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where your sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Cutoff Brightness:  String in a number that is the brightness level to wait  for (1 to 100)
XXXXWait until the Lux sensor reading is greater than the <LF>value specified.  The default is a Lux sensor on<LF>Port 1 that is waiting until it reads a value less than<LF>10000 lux.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where your sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Cutoff Lux:  String in a number that the sensor is<LF>to wait for.
XXXXWait until the Lux sensor reading is less than the <LF>value specified.  The default is a Lux sensor on<LF>Port 1 that is waiting until it reads a value less than<LF>10000 lux.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where your sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Cutoff Lux:  String in a number that the sensor is<LF>to wait for.
XXXXWait until the Redox sensore reading is less than the <LF>value specified.  The default is a redox sensor on Port<LF>1 that is waiting until it reads a value greater than 625 mV.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where your sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Cutoff Voltage:  String in a number that the sensoris to <LF>wait for.
XXXXWait until the Timer reaches a certain value.<LF>The default is to wait until the Red Timer reaches 1 sec.<LF><LF>Note:  You will need a Zero Timer command at some point before this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Wait until timer is:  String in a number (in tenths of seconds) for the Timer wait for.<LF><LF>Timer:  String in a Timer modifier to indicate which timer to wait for.
XXXXWait until the Timer reaches a certain value.<LF>The default is to wait until the red timer reaches <LF>1 sec.<LF><LF>Note:  You will need a Zero Timer command <LF>at some point before this command.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Wait until timer is:  String in a number (in <LF>tenths of seconds) for the Timer wait for.<LF><LF>Timer:  String in a Timer modifier to indicate <LF>which timer to wait for.
XXXXWait until the Volatge is greater than the value specified.  The default is a Voltage Sensor on Port 1 that is waiting until it reads a value greater than 2V.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where your sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Cutoff Voltage:  String in a number that the sensor is to wait for.
XXXXWait until the Voltage is less than the <LF>value specified.  The default is a Voltage Sensor on<LF>Port 1 that is waiting until it reads a value less than<LF>2V.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where your sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Cutoff Voltage:  String in a number that the sensor is<LF>to wait for.
XXXXWait until the accelerometer sensor reading is greater than the <LF>value specified.  The default is a accelerometer sensor on<LF>Port 1 that is waiting until it reads a value greater than<LF>25 m/s/s.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where your sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Cutoff Acceleration:  String in a number that the sensor is<LF>to wait for.
XXXXWait until the accelerometer sensor reading is less than the <LF>value specified.  The default is a accelerometer sensor on<LF>Port 1 that is waiting until it reads a value less than<LF>25 m/s/s.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where your sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Cutoff Acceleration:  String in a number that the sensor is<LF>to wait for.
XXXXWait until the barometer sensor reading is greater than the <LF>value specified.  The default is a barometeric sensor on<LF>Port 1 that is waiting until it reads a value less than<LF>1000 hPa.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where your sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Cutoff Pressure:  String in a number that the sensor is<LF>to wait for.
XXXXWait until the container equals
XXXXWait until the generic unpowered sensor voltage is greater than the value specified.  The default is a generic sensor on Port 1 that is waiting until it reads a value greater than 2V.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where your sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Cutoff Voltage:  String in a number that the sensor is to wait for.
XXXXWait until the generic unpowered sensor voltage is less than the value specified.  The default is a generic sensor on Port 1 that is waiting until it reads a value less than 2V.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where your sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Cutoff Voltage:  String in a number that the sensor is to wait for.
XXXXWait until the humidity is greater than the <LF>value specified.  The default is a humidity <LF>sensor on Port 1 that is waiting until it reads <LF>a relative humidity value greater than 50%.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where your sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Cutoff Humidity (%RH):  String in a number <LF>that the sensor is to wait for.
XXXXWait until the humidity is greater than the value specified.  The default is a humidity sensor on Port 1 that is waiting until it reads a relative humidity value greater than 50%.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where your sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Cutoff Humidity (%RH):  String in a number that the sensor is to wait for.
XXXXWait until the humidity is less than the number specified.  The default is a humidity sensor on Port 1 that is waiting until it reads a relative humidity value less than 50%.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where your sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Cutoff Humidity (%RH):  String in a number <LF>that the sensor is to wait for.
XXXXWait until the humidity is less than the number specified.  The default is a humidity sensor on Port 1 that is waiting until it reads a relative humidity value less than 50%.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where your sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Cutoff Humidity (%RH):  String in a number that the sensor is to wait for.
XXXXWait until the pH is greater than the <LF>value specified.  The default is a pH <LF>sensor on Port 1 that is waiting until it reads <LF>a pH value greater than 7.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where your sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Cutoff pH:  String in a number that the <LF>sensor is to wait for.
XXXXWait until the pH is greater than the value specified.  The default is a pH sensor on Port 1 that is waiting until it reads a pH value greater than 7.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where your sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Cutoff pH:  String in a number that the sensor is to wait for.
XXXXWait until the pH is less than the number specified.  The default is a pH sensor on Port 1 that is waiting until it reads a pH value less than 7.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where your sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Cutoff pH:  String in a number that the sensor is to wait for.
XXXXWait until the pH is less than the value <LF>specified.  The default is a pH sensor <LF>on Port 1 that is waiting until it reads a <LF>pH value less than 7.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where your sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Cutoff pH:  String in a number that the sensor is<LF>to wait for.
XXXXWait until the position is greater than the <LF>value specified.  The default is a position <LF>sensor on Port 1 that is waiting until it reads <LF>a position value greater than 180 degrees.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where your sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Cutoff Position (degrees):  String in a number <LF>that the sensor is to wait for.
XXXXWait until the position is greater than the value specified.  The default is a position sensor on Port 1 that is waiting until it reads a position value greater than 180 degrees.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where your sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Cutoff Position (degrees):  String in a number that the sensor is to wait for.
XXXXWait until the position is less than the <LF>number specified.  The default is a position<LF>sensor on Port 1 that is waiting until it reads <LF>a position value less than 180 degrees.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where your sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Cutoff Position (degrees):  String in a number <LF>that the sensor is to wait for.
XXXXWait until the position is less than the number specified.  The default is a position sensor on Port 1 that is waiting until it reads a position value less than 180 degrees.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where your sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Cutoff Position (degrees):  String in a number that the sensor is to wait for.
XXXXWait until the pressure is greater than the <LF>value specified.  The default is a pressure <LF>sensor on Port 1 that is waiting until it reads <LF>a pressure value greater than 100 kPa.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where your sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Cutoff Pressure (kPa):  String in a number <LF>that the sensor is to wait for.
XXXXWait until the pressure is greater than the value specified.  The default is a pressure sensor on Port 1 that is waiting until it reads a pressure value greater than 100 kPa.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where your sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Cutoff Pressure (kPa):  String in a number that the sensor is to wait for.
XXXXWait until the pressure is less than the <LF>number specified.  The default is a pressure <LF>sensor on Port 1 that is waiting until it reads <LF>a pressure value less than 100 kPa.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where your sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Cutoff Pressure (kPa):  String in a number <LF>that the sensor is to wait for.
XXXXWait until the pressure is less than the number specified.  The default is a pressure sensor on Port 1 that is waiting until it reads a pressure value less than 100 kPa.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where your sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Cutoff Pressure (kPa):  String in a number that the sensor is to wait for.
XXXXWait until the redox sensor voltage is greater than the <LF>value specified.  The default is a redox sensor on Port<LF>1 that is waiting until it reads a value greater than 625 mV.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where your sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Cutoff Voltage:  String in a number that the sensoris to <LF>wait for.
XXXXWait until the sound level is greater than the <LF>value specified.  The default is a sound level <LF>sensor on Port 1 that is waiting until it reads <LF>a decibel value greater than 60 dB.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where your sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Cutoff Sound Level (dB):  String in a number <LF>that the sensor is to wait for.
XXXXWait until the sound level is greater than the number specified.  The default is a sound level  sensor on Port 1 that is waiting until it reads a decibel value greater than 60.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where your sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Cutoff Sound Level (dB):  String in a number that the sensor is to wait for.
XXXXWait until the sound level is less than the <LF>number specified.  The default is a sound level <LF>sensor on Port 1 that is waiting until it reads <LF>a decibel value less than 60.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where your sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Cutoff Sound Level (dB):  String in a number <LF>that the sensor is to wait for.
XXXXWait until the sound level is less than the number specified.  The default is a sound level sensor on Port 1 that is waiting until it reads a decibel value less than 60.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where your sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Cutoff Sound Level (dB):  String in a number that the sensor is to wait for.
XXXXWait until the temperature is greater than <LF>the number specified.  The default is a <LF>temperature sensor on Port 1 that is waiting <LF>until it reads a temperature greater than <LF>30 Celsius.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where your sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Cutoff Temperature:  String in a number that <LF>is the temperature to wait for. If the value of a container is used here, the number must be 10 times the desired threshold temperature (401 for 40.1 degrees).
XXXXWait until the temperature is greater than the <LF>value specified.  The default is atemperature <LF>sensor on Port 1 that is waiting until it reads <LF>a temperature value greater than 30 degrees C.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where your sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Cutoff Temperauture (C):  String in a number <LF>that the sensor is to wait for.
XXXXWait until the temperature is greater than the number <LF>specified.  The default is a temperature sensor on <LF>Port 1 that is waiting until it reads a temperature <LF>greater than 80 Fahrenheit<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where your sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Cutoff Temperature:  String in a number that is the <LF>temperature to wait for. If the value of a container is used here, the number must be 10 times the desired threshold temperature (401 for 40.1 degrees).
XXXXWait until the temperature is greater than the number specified.  The default is a temperature sensor on Port 1 that is waiting until it reads a temperature greater than 30 Celsius.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where your sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Cutoff Temperature:  String in a number that is the temperature to wait for. If the value of a container is used here, the number must be 10 times the desired threshold temperature (401 for 40.1 degrees).
XXXXWait until the temperature is greater than the number specified.  The default is a temperature sensor on Port 1 that is waiting until it reads a temperature greater than 80 Fahrenheit<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where your sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Cutoff Temperature:  String in a number that is the temperature to wait for. If the value of a container is used here, the number must be 10 times the desired threshold temperature (401 for 40.1 degrees).
XXXXWait until the temperature is greater than the value specified.  The default is a temperature sensor on Port 1 that is waiting until it reads a temperature value greater than 30 degrees C.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where your sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Cutoff Temperature (C):  String in a number that the sensor is to wait for.
XXXXWait until the temperature is less than the <LF>number specified.  The default is a temperature <LF>sensor on Port 1 that is waiting until it reads <LF>a temperature less than 30 Celsius.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where your sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Cutoff Temperature:  String in a number <LF>that is the temperature to wait for. If the value of a container is used here, the number must be 10 times the desired threshold temperature (401 for 40.1 degrees).
XXXXWait until the temperature is less than the <LF>value specified.  The default is a temperature <LF>sensor on Port 1 that is waiting until it reads <LF>a value less than 30 degrees C.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where your sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Cutoff Temperature (C):  String in a number <LF>that the sensor is to wait for.
XXXXWait until the temperature is less than the number <LF>specified.  The default is a temperature sensor on <LF>Port 1 that is waiting until it reads a temperature <LF>less than 80 Fahrenheit<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where your sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Cutoff Temperature:  String in a number that is the <LF>temperature to wait for. If the value of a container is used here, the number must be 10 times the desired threshold temperature (401 for 40.1 degrees).
XXXXWait until the temperature is less than the number specified.  The default is a temperature sensor on Port 1 that is waiting until it reads a temperature less than 80 Fahrenheit<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where your sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Cutoff Temperature:  String in a number that is the temperature to wait for. If the value of a container is used here, the number must be 10 times the desired threshold temperature (401 for 40.1 degrees).
XXXXWait until the temperature is less than the number specified.<LF>The default is a temperature sensor on Port 1 that is waiting until it reads a temperature less than 30 Celsius.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where your sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Cutoff Temperature:  String in a number that is the temperature to wait for. If the value of a container is used here, the number must be 10 times the desired threshold temperature (401 for 40.1 degrees).
XXXXWait until the temperature is less than the value specified.  The default is a temperature sensor on Port 1 that is waiting until it reads a value less than 30 degrees C.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to where your sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Cutoff Temperature (C):  String in a number that is the sensor to wait for.
XXXXWait until the touch sensor connected to Port 1 <LF>is pushed in.
XXXXWait until the touch sensor connected to Port 1 <LF>is released.
XXXXWait until the touch sensor connected to Port 1 is pushed in.<LF><LF>
XXXXWait until the touch sensor connected to Port 1 is released.
XXXXWait until the touch sensor is pushed in.<LF>The default is on Port 1.<LF><LF>Note: If the touch sensor is already pushed in when <LF>the program executes this command, the RCX will <LF>wait until the touch sensor is released and pushed in again.<LF><LF>Modifiers: <LF><LF>Number of Clicks: If you wire in a value here it will wait for that <LF>clicks (or pushes).  If unwired - it waits of a single push.<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds <LF>to the where your sensor is.
XXXXWait until the touch sensor is pushed in.<LF>The default is on Port 1.<LF><LF>Note: If the touch sensor is already pushed in when the program executes this command, the RCX will wait until the touch sensor is released and pushed in again.<LF><LF>Modifiers: <LF><LF>Number of Clicks: If you wire in a value here it will wait for that clicks (or pushes).  If unwired - it waits of a single push.<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to the where your sensor is.
XXXXWait until the touch sensor is released.<LF>The default is on Port 1.<LF><LF>Note: If the touch sensor is already released when the <LF>program executes this command, the RCX will wait until <LF>the touch sensor is pushed in and released again.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds <LF>to the where your sensor is.
XXXXWait until the touch sensor is released.<LF>The default is on Port 1.<LF><LF>Note: If the touch sensor is already released when the program executes this command, the RCX will wait until the touch sensor is pushed in and released again.<LF><LF>Modifier:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that corresponds to the where your sensor is.
XXXXWait until the voltage sensor voltage is greater than the <LF>value specified.  The default is a generic sensor on Port<LF>1 that is waiting until it reads a value greater than 2V.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where your sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Cutoff Voltage:  String in a number that the sensoris to <LF>wait for.
XXXXWait until the voltage sensor voltage is less than the <LF>value specified.  The default is a generic sensor on Port<LF>1 that is waiting until it reads a value greater than 2V.<LF><LF>Modifiers:<LF><LF>Port:  String in the input port modifier that <LF>corresponds to where your sensor is connected.<LF><LF>Cutoff Voltage:  String in a number that the sensoris to <LF>wait for.
XXXXWait until this number of points has been taken.   The maximum number of points is 1000.
XXXXWaits until RCX is in View of tower.
XXXXWarning
XXXXWatch (0)
XXXXWaveform Graph
XXXXWeb
XXXXWeb Help
XXXXWeb Resources
XXXXWelcome to Inventor.<LF>Write your program in the window below.<LF>To go back to the main menu, close all Inventor windows.
XXXXWell Time
XXXXWhen the mouse is moved over an active window, this VI returns the window number and the mouse coordinates.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Window Number gives the number of active windows.<LF><LF>X mouse coordinate gives the X coordinate of the mouse in the active screen.<LF><LF>Y mouse coordinate gives the Y coordinate of the mouse in the active screen. <LF><LF>error out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF>
XXXXWhich Vault?
XXXXWhile Accelerometer is Greater Than
XXXXWhile Accelerometer is Less Than
XXXXWhile Barometer is Greater Than
XXXXWhile Barometeric Sensor is Less Than
XXXXWhile Generic Sensor Is Greater Than
XXXXWhile Lux Sensor is Greater Than
XXXXWhile Lux Sensor is Less Than
XXXXWhile Position is Greater Than
XXXXWhile Position is Less Than
XXXXWhile Redox Sensor Is Greater Than
XXXXWhile Redox Sensor Is Less Than
XXXXWhite
XXXXWhite on Black
XXXXWhiteIsZero
XXXXWhole note
XXXXWidth
XXXXWidth & Height
XXXXWindow Number
XXXXWindow Number (0...15)
XXXXWindow Number (0...22)
XXXXWindow Number (17...22)
XXXXWindow Number Out
XXXXWindow can close? (Yes)
XXXXWindow can grow? (Yes)
XXXXWindow has title bar? (Yes)
XXXXWindow is floating? (No)
XXXXWindow number
XXXXWrite Area
XXXXWrite Data Point to Data Set
XXXXWrite Page
XXXXWrite error code
XXXXWrites an image in a file.<LF><LF>Color Palette: is used to apply an RGB color palette to the file. Color Palette is an array of clusters constructed by the user or supplied by IMAQ GetPalette. This palette is composed of 256 elements for each of the three color planes. A specific color is the result of applying a value between 0 and 255 for each of the three color planes (red, green, and blue). If the three planes have the identical value, then a gray level is obtained. (0 specifies black and 255 specifies white).<LF><LF>Image: is the reference to the image structure to which the data from the image file is applied.<LF><LF>File Type: describes the file type to be written. The default file type is APD. The file types supported are : BMP, TIFF, PICT (Macintosh only), and AIPD (internal file format).<LF><LF>File Path: is the complete path name, including drive, directory, and filename, for the file to be loaded. This path can be supplied either by the user or the VI File Dialog from LabVIEW or BridgeVIEW.<LF><LF>error in (no error) is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. For more information about this control, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>error out: is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. For more information about this indicator, see the topic IMAQ VI Error Clusters in the section VI Overview and Programming Concepts.<LF><LF>Note :	The options regulating the saving of an image file can be used for certain file types. These options exist as a cluster that is not visible from the connection panel but is visible from the front panel of the VI. For example, the cluster TIFF Options allows the user to specify the value of certain tags (for example, RowsPerStrip, PhotometricInterpretation, or ByteOrder). To change the default values for a TIFF file, it is sufficient to modify the parameter in the front panel of IMAQ WriteFile.
XXXXX + Y Axis Averages
XXXXX - Y Axis Averages
XXXXX Axis
XXXXX Axis Averages
XXXXX Centroid
XXXXX Component
XXXXX Coordinate
XXXXX Duplication Step
XXXXX Inc
XXXXX Increment
XXXXX Max
XXXXX Min
XXXXX Offset
XXXXX Position
XXXXX Resolution
XXXXX Scale.Range
XXXXX Size
XXXXX Start
XXXXX Step
XXXXX Step Size
XXXXX Value
XXXXX axis
XXXXX mouse coordinate
XXXXX-axis
XXXXXOffset
XXXXXY Graph 1
XXXXXY Graph 2
XXXXXY Graph 3
XXXXXY Graph 4
XXXXXY Graph 5
XXXXXY Graph 6
XXXXXY Graph 7
XXXXXY Graph 8
XXXXXY Plot
XXXXXor/Xnor (Xor)
XXXXY Axis
XXXXY Axis Averages
XXXXY Centroid
XXXXY Component
XXXXY Coordinate
XXXXY Duplication Step
XXXXY Inc
XXXXY Max
XXXXY Min
XXXXY Offset
XXXXY Position
XXXXY Resolution
XXXXY Scale.Range
XXXXY Size
XXXXY Step
XXXXY Step Size
XXXXY Values
XXXXY axis
XXXXY axis<LF>X axis
XXXXY mouse coordinate
XXXXY-axis
XXXXYES
XXXXYOffset
XXXXYellow
XXXXYellow Bin
XXXXYellow Container
XXXXYellow Data Set
XXXXYellow Event
XXXXYellow Jump
XXXXYellow Land
XXXXYellow Scroll
XXXXYellow Timer
XXXXYellow scroll
XXXXYou can see that the sun started to rise 350 min after the program started.  The small amount of light measured at night was from the little red light on the light brick.
XXXXYou found a secret button!<LF><LF>Click here to download a secret song to the RCX.
XXXXYour Program [06/07/1999 15-36-45]
XXXXYour Program [12/07/1999 13-52-48]
XXXXZero Angle Sensor
XXXXZero Clicks Sensor
XXXXZero Light Sensor
XXXXZero Temperature Sensor (Celsius)
XXXXZero Temperature Sensor (Fahrenheit)
XXXXZero Timer
XXXXZero Timers
XXXXZero Touch Sensor
XXXXZero Touch and Release Sensor
XXXXZero all of the timers.
XXXXZero the angle sensor.
XXXXZoom
XXXXZoom Factor
XXXXZoom Factor X
XXXXZoom Factor Y
XXXXZoom Plot
XXXXZoomFactors X and Y
XXXX[user-specified font]
XXXXadmin button text: HIDE
XXXXalpha
XXXXappended path
XXXXappended path 2
XXXXarea
XXXXarray
XXXXarrayofLandI
XXXXbackground
XXXXbeta
XXXXbit depth(8)
XXXXblue
XXXXborder
XXXXbottom
XXXXbounds
XXXXbrian
XXXXbuttons
XXXXcalls 4
XXXXcancelled
XXXXchannel 1
XXXXchannel identifies the analog input channel you want to measure (can be 1, 2, or 3).  This corresponds to the grey connector on the RCX.
XXXXchannel identifies the analog input channel you want to measure. If x, y, and z refer to channels, you can specify a list of channels by separating the individual channels by commas–for example, x,y,z. If x refers to the first channel in a consecutive channel range and y refers to the last channel, you can specify the range by separating the first and last channels with a colon–for example, x:y.
XXXXchannel identifies the pwm output channel you want to control (can be A, B, or C).  This corresponds to the black connector on the RCX.
XXXXchannel<FONT predef=APPFONT>
XXXXchannels identifies the analog input channels you want to measure (can be 1, 2,  and/or 3).  This corresponds to the grey connectors on the RCX.  To have more than one simply list them with columns (1,2 would read first channel 1 then channel 2).  Data for each channel is returned as another row of the resulting data matrix.
XXXXchannels identifies the analog input channels you want to measure. If <LF>x, y, and z refer to channels, you can specify a list of channels by separating the individual channels with commas–for example, x,y,z. If x refers to the first channel in a consecutive channel range and y refers to the last channel, you can specify the range by separating the first and last channels by a colon–for example, x:y.
XXXXchannels identifies the pwm output channels you want to control (can be A, B, and/or C).  This corresponds to the black connectors on the RCX.  If you specify multiple channels, you will need multiple columns in your waveform matrix.
XXXXchannels<FONT predef=APPFONT>
XXXXchannels<FONT predef=APPFONT> (1)
XXXXchar*
XXXXchooses between looking for peaks (positive-going bumps) and valleys (negative-going bumps)
XXXXclustering
XXXXcode
XXXXcode is the error code associated with an error.<LF>
XXXXcode is the number identifying an error or warning. If status is TRUE, code is a non-zero error code. If status is FALSE, code can be zero or a warning code. Use the error handler VIs to look up the meaning of this code and to display the corresponding error message.
XXXXcolor table
XXXXcolors
XXXXcomputer
XXXXcontains an error code for any invalid operations. 
XXXXcontains the amplitudes of peaks/valleys found in the current block of data. 
XXXXcontains the locations of peaks/valleys found in the current block of data. Locations are reported in indices from the start of processing.
XXXXcontains the number of peaks/valleys found in the current block of data.
XXXXcontains the second derivatives of the peaks/valleys found in the current block of data. 
XXXXcontrast
XXXXcurrent path
XXXXdata string
XXXXdedication
XXXXdegrees
XXXXdelete
XXXXdelete?
XXXXdepth
XXXXdesired font(Application)
XXXXdevice <FONT predef=APPFONT>(Com1)
XXXXdon't change
XXXXdone?
XXXXelements
XXXXempty picture is the output.<LF>
XXXXend of data (T)
XXXXentropy
XXXXerror
XXXXerror code is -1 if baud rate, data bits, stop bits, parity, or port number are out of range, or if the serial port could not be initialized. Check the values of baud rate, data bits, stop bits, parity, and port number. If these values are valid, verify that the serial port has been initialized.<LF>Refer to Appendix C, Error Codes, for a list of error codes.<LF>You can connect error code to one of the error handler VIs. These VIs can furnish you with a description of the error, and give you options on how to proceed when an error occurs. For more information on using the error handler VIs, refer to Chapter 18, Error Handler VIs, of your LabVIEW user manual.<LF>Some error codes returned by the serial port VIs are platform-specific. Please refer to your system documentation for a list of error codes.<LF><LF>
XXXXerror code. If error code is non-zero, an error occurred. Refer to Appendix C, Error Codes, for a list of error codes.<LF>You can connect error code to one of the error handler VIs. These VIs furnish you with a description of the error, and give you options on how to proceed when an error occurs. For more information on using the error handler VIs, refer to Chapter 18, Error Handler VIs, of your LabVIEW user manual.<LF>Some error codes returned by the serial port VIs are platform-specific. Please refer to your system documentation for a list of error codes.<LF>
XXXXerror in
XXXXerror in (no error)
XXXXerror in describes an error that you want to check. If unwired, this VI checks error code for errors.<LF>
XXXXerror in describes an error that you want to check. If you leave error in unwired, this VI checks error code for errors.<LF>
XXXXerror in is a cluster that describes the error status before this VI executes. If error in indicates that an error occurred before this VI was called, this VI may choose not to execute its function, but just pass the error through to its error out cluster. If no error has occurred, then this VI executes normally and sets its own error status in error out. Use the error handler VIs to look up the error code and to display the corresponding error message. Using error in and error out clusters is a convenient way to check errors and to specify execution order by wiring the error output from one subVI to the error input of the next.
XXXXerror in<FONT predef=APPFONT> (no error)
XXXXerror out
XXXXerror out contains the same information as status out, code out, and source out. It has the same structure as error in.<LF>
XXXXerror out is a cluster containing the same information as in status out, code out, and source out. It has the same structure as error in.<LF>
XXXXerror out is a cluster that describes the error status after this VI executes. If an error occurred before this VI was called, error out is the same as error in. Otherwise, error out shows the error, if any, that occurred in this VI. Use the error handler VIs to look up the error code and to display the corresponding error message. Using error in and error out clusters is a convenient way to check errors and to specify execution order by wiring the error output from one subVI to the error input of the next.
XXXXfalling
XXXXfile names
XXXXfilter width
XXXXfinal path
XXXXfirmware
XXXXflattened pixmap data
XXXXflipped?
XXXXfont name selects the font to use for the string.<LF>
XXXXfont size selects the size of the font in points.<LF>
XXXXforce DL
XXXXgrow?
XXXXhelp
XXXXhelp screen
XXXXhigh
XXXXhistogram
XXXXhttp://www.ceeo.tufts.edu/
XXXXhttp://www.ifactory.com/
XXXXhttp://www.lego.com/dacta/
XXXXhttp://www.lego.com/dacta/robolab/robolabsupport
XXXXhttp://www.natinst.com/robolab/
XXXXimage
XXXXindicates that the first block of data is to be processed. The VI requires some internal setup that must be done at the start for proper operation.
XXXXindicates that the last block of data is to be processed. The VI cleans up internal data after the last block has been processed.
XXXXinitialize (T)
XXXXinput data
XXXXinter-class variance
XXXXinvalid
XXXXinvalide
XXXXitem tag
XXXXitteration
XXXXkeep
XXXXlast path
XXXXleft
XXXXlight
XXXXlight & temp program
XXXXlight &temp data
XXXXlight vs temp
XXXXline 2
XXXXlines
XXXXlocaldomain
XXXXlog
XXXXlog?
XXXXlogging info
XXXXlow
XXXXmask
XXXXmetric
XXXXmin
XXXXmoments
XXXXmotion
XXXXmotor speed
XXXXname
XXXXname 2
XXXXname me
XXXXname of program:
XXXXnet error
XXXXnew features
XXXXnew file path is the path of the file to which the VI wrote data. You can use this output to determine the path of a file that you open using dialog. new file path returns Not A Path if the user selects Cancel from the dialog box.<LF>
XXXXnew path
XXXXnew picture
XXXXno cmd
XXXXno error
XXXXno mimic
XXXXno refresh inventor
XXXXno refresh pilot
XXXXnothing
XXXXnumber
XXXXnumber of samples/ch
XXXXnumber of samples/ch is the number of samples per channel the VI acquires before the acquisition is complete. <LF>
XXXXnumberofpages
XXXXof
XXXXon
XXXXonoff (0 - 1)
XXXXoutput string
XXXXpH Container (pH LogIT)
XXXXpH LogIT
XXXXpH Sensor Fork (pH LogIT)
XXXXpH meter
XXXXpage
XXXXpath
XXXXpath to vault
XXXXpeaks/valleys
XXXXpicture
XXXXplane
XXXXplay where
XXXXplays 5
XXXXplot 0
XXXXplot style
XXXXpoints
XXXXport
XXXXprint now?
XXXXpts/sweep
XXXXpurple
XXXXqueue element
XXXXrcx there?
XXXXrecord
XXXXrect
XXXXred
XXXXreset
XXXXrest
XXXXreturn value
XXXXreverse
XXXXright
XXXXrising
XXXXrotations
XXXXsamples
XXXXsamples/ch
XXXXsave in theme:
XXXXscan rate is the number of scans per second the RCX acquires. The default rate is 10 scans/s.   The RCX cannot do better than about 100 samples per sec.<LF>
XXXXscan rate is the number of scans per second the RCX sends out to the motors. The default rate is 10 scans/s.   The RCX cannot do better than about 100 samples per sec.<LF>
XXXXscan rate is the number of scans per second the VI acquires. The default rate is 1,000 scans/s. <LF>
XXXXscan rate<FONT predef=APPFONT>
XXXXscan rate<FONT predef=APPFONT> (10 scans/sec)
XXXXscott
XXXXsec/sweep
XXXXsize(s)
XXXXskip?
XXXXsomewhere.outthere.com
XXXXsound_enable
XXXXsound_onoff
XXXXsoundset_number
XXXXsource
XXXXsource is a string that indicates the origin of the error, if any. Usually source is the name of the VI in which the error occurred.
XXXXsource. In case of an error, most VIs that use the error in and error out clusters set source to the name of the VI or function that produced the error.<LF>
XXXXspeed A
XXXXspeed C
XXXXspreadsheet string
XXXXstats
XXXXstatus
XXXXstatus is TRUE if an error occurred before this VI was called, or FALSE if not. If status is TRUE, code is a non-zero error code. If status is FALSE, code can be zero or a warning code.
XXXXstatus is TRUE if an error occurred, or FALSE if not. If status is TRUE, code is a non-zero error code. If status is FALSE, code can be zero or a warning code.
XXXXstatus is TRUE if an error occurred. If this value is FALSE, the VI assumes that no error occurred according to the error in, and then checks error code.<LF>
XXXXstatus is TRUE if an error occurred. If this value is FALSE, then the error handler assumes that no error occurred according to the error in, and then checks the error code.<LF>
XXXXstop
XXXXstripped path
XXXXsubstring
XXXXsubstring 2
XXXXsure?
XXXXtask
XXXXtask 0
XXXXtest
XXXXthreshold
XXXXtime
XXXXtop
XXXXtop left point(0, 0)
XXXXtouch
XXXXtouch sensor image
XXXXtranslator
XXXXtry again?
XXXXtry again? 2
XXXXtype of LEGO sensor
XXXXtype string
XXXXuntitled
XXXXvalue
XXXXvalues measured
XXXXvariable
XXXXvi path
XXXXvi reference
XXXXvoid*
XXXXvolts
XXXXwaveform
XXXXwaveform (1D)
XXXXwaveforms
XXXXwebpage
XXXXwhatthe
XXXXwidth
XXXXwidth specifies the number of consecutive data points to use in the quadratic least squares fit. The value should be no more than about 1/2 of the half-width of the peak/valley and can be much smaller (but >>2) for noise-free data. Large widths can reduce the apparent amplitude of peaks and shift the apparent location. For noisy data, this modification is unimportant since the noise obsures the actual peak.
XXXXwrite
XXXXx is the horizontal coordinate that increases to the right.<LF>
XXXXx1Left
XXXXx2Right
XXXXxRes
XXXXy is the vertical coordinate that increases to the bottom.<LF>
XXXXy1Top
XXXXy2Bottom
XXXXyRes
XXXXyellow